Agilent Technologies TD-1225A (V) 1/U Microwave Frequency Counter Technical Manual

TM 11-6625-3014-14
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL,
DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR
MICROWAVE FREQUENCY COUNTER
TD-1225A (V) 1/U
(NSN 6625-01-103-2958)
WARNING – This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export
Control Act (Title 22, U. S. C., Sec 2751 et seq) or the Export Administration Act 1979, as amended, Title
50, U.S.C., App. 2401 et seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties.
Disseminate in accordance with provision of DOD Directive 5230-25.
Distribution Statement B - Distribution authorized to U.S. Government Agencies only to protect
contractor proprietary rights. Recipient agrees not to reproduce, disclose, or transfer to other
documents all or any part of this document for any purpose without permission in writing from
Agilent Technologies, Inc. The U.S. Government has only limited rights to this data as defined in
DFARS 252.227-7013 (Nov. 1995). This determination was made 16 November 2005. Other requests
shall be referred to Agilent Technologies, 3500 Deer Creek Road, Palo Alto, CA 94304.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE – Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
10 SEPTEMBER 1981
SAFETY STEPS TO FOLLOW IF SOMEONE
IS THE VICTIM OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
DO NOT TRY TO PULL OR GRAB THE INDIVIDUAL
IF POSSIBLE , TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER
IF YOU CANNOT TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL
POWER, PULL, PUSH, OR LIFT THE PERSON TO
SAFETY USING A WOODEN POLE OR A ROPE OR
SOME OTHER INSULATING MATERIAL
SEND FOR HELP AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
AFTER THE INJURED PERSON IS FREE OF
CONTACT WITH THE SOURCE OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK, MOVE THE PERSON A SHORT DISTANCE
AWAY AND IMMEDIATELY START ARTIFICIAL
RESUSCITATION
SAFETY
This product has been designed and tested according to International Safety Requirements. To ensure
safe operation and to keep the product safe, the information, cautions, and warnings in this manual
must be heeded. Refer to Section I for general safety considerations applicable to this product.
TM 11-6625-3014-14
C1
Headquarters
Department of the Army
Washington, D.C., 13 January 2006
CHANGE )
)
No.
1)
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL
SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR
MICROWAVE FREQUENCY COUNTER
TD-1225A (V) 1/U
(NSN 6625-01-103-2958)
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION – This document has been reviewed for the presence
of solvents containing hazardous materials as defined by the EPCRA 302 and 313 lists by the
AMCOM G-4 (Logistics) Environmental Division. As of the base document, dated 10 September
1981, all references to solvents containing hazardous materials have been removed from this
document by substitution with non-hazardous or less hazardous materials where possible.
OZONE DEPLETING CHEMICAL INFORMATION – This document has been reviewed for the
presence of Class I ozone depleting chemicals by AMCOM G-4 (Logistics) Environmental
Division. As of the base document, dated 10 September 1981, all references to Class I ozone
depleting chemicals have been removed from this document by substitution with chemicals that
do not cause atmospheric ozone depletion.
WARNING – This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms
Export Control Act (Title 22, U. S. C., Sec 2751 et seq) or the Export Administration Act 1979, as
amended, Title 50, U.S.C., App. 2401 et seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to
severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provision of DOD Directive 5230-25.
Distribution Statement B - Distribution authorized to U.S. Government Agencies only to protect
contractor proprietary rights. Recipient agrees not to reproduce, disclose, or transfer to other
documents all or any part of this document for any purpose without permission in writing from
Agilent Technologies, Inc. The U.S. Government has only limited rights to this data as defined in
DFARS 252.227-7013 (Nov. 1995). This determination was made 16 November 2005. Other
requests shall be referred to Agilent Technologies, 3500 Deer Creek Road, Palo Alto, CA 94304.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE – Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
TM 11-6625-3014-14, dated 10 September 1981, is changed as follows:
1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is
indicated by a vertical bar in the outer margin of the page. Illustration changes are indicated
by a pointing hand. New or changed part numbers are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Completely revised sections or chapters are indicated by a vertical bar next to the title only.
Remove Pages
A /(B blank)
Insert Pages
A/(B blank)
TM 11-6625-3014-14
C1
Remove Pages
i through x
0-1/(0-2 blank)
A-1/ (A-2 Blank)
Cover
Insert Pages
i through ix/(x blank)
0-1/(0-2 blank)
A-1/ (A-2 blank)
Cover
2. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
PETER J. SCHOOMAKER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0531905
TM 11-6625-3014-14
INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
NOTE
ON CHANGED PAGES, THE PORTION OF THE TEXT AFFECTED BY THE LATEST CHANGE IS INDICATED BY A
VERTICAL LINE OR OTHER CHANGE SYMBOL IN THE OUTER MARGIN OF THE PAGE.
Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:
Original 0
10 September 1981
Change 1
13 January 2006
Total number of pages in this publication is 364 consisting of the following:
Page
*Change
No.
No.
Cover ......................................... 1
A/(B blank) ................................. 1
i through viii................................ 1
ix/(x blank) ................................. 1
0-1/(0-2 blank) ........................... 1
1-1 thru 1-4 ................................ 0
2-1 thru 2-9 ................................ 0
3-1 thru 3-30 .............................. 0
4-1 thru 4-31 .............................. 0
5-1 thru 5-13 .............................. 0
6-1 thru 6-4 ................................ 0
7-1 thru 7-7 ................................ 0
8-1 thru 8-85 .............................. 0
A-1/(A-2 blank) .......................... 1
B-1 through B-6 ......................... 0
C-1 and C-2 ............................... 0
* Zero in this column indicates an original page.
Change 1 A/(B blank)
Reproduced with Permission, Courtesy of Agilent Technologies, Inc. Copyrighted By Agilent Technologies,
Inc., 2005. For Official U.S. Government Use ONLY.
TM 11-6625-3014-14
Technical Manual
)
No. 11-6625-3014-14
)
)
Headquarters
Department of the Army
Washington, D.C., 10 September 1981
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT (DS) AND GENERAL
SUPPORT (GS) MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR
MICROWAVE FREQUENCY COUNTER
TD-1225A (V) 1/U
(NSN 6625-01-103-2958)
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures
please let us know. Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank
Forms) directly to: Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command, AMSAM-MMC-MA-NP,
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-5000. A reply will be furnished to you. You may also provide DA Form 2028
information to AMCOM via email, fax or the World Wide Web. Our fax number is DSN 788-6546 or
Commercial 256-842-6546. Our email address is: [email protected]. Instruction for sending an
electronic 2028 may be found at the back of this manual immediately preceding the hardcopy 2028. For
the World Wide Web use: https://amcom2028.redstone.army.mil.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION
This document has been reviewed for the presence of solvents containing hazardous materials as defined
by the EPCRA 302 and 313 lists by the AMCOM G-4 (Logistics) Environmental Division. As of the base
document, dated 10 September 1981, all references to solvents containing hazardous materials have been
removed from this document by substitution with non-hazardous or less hazardous materials where
possible.
OZONE DEPLETING CHEMICAL INFORMATION
This document has been reviewed for the presence of Class I ozone depleting chemicals by the AMCOM
G-4 (Logistics) Environmental Division. As of the base document, dated 10 September 1981, all
references to Class I ozone depleting chemicals have been removed from this document by substitution
with chemicals that do not cause atmospheric ozone depletion.
WARNING – This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control
Act (Title 22, U. S. C., Sec 2751 et seq) or the Export Administration Act 1979, as amended, Title 50,
U.S.C., App. 2401 et seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties.
Disseminate in accordance with provision of DOD Directive 5230-25.
Distribution Statement B - Distribution authorized to U.S. Government Agencies only to protect
contractor proprietary rights. Recipient agrees not to reproduce, disclose, or transfer to other
Documents all or any part of this document for any purpose without permission in writing from
Agilent Technologies, Inc. The U.S. Government has only limited rights to this data as defined in
DFARS 252.227-7013 (Nov. 1995). This determination was made 16 November 2005. Other
requests shall be referred to Agilent Technologies, 3500 Deer Creek Road, Palo Alto, CA
94304.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE – Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
This manual is an authentication of the manufacturer’s commercial literature which, through usage, has been
found to cover the data required to operate and maintain this equipment. Since the manual was not prepared in
accordance with military specifications, the format has not been structured to consider levels of maintenance.
Change 1
i
TM 11-6625-3014-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
0
Title
Page
I N S T R U C T I O N S ...........................................................................
0 - 1 Scope ..........................................................................................
0-2 Indexes of publications .............................................................
0 - 3 Forms and records ....................................................................
0-4 Reporting of equipment improvement
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
Recommendations (EIR) ...........................................................
Administrative storage ................................................................
0-1
0-1
Destruction of Army Electronic Material
SERIAL PREFIX:1840A
0-1
0-5
0-6
.
This manual applies to Serial Prefix 1840A, unless
Accompanied by a Manual Change Sheet indicating
otherwise.
Section
Title
Page
I
GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................
1-1.
Introduction .............................................................................
1-3.
Specifications .........................................................................
1-5.
Safety Considerations ...........................................................
1-7.
Instrument Identification ..........................................................
1-9.
Accessories ............................................................................
1-11. Description .............................................................................
1-13. O p t i o n s ..................................................................................
1-15. Service Equipment Available .....................................
1-17. R e c o m m e n d e d Test Equipment .....................................
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
II
INSTALLATION ..................................................................................
2-1. Introduction ..............................................................................
2-3. Unpacking and Inspection ....................................................
2-5. Installation Requirements ......................................................
2-9. Power Cable ............................................................................
2-11. Operating Environment ..........................................................
2-15. Storage and Shipment .............................................................
2-16. Environment .............................................................................
2-19. Packaging .................................................................................
2-22. Field Installation of Options .........................................
2-24. Part Numbers for Ordering Option Kits ..............................
2-26. Installation of 10 MHz Oscillator Option 001 .....................
2-28. Installation of Amplitude Measurement Option 002 .........
2-30. Installation of Extended Dynamic Range Option 003 ......
2-32. Installation of Digital-to-Analog Conversion
(DAC) Option 004 ...................................................................
2-34. Installation of HP-IB Option 011 .....................................
2-36. HP-IB In te rco nnec tio ns ......................................................
2-39. 5342A Listen Address ..........................................................
2-41. HP-IB Descriptions ................................................................
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-7
ii Change 1
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
TM 11-6625-3014-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
III
IV
OPERATION ...........................................................................................................
3-1.
Introduction ................................................................................................
3-1
3-1
3-3.
Operating Characteristics .......................................................................
3-5.
Operating Ranges ..............................................................................
3-7.
Resolution Keys ..................................................................................
3-10.
CHECK, DAC, and ENTER Keys ....................................................
3-12.
FREQ Keys ..........................................................................................
3-14.
Automatic Mode .................................................................................
3-16.
Manual Mode .......................................................................................
3-18.
Offset Frequencies ...........................................................................
3-20.
Amplitude and Offset Measurements ............................................
3-22.
Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) .........................................
3-24.
SET, RESET, RECALL, and CHS Keys .........................................
3-25.
SAMPLE RATE, GATE, and REMOTE ...........................................
3-30.
AM Tolerance ....................................................................................
3-32.
FM Tolerance .....................................................................................
3-34.
Automatic Amplitude Discrimination ..............................................
3-36. Maximum Input Signal Power ...................................................................
3-39. Input Cable Considerations .....................................................................
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-41. Controls, Indicators, and Connectors ....................................................
3-4
3-43.
3-45.
3-47.
3-49.
3-51.
3-53.
3-57.
3-59.
3-61.
3-63.
3-65.
3-67.
3-69.
3-79.
3-81.
3-83.
3-4
3-14
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-25
3-28
Operating Procedures ...............................................................................
O per ator Key board Check ......................................................................
Error Code Displays .....................................................................
Instrument Error Displays .........................................................................
Operator Error Displays ............................................................................
Limit Errors and Sequence Errors ............................................................
Options
Time Base Option 001
Amplitude Option 002 ...............................................................................
Extended Dynamic Range Option 003 ....................................................
HP-IB Interface Option 011 .........................................................................
Digital-to-Analog C o n ve r te r (DAC) Option 004 ................................... .
HP-lB Programming
(Option 011) ...............................................
9825A Program Examples ..........................................................................
HP-lB Programming ........................................................................
Remote Programming of Diagnostic Mode 6
( Option 002,011 Only) ................................................................................
PERFORMANCE TESTS ................................................................................................
4-1. Introduction ......................................................................................................
4-3. Operational Verification ....................................................................
4-5. Complete Performance Test .........................................................................
4-7. Equipment Required ........................................................................
4-9. Test Record .....................................................................................................
4-11. Operational Verification Procedures.......................................................
4-12. Self-Check .....................................................................................................
4-13. 10 Hz—500 MHz Input Sensitivity Test, 50Ω/1MΩ
(Standard and Option 003 instruments Only) ..........................................
4-14. 10 Hz—500 MHz Input 50Ω Minimum Level and
Amplitude Accuracy Test (Option 002) .........................................................
3-30
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
Change 1 iii
TM 11-6625-3014-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
4-15. 10 Hz—500 MHz Input (50Ω) Maximum
Input Test (Option 002) ...................................................................
4-4
4-16. 500 MHz-18 GHz Input Sensitivity Test (Standard and
Option 003 Instruments Only) .........................................................
4-5
4-17. 500 MHz—18 GHz Input Minimum Level and Amplitude
Accuracy Test (Option 002) ............................................................
4-6
4-18. 500 MHz-18 GHz High Level Test ...................................................
4-7
4-19. Option 011 HP-IB Verification Program .........................................
4-7
4-27. Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)Output Test (Option 004) . .
4-16
4-17
4-28. Performance Test procedures ...............................................
4-29. 10 Hz—500 MHz Input Sensitivity Test, 50Ω
(Standard and Option 003 Instruments Only) .............................
4-17
4-18
4-30. 10 Hz—500 MHz Input Sensitivity Test, 1Ω .................................
4-31. 500 MHz—18 GHz Input Sensitivity Test (Standard and
Option 003 Instruments Only)…………………………………………………4-19
4-32. 500 MHz-18 GHz lnput SWR Test……………………………………………...4-20
4-33. 500 MHz-18 GHz Maximum Input Test……………………………………..4-22
4-34. FM Tolerance Test..........................................................................4-24
4-35. Automatic Amplitude Discrimination Test…………………………………..4-26
4-36.
500 MHz—18 GHz Input Minimum Level a n d Amplitude
Accuracy Test (Option 002) ...........................................
4-27
4-37.
10 Hz—500 MHz Input (50Ω)Minimum Level a n d
Amplitude A c c u r a c y Test (Option 002) ......................
4-28
4-38.
10 Hz—500 MHz Input 50Ω Maximum
Input Test (Option 002) ...................................................
4-29
4-39.
10 Hz—500 MHz Input 50Ω SIR Test (Option 002) ....................
4-30
4-40.
Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Output
Test (Option 004) ...............................................................................
4-31
V
5-1
ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................................................
5-1.
Introduction ...............................................................................................
5-1
5-1
5-4.
Equipment Required ...............................................................................
5-6.
Factory Selected Components ............................................................
5-1
5-8.
Adjustment Locations ............................................................................
5-1
5-1
5-10. S a f e t y C o n s i d e r a t i o n s .........................................................................
5-3
5-12. A d j u s t m e n t P r o c e d u r e s ......................................................................
5-13. Power Supply Adjustments ...................................................................
5-3
5-17. Main Synthesizer Adjustment ...............................................................
5-4
5-5
5-19. Offset Synthesizer Adjustments ..........................................................
5-21. IF Adjustment .......................................................................................... .
5-28. Direct Count Adjustment ........................................................................ . 5-8
5-8
5-30. Oscillator A d j u s t m e n t s ..........................................................................
5-8
5-31. A24 Standard Oscillator ........................................................................
5-9
5-32. Option 001 Oven Oscillator (10544A) ...............................................
5-10
5-33. O p t i o n 002 Amplitude M e a s u r e m e n t A d j u s t m e n t s .....................
5-10
5-34. A16 Adjustments ......................................................................................
5-11
5-38. A27 Adjustments (Resistors A27R9,A27R10) ..................................
5-12
5-39. O p t i o n 002/003 A d j u s t m e n t s ..............................................................
5-12
5-40. A11, A25 Adjustments (Resistors A11R14, A25R31) ....................
5-13
5-41. O p t i o n 004 Digital-to-Analog (DAC) A d j u s t m e n t s .........................
VI
REPLACEABLE PARTS ..........................................................................................
iv
Change 1
6-1
TM 11-6625-3014-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
6-1.
6-3.
6-5.
6-7.
6-11.
6-14.
6-17.
Introduction ......................................................................................
Exchange Assemblies .................................................... .
Abbreviations and Reference Designators ....................... .
R e p l a c e a b l e Parts List .................................................................
Ordering Information .....................................................................
Direct Mail O r d e r System ............................................................
O p t i o n Retrofit Kits .......................................................................
. . .
. . .
.. .
. .
.. .
. . .
.. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
.
.
.
.
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-7
.
.
.
.
VII
MANUAL CHANGES ..................................................................................
7-1. Introduction ......................................................................................
7-3. Manual Changes .............................................................................
7-6. O l d e r Instruments ..........................................................................
Vlll
SERVICE ....................................................................................................... . . . .
8-1. Introduction ...................................................................................... . . . .
8-3. Schematic Diagram Symbols and Reference Designators ... . . . .
8-5. Reference Designations ................................................................ . . . .
8-7. Identification Markings on Printed-Circuit Bonds................................
8-11 Assembly Identification ................................................................................
8-13. Safety Considerations………………………………………………………..
8-18. Safety Symbols ..............................................................................................
8-20. Signal Names ................................................................................................
8-22. Disassembly and Reassembly ...................................................................
8-24. Top Cover Removal .....................................................................................
8-26. Bottom Cover Removal ................................................................................
8-28. Front Frame Removal ..................................................................................
8-30. Removal of A1 Display Assembly and A2 Display
Assembly from Front Panel Frame ..............................................................
8-32. R e p l a c e m e n t of LED’s in Front Panel Switches ....................................
8-34. Removal of U1 Sampler, A25 Preamplifier, and
A26 Sampler Driver ......................................................................................
8-36. Factory Selected Components ...................................................................
8-38 Procedure for Selecting Resistor R15 on
Direct Count Amplifier ..................................................................................
8-40. Procedure for Selecting Resistor R16 for C a p a c i t o r C10
on Direct Count Amplifier A3 ......................................................................
8-42 Procedures for Selecting Resistor R16 on
Main Loop Amplifier A9 ................................................................................
8-44. Procedure for Selecting Resistor A16R2 on
A16 Assembly (Option 002 or 003) ............................................................
8-46. Service Accessory Kit 10842A.......................................................................
8-48. Equipment Supplied .....................................................................................
8-50. Replaceable Parts ........................................................................................
8-52. Using Extender Board 05342-60036 .........................................................
8-58. Logic Symbols ................................................................................................
8-60. Logic C o n c e p t s ............................................................................................
8-62. Negation ...........................................................................................................
8-64. Logic Implementation and Polarity Indication ..........................................
8-73. Other Symbols ................................................................................................
8-75. Dependency Notation “C” “G” “V” “F” .........................................................
8-77. Control Blocks ................................................................................................
8-79. Complex Logic Devices ................................................................................
8-81. Theory of Operation .......................................................................................
8-83. Harmonic Heterodyne Technique ...............................................................
Change 1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-18
8-18
8-20
8-22
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-28
8-36
8-36
v
TM 11-6625-3014-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
8-94. HP 5342A Overall Operation ................................................................................................. 8-39
8-99. FM Tolerance ............................................................................................................................ 8-40
8-101. Automatic Amplitude Discrimination .................................................................................. 8-40
8-105. Sensitivity …………………………………………………………………………………………… 8-41
8-110. HP 5342A Block Diagram Description ................................................................................ 8-42
8-112. Direct Count Section .............................................................................................................. 8-42
8-114. Synthesizer Section …………. ............................................................................................... 8-42
8-116. Main Loop Operation…………….. ........................................................................................ 8-42
8-120. Offset Loop Operation………………….. .............................................................................. 8-43
8-124. IF Section………………………………………………………….. ........................................... 8-43
8-126. Time Base/PSR Section ........................................................................................................ 8-46
8-128. Control Section ………………………………. ........................................................................ 8-46
8-130. Detailed Theory of Operation ............................................................................................... 8-46
8-132 A1 Display Assembly and A2 Display Driver Assembly ...................................………… . 8-46
8-138. Keyboard Operation ..............................................................................................………… 8-47
8-145. A3 Direct Count Amplifier Assembly .................................................................. ………… 8-48
8-152. A4 Offset VCO ....................................................................................................... ………….. 8-49
8-154. A5 RF Multiplexer Assembly ...............................................................................…………. 8-49
8-158. A6 Offset Loop Amp/Search Generator Assembly ...........................................…………. 8-50
8-166. A7 Mixer/Search Control Assembly ..................................................................…………. . 8-51
8-172. A8 Main VCO Assembly ...................................................................................... …………. 8-52
8-176. A9 Main Loop Amplifier Assembly ......................................................................………… 8-53
8-181. A10 Divide-by-N Assembly ...................................................................................………… 8-53
8-190.Two Modulus Prescaler Technique .................................................................... …………. 8-55
8-198 Counter (Divider) Chain Utilizing 9’s Complement ............................................…………. 8-56
8-202. A11 IF Limiter Assembly ......................................................................................…………. 8-57
8-206. A12 IF Detector Assembly ...................................................................................…………. 8-57
8-215. A13 Counter Assembly .........................................................................................…………. 8-59
8-225. A14 Microprocessor Assembly ..........................................................................…………. 8-60
Microprocessor Operation ..........................................................................…………. 8-60
8-228.
8-240. A15 Option 011 HP-IB Assembly ........................................................................…………. 8-65
8-242. A16 Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Assembly and
A16 Option 003 Extended Dynamic Range Assembly ..................................... ………… 8-65
8-244. A17 Timing Generator Assembly ........................................................................…………. 8-65
8-247.
Pseudorandom Sequence Generation ......................................................…………. 8-65
Gate Time Generation .................................................................................…………. 8-67
8-257.
Sample Rate Generation .............................................................................…………. 8-68
8-262.
8-266. A18 Time Base Buffer Assembly ........................................................................…………. 8-68
8-269. A19, A20, A21 Power Supply ..............................................................................…………. 8-69
8-278. A22 Motherboard ..................................................................................................…………. 8-71
8-280. A23 Power Module ...............................................................................................………… 8-71
8-282. A24 Oscillator Assembly ......................................................................................…………. 8-71
8-284. A25 Preamplifier ....................................................................................................………… 8-71
8-290. A26 Sampler Driver Assembly ........................................................................... ………… 8-72
and 011) ........................................ ………… 8-72
8-294. Options Theory (Options 002,003,004
8-296. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Overall Theory .................................... ………… 8-73
8-297. Introduction ............................................................................................................ ………… 8-73
8-300. Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... …………. 8-73
8-305. Option 002 Detailed Theory ................................................................................ …………. 8-73
8-306. U2 High Frequency Amplitude Assembly (5088-7035) ............................... ………… 8-73
8-310. A27 Low Frequency Amplitude Assembly ........................................................ ………….. 8-75
Assembly ............................................................................... ………… 8-75
8-314. A16 Amplitude
8-331. Option 003 Extended Dynamic Range .............................................................. ………… 8-77
8-340. Option 004 Digital-to-Analog Conversion (DAC) ............................................ ………… 8-79
8-346. Option 011 Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB) ........................................ ………. . 8-80
vi Change 1
TM 11-6625-3014-14
LIST OF TABLES
Table
1-1.
Title
Model 5342A Specifications .............................................
Page
1-2
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
Equipment Supplied ........................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories Available ..................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Test Equipment ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1.
HP-IB Interface Capability ............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-2
3-3.
3-4.
5342A Bus Message Usage ........................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Address Selection ........................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Option 001 HP-IB Program Code Set ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
4-1.
Operational Verification
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
Model 5342A Program ....................................................
Model 9825A Program Description .................................
Sample Printout ...............................................................
Performance Test Record ...............................................
..
..
..
..
4-10
4-13
4-15
4-32
5-1.
Adjustments .................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
6-1.
Exchange Assemblies ..................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
Abbreviations and Reference Designations .................... .
Replaceable Parts ........................................................... .
Option 001 Replaceable Parts ........................................ .
Option 002 Replaceable Parts ........................................ .
Option 003 Replaceable Parts ........................................ .
Option 004 Replaceable Parts ........................................ .
Option 011 Replaceable Parts ........................................ .
Manufacturers Code List ................................................. .
.. . ..
. .. . .
. . .. .
. . .. .
. . .. .
. . .. .
. . .. .
. .. . .
6-2
6-5
6-37
6-38
6-41
6-42
6-44
6-45
7-1.
Manual Backdating .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
8-1.
Assembly Identification ................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
8-8.
8-9.
8-10.
8-11.
8-12.
8-13.
8-14.
8-15.
8-16.
8-17.
8-18.
8-19.
8-20.
8-21.
8-21A.
8-21B.
8-21C.
Record ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
. . . .. . .
. . .. . . ..
. . .. . . ..
. . . .. . ..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. .
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Signal Names .................................................................. . . . . . . . . .
10842A Kit Contents ........................................................ . . . . . . . . .
Replaceable Parts for Extender Board 05342-60036 ..... . . . . . . . .
Overall Troubleshooting ................................................ . . . . . . . . .
Assemblies Tested by Test Mode ................................... . . . . . . . . .
Probable Failed Assemblies by Test Mode ..................... . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Modes of the 5342A ...................................... . . . . . . . . .
A14 Microprocessor Troubleshooting ............................. . . . . . . . . .
A19, A20, A21 Power Supply Troubleshooting ............... . . . . . . . . .
A1, A2 Keyboard/Display Troubleshooting ..................... . . . . . . . . .
A3 Direct Count Amplifier Troubleshooting ..................... . . . . . . .
A13 Counter Troubleshooting ......................................... . . . . . . . . .
A17 Timing Generator Troubleshooting .......................... . . . . . . . . .
A8, A9, A10 Main Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting ..... . . . . . . . .
A11, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting ............................ . . . . . . . . .
A4, A6, A7 Offset Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting ..... . . . . . . .
A26 Sampler Driver Troubleshooting .............................. . . . . . . . . .
A5 RF Multiplexer Troubleshooting ................................. . . . . . . . . .
Option 002 Amplitude Measurement Troubleshooting .....................
Option 001 HP-IB Troubleshooting ................................. . . . . . . . . .
Acceptor Handshake (HP-IB) .......................................... . . . . . . . . .
Source Handshake (HP-IB) ............................................. . . . . . . . . .
U23, U26 ROM Table (HP-IB) ........................................ . . . . . . . . .
.. . .
. .. .
. . ..
. . ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-3
1-4
1-5
4-9
. . . . . . . 8-6
. . . . . . . 8-18
. . . . . . . 8-18
. . . . . . . 8-85
. . . . . . . 8-88
. . . . . . . 8-89
. . . . . . . 8-90
. . . . . . . 8-91
. . . . . . . 8-97
. . . . . . 8-102
. . . . . . 8-104
. . . . . . 8-105
. . . . . . 8-109
. . . . . 8-113
. . . . . . 8-116
. . . . . . 8-122
. . . . . . 8-124
. . . . . . 8-125
. . . . . . 8-127
. . . . . . 8-137
. . . . . . 8-137
. . . . . . 8-138
. . . . . . 8-139
Change 1 vii
TM 11-6625-3014-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
8-8.
8-9.
8-10.
8-11.
8-12.
8-13.
8-14.
8-15.
8-16.
8-17.
8-18.
8-19.
8-20.
8-21.
8-21A.
8-21B.
8-21C.
Figure
Diagnostic Modes of the 5342A .......................................................... . . . . . . . . .
A14 Microprocessor Troubleshooting ................................................. . . . . . . . . .
A19, A20, A21 Power Supply Troubleshooting ................................... . . . . . . . . .
A1, A2 Keyboard/Display Troubleshooting ......................................... . . . . . . . . .
A3 Direct Count Amplifier Troubleshooting ......................................... . . . . . . .
A13 Counter Troubleshooting ............................................................. . . . . . . . . .
A17 Timing Generator Troubleshooting .............................................. . . . . . . . . .
A8, A9, A10 Main Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting ........................ . . . . . . . .
A11, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting ............................................... . . . . . . . . .
A4, A6, A7 Offset Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting ........................ . . . . . . .
A26 Sampler Driver Troubleshooting .................................................. . . . . . . . . .
A5 RF Multiplexer Troubleshooting .................................................... . . . . . . . . .
Option 002 Amplitude Measurement Troubleshooting ..........................................
Option 001 HP-IB Troubleshooting ..................................................... . . . . . . . . .
Acceptor Handshake (HP-IB) ............................................................. . . . . . . . . .
Source Handshake (HP-IB) ................................................................ . . . . . . . . .
U23, U26 ROM Table (HP-IB) ............................................................ . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF FIGURES
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. . .
. . .
.. .
. .
. . .
. . .
.. .
. ..
. ..
.. .
. ..
. ..
.. .
.. . .
.. . .
.. . .
.. .
. . .
.. .
. ..
. . .
.. .
. . .
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
. ..
Title
8-90
8-91
8-97
8-102
8-104
8-105
8-109
8-113
8-116
8-122
8-124
8-125
8-127
8-137
8-137
8-138
8-139
Page
1-1.
Model 5342A Microwave Frequency Counter ......................................................... . .
1-1
2-1.
Line Voltage Selection ................................................................................................ . .
2-1
2-2.
2-3.
Power Cable HP Part Numbers versus Mains Plugs Available ................................. . .
Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus Connection ............................................................... .
2-2
2-10
3-1.
Front Panel Controls and Indicators ......................................................................... . .
3-5
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
Rear Panel Controls and Connectors .........................................................................
Operating Procedures ................................................................................................. .
Amplitude Measurements (Option 002) ..................................................................... .
DAC Operation (Option 004) .....................................................................................
3-7
3-8
3-12
3-13
8-1.
Schematic Diagram Notes .......................................................................................... .
8-3
8-2.
8-3.
Front Frame, A25, A26, and U1 Removable ............................................................. . .
10842A Service Accessory Kit .................................................................................... . .
8-14
8-19
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
8-8.
8-9.
Extender Board (05342-60036) Test Points R1, R2, and R3 ................................... .
Extender Board (05342-60036) Schematic Diagram .................................................
Harmonic Heterodyne Technique .............................................................................
Frequency Relationships ...........................................................................................
HP 5342A Simplified Block Diagram ......................................................................... .
HP 5342A Block Diagram ...........................................................................................
..
..
..
..
..
..
8-20
8-21
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-44
8-10.
8-11.
8-12.
8-13.
8-14.
8-15.
8-16.
8-17.
8-18.
Block Diagram of Synthesizer Section ...................................................................... .
Timing Diagram of A6 Search Generator Operation ................................................. .
Data Transfer Timing in A10 Circuit ...........................................................................
0Filter Timing on A12 IF Detector ............................................................................ .
A14U21 Expanded Block Diagram ............................................................................ .
Memory Arrangement ................................................................................................. .
A19, A20, and A21 Power Supply Block Diagram .....................................................
Option 002 Amplitude Measurement Block Diagram .................................................
Option 003 Extended Dynamic Range Block Diagram ..............................................
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
. .
8-45
8-51
8-54
8-58
8-61
8-64
. 8-70
. 8-74
8-78
viii
Change 1
..
..
..
..
TM 11-6625-3014-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
8-19.
5342A Front (A1 Display) View ................................................................................. .
8-142
8-20.
8-21.
8-22.
8-23.
8-24.
8-25.
8-26.
8-27.
8-28.
8-29.
8-30.
8-31.
8-32.
8-33.
8-34.
8-35.
8-36.
8-37.
8-38.
8-39.
5342A Rear View ......................................................................................................... .
5342A Top View (Assembly Locations and Adjustments) ......................................... . .
5342A Bottom View, Options Installed ..................................................................... .
5342A Detailed Block Diagram ................................................................................... .
A1 Display Assembly and A2 Display Drive Assembly ............................................. .
Option 004 Display Driver Additions on A2 Assembly ............................................... .
A3 Direct Count Amplifier Assembly ........................................................................ .
A4 Offset VCO Assembly ........................................................................................... .
A5 RF Multiplexer Assembly .................................................................................... .
A6 Offset Loop Amp/Search Generator Assembly .................................................... .
A7 Mixer/Search Control Assembly ......................................................................... .
A8 Main VCO Assembly .............................................................................................. .
A9 Main Loop Amplifier Assembly ........................................................................... .
A10 Divide-by-N Assembly ........................................................................................ .
A11 IF Limiter Assembly ........................................................................................... .
A12 IF Detector Assembly ........................................................................................ .
A13 Counter Assembly ................................................................................................ .
A14 Microprocessor Assembly .................................................................................... .
Option 011 A15 HP-IB Assembly ............................................................................. .
Option 002 A16 Amplitude Measurements .................................................
A27 Low Frequency Amplifier, and……………………………………………. ..
U2 High Frequency Amplifier Assemblies ..............................................
8-143
8-144
8-145
8-147
8-149
8-151
8-153
8-155
8-157
8-159
8-161
8-163
8-165
8-167
8-169
8-171
8-173
8-175
8-177
8-179
Option 003 A16 Extended Dynamic Range Assembly ................................
A17 Timing Generator Assembly ..............................................................
A18 Time Base Buffer Assembly ..............................................................
A19, A20, A21, and A23 Power Supply Assembly .....................................
A24 Oscillator Assemblies .......................................................................
A25 Preamplifier Assembly ......................................................................
A26 Sampler Driver Assembly .................................................................
8-181
8-183
8-185
8-187
8-189
8-191
8-193
8-40.
8-41.
8-42.
8-43.
8-44.
8-45.
8-46.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Change 1
ix/(x blank)
TM 11-6625-3014-14
SECTION O
INSTRUCTIONS
0 - 1 . SCOPE.
This manual describes Microwave Frequency Counter TD-1225A (V) l/U (fig. l-l)
and provides maintenance instructions. Throughout this manual, the TD-1225A (V) l/U is
referred to as the Hewlett-Packard (HP) Model 5342A.
0 -2 . INDEXES OF PUBLICATIONS.
a.
DA Pam 25-30. Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 25-30 to determine whether there
are new editions, changes, or additional publications pertaining to the equipment.
b.
DA Pam 25-30. Refer to DA Pam 25-30 to determine whether there are
modification work orders (MWO’S) pertaining to the equipment.
0 -3 . FORMS AND RECORDS.
a.
Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory Equipment. Maintenance forms,
records, and reports which are used by maintenance personnel at all levels of maintenance are
listed in and prescribed by DA Pam 25-30.
b.
Report of Packaging and Handling Deficiencies. Fill out and forward SF 364 (Report
of Discrepancy (ROD) as prescribed in AR 735-11-2/DLAR 4140.55/NAVSUPINST
4610.33B/AFR 75-18/MCO p4610.19C and DLAR 4500.15.
c.
Discrepancy in Shipment Report (DISREP) (SF 361). Fill out and forward
Discrepancy in Shipment Report (DISREP) (SF 361) as prescribed in DA Pam 2530/NAVSUPINST 4610.33B/AFR 75-18/MCO P4610.19C and DLAR 4500.15.
0 -4 . REPORTING OF EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR).
EIR’s will be prepared using DA Form 2407, Maintenance Request. Instructions
for preparing EIR’s are provided in DA Pam 25-30, The Army Maintenance
Management System. EIR’s should be mailed directly to Commander, U.S. Army
Aviation and Missile Command, ANSAM-MMC-MA-NM, Redstone Arsenal, AL. 358985000. A reply will be furnished directly to you.
0 -5 . ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE.
Administrative storage of equipment issued to and used by Army activities shall be in
accordance with DA Pam 25-30.
0-6. DESTRUCTION OF ARMY ELECTRONICS MATERIEL.
Destruction of Army electronics materiel to prevent enemy use shall be in accordance with
TM 750-244-2.
Change 1 0-1/(0-2 blank)
Model 5342A
General Information
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1. INTRODUCTION
1-1. This manual provides operating and service information for the Hewlett-Packard Model
5342A Microwave Frequency Counter, shown in Figure 1-1.
1-3. SPECIFICATIONS
1-4. Specifications of the 5342A are listed in Table 1-1.
Figure 1-1. Model 5342A Microwave Frequency Counter
1-1
Model 5342A
General Information
Table 1-1. Model 5342A Specifications
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT 1:
Frequency range: 500 MHz to 18 GHz
Sensitivity:
500 MHz to 12.4 GHz -25 dBm
-20 dBm
12.4 GHz to 18 GHz
Maximum input: +5 dBm (see Options 002,003
for higher level).
Dynamic range:
500 MHz to 12.4 GHz 30 dB
12.4 GHz to 18 GHz
25 dB
Impedance: 50 ohms, nominal
Connector: Precision Type N female
Damage level: +25 dBm, peak
Coupling: dc to load, ac to instrument.
SWR:
<2:1, 500 MHz—10 GHz
<3:1, 10 GHz—18 GHz
FM tolerance: Switch selectable (rear panel)
FM (wide): 50 MHz p-p worst case.
CW (normal): 20 MHz p-p worst case.
For modulation rates from dc to 10 MHz.
AM tolerance: Any modulation index provided
the minimum signal level is not less than the
sensitivity specification.
Automatic amplitude discrimination: Automatically measures the largest of all signals present, providing that signal is 6 dB above any
signal within 500 MHz; 20dB above any signal,
500 MHz—18 GHz.
Modes of operation:
Automatic: Counter automatically acquires
and displays highest level signal within sensitivity range.
Manual: Center frequency entered to within
±50 MHz to true value.
Acquisition time:
Automatic mode: Normal FM 530 ms worst
case; wide FM 2.4 s worst case.
Manual mode: 80 ms after frequency entered.
INPUT 2:
Frequency range: 10 Hz to 520 MHz Direct
Count.
Sensitivity:
50
10 Hz to 520 MHz 25 mV rms,
1 M
10 Hz to 25 MHz 50 mV rms.
Impedance: Selectable: 1 MW, <50 pF or 50W
nominal.
Coupling: ac
Connector: Type BNC female.
Maximum input: 50Ω 3.5V rms (+24 dBm) or 5V
dc fuse protected; 1 MW 200V dc +5.0V rms.
TIME BASE
Crystal frequency: 10 MHz
Stability:
Aging rate: <1 X 10-7 per month.
Short term:
50°C.
Line variation:
nominal.
(TTL compatible); 1.5V peak-to-peak into
50W available from rear panel BNC.
1-2
External time base: Requires 10 MHz, 2.0V peakto-peak sine wave or square wave into 1 KW
Switch
via rear panel BNC connector.
selects either internal or external time base.
OPTIONAL TIME BASE
(OPTION 001)
Option 001 provides an oven-controlled crystal
oscillator time base, 10544A (see separate data
sheet), that results in better accuracy and longer
periods between calibration.
Crystal frequency: 10 MHz
Stability:
Aging rate:
up.
Temperature:
50°C.
Short term:
Line variation:
nominal.
Warm-up:
after turn-on, at 25°C.
AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT
(OPTION 002)
Option 002 provides the capability of measuring
the amplitude of the incoming sine wave signal,
and simultaneously displaying its frequency (MHz)
and level (dBm). The maximum operating level
and the top end of dynamic range are increased to
+20 dBm. Amplitude offset to 0.1 dB resolution
may be selected from front panel pushbuttons.
INPUT 1:
Frequency range: 500 MHz—18 GHz,
Dynamic range (frequency and level):
-22 dBm to +20 dBm 500 MHz to 12.4 GHz
-15 dBm to +20 dBm 12.4 GHz to 18 GHz
Maximum operating level: +20 dBm
Damage level: +25 dBm, peak
Resolution: 0.1 dB
Accuracy: ±1.5 dB (excluding mismatch
uncertainty).
SWR:
<2:1 (amplitude measurement).
<5:1 (frequency measurement).
Measurement time: 100 ms + frequency measurement time.
Display: Simultaneously displays frequency to 1
MHz resolution and input level. (Option 011
provides full frequency resolution on HP-IB
output.)
INPUT 2: (500 impedance only)
Frequency range: 10 MHz—520 MHz
Dynamic range (frequency and level):
-17 dBm to +20 dBm.
Damage level: +24 dBm, peak
Resolution: 0.1 dBm.
Accuracy: 1.5 dB (excluding mismatch
uncertainty).
SWR: <1.8:1
Measurement time: 100 ms + frequency measurement time.
Display: Simultaneously displays frequency to 1
MHz resolution and input level.
Model 5342A
General Information
Table 1-1. Model 5342A Specifications (Continued)
EXTENDED DYNAMIC RANGE
(OPTION 003)
Option 003 provides an attenuator that automatically extends the dynamic range of operation for
input 1.
INPUT 1:
Frequency range: 500 MHz to 18 GHz
Sensitivity:
500 MHz to 12.4 GHz -22 dB
-15 dBm
12.4 GHz to 18 GHz
Maximum operating level: +20 dBm.
Dynamic range:
500 MHz to 12.4 GHz 42 dB
12.4 GHz to 18 GHz
35 dB
Damage level: +25 dBm, peak
SWR: <5:1
DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER
(OPTION 004)
Option 004 provides the ability to convert any
three consecutive displayed digits into an analog
voltage output. A display of ∅∅∅ produces ∅ V output; 999 produces 9.99V full scale.
Accuracy: ±5 mV, ±0.3 mV/°C (from 25°C)
Conversion Speed:
reading.
Resolution: 10 mV
Output: 5 mA. Impedance <1.0 ohm.
Connector: Type BNC female on rear panel.
GENERAL
Accuracy: ±1 count ± time base error.
Resolution: Front panel pushbuttons select 1 Hz to
1 MHz.
Residual stability: When counter and source use
common time base or counter uses external
higher stability time base, <4 X 10- 11 r m s
typcial.
Display: 11-digit LED display, sectionalized to
read GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
Selected from front panel pushSelf-check:
buttons. Measures 75 MHz for resolution
chosen.
Frequency offset: Selected from front panel
pushbuttons. Displayed frequency is offset by
entered value to 1 Hz resolution.
Sample rate: Variable from less than 20 ms between measurements to HOLD which holds
display indefinitely.
IF out: Rear panel BNC connector provides 25
MHz to 125 MHz output of down-converted
microwave signal.
Operating temperature: 0°C to 50°C.
Power requirements: 100/120/220/240V rms, +5%,
-10%, 48—66 Hz; 100 VA max.
Accessories furnished: Power cord, 229 cm (7½ ft.)
Size: 133 mm H X 213 mm W X 498 mm D
Weight: Net 9.1 kg (20 Ibs.).
Shipping 12.7 kg (28 Ibs.).
1-5. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1-6. This product is a Safety Class I instrument (provided with a protective earth terminal). Safety
information pertinent to the operation and servicing of this instrument is included in appropriate
sections of this manual.
1-7.
INSTRUMENT
IDENTIFICATION
1-8. Hewlett-Packard instruments have a 2-section, 10-character serial number (0000A00000),
which is located on the rear panel. The four-digit serial prefix identifies instrument changes. If
the serial prefix of your instrument differs from that listed on the title page of this manual, there
are differences between this manual and your instrument. Instruments having higher serial
prefixes are covered with a “Manual Changes” sheet included with this manual. If the change
sheet is missing, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office listed at the back of
this manual. Instruments having a lower serial prefix than that listed on the title page, are covered
in Section VII.
1-9. ACCESSORIES
1-10. Table 1-2 lists accessory equipment supplied and Table 1-3 lists accessories available.
Table 1-2. Equipment Supplied
DESCRIPTION
HP PART NUMBER
Detachable Power Cord 229 cm (7½ feet long)
8120-1378
1-3
Model 5342A
General Information
Table 1-3. Accessories Available
DESCRIPTION
HP PART NUMBER
Bail Handle Kit
5061-2002
Rack Mounting Adapter Kit (Option 908)
5061-0057
Rack Mounting Adapter Kit with slot for access
to front connectors from rear.
Transit Case
9211-2682
Service Accessory Kit (refer to paragraph 1-16)
Microwave
K70-59992A
Attenuators
Signature Analyzer
Model 10842A
Model 8491B, 8494/5/6H
Model 5004A
1-11. DESCRIPTION
1-12. The 5342A Microwave Frequency Counter measures the frequency of signals in the range
of 10 Hz to 18 GHz, with a basic sensitivity of -25 dBm. Signals in the frequency range of 10 Hz to
500 MHz are measured by the direct count method. Signals in the frequency range of 500 MHz to
18 GHz are down-converted to an IF by a heterodyne conversion technique for application to the
counter circuits. The unique conversion technique employed results in high sensitivity and FM
tolerance in addition to automatic amplitude discrimination. The counted IF is added to the local
oscillator frequency to determine the unknown frequency for display.
1-13. OPTIONS
1-14. Options available with the 5342A are described in Table 1-1 and paragraph 3-57. If an
option is included in the initial order, it will be installed at the factory and ready for operation
upon receipt. If an option is ordered for field installation it will be supplied as a retrofit kit. Refer
to Section II for kit part numbers and installation instructions.
1-15. SERVICE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE
1-16. Extender boards are available for servicing printed circuit assemblies while extended from
the instrument. The extender boards allow assemblies to be extended from their plug-in connectors for monitoring with appropriate test equipment. Extender boards for each assembly are
supplied in Service Accessory Kit 10842A as described in paragraph 8-46.
1-17. RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT
1-18. The test equipment listed in Table 1-4 is recommended for use during performance tests,
adjustments, and troubleshooting. Substitute test equipment may be used if it meets the required
characteristics listed in the table.
1-4
Model 5342A
General Information
Table 1-4 Recommended Test Equipment
INSTRUMENT
Oscilloscope
Signal Generator
Spectrum Analyzer
REQUIRED
CHARACTERISTICS
USE*
RECOMMENDED
MODEL
100 MHz bandwidth
T,A,OV,P
HP 1740A
10 Hz—10 MHz
10 MHz—2.4 GHz
2 GHz—18 GHz
T,A,OV,P
HP 651B
HP 8620C/86222A
HP 8620C/86290A
RF inputs from 1 MHz—500 MHz
T,A,P
HP 141T/8552A/8554B
DC Voltmeter
20V Range, 0.05V Resolution
T,A
HP 3465A
AC Voltmeter
10 MHz-350 MHz
T,A
HP 3406A
100 kHz, 1% accuracy
A (Opt. 002)
HP 3400A
HP 1740A compatibility
T
HP 1607A (use
with HP 1740A)
AC Voltmeter
Logic State Analyzer
Signature Analyzer
Power Splitter
Logic Pulser
5342A compatibility
T
HP 5004A
DC—18 GHz
OV,P
HP 11667A
TTL compatibility
T
HP 546A
Current Tracer
1 mA—1 A range
T
HP 547A
Logic Probe
TTL compatibility
T
HP 545A
DC—18 GHz 10 dB steps
OV,P
HP 8495B
Step Attenuator
AP Clips (4)
Isolation Transformer
Extender Boards
Clip for 14 pin/16 pin IC’s
T
HP P/N 1400-0734
120V IN — Isolated 120V OUT
T
Allied Electronics
P/N 705-0048
2 X 10 pin
2 X 12 pin
2 X 15 pin
2 X 18 pin (2)
2 X 22 pin (2)
2 X 24 pin
A 14 Extender
A15 Extender
T
HP P/N 05342-60030
HP P/N 05342-60031
HP P/N 05342-60032
HP P/N 05342-60033
HP P/N 05342-60034
HP P/N 05342-60035
HP P/N 05342-60036
HP P/N 05342-60039
Power Meter
10 MHz—18 GHz
A,OV,P
HP 436A
Power Sensor
10 MHz—18 GHz
-30 dBm to +20 dBm
A,OV,P
HP 8481A
DC—18 GHz
P
HP 909A (Option 012)
1 GHz, >+20 dBm Output
P (Opt. 002)
HP 489A
Signal Generator
100 MHz, +20 dBm
A (Opt. 002)
HP 8601A
Signal Generator
>100 MHz, >+20 dBm
P,OV,
HP 3312A
50Ω Termination
Microwave Amplifier
(Option 002)
Swept Frequency Analyzer
15 MHz—18GHz Modulator
15 MHz-18 GHz Detectors
(2 required)
Oscilloscope
Mainframe
100 MHz—18 GHz
P
HP 8755B
HP 8755B compatibility
P
HP 11665B
0.1—18 GHz
P
HP 11664A
HP 8755B compatibility
P
HP 182T
2—18 GHz
P
HP 11692D
100—500 MHz
P
HP 778D
(Two Microwave sources needed
for automatic amplitude
discrimination test — see
paragraph 4-35)
P
HP 8620C Mainframe
Bus System Analyzer
Control HP-IB lines
T (Opt. 011)
HP 59401A
*T = Troubleshooting
A = Adjustments
OV = Operational Verification
P = Full Performance Testing
Directional Coupler
Directional
Coupler
Signal Generator
Mainframe
1-5
Model 5342A
Installation
SECTION II
INSTALLATION
2-1. INTRODUCTION
2-2. This section contains information for unpacking, inspection, storage, and installation.
2-3. UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
2-4. If the shipping carton is damaged, inspect the instrument for visible damage (scratches,
dents, etc.). If the instrument is damaged, notify the carrier and the nearest Hewlett-Packard
Sales and Service Office immediately (offices are listed at the back of this manual). Keep the
shipping carton and packing material for the carrier’s inspection. The Hewlett-Packard Sales
and Service Office will arrange for repair or replacement of your instrument without waiting for
the claim against the carrier to be settled.
2-5. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
Before connecting the instrument to ac power lines,
be sure that the voltage selector is properly
positioned as described below.
2-6. LINE VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS. The 5342A is equipped with a power module that contains a printed-circuit line voltage selector to select 100- 120-, 220-, or 240-volt ac operation.
Before applying power, the pc selector must be set to the correct position and the correct fuse
must be installed as described below.
2-7. Power line connections are selected by the position of the plug-in circuit card in the
module. When the card is plugged into the module, the only visible markings on the card indicate the line voltage to be used. The correct value of line fuse, with a 250-voIt rating, must be
installed after the card is inserted. This instrument uses a 0.75A fuse (HP Part No. 2110-0360) for
100/120-volt operation; a 0.375A fuse (HP Part No. 2110-0421) for 220/240-volt operation.
2-8. To convert from one line voltage to another, the power cord must be disconnected from
the power module before the sliding window covering the fuse and card compartment can be
moved to expose the fuse and circuit card. See Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1. Line Voltage Selection
2-1
Model 5342A
Installation
2-9. Power Cable
2-10. The 5342A is shipped with a three-wire power cable. When the cable is connected to an
appropriate ac power source, this cable connects the chassis to earth ground. The type of power
cable plug shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination. Refer to
Figure 2-2 for the part numbers of the power cable and plug configurations available.
Figure 2-2. Power Cable HP Part Numbers versus Mains Plugs Available
WARNING
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT, THE
PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINALS OF THIS INSTRUMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTIVE
CONDUCTOR OF THE (MAINS) POWER CORD. THE
MAINS PLUG SHALL ONLY BE INSERTED IN A
SOCKET OUTLET PROVIDED WITH A PROTECTIVE
EARTH CONTACT, THE PROTECTIVE ACTION MUST
NOT BE NEGATED BY THE USE OF AN EXTENSION
CORD (POWER CABLE) WITHOUT A PROTECTIVE
CONDUCTOR (GROUNDING).
2-2
Model 5342A
Installation
2-11. Operating Environment
2-12. TEMPERATURE. The 5342A may be operated in temperatures from 0°C to +55°C.
2-13. HUMIDITY. The 5342A may be operated in environments with humidity up to 95%. However, it should be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation in the
instrument.
2-14. ALTITUDE. The 5342A may be operated at altitudes up to 4,600 metres (15,000 feet).
2-15.
STORAGE
AND
SHIPMENT
2-16. Environment
2-17. The instrument may be stored or shipped in environments within the following limits:
TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40°C to +75°C
HUMIDITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up to 95%
ALTITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,620 metres (25,000 feet)
2-18. The instrument should also be protected from temperature extremes which cause
condensation within the instrument.
2-19. Packaging
2-20. ORIGINAL PACKAGING. Containers and materials identical to those used in factory
packaging are available through Hewlett-Packard offices. If the instrument is being returned to
Hewlett-Packard for servicing, attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address,
model number, and full serial number. Also, mark the container FRAGILE to ensure careful
handling. In any correspondence, refer to the instrument by model number and full serial
number.
2-21. OTHER PACKAGING. The following general instructions should be used for repacking
with commercially available materials:
a.
Wrap instrument in heavy paper or plastic. (If shipping to Hewlett-Packard office or
service center, attach tag indicating type of service required, return address, model
number, and full serial number.)
b. Use strong shipping container. A double-wall carton made of 350-pound test material is
adequate.
c.
Use a layer of shock-absorbing material 70 to 100 mm (3-to 4-inch) thick around all sides
of the instrument to provide firm cushioning and prevent movement inside container.
Protect control panel with cardboard.
d. Seal shipping container securely.
e.
Mark shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling.
f.
In any correspondence, refer to instrument by model number and full serial number.
2-22. FIELD INSTALLATION OF O P T I O N S
2-23. Procedures for field installation of Options 001,002,003,004, and 011 are described in the
following paragraphs.
2-3
Model 5342A
Installation
2-24. Part Numbers for Ordering Option Kits
2-25. To obtain the necessary parts for installation of an option, order by part number as listed
below (refer to Section VI for ordering information):
Name
Option
Part Number
001
High Stability Time Base
HP Model 10544A
002
Amplitude Measurement
05342-60200 (Kit)
003
Extended Dynamic Range
05342-60201 (Kit)
*004
Digital-to-Analog Converter
05342-60202 (Kit)
001
HP-IB I/O
05342-60019 (HP-IB Assy.)
05342-60029 (HP-IB Input Assy.)
*NOTE
If the instrument in which Option 004
has a series number 1812 or lower,
A14 Microprocessor will have to be
U7 ROM Part Number 1818-0706 to
U7 ROM (1818-0331).
is to be installed
the U7 ROM on
replaced. Order
replace the old
2-26. Installation of 10 MHz Oscillator Option 001
2-27. Option 001 consists of oven-controlled crystal oscillator time base 10544A, which has a pc
card connector. Option 001 is installed in the same connector on the motherboard as the standard oscillator (A24). See Figure 8-44. To install Option 001, proceed as follows:
a.
Remove the standard oscillator from A24 connector.
b. Install Option 001 oscillator into A24 connector.
c.
Attach Option 001 oscillator to the motherboard by means of two 6/32X5/16 pan head
screws. Install the screws from the bottom of the motherboard using star washers.
d. Perform Option 001 oscillator adjustment as described in paragraph 5-32.
2-28. Installation of Amplitude Measurement Option 002
2-29. Option 002 consists of U2 High Frequency Amplitude assembly and A27 Low Frequency
Amplitude Assembly modules and the A16 Amplitude Assembly pc board. U2 is connected to the
high frequency input of the 5342A, A27 is connected to the low frequency input and both of the
modules are connected to the A16 board by the coax wires supplied. See photo of installed
option, Figure 8-22, and schematic diagram, Figure 8-39. To install the components proceed as
follows:
NOTE
The parts that comprise this option are listed in Table 6-5.
a.
Remove the top and bottom covers and top plate from instrument.
b. Place instrument top down.
c.
At inside front panel, disconnect cables from A1J1,J1J3,J25J1 (IF OUT lNT), and A25J2 (IF
OUT EXT).
d. Solder one end of the white/red/green 14-inch wire (8120-0483) to AT1 feedthrough
capacitor terminal on A25 Preamplifier assembly.
2-4
Model 5342A
Installation
e.
Install coax assembly 8120-2268 through A22 motherboard from top of instrument at A16
slot. Place the wires through the holes as shown below:
NOTE
Prior to installing A27 Low Frequency
Amplitude Assembly, connect the wires as
described below.
f.
Solder one end of the black/white/blue 14-inch wire (8120-0471) to C7 feedthrough
capacitor terminal on A27.
g.
Place heat shrinkable tubing (0890-0983) over connection at C7,
h.
Place heat shrinkable tubing (0890-0983) over three of the coax wires (red, blue, and
green) that were installed in step e. and solder these wires to the terminals listed below:
Coax
Terminal
Red
Blue
Green
A27C10
A27C9
A27C8
i.
Apply heat to shrink the tubing at the connections made in step g and h.
j.
Remove attaching nut from front panel N-type input connector and disconnect rigid
coax W1 from J1 on U1 Sampler. Remove W1 from instrument.
k.
Mount A27 Low Frequency Amplitude Assembly in the recessed angle of the casting
behind front frame, see Figure 8-22. Attach A27 to casting with two pan head screws
supplied. Place a star washer under the other screw.
l.
The wire previously soldered to A27C10 has a black ground wire attached. Solder the end
of this black wire to the ground lug installed in preceding step.
m.
Solder the free end of white/red/green wire (other end connected to A25AT1 in step d)
to A22 motherboard at XA16B, pin 3 (ATT).
NOTE
Prior to installing U2 High Frequency Amplitude
Assembly, connect the color-coded wires as shown
below. Place heat shrinkable tubing (0890-0983 for
coax and 0890-0706 for single wires) over all connections to U2.
2-5
Model 5342A
Installation
n.
Connect rigid coax (8120-2516) from U2 High Frequency Amplitude Assembly to J1 on
Sampler U1. Install U2 input connector through front panel. Fasten with attaching nut.
o.
Solder white/black/red wire (from U2) to A22 motherboard XA16B, pin
p.
Solder white/brown/red wire (from U2) to A22 motherboard XA16B, pin
q.
Harness the coax cables and wires with tie wraps supplied.
r.
Connect cable 05342-60119 from A27J1 to A1J3.
s.
Connect cable A1J3/A27J2 to A27J2.
t.
Reconnect A1J1,J1 (IF OUT INT) and J2 (IF OUT EXT) and harness with tie wrap.
u.
Harness the white cables with tie wraps supplied.
NOTE
The ROM and U2 High Frequency Amplitude
Assembly are supplied as a matched pair and are
included under one replaceable part number
(05342-80005).
v.
Install the ROM (supplied with option) into U3 socket on A16 (05342-60038) board.
w.
Replace resistor R2 on A16 board with a resistor of the value labeled on U2 assembly.
x.
Insert the plug of 8120-2268 cable into mating socket on A16 board (05342-60038) and
install A16 into connector XA16.
y.
Perform the Option 002 adjustments listed under paragraph 5-33 through 5-39 of this
manual.
z.
Perform the operational verification procedures in paragraphs 4-14, 4-15, and 4-17
of this manual.
NOTE
If the instrument does not meet the specified
accuracy of ±1.5 dB as described in paragraph 4-14,
perform the following procedures.
Replace resistor R6 from the A27 Low Frequency Amplitude Assembly and replace with a
resistor of a higher or lower value as shown below. For lower power readings increase the
value and for higher power readings decrease the value of resistor R6 as follows:
2-6
dB Change
R6 Changes (ohms)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
10
20
30
40
50
Model 5342A
Installation
2-30. Installation of Extended Dynamic Range Option 003
2-31. Option 003 consists of A16 Extended Dynamic Range Assembly (05342-60037) and U2
Attenuator Assembly (5088-7038). See Figure 8-22 for location of U2 (Option 002 or 003).
NOTE
The parts that comprise this option are listed at the
end of Table 6-6.
a.
Remove the top and bottom covers and top plate from instrument.
b.
Place instrument top down.
c.
At inside front panel, disconnect cable from A1J1,A1J3,A25J1 (IF OUT INT), and A25J2
(IF OUT EXT).
d.
Solder one end of the white/red/green 14-inch wire (8120-0483) to AT1 feedthrough
capacitor terminal on A25 Preamplifier Assembly.
e.
Solder free end of white/red/green wire (other end connected to A25AT1 in step d) to
A22 Motherboard at XA16B, pin 3 (ATT).
f.
Solder white/bIack/red wire (from U2) to A22 Motherboard XA16B, pin
g.
Solder white/brown/red wire (from U2) to A22 Motherboard XA16B, pin
h.
Remove the N-type input connector from front panel and replace with U2 (5088-7038).
i.
Connect rigid coax (supplied) from U2 to J1 on Sampler U1.
j.
Install A16 board (05342-60037) into XA16 connector.
k.
Perform the operational verification procedures in paragraphs 4-13 and 4-16
of this manual.
2-32.
Installation of Digital-to-Analog Conversion (DAC) Option 004
2-33. Option 004 consists of an A2 Display Driver Assembly (05342-60028) that contains DAC
circuitry added to the standard A2 circuit. Interconnecting wires are included with the Option
004 retrofit kit (05342-60202). Procedures for installation of Option 004 are as follows:
2-7
Model 5342A
Installation
a.
Remove top and bottom covers, front frame and A1-A2 assemblies. Refer to disassembly
procedures, paragraph 8-22.
b.
Replace the original A2 board (05342-60002) with Option 004 A2 board (05342-60028) and
reassemble unit.
c.
If the series number of the instrument is 1812 or lower, the U7 ROM, 1818-0331 on the
A14 Microprocessor board will have to be replaced with U7 ROM, 1818-0706 as described
in step d. If instrument has the 1818-0706 ROM, proceed to step e.
CAUTION
ROM U7 is a large-scale MOS IC. Its inputs are
susceptible to damage by high voltage and by static
charges. Particular care should be exercised when
servicing this IC or handling it under conditions
where static charges can build up.
d.
Remove top plate from 5342A. Remove A14 Microprocessor and replace ROM U7 part
number 1818-0331 with part number 1818-0706. Install A14.
e.
At bottom of 5342A connect coax cable to the connector at the bottom rear of A2 board
labeled D/A OUTP. Solder the other end of this cable to the DAC OUT connector on the
rear paneI.
f.
Connect the white/gray wire to the pin (push-on) labeled LDA at bottom rear of A2
Display Driver board. Solder other end of wire to LDA terminal on A22 Motherboard as
shown in figure below.
g.
Connect red wire (+15V) and violet wire (-15V) to the proper terminals (push-on pins) on
A2 Display Driver board (see Figure 8-25, component locator for location). Connect
other end of these wires to terminals on A22 Motherboard as shown in figure below.
h.
Reassemble instrument and perform operational verification procedures in paragraph 4-27 of this manual.
2-34.
Installation of HP-IB Option 011
2-35. Option 011 consist of printed-circuit assembly A15 and interconnection board A29. The
interconnection board mounts inside the 5342A rear panel and is connected to A22 Motherboard
via a cable strap. Procedures for installation of Option 011 are as follows (see photo of installed
option, Figure 8-22):
a.
Remove top and bottom covers and top panel from the 5342A.
b. Insert A15 assembly into A15 slot. See Figure 8-21 for location.
2-8
Model 5342A
Installation
c.
If 5342A is equipped with Option 001 Oscillator, remove oscillator assembly by removing
two attaching screws from A22 Motherboard.
NOTE
In the following step, make sure that the address
switch (A29S1) is located as shown in Figure 8-20.
d.
Insert the A29 Interconnection board (05342-60019) into the rear panel slots provided
(from inside). Screw the two mounting studs (0380-0644) and washers (2100-3171) into the
HP-IB connector to attach the board to the rear panel,
e.
Connect the plug of the cable strap from A29 to J2 on A22 Motherboard with arrow on
installed plug pointing toward front panel.
f.
Perform the Option 011 HP-IB Verification in paragraph 4-19 of this manual.
g.
Refer to paragraph 2-36 for HP-IB interconnection data and to paragraph 3-69 for
programming information.
2-36. HP-IB Interconnections
2-37. HEWLETT-PACKARD INTERFACE BUS. Interconnection data concerning the rear panel
HP-IB connector is provided in Figure 2-3. This connector is compatible with the HP 10631A/
B/C/D HP-IB cables. The HP-IB system allows interconnection of up to 15 (including the controller) HP-IB compatible instruments. The HP-IB cables have identical “piggy back” connectors
on both ends so that several cables can be connected to a single source without special adapters
or switch boxes. System components and devices may be connected in virtually any configuration desired. There must, of course, be a path from the calculator (or other controller) to every
device operating on the bus. As a practical matter, avoid stacking more than three or four cables
on any one connector. If the stack gets too large, the force on the stack produces great leverage
which can damage the connector mounting. Be sure each connector is firmly (finger tight)
screwed in place to keep it from working loose during use.
2-38. CABLE LENGTH RESTRICTIONS. To achieve design performance with the HP-IB, proper
voltage levels and timing relationship must be maintained. If the system cable is too long, the
lines cannot be driven properly and the system will fail to perform properly. Therefore, when
interconnecting an HP-IB system, it is important to observe the following rules:
a.
The total cable length for the system must be less than or equal to 20 metres (65 feet).
b. The total cable length for the system must be equal to or Iess than 2 metres (6.6 feet) times
the total number of devices connected to the bus.
c.
The total number of instruments connected to the bus must not exceed 15.
2-39. 5342A Listen Address
2-40. The 5342A contains a rear panel HP-IB Instrument address selection switch. There are five
setting and changing the listen address are provided in Section III of this manual along with
programming codes.
2-41. HP-IB Descriptions
2-42. A description of the HP-IB is provided in Section Ill of this manual, A study of this information is necessary if the user is not familiar with the HP-IB concept. Additional information
concerning the design criteria and operation of the bus is available in IEEE Standard 488-1975,
titled “IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation”.
2-9
Model 5342A
Installation
Figure 2-3. Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus Connection
2-10
Model 5342A
Operation
SECTION Ill
OPERATION
3-1. INTRODUCTION
3-2. This section contains operating information including operating characteristics, descriptions of controls and indicators, and operating procedures.
3-3. OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
3-4. The following paragraphs describe the operating ranges and modes, resolution, sample
rate, AM and FM characteristics, and auto-amplitude discrimination. Front panel controls and
indicators are described in Figure 3-1, rear paneI controls and connectors are described in Figure 3-2. Operating procedures are explained in Figure 3-3. Amplitude measurements (Option
002) are described in Figure 3-4. DAC operation (Option 004) is described in Figure 3-5.
3-5.
Operating Ranges
3-6. There are two basic operating ranges: 10 Hz to 500 MHz and 500 MHz to 18 GHz.
Frequencies in the lower range are measured directly while measurements in the 500 MHz to
18 GHz range are made indirectly by a harmonic heterodyne down-conversion technique.
Provision is made to select either range by a front-panel slide switch. A separate input connector
is provided for each range. When the range switch is in the 10 Hz—500MHz position, the signal at
the BNC connector is routed to the direct count circuits of the 5342A. In this range, input impedance is selectable via the 50Ω−1 ΜΩ switch. When the range switch is in the 500 MHz—18 GHz
range, the input signal is applied via the front-panel type N connector to the down-conversion
circuits of the 5342A.
3-7. Resolution Keys
3-8. The best case resolution is the value represented by the least significant digit (LSD) in the
display. In the 5342A, a maximum resolution of 1 Hz can be selected (by the pushbutton keys on
the front panel labeled in blue, preceded by the blue key being pressed). The display is divided
into four sections for ease of determining GHz,MHz,kHz,and Hz resolution. Half-sized
used as space fillers within a section to improve interpretation of the display. For example, a
signal measured to 100 kHz resolution will be displayed thus:
3-9. The pushbutton keys on the front panel under the RESOLUTION label are used for other
purposes when the blue key is not in effect (has not been pressed). When the blue key has not
been pressed, the keys are defined by the black number on the keys and are used to enter frequency offsets, manual center frequencies, and amplitude offsets as described in Figure 3-1.
3-1
Model 5342A
Operation
3-10. CHECK, DAC, and ENTER keys
3-11. The CHECK, DAC, and ENTER keys are used as described in Figure 3-1.
3-12. FREQ Keys
3-13. Two of the pushbutton keys on the front paneI under the FREQ label are used to select the
automatic or manual mode of operation. The other keys in this section of the keyboard control
the use of the RESOLUTON keys. Use of these keys is described in detail in Figure 3-1.
3-14. Automatic Mode
3-15. The automatic mode of operation is selected by pressing the AUTO key. Input signals in
the 500 MHz—18 GHz range are acquired, measured, and displayed automatically. When power
is initially turned on, the 5342A goes into this mode automatically.
3-16. Manual Mode
3-17. The manual mode of operation is selected by pressing the MAN (MHz) key. To operate in
this mode, input signals in the 500 MHz-18 GHz range must be known to within 50 MHz and this
frequency (called the manual center frequency) must be entered into the display prior to the
measurement. Use of the manual mode is described in detail in Figure 3-3.
3-18. Offset Frequencies
3-19. It is sometimes desirable to add or subtract a constant to\from a frequency measurement.
For example, by measuring a radio IF and knowing the LO, the counter can display the RF input
when the LO frequency is entered as a positive offset. It may be easier to tune an oscillator to a
specific frequency if the desired frequency is entered as a negative offset and the oscillator tuned
until the counter reads zero. Frequency offsets are described in Figure 3-3.
3-20. Amplitude and Offset Measurements
3-21. When Amplitude Option 002 is installed, the amplitude is displayed in addition to the frequency of the input signal. The frequency is displayed to 1 MHz resolution in the five leftmost
digits and the amplitude is displayed to 0.1 dB resolution in the four rightmost digits of the display. An arbitrary value can be selected as an amplitude offset and can be added to or subtracted
from the measured value as described in Figure 3-4.
3-22. Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Operation
3-23. When DAC Option 004 is installed, any three consecutive digits of the display can be
selected and converted to a corresponding analog voltage output. The voltage is available at the
BNC connector on the rear panel (labeled DAC OUT) and is between ∅ and 9.99 volts dc. For
example, if the selected digits are ∅∅∅ the output is ∅ volts and if the selected digits are 999 the
output is 9.99 volts dc. Operating procedures are listed in Figure 3-5.
3-24. SET, RESET, RECALL, and CHS Keys
3-25. The SET, RESET, RECALL, and CHS keys allow offsets and center frequencies to be entered,
reset the measurement process, recall previous values, and change the sign of offsets as
described in Figure 3-3.
3-26. SAMPLE RATE, GATE, and REMOTE
3-27. The SAMPLE RATE control adjusts the deadtime between the end of one measurement
and the start of the next measurement. The duration of the measurement is determined by the
3-2
Model 5342A
Operation
resolution selected. The SAMPLE RATE is variable between <20 ns and HOLD. In HOLD position
the display will hold the measurement displayed indefinitely.
3-28. The GATE indicator is lit during the measurement interval (gate time) when the counter’s
gate is open and accumulating counts.
3-29. The REMOTE indicator is lit when the 5342A is in remote operation (Option 011 installed).
3-30. AM Tolerance
3-31. The 5342A will measure carrier frequencies containing amplitude modulation to any
modulation index provided the minimum voltage of the signal is not less than the sensitivity
specification of the 5342A.
3-32. FM Tolerance
3-33. The 5342A will measure carrier frequencies which are modulated in frequency such as a
microwave radio carrier. The FM tolerance is the worst case FM deviation which can be present
without affecting the counters ability to acquire the signal. If the deviations about the carrier are
symmetrical, then the counter averages out the deviations to measure the actual carrier frequency. The FM tolerance is determined by the position of the CW-FM switch on the rear panel.
The CW position provides FM tolerance of 20 MHz peak-to-peak. The FM position provides a
tolerance of 50 MHz peak-to-peak but results in slower acquisition time (2.4 seconds compared
to 530 milliseconds for CW position).
NOTE
Most measurements should be made with the rear
panel FM/CW switch in CW position. The FM
position should be used only when the input signal
has significant amounts of FM (>20 MHz p-p). Incorrect measurements may result if the FM position is
used with a stable input (non-FM) signal which has
been locked to the counter’s time base.
3-34. Automatic Amplitude Discrimination
3-35. The automatic amplitude discrimination feature allows the 5342A to acquire and display
the highest level signal within its sensitivity range. The highest level signal must be 20 dB greater
in amplitude than any other signal present. Typical operation is approximately 10 dB. This feature
is useful for discriminating against spurious signals and harmonics.
3-36. MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL POWER
CAUTION
Do not exceed +25 dBm (peak) of input power at the
type N connector (500 MHz–18 GHz). Damage to the
internal sampler may occur. Refer to paragraph 3-37
for detailed explanation.
3-37. The 5342A will function within specifications for 500 MHz-18 GHz signal inputs up to
+5 dBm (standard unit). For measuring higher level inputs, refer to the options described in paragraphs 3-61 and 3-63. Under no circumstances should the input level to the 5342A exceed
+25 dBm. If the input power exceeds this Ievel, damage to the internal sampler may occur and the
sampler is expensive to replace. Measurements from +5 to +25 dBm are not recommended as
false readings may occur. When signal levels exceed +5 dBm external attenuators should be used
to attenuate the signal. Options 002 and 003 can extend the range to +20 dBm.
3-3
Model 5342A
Operation
3-38. The 10 Hz—500 MHz direct count input BNC connector is fuse-protected for a maximum
input level of 3.5V rms (+24 dBm).
3-39. INPUT CABLE CONSIDERATIONS
3-40. Consideration should be given to input cable losses at higher frequencies. For example, a
6-foot section of RG-214/U coaxial cable has about 15 dB loss at 18 GHz. Such losses must be
taken into consideration along with the sensitivity specifications given in Table 1-1.
3-41. CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS
3-42. Figure 3-1 describes the front panel controls, indicators, and connectors. Figure 3 - 2
describes the rear panel connectors and controls.
WARNING
BEFORE THE INSTRUMENT IS SWITCHED ON, ALL
PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINALS, EXTENSION
CORDS, AUTOTRANSFORMERS AND DEVICES
CONNECTED TO IT SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO A
PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUNDED SOCKET. ANY
INTERRUPTION OF THE PROTECTIVE EARTH
GROUNDING WILL CAUSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK
HAZARD THAT COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
ONLY FUSES WITH THE REQUIRED RATED CURRENT AND SPECIFIED TYPE SHOULD BE USED. DO
NOT USE REPAIRED FUSES OR SHORT CIRCUITED
FUSEHOLDERS. TO DO SO COULD CAUSE A SHOCK
OR FIRE HAZARD.
CAUTION
Before the instrument is switched on, it must be set to
the voltage of the power source, or damage to the
instrument may result. (Refer to paragraph 2-6.)
3-43. OPERATING PROCEDURES
3-44. Figure 3-3 illustrates operating procedures for the standard 5342A. Self-check procedures
are also given in Figure 3-3. An operators keyboard check is given in paragraph 3-45. Operating
procedures for Amplitude Option 002 are listed in Figure 3-4, and for DAC Option 004 in
Figure 3-5.
3-4
Model 5342A
Operation
DISPLAY
Digits:
The display contains 11 digit positions, two digits for frequencies in GHz and three digits each for
MHz, kHz, and Hz. (The Hz digits position is used to display dBm when Amplitude Option 002 is
installed.)
Annunciators:
-Sign
When lighted, indicates a negative frequency offset has been entered into display (MHz).
OVN indicator
Oven monitor indicates when crystal oscillator oven is on (warming). When
warmed-up, light goes out (Option 001 only).
dBm indicator
lighted, indicates amplitude of input signal is being measured (Option
002 installed).
pressing AMPL key and displayed in Hz portion of display. The fourth
digit from the right displays a — sign for signals below 0 dBm.
* indicator
When lighted, indicates the rear panel CW-FM switch is in FM position. This selects
the wide-band mode which provides wider FM (50 MHz p-p) tolerance.
FREQ Keys
The FREQ keys select the mode of operation and control the display.
NOTE
Some keys are equipped with center indicator lights that serve as
“prompters” to the user. A blinking indicator light states a “ready”
condition for the key function that was selected and the instrument is
waiting for a mode or number to be entered. A steady indicator light
states that the key function that was selected is in operation.
AUTO key. Selects the automatic mode of operation to acquire and display input signal frequencies
in the 500 MHz-18 GHz range. The instrument goes into this mode when power is turned on.
MAN (MHz) key. Selects manual mode for input signal frequencies in the 500 MHz—18 GHz range.
Input signal frequency must be known (within 50 MHz) and entered into display via the blacknumbered keys.
Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators
3-5
Model 5342A
Operation
Blue key. Pressing this key activates the blue-labeled functions of the RESOLUTION keys.
RESET key. Clears the display and restarts a measurement. Clears any blinking lights in key center
indicators.
SET key. Must be pressed prior to selecting OFS dB, OFS MHz or MAN (MHz). The SET condition
is indicated by lighted segments
in the GHz digits of the display. This indicates that a center
frequency, offset frequency, or amplitude offset may be entered into the display.
RECALL key. Recalls stored memory information into display. The MAN (MHz), OFS dB, or OFS
MHz keys, if held in after RECALL is pressed, will result in a display of previously entered or computed information.
NOTE
Information stored in memory (by digit keys) after MAN (MHz) key is
pressed is available for display until AUTO mode is selected. Then the
center frequency determined by the automatic measurement overrides
the manual information.
AMPL key. Selects amplitude mode (when Option 002 is installed). The amplitude of the input signal
is displayed in the four rightmost digits of the display to a resolution of 0.1 dBm. The frequency
of the input signal is displayed in the five leftmost digits of the display.
OFS dB key. After pressing the SET key, the OFS dB key is pressed prior to entering an offset value
in dB via the digit keys. (Digit keys are labeled in black numbers under RESOLUTION.) Indicates
selection of amplitude offset mode when lighted and adds amplitude offset to measured amplitude
(Option 002).
NOTE
An offset value is an arbitrary value selected for entry into the display
to be added or subtracted from a measured value.
OFS MHz key. After pressing the SET key, the OFS MHz key is pressed prior to entering an offset
value via the digit keys. (Digit keys are labeled in black numbers under RESOLUTION.) Indicates
selection of frequency offset mode when lighted and adds frequency offset to measured frequency.
RESOLUTION keys:
The resolution keys select the display resolution (according to the blue labeling above each key)
after the blue key is pressed. The keys are defined by the black number labeled on the key when
entering offsets and manual center frequencies.
CHECK key. After pressing the blue key, the CHECK key is pressed to perform a self-check of the
instrument. The display will indicate 75 MHz for proper operation. Press RESET to exit self-check.
NOTE
The instrument must not have an input signal connected at the
500 MHz-18 GHz input to perform the self-check.
ENTER key. Used to enter digits for manual center frequencies or offsets into memory via blacknumbered keys. After the digits have been selected, ENTER key is pressed to signal the end of the
digit sequence.
LINE switch. In ON position, applies power to all circuits except the crystal oven (Option 001 installed). The crystal oven connects through a separate transformer, a thermal circuit breaker and
fuse directly to the ac line. This allows the oven to maintain its operating temperature and accuracy
when the LINE switch is in STBY position, thereby eliminating warmup delays.
SAMPLE RATE control. Adjusts the interval between measurements from 20 ms to HOLD. When
rotated to HOLD will hold display indefinitely.
GATE indicator. Indicates when counters main gate is open and a measurement is in progress.
REMOTE indicator. Illuminates when counter is in remote operation.
50Ω− 1 ΜΩ switch. Selects input impedance for adjacent 10 Hz-500 MHz input connector.
10 Hz-500 MHz, 500 MHz-18 GHz switch. Selects either low or high frequency range input
connector.
BNC Input Connector. Accepts 10 Hz-500 MHz input for direct count measurements. Measurements
made at this input require that the range switch is set to the 10 Hz-500 MHz position. Sensitivity is
listed in Table 1-1.
Type N Input Connector. Input for measurements in the 500 MHz-18 GHz range. Measurements
made at this input require that the range switch is set to the 500 MHz-18 GHz position. Sensitivity
is listed in Table 1-1.
3-6
Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators (Continued)
Model 5342A
Operation
1.
PROCESSOR INTERFACE connector A22W4JI. Not used. This connector is part of cable W4
which is connected to A22 motherboard as an interface to the A14 Microprocessor address and
data lines. This interface is provided for future use with companion instruments.
2.
position of digital input/output connector when instrument is equipped with Hewlett-Packard
Interface Bus (HP-1B) Option 011. Refer to paragraph 3-69 for details.
3.
Position of ADDRESS switch when instrument is equipped with Hewlett-Packard Interface
Bus (HP-IB) Option 011. Refer to paragraph 3-72 for details.
4.
AC Power Module. Input power module consisting of an IEC approved connector, a fuse
(0.75 amp for 100/200-volt operation, 0.375 for 220/240-volt operation) and a pC card line
voltage selector. Refer to paragraph 2-6 for details.
5.
CW-FM selector switch. Selects a short or long pseudorandom sequence (prs). The CW
position provides a short prs (or narrow mode) with FM tolerance of 20 MHz p-p. The FM
position provides a long prs (or wide mode) with FM tolerance of 50 MHz p-p.
NOTE
Most measurements should be made with the rear panel FM/CW
switch in the CW position. The FM position should be used only when
the input signal has significant amounts of FM (>20 MHz p-p).
6.
lNT/EXT selector switch. Selects the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator signal or an external
10 MHz source for the time base circuit. The external source must be connected to the adjacent
connector (7).
NOTE
[f the lNT/EXT switch is switched and causes momentary loss of
clock, the microprocessor may hang up and cause the display to stop
counting. To recover, press LINE switch to STBY then to ON.
7.
EXT FREQ STD connector. Accepts 10 MHz external time base signal when INT/EXT switch
is in EXT position.
8.
FREQ STD OUT connector. Supplies a 10 MHz squarewave output at 1.5 volts peak-to-peak.
9.
IF OUT connector. provides the intermediate frequency (IF) output of the Preamplifier circuit
for test or monitor of the IF.
10.
DAC connector. Provides the output voltage of the digital to analog converter when the
Option 004 is installed.
Figure 3-2. Rear Panel Controls and Connectors
3-7
Model 5342A
Operation
PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
1. On rear panel:
a. Set lNT/EXT to INT position.
b. Set CW/FM switch to CW. Refer to paragraph 3-33 for detailed description.
c. On ac power module, check for proper fuse (0.75 amp for 100/120-volt operation, 0.375
amp for 220/240-voh operation) and check position of pc line voltage selector (refer to
paragraph 2-6 for detailed description).
d. For remote operation, refer to paragraph 3-69 for explanation of HP-IB programming and
address switch settings on rear panel (for 5342A’s equipped with Option 011).
2. On front panel, set LINE switch to ON position.
Do not exceed +25 dBm peak of input power at the type N connector (500 MHz-18 GHz). Damage to the internal sampler may
occur.
NOTE
When the input signal level to the type N connector exceeds
approximately +5 dBm, each digit in the display becomes a minus
sign (-) to indicate overload. For Options 002,003, this threshold is
approximately +20 dBm.
The 10 Hz-500 MHz direct count input BNC connector is fuseprotected for a maximum input level of 3.5V rms (+24 dBm).
NOTE
The fuse for the 10 Hz-500 MHz input is located on the A3 Direct
Count Amplifier assembly.
Figure 3-3. Operating Procedures
3-8
Model 5342A
Operation
3.
Connect input signal to appropriate input connector according to frequency requirements
(BNC for 10-500 MHz, type N for 500 MHz-18 GHz) and set frequency range switch
accordingly.
4.
For input signals connected to BNC connector (10-500 MHz): set the 50Q-1 MQ switch as
required. This switch has no effect on input signals connected to the type N connector (500
MHz-18 GHz).
5.
Press blue key, then press blue-labeled RESOLUTION key for desired resolution.
NOTE
Half-sized
are used as fillers in the display to facilitate display
interpretation.
6.
Adjust SAMPLE RATE control for desired interval between measurements.
KEY INDICATORS
Indicator LED’s in the center of some keys are used as “prompters”
by the operator, as follows:
Blinking Indicator
A blinking LED in a key is a “ready” condition for that key function.
It indicates it is waiting for an entry via the keyboard. To clear the condition, press RESET.
Steady Indicator
A steady “on” LED in a key is an indication that the key function is in
effect. To clear the condition, press the key. (The AUTO Key is cleared
by pressing MAN (MHz) and vice versa.)
SELF-CHECK PROCEDURE
Perform the self-check as follows (no input signal connected and
SAMPLE RATE full CCW):
The manual center frequency is entered (and displayed) with 1 MHz
resolution and must be within so MHz of the input signal frequency
(connected to 500 MHz—18 GHz connector).
Figure 3-3. Operating Procedures (Continued)
3-9
Model 5342A
Operation
3-10
Figure 3-3. Operating Procedures (Continued)
Model 5342A
Operation
AUTOMATIC OFFSETS
Example - To “hold” a measurement and use it as a negative offset in
subsequent measurements:
Rotate SAMPLE RATE cw to HOLD
Rotate SAMPLE RATE ccw to normal
NOTE
The measured frequency will now be negatively offset by the frequency
captured when in HOLD.
RESET
RESET
Pressing
key clears the display and initiates a new measurement
without clearing stored values of offset or center frequencies. Clears
any blinking (ready state) key indicators, but does not clear steady
state indicators. 5342A maintains current operating modes.
Figure 3-3. Operating Procedures (Continued)
3-11
Model 5342A
Operation
3-12
Figure 3-4. Amplitude Measurements (Option 002)
Model 5342A
Operation
Figure 3-5. DAC Operation (Option 004)
3-13
Model 5342A
Operation
3-45.
3-14
Model 5342A
Operation
3-15
Model 5342A
Operation
3-47. ERROR CODE DISPLAYS
3-48. Error codes are displayed by the 5342A to indicate circuit malfunctions in the instrument
and to indicate operator (procedure) errors.
3-49. Instrument Error Displays
3-50. When power is applied to the 5342A, check-sum routines are automatically performed. if
a routine fails, an error code is displayed to indicate the circuit fault area as follows:
NOTE
If any of the above codes are displayed. refer to the
troubleshooting procedures in Table 8-5.
3-16
Model 5342A
Operation
3-51. Operator Error Displays
3-52.
3-17
Model 5342A
Operation
3-53. Limit Errors and Sequence Errors
3-54. A limit error (for example, setting a manual center frequency less than 500 MHz) will be
displayed as:
3-55. A sequence error (for example, pressing a digit key before pressing a function key) will be
displayed as:
.
3-56. For detailed descriptions of error codes, refer to Table 8-5.
3-57.
OPTIONS
3-58, The operating characteristics of the 5342A are affected by the addition of any of the
options described in the following paragraphs.
3-59. Time Base Option 001
3-60. Option 001 provides an oven-controlled crystal oscillator time base (Model 10544A) that
results in higher accuracy and longer periods between calibration (refer to Table 1-1). The oven
temperature is maintained when the 5342A LINE switch is in either the ON or the STBY position
(provided the instrument is connected to the power mains). When the OVN indicator in the
display is lit, the oven is on (warming). When the oven is at the proper temperature, the OVN
indicator goes out.
3-61. Amplitude Option 002
3-62. The amplitude option provides the capability of measuring the amplitude of the input
signal and simultaneously displaying the frequency (5 leftmost digits) and the amplitude level in
dBm (4 rightmost digits). The maximum operating level of +5 dBm for the standard 5342A is extended to +20 dBm for Option 002. The frequency is displayed to a resolution of 1 MHz and the
level is displayed to a resolution of 0.1 dBm, The sensitivity of the 5342A with Option 002 is
.
approximately 3 to 5 dB less than the standard 5342A, depending upon frequency.
3-63. Extended Dynamic Range Option 003
3-64. The extended dynamic range option extends the maximum operating level of + 5 dBm for
the standard 5342A to +20 dBm for Option 003 by insertion of an attenuator at the input (ahead of
the sampler), The insertion loss of the attenuator results in a sensitivity decrease of approximately
3 to 5 dB, depending upon the frequency of the signal.
3-65. HP-IB Interface Option 011
3-66. The Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB) Option 011 allows the functions of the 5342A
to be controlled remotely and allows measurement data to be ouptut to the bus, Programming information for Option 011 is given in paragraphs 3-69 through 3-80.
3-18
Model 5342A
Operation
3-67. Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Option 004
3-68. The DAC option allows selection of any three consecutive digits in the display and conversion of these digits to an analog voltage. The analog voltage is available at a rear panel connector. The digits are converted to a voltage of from 0 to 10 volts, corresponding to the digits
selected. Digits 000 produce 0 volts, digits 999 produce 9,99 volts, fullscale into 15 kilohms.
3-69. HP-IB PROGRAMMING (OPTION 011)
3-70. The capability of a device connected to the HP-IB is specified by its interface functions.
Table 3-1 lists the interface functions of the 5342A using the terminology of IEEE Standard
488-1975 (Appendix C). Interface functions provide the means for a device to receive, process,
and send messages over the HP-19, Procedures for verification of proper operation of Option 011
HP-IB are contained in paragraphs 4-19 through 4-26.
Table 3-1. HP-/B Interface Capabilitv.
Interface Function
Subset Identifier
Interface Function Description
SH1
Complete source handshake capability.
AH1
Complete acceptor handshake capability.
T1
Talker (basic talker, serial poll, talk only mode, does not unaddress to talk if
addressed to listen).
L2
Listener (basic listener, no listen only mode, doe not unaddress to listen if
addressed to talk),
SRI
Service request capability.
RL1
Complete
remote/local
capability.
PP0
No parallel poll capability.
DCI
Device clear capability.
DT1
Device Trigger capability.
C0
No controller capability.
E1
One unit load.
3-71. There are 12 basic messages which can be sent over the interface. Table 3-2 lists each bus
message, a description of the message, how the 5342A uses that message, and examples of 9825A
implementation of the messages.
3-72. The 5342A must be assigned a bus address. Table 3-3 gives the allowable address switch
settings.
3-73. Table 3-4 gives the program code set for the 5342A, Frequency and amplitude mode ,
selection, manual center frequency setting, frequency and amplitude offset mode selection, frequency and amplitude offset setting, resolution selection, range selection, FM/CW mode selection, and automatic offsets are all analogous to the corresponding front panel operations
described previously.
3-74. There are four sample rate modes T0-T3. In T0, the sample rate is determined by the
setting of the front panel SAMPLE RATE control, In T1, the counter is in hold. To trigger a measurement, a trigger message must be sent. In T2, the counter ignores any sample rate run-down
and initiates a new measurement as soon as the previous measurement is over. In T3, the counter
takes a measurement and holds until the next T3 or trigger message.
3-19
Model 5342A
Operation
Table 3-2. 5342A Bus Message Usage
Description
5342A Use
Data
Transfers device-dependent
information from one device to
one or more devices on the bus.
Sends measurement data. See
paragraph 3-77 for output
format. Accepts program codes.
See Table 3-4 for code set.
Causes a group of selected
devices to simultaneously
initiate a set of devicedependent actions
Starts a new measurement.
trg 7 o r
trg 702
Clear
Causes an instrument to be set to
a predefined state (a certain
range, function, etc.).
Same as front panel RESET.
Clears internal count and starts
new measurement.
clr 7 or
clr 702
Remote
Permits selected devices to be
set to remote operation, allowing parameters and device characteristics to be controlled by
Bus Messages.
5342A goes to remote if REN is
true and addressed to listen. In
absence of program data, remote operation is according to
the state of the front panel settings just prior to going to
remote.
Causes selected devices to return to local (front panel)
operation.
Goes to local front panel control. In absence of front panel
data, local operation is according to the state of the remote
data just prior to going to local.
Trigger
Local
Disables local (front panel)
Local
Lockout controls of selected devices.
Returns all devices to local (front
Clear
Lockout panel) control and simultaand local neously clears the Local Lockout
Message,
red 702, A
wrt 702, “AUSR4”
rem 702
IcI 702
Disables front panel RESET.
5342A remains in remote.
llo7
Local lockout cleared and returns to local front panel control
Icl 7
Require
Service
Indicates a device’s need for
interaction with the controller.
Pulls on SRQ to indicate end of a
measurement.
rds(7)-A
if bit (7, A)
(bit 7=1 if SRQ true)
Status
Byte
Presents status information of a
particular device; one bit indicates whether or not the device
currently requires service, the
other 7 bits (optional) are
used to indicate the type of
service required.
In serial poll mode, 5342A outputs decimal 80 (01010000) to
indicate end of measurement,
rds (702)-A
(if A=80, then 5342A is
ready to output)
Status Bit A single bit of device-dependent
status information which may be
logically combined with status
bit information from other devices by the controller.
3-20
Sample 9825 Statements
(5342A set to Address 02)
Message
Pass
Control
Passes bus controller responsibilities from the current controller to a device which can
assume the Bus supervisory role.
Abort
Unconditionally terminates Bus
communications and returns
control to the system controller.
Does not use
Does not use
Clears Talk, Listen, Serial Poll
Enable registers on 5342A HP-IB
interface. Front panel annunciators do not change, however,
cli 7
Model 5342A
Operation
Table 3-3. Address Selection
3-21
Model 5342A
Operation
Table 3-4. Option 011 HP-IB Program Code Set
3-22
Model 5342A
Operation
Table 3-4. Option 011 HP-IR Program Code Set (Continued)
3-75. ln the“output only when addressed” mode, the counter pulls SRQ at the end of a measurement and then checks to see if it has been addressed to talk, If not, SRQ is cleared and it starts
the next measurement. If it has been addressed to talk, it outputs the measurement, clears SRQ,
and-starts the next measurement. In the “wait until addressed” output mode, the counter pulls
SRQ at the end of a measurement and waits in a loop until it has been addressed to talk. When it is
addressed to talk, it outputs the measurement, clear SRQ and starts the next measurement,
NOTE
[f the counter is placed in the HOLD (T1) mode,
triggered, then addressed to talk, be sure to use the
Wait Until Addressed (ST2) output mode. If not, then
for short gate times the measurement may be completed before the controller addresses the counter to
talk and the counter will discard the measurement
result and hang up the bus.
3-76. The 5342A executes each complete program code as it is received just as if the microprocessor were receiving the data from the front panel keyboard, Program code strings should
be in the same order as they would be if being entered from the front panel. When a data byte is
sent to the 5342A HP-IB Option 011, the HP-IB interface stores the byte and sends an interrupt to
the microprocessor which reads in the byte. If the byte does not complete a program code, then
the microprocessor waits for the next byte(s) until a complete code is sent (for example, SR5 is a
complete code but SR is not). After a complete code is received, the microprocessor executes the
code and begins the measurement. If more codes are in the string, another interrupt is generated. For example, if the string “SR5AU” is sent by the controller, the “S” is the first byte received
and stored by the 5342A HP-IB interface. The interface generates an interrupt to the microprocessor and the “S” is read by the MPU. Since S is not a complete code, the microprocessor
3-23
Model 5342A
Operation
waits until the complete code is sent and received. After “R” and then “5” are sent, the microprocessor sets the resolution accordingly and then goes to the beginning of the measurement.
When the controller sends “A”, an interrupt is generated and “A” is read by the microprocessor.
It then waits for the complete code to be sent which in this case is “AU”. The microprocessor
again goes to the start of the measurement cycle.
Table 1-1.
paragraph 3-82.
3-77.
3-78.
3-24
Model 5342A
Operation
3-79. 9825A PROGRAM EXAMPLES
3-80. The following 9825A program examples are illustrative of 5342A programming:
EXAMPLE 1
This program assumes the range switch was set to 0.5-18 GHz
before the program was executed. The program puts the
5342A in AUTO, 10 kHz resolution, HOLD, and “wait until
addressed” output mode. Program takes a measurement
(trg 702) and reads it into the A register. After waiting 500 ms,
the program loops back to the next trigger, then read
statement.
EXAMPLE 2
This program also assumes the range switch was previously
set to the 0.5-18 GHz position. The program puts the counter
in AUTO mode, 10 Hz resolution, fast sample, and “only if
addressed” output mode. The program takes a measurement,
unaddressed the 5342A as a talker (cmd 7, “-”) so that the
counter will continue making measurements at a fast rate,
and waits 500 ms until reading the next measurement.
EXAMPLE 3
This program sets a manual center frequency of 10 GHz
(input frequency = 10.03 GHz), 1 Hz resolution, 0.5-18 GHz
range, FM mode, front panel sample rate control, and “output only if addressed”. Each reading is printed on the 9825A
printer.
3-25
Model 5342A
Operation
EXAMPLE 4
This program selects AUTO mode, 1 Hz resolution, fast
sample, “output only if addressed”, and amplitude “on”. The
frequency is read into the A register and -the amplitude is
read into the B register. Notice that although the frequency
is displayed only to 1 MHz resolution on the counter, the full
1 Hz resolution is output to the calculator.
EXAMPLE 5
This program measures the same signal as in (4) but enters
a -10 dB offset in the amplitude measurement.
3-26
Model 5342A
Operation
EXAMPLE 6
This is the same program as (5) but with a +10 GHz offset.
3-27
Model 5342A
operation
3-81.
3-82.
a.
b.
c.
d.
HP-IB PROGRAMMING NOTES
The HP-IB output is affected by input signal level as follows:
For input signal levels greater than or equal to specified sensitivity, the 5342A outputs
measurement data as described in paragraph 3-77.
For input signal levels less than the actual sensitivity by 0.1 dB or more (or for no input),
the counter outputs zeros when addressed to talk.
For input signal levels just on the edge of the ccunter’s actual sensitivity (approximately a ,
0.1 dB band) the detectors which indicate sufficient signal level for counting may become
intermittent resulting in very long acquisition times. The counter’s display holds the
previous reading during the prolonged acquisition but the counter will not output any
data when addressed to talk. This will hang up the program at the read statement.
With the 9825A, use the “time” statement and “on err” statement to branch around the
read statement if it takes longer than a specified number of milliseconds to complete an
1/0 operation. The following example program can be used when there is more than one .
read statement in the program. If there is only one read statement, then statement 2
could be deleted and the end of statement 7 could simply cause the program to go to the
statement after the read (in this case, “gto 6“):
Since this statement is in line 2, the
program jumps to the statement after
the read statement.
Error 4 is time out error. Reset time
and error jump.
When the 5342A took more time than
1 second to make the measurement,
zeroes are output.
3-28
Model 5342A
Operation
NOTE
For any controller, check SRQ to see if a measurement has been completed.
Allow an adequate
number of iterations on the SRC) check to permit the
counter to complete the measurement and pull SRQ.
A flow diagram of such an algorithm is:
3-29
Model 5342A
Operation
3-83. REMOTE PROGRAMMING OF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 6
(OPTION 002,011 ONLY)
3-84. In some system applications, it may be desirable to program the 5342A to diagnostic mode
6 so that the counter will constantly present a low SWR and not switch to frequency measurements (higher SWR). The following example shows how this may be done:
EXAMPLE
—
Program counter for AMPL mode
.
This sets the counter to diagnostic mode 6
Counter must be triggered to enter
‘diagnostic mode 6. For 5 seconds,
counter does not switch to frequency.
This resets the counter to amplitude and
frequency measurements
3-30
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
SECTION IV
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-1. INTRODUCTION
4-2. The procedures in this section test the electrical performance of the 5342A using the specifications in Table 1-1 as performance standards. Those specifications which are inherent to the
design (obvious during operation) are not covered in these tests. For example, worst case acquisition time is determined by the period of the sweep and the length of the pseudo-random
sequence. If the counter acquires the signal, it must have acquired it in a time less than specified.
4-3. OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION
4-4. The abbreviated checks given in paragraphs 4-12 through 4-18 can be performed to give a
high degree of confidence that the 5342A is operating properly without performing the complete
performance test. The operational verification should be useful for incoming QA, routine
maintenance, and after instrument repair. The Option 011 HP-IB Verification Program is
described in paragraphs 4-19 through 4-26. The Option 004 DAC test is contained in paragraph 4-27.
4-5. COMPLETE PERFORMANCE TEST
4-6. The complete performance test is given in paragraphs 4-28 through 4-40. All tests can be
performed without access to the inside of the instrument.
4-7. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
4-8. Equipment required for the complete test and operation verification is listed in Table 1-4.
Any equipment which satisfies the critical specifications given in the table may be substituted for
the recommended model numbers.
4-9. TEST RECORD
4-10. Results of the operational verification may be tabulated on the Operational Verification
Record, Table 4-1. Results of the performance test may be tabulated on the Performance Test
Record, Table 4-5.
4-1
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-11.
4-12.
OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION PROCEDURES
Self-Check
a.,
Select 1 Hz resolution, AUTO mode, and 500 MHz—18 GHz range. Set self-check mode
and verify counter displays 75.000000 MHz ±1 count.
b.
Set 5342A to 10 Hz—500 MHz range. Connect rear panel FREQ STD OUTPUT to front
panel BNC input. Select 50 impedance. Verify that the 5342A counts 10.000000 MHz ±1
count.
4-13. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input Sensitivity Test,
Instruments
Only)
/1
(Standard and Option 003
Setup:
Set the 5342A to 10 Hz—500 MHz range and 500.
Set 8620C to 10 MHz and a level of -19.3dBm (25 mV rms) as measured on
the 436A Power Meter. Measure actual sensitivity and verify that the
5342A counts at 10 MHz, 100 MHz, 520 MHz, and record on operational
verification record (Table 4-1).
Disconnect 11667A and connect 8481A directly to 86222A output. Set
8620C to 25 MHz at a level of -19.3 dBm (25 mV rms).
.
Disconnect 8481A from 86222A output. Switch 5342A to the 1 Mfl
position. Connect 86222A output to 5342A 10 Hz—500 MHz input
(86222A supplies 25 mV rms into 50fl or 50 mV rms into 1 Mfl).
.
Verify that the 5342A counts 25 MHz at 50 mV rms and record on operational verification record (Table 4-1).
4-2
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-14. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input (500) Minimum Level and Amplitude Accuracy Test (Option 002)
±1.5 dB accuracy for frequencies from 10 MHz to 520 MHz.
Specification:
Minimum Level: -17 dBm.
Setup:
●
Connect the 11667A directly (using type N to BNC adapter) to the 5342A
BNC low frequency input. Connect 8481A directly to the other 11667A
output.
●
Set the 5342A to 10 Hz-500 MHz range, 50Q, and amplitude mode.
●
Set the 86222A to 10 MHz and adjust output level and 8495B for a level of
-17 dBm as measured on the 436A Power Meter. (8495B set to 10 dB or
greater.) Slowly vary the 8620C from 10 Hz to 520 MHz and verify that the
5342A displays correct frequency.
●
Take a measurement at 10 MHz, 100 MHz, and 520 MHz, and verify that
5342A reading is within ±1.5 dB of 436A reading. Enter results on operational verification record (Table 4-1).
4-3
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-15. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input (50Q) Maximum Input Test (Option 002)
+20 dBm
Specification:
Setup:
4-4
●
Set the 8495B to 10 dB,
●
Set the 3312A to 13 MHz sine wave with AMPLITUDE set to 10. Adjust
amplitude vernier for a +15 dBm output level (+5 dBm on 436A).
●
Set the 5342A to AMPL mode, 50Q, 10 Hz—500 MHz range and connect
the 3312A output to the 5342A input. Increase the 3312A output until
the 5342A measures +20 dBm.
●
Disconnect output of 3312A from 5342A and connect it to 8495B. Power
meter should display +10 dBm ±1.5dB (allowing for the + 10 dB of 8495 B).
Enter on operational verification record (Table 4-1).
●
Reconnect 3312A to 5342A and increase power output until 5342A
“dashes” the display to indicate overload. This must occur at a level
greater than +20 dBm. Enter on operational verification record.
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-16. 500 MHz—18 GHz Input Sensitivity Test (Standard and Option 003 Instruments Only)
Sensitivity = -25 dBm, 500 MHz-12.4 GHz
= -20 dBm, 12.4 GHz-18 GHz.
Specification:
For Option 003:
Sensitivity = -22 dBm, 500 MHz-12.4 GHz
= -15 dBm, 12.4 GHz-18 GHz.
The 5342A is set to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range and a signal at the rated
sensitivity is applied to the type N connector. The frequency is slowly
varied over the range of 500 MHz to 12.4 GHz and the 5342A is checked
for proper counting. The output level of the test generator is increased to
the second value, the frequency is slowly varied from 12.4 GHz to 18
GHz, and the 5342A checked for proper counting.
Description:
●
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range.
●
Connect the 11667A Power Splitter directly to the 5342A type N connector. Connect the 8481A power sensor directly to the other output port of
the 11667A power splitter.
●
Set the 8620C with the appropriate plug-in (86222A for 500 MHz to 2 GHz,
86290A for 2 GHz-18 GHz) and the 8495B step attenuator to the rated
sensitivity as measured on the 436A. Remember that the 5342A with
Option 003 has different specifications.
●
Slowly increase the 8620C frequency over the range and verify that the
5342A counts properly.
●
Measure actual sensitivity at 1 GHz,12.4GHz, and 18GHz. Enter on operational verification record (Table 4-1).
4-5
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-17. 500 MHz-18 GHz Input Minimum Level and Amplitude Accuracy Test (Option 002)
dB accuracy for frequencies from 500 MHz to 18 GHz.
Minimum level:
-22 dBm 500 MHz-12.4 GHz
-15 dBm 12.4 GHz-18 GHz
±1.5
Specification:
Description:
A signal at the minimum level is applied to the 5342A and 436A power
meter and is varied over the frequency range. The amplitude reading of
the 5342A is compared to the 436A Power Meter (calibration factor
included).
Setup:
4-6
●
Connect the 11667A directly to the 5342A type N connector and connect
the 8481A directly to the other 11667A output.
●
Set the 8620C at 500 MHz and adjust the output level and the step
attenuator for -22 dBm as measured on the 436A Power Meter.
●
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range and select amplitude mode.
Slowly vary the 8620A up to 12.4 GHz and verify correct 5342A display.
●
Take measurements at 1 GHz and 12.4 GHz. Verify that the 436A reading
is within ±1.5 dB of the 5342A reading. (Be sure to change the 436A calibration factor with frequency.) Record difference between 436A and
5342A readings on verification record,
●
Set the 8620C to 12.4 GHz and adjust the output level to -15 dBm as
measured on the 436A Power Meter. Slowly vary the 8620C up to 18GHz
and verify correct 5342A display.
●
Take a measurement at 18 GHz and verify that the 5342A is within ±1.5 dB
of the 436A reading (be sure to adjust 436A calibration factor). Record
difference between 436A and 5342A readings on verification record
(Table 4-1).
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-18. 500 MHz-18 GHz High Level Test
For Standard Instrument:
Set the 8620C to 1 GHz at +5.0 dBm as measured by the 436A Power
Meter. Connect the 8620C output to the 5342A and verify that the
counter counts 1 GHz.
Increase the level of the 8620C output until the counter’s display fills with
dashes. Measure this level on the 436A and verify that it is greater than
+5 dBm. Enter on verification record (Table 4-1).
.
For Option 002 Instruments:
Set 5342A to 500 MHz-18 GHz range and AMPL mode.
Set the 8620C to 1 GHz at a level of +10 dBm as measured on the 436A.
Connect the 8620C output to the 5342A and verify that the 5342A counts
1 GHz. Enter difference between 5342A and 436A readings on verification record (Table 4-1).
4-19.
OPTION 011 HP-IB VERIFICATION PROGRAM
4-20. The 9825A program listed in Table 4-2 exercises the 5342A through various operating
modes, described below, via its HP-IB Interface. If the 5342A successfully completes all phases of
the verification program, then there is a high probability that the HP-IB Interface (A15 assembly)
is working properly. If the 5342A does not respond as described, refer to HP-IB troubleshooting
in Section VIII.
NOTE
Prior to conducting the performance test, check the
A15 board revision letter (adjacent to the board part
number). If the revision letter is D or later, check the
LSRQ line to pin 13 to be sure the jumper is installed
as shown in Figure 8-38.
4-7
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-21. To perform the verification, set up the 5342A as shown and set its rear panel address
switches to address 07.
4-22. The program listed in Table 4-2 may be keyed into the 9825A or may be loaded from a
HP-IB Verification Cassette, HP P/N 59300-10001, (Revision B or Iater] which also contains HP-IB
verification programs for the 59300 series of instruments. To run the program on the cassette,
insert the cassette into the 9825A, load file 0, and press RUN. Enter “5342” when the instrument
mode number is requested and select code “707” when select code is requested. The 9825A will
then load the 5342A verification program into memory.
4-23. Apply power to the 5342A and verify that the counter powers up in AUTO mode and
REMOTE off. Verify that when the range switch is placed in the 10 Hz-500 MHz position and
impedance select to 50
the counter counts its 10 MHz time base.
4-24. The program goes through 14 check points for the standard instrument and an additional
4 check points for the amplitude option (002). The information in Table 4-3 tells what occurs
during each test and what should be observed by the operator if the test has been successfully
completed. At the conclusion of each test, the program stops and displays the current check
point. To advance to the next test, simply press CONTINUE. If it is desired to repeat a test, set the
variable Lto 1 via the keyboard (1--L EXECUTE), To go on to the next test after looping, set L back
to when the program halts
L (EXECUTE). Record on operational verification record
(Table 4-1).
4-25. When the 9825A displays “AMPL OPT?” at the end of check point 14, enter “YES” if the
5342A has Option 002. Enter “NO” if the amplitude option is not present.
4-26. Table 4-4 is a sample printout from the 9825A.
4-8
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-1.
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-26
4-27
4-9
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-2. Model 9825A Program
4-10
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-2. Model 9825A Program (Continued)
4-11
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-2. Model 9825A Program (Continued)
4-12
Model 5342A
performance Tests
Table 4-3. Model 9825A Program Description
CHECK POINT
TEST
OBSERVE ON 5342A
1
Remote
2
Manual/Auto
3
Frequency OffsetOn/OFF
Front panel OFS (MHz) should light for approximately
5 seconds then go off.
4
Range - Low/High
The counter should display 10 MHz for approximately
5 seconds and then all O’s (high range - no input).
5
FM mode - On/Off
Front panel asterisk should light for approximately
5 seconds.
6
Resolution 1 Hz to 1 MHz
The counter should display the 75 MHz check frequency
with resolution from 1 Hz to 1 MHz. Each beep from
calculator decreases resolution by one decade. There
is approximately a 2-second wait between each change.
7
Set Manual Center
Frequency
When the 9825A displays X?, enter a manual center
frequency in MHz, no decimal points between 500 (MHz)
and 18000 (MHz). Press CONTINUE. Verify that the
counter was set to this manual center frequency by
pressing RESET, RECALL, MANUAL. For example, if
12345 is entered (12.345 GHz manual frequency), then
12.345 GHz should be displayed by the counter when
the manual center frequency is recalled.
8
Set Offset Frequency
9
Talk
The 9825A should print 75 MHz, which is the output of
the 5342A in check mode. The 5342A RECALL light should
flash on during output, indicating that it has been
addressed as a talker.
10
Sample Rate - Hold,
Front Panel Control,
Fast Sample,
Sample and Hold
In the first part of the test, the 5342A is placed in HOLD
and a trg 722 is executed. For each beep of the calculator,
observe that the 5342A GATE lights. After the second
measurement, the 5342A is programmed for front panel
control. Vary the front panel sample rate pot and
observe the change in GATE delay. Press CONTINUE
and the 5342A is programmed for fast sample. Verify
that the front panel pot has no effect and that there is
minimum time between measurements. Press
CONTINUE and the 5342A is programmed for sample
and HOLD. Before each beep from the 9825A, the 5342A
is sent T3 which takes one measurement and holds.
Front panel REMOTE should light.
Front panel MANUAL should light for approximately
5 seconds (AUTO goes off for 5 seconds). At conclusion
of test, AUTO light should be on.
When the 9825A displays X?, enter a frequency offset in
MHz, decimal points allowed, Press CONTINUE. Verify
that the counter was set to this frequency offset by
pressing RESET, RECALL, OFS (MHz). For example, if
12345.678987 is entered, then 12.345678987 GHz should
be displayed by the counter when the fequency offset
is recalled.
4-13
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-3. Model 9825A Program Description (Continued)
OBSERVE ON 5342A
CHECK POINT
TEST
11
Only If/Wait
Until Addressed
At the start of this test, the 5342A is placed in the ONLY
IF addressed mode. The GATE light should continually
light, indicating that measurements are continually
being made until the 5342A is addressed to talk. The
counter is addressed to talk and the value is printed,
The counter is then placed in WAIT UNTIL addressed,
The GATE light should go out after the first measurement and remain out, indicating that the first measurement is being saved until the counter is addressed to
talk. It is then addressed to talk and the value is printed
by the printer,
12
Status Byte
The 5342A is put in HOLD and serial poll mode. Its
status byte is displayed by the 9825A. After approximately 5 seconds, the 5342A is triggered and a measurement is taken. The status byte displayed by the 9825A
should change from O to 80, indicating that the 5342A
has taken a measurement.
13
Go To Local
LCL 722 is issued. The front panel REMOTE light should
go off.
14
Local Lockout
The 5342A is returned to remote control and the local
lockout command is issued, When the 9825A displays
“press CONTINUE”, press RESET on the 5342A and
verify that the counter remains in REMOTE. Press
CONTINUE on the 9825A and Icl 7 is issued. Verify that
the 5342A goes to local.
AMPL
OPTION 002:
1
Amplitude-On/Off
Front panel AMPL should light for approximately 5
seconds and then of off.
2
Amplitude Offset-
Front panel OFS (dB) should light for approximately
5 seconds and then go off.
On/Off
4-14
3
Set Amplitude
Offset
When the 9825A displays X?, enter an amplitude offset
in dB in the range of -99.9 to +99.9. Press CONTINUE.
Verify that the 5342A was set to this offset by pressing
RESET, RECALL, OFS (dB).
4
AMPL Output
The 5342A is placed in amplitude mode and addressed
to talk, Verify proper output format as given in sample
printout in Tab/e 4-4.
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-4. Sample Printout
4-15
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-27. DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER (DAC) OUTPUT TEST (OPTION 004)
Accuracy = ±5 mV, ±0.3 mV/°C (from 25°C).
Specification:
The 5342A is set to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range and a 999 MHz signal is
applied to the type N connector. A DVM is connected to the DAC OUT
connector on the rear panel. The front panel keyboard is used to select
digits 999 and the DVM observed for an indication of 9.99 volts dc. Then
the 000 digits are selected and the DVM observed for 0 volts dc.
Description:
Setup:
●
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range, AUTO mode.
●
Connect DVM to DAC OUT, set DVM to 20V range.
●
Set the generator to 999 MHz as indicated on 5342A display.
●
On 5342A keyboard, press:
●
Observe DMV for indication of 9.99 ±0.01. Enter on operational verification record (Table 4-7).
4-16
●
On 5342A keyboard, press:
●
Observe DVM for 0 ±0.01. Enter on operational verification record.
●
On 5342A keyboard, press:
●
Observe DVM for 9.00 ±0.01. Enter on performance test record.
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-28. PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURES
4-29. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input Sensitivity Test, 500 (Standard and Option 003 Instruments Only)
Specification:
50
position, sensitivity = 25 mV rms for frequencies from 10 Hz-520
MHz.
Description:
The 5342A is set to the 10 Hz-500 MHz range and a signal at the rated
sensitivity is applied to the BNC input. The frequency is slowly swept up
to 10 MHz at constant level and the 5342A reading is checked for the
proper count. For the range of 10 MHz to 520 MHz, a different generator
is used. For Option 002, sensitivity is tested in paragraph 4-37.
Setup:
a. 10 Hz—10 MHz
●
Set 651B to 10 Hz and 25 mV rms.
●
Increase the frequency of the 651B and verify that the 5342A counts
proper frequency from 10 Hz to 10 MHz.
●
Measure actual sensitivity by decreasing the 651B level until the 5342A
gives an unstable count at these frequencies: 10 Hz, 1 kHz, 500 kHz,
5 MHz, 10 MHz. Enter on performance test record (Table 4-1).
b. 10 MHz-520 MHz
●
5342A settings remain unchanged.
●
Set 436A power meter for AUTO range and dBm mode.
●
Set the 86222A for INT leveling and adjust the output power level for a
436A reading of -19.3 dBm (25 mV rms into 500).
●
Increase the frequency of the 8620C over the range of 10 MHz to 520
MHz and verify that the 5342A counts proper frequency. Use 436A to
verify input power.
●
Measure actual sensitivity at 50 MHz, 250 MHz, 520 MHz, and enter on
performance test record (Table 4-5).
4-17
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-30. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input Sensitivity Test, 1M
1 M
position, sensitivity = 50 mV rms for frequencies from 10 Hz25 MHz.
Specifications:
Setup:
a. 10 Hz-10 MHz
●
Set the 651B to 10 Hz and adjust level for 141 mV p-p signal (50 mV rms).
●
Increase the frequency of the 651B and verify that the 5342A counts
proper frequency from 10 Hz to 10 MHz.
●
Measure actual sensitivity at 10Hz, 1kHz, 500kHz,5MHz, and 10MHz by
monitoring p-p voltage on oscilloscope. Enter on performance test
record (Table 4-5).
b. 10 MHz-25 MHz
4-18
●
5342A settings remain unchanged.
●
Adjust 86222A output for a 141 mV p-p (50 mV rms) reading on the 1740A.
●
Increase the frequency of the 8620C from 10 MHz-25 MHz and verify
that the counter counts properly. Monitor the output level on the oscilloscope for 141 mV p-p (50 mV rms) over the range.
●
Measure actual sensitivity at 15 MHz, 25 MHz, and enter on performance
test record (Table 4-5).
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-31. 500 MHz-18 GHz Input Sensitivity Test (Standard and Option 003 Instruments Only)
Sensitivity = -25 dBm, 500 MHz-12.4 GHz
= -20 dBm, 12.4 GHz-18 GHz
Specification:
For Option 003:
Sensitivity = -22 dBm, 500 MHz-12.4 GHz
= -15 dBm, 12.4 GHz-18 GHz
The 5342A is set to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range and a signal at the rated
sensitivity is applied to the type N connector. The frequency is slowly
varied over the range of 500 MHz to 12.4 GHz and the 5342A is checked
for proper counting. The output level of the test genertor is increased to
the second value, the frequency is slowly varied from 12.4 GHz to 18
GHz, and the 5342A checked for proper counting. For Option 002,
sensitivity is tested in paragraph 4-37.
Description:
Setup:
●
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range, AUTO mode.
●
Connect the 11667A power splitter directly to the 5342A type N connector. Connect the 8481A power sensor directly to the other output port of
the 11667A power splitter.
●
Set the 8620C with the appropriate plug-in (86222A for 500 MHz to 2GHz,
86290A for 2 GHz-18 GHz) and the 8495B step attenuator to the rated
sensitivity as measured on the 436A. Remember that the 5342A with
Option 003 has different specifications.
●
Slowly increase the 8620C frequency over the range and verify that the
5342A counts properly.
●
Measure actual sensitivity at 500 MHz, 1 GHz, 5 GHz, 10 GHz, 12.4 GHz,
Enter on performance test record
15 GHz, 17 GHz, and 18 GHz.
(Table 4-5).
4-19
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-32. 500 MHz-18 GHz Input SWR Test
Specification:
Option 002:
<2:1 500 MHz-18 GHz (during amplitude measurements)
5:1 500 MHz-18GHz (during frequency measurements)
Option 003:
<5:1 500 MHz-18 GHz
Description:
Using an 8755B Swept Amplitude Analyzer, the return loss of the 5342A
high frequency input is measured over the range of 2GH Z to 18GHz. An
SWR of 2:1 (9.5dB return loss) is worst case for frequencies below 10GHz
and an SWR of 3:1 (6 dB return loss) is worst case for frequencies from 10 GHz-18 GHz. The dual directional coupler outputs the incident power
and reflected power to the 11664A detectors. The 8755B performs the
ratio and displays return loss directly.
Setup:
4-20
<2:1 500MHz-10GHz
<3:1 10 GHz-18 GHz
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
●
Set the 8620C to sweep from 2 GHz to 18 GHz with the FAST vernier set
full clockwise.
●
Set the 86290A to the 2-18GHz band and a power level of approximately
+5 dBm, internally leveled.
●
Set the 8755B for SMOOTHING (ON), OFFSET CAL (ON), DISPLAY (A/R),
THUMBWHEELS (ØØ), scale 5 dB/div. Set the 182T to EXT CAL.
●
To calibrate the 8755B, short (or open) the 11692D coupler output which
feeds the 5342A. Adjust the OFFSET CAL of the A channel to center the
scope display at the center horizontal line of the 182T CRT.
●
Connect 5342A to 11692D coupler and set A channel offset dB on the
8755B to -09. The trace should be below the center line for frequencies
below 10 GHz as shown below. Verify that the return loss is >9.5dB from
2-10 GHz and >6.0 dB from 10-18 GHz (standard instrument). For
Option 003, verify that the return loss is >3.5 dB over the range of 2-18
GHz. Enter the minimum return loss for each range of frequency on the
performance test record (Table 4-5).
FOR AMPLITUDE OPTION, put the 5342A in diagnostic mode 5 (press
SET, SET 5) to prevent switching between the sampler input and the peak
detector input. Measure SWR as described above and verify that for
amplitude measurements, return loss is >9.5 dB for frequencies from 2
GHz-18 GHz. Next put the 5342A in AUTO and frequency only so that
amplitude measurements are not made. Verify that the return loss is >3.5
dB for frequencies from 2-18 GHz (SWR <5:1).
4-21
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-33. 500 MHz-18 GHz Maximum Input Test
+5 dBm (Standard Instrument)
+20 dBm (Options 002, 003)
Specification:
The 5342A display will fill with dashes in an overload condition. The
detecting circuits controlling the “dashing” of the display exhibit
approximately 2 dB hysteresis so that once the threshold is exceeded, the
level must be dropped by approximately 2 dB before the counter will
count again. Consequently, it is critical that in this test the level be
approached from below the +5 dBm limit. Since the sampler response is
greatest near 1 GHz, this test is made at 1 GHz.
Description:
The standard instrument is tested first and then the Option 002 or 003,
(which use a thin film attenuator in front of the sampler to increase the
maximum allowable input to +20 dBm) is tested (if installed).
(Standard Instrument)
Setup:
Set the 8620C to 1 GHz at +5.0 dBm as measured by the 436A Power
Meter. Connect the 8620C output to the 5342A and verify that the
counter counts 1 GHz,
●
4-22
Increase the level of the 8620C output until the counter’s display fills with
dashes, Measure this level on the 436A and verify that it is greater than +5,
dBm, Enter the level (at which the display is dashed) on the performance
test record (Table 4-5).
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
●
For Options 002 003 only:
●
Set the 84956 to 10 dB.
●
Set the 8620C to 1 GHz and connect the 84956 output to the 8481A power
sensor. Adjust the 489A gain control and 86222A gain control for a 489A
output level of +15 dBm (+5 dBm displayed on 436A).
●
Connect the 489A output to the 5342A and verify that the counter counts
1 CHz. Increase the signal level until 5342A (Option 002) displays +20
dBm ±1.5 dB. Enter on performance test record, Reconnect signal to
5342A and increase level until display fills with dashes. This must occur at
a level >+20 dBm. Enter the level (at which the display is dashed) on the
performance test record (Table 4-5), Be sure to add 10 dB to 436A
readings to account for the 8495B attenuator.,
4-23
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-34. FM Tolerance Test
Specification:
20 MHz peak-to-peak (CW mode)
50 MHz peak-to-peak (FM mode)
Description:
The FM tolerance specification indicates the worst case FM deviation
which can be present on a carrier that the counter can acquire and
count. If the deviations are symmetrical about the carrier, then the
counter averages out the deviations and displays the carrier frequency.
A rear panel switch controls the CW mode and FM mode,
In this test, a function generator is used to FM the 8620C and the output is
examined on a spectrum analyzer to measure the peak-to-peak deviation. The amplitude of the modulating waveform is adjusted for a 20
MHz p-p deviation and then a 50 MHz-p-p deviation.
4-24
●
Set 86290A to 4 GHz at -10 dBm.
●
Put 5342A in 500 MHz-18 GHz range and AUTO mode. Observe IF OUT
on the spectrum analyzer. Set 5342A to manual mode to setup peak-topeak deviation,
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
●
Apply modulating signal to EXT FM input on the rear panel of 86290A.
Use a 100 kHz sine wave of sufficient amplitude to give 20 MHz p-p FM
deviation as shown. (Modulating rate for this photo was 100 kHz.) Record
on performance test record (Table 4-5).
●
Switch the counter from manual to AUTO to verify that the counter will
acquire and count the signal.
●
If deviations are symmetrical about center frequency, the 5342A will
average out the deviations and display the 4.0 GHz center frequency.
●
Return the MAN mode, Increase amplitude of modulating waveform to
product a 50 MHz p-p deviation as shown below (fm = 100 kHz). Record
on performance test record (Table 4-5).
●
Switch rear panel switch to FM. Switch counter from MAN to AUTO.
Verify that the counter will acquire and count the signal.
●
If deviations are symmetrical about the center frequency, the 5342A will
average out the deviations and display the 4.0 GHz center frequency. For
this case, the deviation is not symmetrical about the center frequency, To
verify that the counter has passed the test, check that the displayed frequency is within 300 MHz of 4 GHz (if then N number computed is off by
1 due to excessive FM, then the displayed frequency will be off by 300 to
350 MHz).
4-25
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-35. Automatic Amplitude Discrimination Test
Specification:
The 5342A measures the largest of all signals present, providing that the
signal is 6 dB above any signal within 500 MHz; 20 dB above any signal,
500 MHz-18 GHz.
Description:
In this test, two microwave generators are used to provide two signals
into the 5342A. The relative level of the two signals is adjusted to the
specification and the 5342A must count the higher amplitude signal.
Set generator 1 to 18 GHz and at a level to deliver -5 dBm to the 5342A. To
set this level, disconnect generator 2 from the 11667A and terminate that
input port of the 11667A with a 909A (Option 012)
nect the 8481A to the 5342A end of cable A and adjust the 86290A output
fer a -5 dBm reading.
Set generator 2 to 500 MHz and at a level to deliver -25 dBm to the 5342A.
To set this level, disconnect generator 1 from the 11667A input (reconnect generator 2 to 11667A) and terminate the generator 1 input of the
11667A with a 909A 500 termination. Connect the 8481A to the 5342A
end of cable A and adjust 86222A for a -25 dBm reading.
Connect both Generators to the 11667A inputs. Connect cable A to the
5342A. Verify that the 5342A counts 18 GHz. Increase the level of generator 2 until the 5342A counts incorrectly - measure that level (by using
the same procedure described above) and record on test record.
Set generator 1 to 2.5 GHz and at a level to deliver -5 dBm to the 5342A
using the technique described above. Set generator 2 to 2.0 GHz and at a
level to delivery -11 dBm to the 5342A using the technique described
above. Connect both generators to the 11667A and cable A to the 5342A.
Verify that the 5342A counts 2.5 GHz. Increase generator 2 level until
counter counts incorrectly - measure that level and record on test
record (Table 4-5).
4-26
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-36. 500 MHz-18 GHz Input Minimum Level and Amplitude Accuracy Test (Option 002)
±1.5 dB accuracy for frequencies from 500 MHz to 18 GHz
Minimum level:
-22 dBm 500 MHz-12.4 GHz
-15 dBm 12.4 GHz-18 GHz
Specification:
Description:
A signal at the minimum level is applied to the 5342A and 436A Power
Meter and is varied over the frequency range. The amplitude reading of
the 5342A is compared to the 436A Power Meter (calibration factor
included).
●
Connect the 11667A directly to the 5342A type N connector and connect
the 8481A directly to the other 11667A output.
●
Set the 8620C at 500 MHz and adjust the output level and the step attenuator for -22 dBm as measured on the 436A Power Meter (8495B set for at
least 10 dB).
●
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18GHz range and select amplitude mode.
Slowly vary the 8620C up to 12.4 GHz and verify that the 5342A counts
correctly.
●
Take measurements at 500 MHz, 1 GHz, 5 GHz, 10 GHz, 12.4 GHz. Verify
that the 436A reading is within ±1.5 dB of the 5342A reading. (Be sure to
change the 436A calibration factor with frequency. ) At each frequency,
increase level by taking out 10 dB in the 8495B attenuator and verify that
the readings agree within ±1.5 dB. Record the actual 5342A amplitude
readings on the performance test record (Table 4-5).
●
Set the 8620C to 12.4 GHz and adjust the output level to -15 dBm as measured on the 436A Power Meter. Slowly vary the frequency to 18 GHz and
verify that the 5342A counts correctly.
●
Take measurements at 12.4 GHz, 15 GHz, 17 GHz, 18GHz, and verify that
the 5342A is within ±1.5 dB of the 436A reading (be sure to adjust 436A
calibration factor). At each frequency, increase level by reducing 8495B
by 10 dB and verify that readings again agree within ±1.5 dB. Record the
actual amplitude readings on the performance test record (Table
4-5).
4-27
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-37. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input
Minimum Level and Amplitude Accuracy Test (Option 002)
±1.5 dB accuracy for frequencies from 10 MHz to 520 MHz
Minimum Level: -17 dBm.
Specification:
Setup:
●
Connect the 11667 directly (using type N to BNC adapter) to the 5342A
BNC low frequency input. Connect 8481A directly to the other 11667A
output.
●
Set the 5342A to 10 Hz-500 MHz range,
●
Set the 86222A to 10 MHz and adjust output level and 8495B for a level of
-17 dBm as measured on the 436A Power Meter. (84956 set to 10 dB or
greater.)
●
4-28
Take a measurement at 10 MHz, 5 MHz, 100 MHz, 300 MHz, 520 MHz,
and verify that 5342A reading is within ±1.5 dB of 436A reading. At each
frequency, increase level by taking out 10 dB in the 8495B and verify that
readings agree to within ±1.5 dB, Record the actual 5342A amplitude
measurements on the performance test record (Table 4-5).
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-38. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input (50Q) Maximum Input Test (Option 002)
+20 dBm
Specification:
Setup:
●
Set the 8495B to 10 dB.
●
Set the 3312A to 13 MHz sine wave with AMPLITUDE set to 10. Adjust
amplitude vernier for a +15 dBm output level (+5 dBm on 436A).
●
Set the 5342A to AMPL mode, 50fl, 10 Hz-500 MHz range and connect
the 3312A output to the 5342A input. Increase the 3312A output until the
5342A measures +20 dBm.
●
Disconnect output of 3312A from 5342A and connect it to 8495B. Power
meter should display +10 dBm ±1.5 dB (allowing for the +10 dB of 8495 B).
Record on performance test record (Table 4-5).
●
Reconnect 3312A to 5342A and increase power output until 5342A
“dashes” the display to indicate overload. This must occur at a level
greater than +20 dBm. Record this level on performance test record
(Table 4-5).
4-29
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-39. 10 Hz-500 MHz Input (50f2) SWR Test (Option 002)
<1.8:1
Specification:
Using a lower frequency range directional coupler (such as the 778 D),
the test setup described in paragraph 4-13 is used to sweep the low frequency input over the range of 100 MHz to 500MHz and the return loss is
measured. Return loss must be >10.75 dB over the range.
Description:
Setup:
4-30
●
Same as described in paragraph 4-32 except use the 86222A plug-in and
setup to sweep from 100 MHz to 500 MHz. Replace the 11692D Dual
Directional Coupler with the 778D Dual Directional Coupler.
●
Calibrate the system with a short (or open) at the 778D output which
normally feeds the 5342A low frequency input,
●
Set the 5342A to 50Q and diagnostic mode 5 (described in Table 8-8) to
prevent switching between frequency and amplitude measurements.
Verify that the return loss is >10,75 dB, Record on performance test
record (Table 4-5).
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
4-40. Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Output Test (Option 004)
Accuracy = ±5 mV, ±0.3 mV/°C (from 25°C)
Specification:
Description:
The 5342A is set to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range and a 999 MHz signal is
applied to the type N connector. A DVM is connected to the DAC OUT
connector on the rear panel. The front panel keyboard is used to select
digits 999 and the DVM observed for an indication of 9.99 volts dc. Then
the 000 digits are selected the DVM observed for 0 volts dc.
Setup:
●
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range, AUTO mode.
●
Connect DVM to DAC OUT, set DVM to 20V range.
●
Set the generator to 999 MHz as indicated on 5342A display.
●
●
Observe DVM for indication of 9.99 ±0.01. Enter on performance test
record (Table 4-5).
●
On 5342A keyboard, press:
Observe DVM for Ø ± 0.01. Enter on performance test record (Table
4-5).
Observe DVM for 9.00 ±0.01. Enter on performance test record (Table
4-5).,
4-31
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-5. Performance Test Record
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-32
Model 5342A
Performance Tests
Table 4-5. Performance Test Record (Continued)
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-33
Model 5342A
Adjustments
SECTION V
ADJUSTMENTS
5-1.
INTRODUCTION
5-2. This section describes the adjustments required to maintain the 5342A’s operating characteristics within specifications. Adjustments should be made when required, such as after a performance test failure or when components are replaced that may affect an adjustment.
5-3. Table 5-1 is a list of all adjustable components in the 5342A and indicates the order in which
adjustments should be performed.
5-4.
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED
5-5. The test equipment required for the adjustment procedures is listed in Table 1-4, Recommended Test Equipment. Substitute instruments may be used if they meet the critical
specifications.
5-6. FACTORY SELECTED COMPONENTS
5-7. Factory selected components are identified by an asterisk (*) in parts lists and schematic
diagrams. Refer to paragraph 8-36 for replacement information.
5-8.
ADJUSTMENT
LOCATIONS
5-9. Adjustment locations are identified in the component locators in the Section VIII schematic diagrams and in the top view of the instrument, Figure 8-21.
5-10.
SAFETY
CONSIDERATIONS
5-11. This section contains warnings that must be followed for your protection and to avoid
damage to the equipment.
WARNING
MAINTENANCE DESCRIBED HEREIN IS PERFORMED
WITH POWER SUPPLIED TO THE INSTRUMENT,
AND PROTECTIVE COVERS REMOVED. SUCH
MAINTENANCE SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY
SERVICE-TRAINED PERSONNEL WHO ARE AWARE
OF THE HAZARDS INVOLVED (FOR EXAMPLE, FIRE
AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK). WHERE MAINTENANCE
CAN BE PERFORMED WITHOUT POWER APPLIED,
THE POWER SHOULD BE REMOVED.
BEFORE ANY REPAIR IS COMPLETED, ENSURE THAT
ALL SAFETY FEATURES ARE INTACT AND FUNCTIONING, AND THAT ALL NECESSARY PARTS ARE
CONNECTED TO THEIR PROTECTIVE GROUNDING
MEANS.
5-1
Model 5342A
Adjustments
Table 5-1. Adjustment
NAME
REFERENCE
DESIGNATOR
NAME
POWER
Should be done first
in following order:
1. Power Supply
Adjustments
2. Main Synthesizer
Adjustment
A21R27
—
Set frequency of switching
regulator to 20 kHz.
(1)
A21R17
—
Sets reference voltage
against which +5V (D) is
compared.
(2)
A19R5
—
Sets current level at which
shutdown occurs.
(3)
A8R22
—
Sets free-run frequency of
A8 Main VCO.
Can be done anytime
Should be done after
Main Synthesizer
adjustment in follow
ing order:
3. Offset Synthesizer
Adjustments
A4RI
—
Sets free-run frequency of
A4 OFFSET VCO.
(1)
A6R1 , A6R2
—
Set center and extremes of
triangular search waveform
on A6.
(2)
Can be done anytime
in following order:
4. IF Adjustments
5. Direct Count
Adjustment
5-2
ORDER
Maximizes gain through
A25U2.
(1)
Sets attenuation at 175 MHz
(2)
“AMP”
Maximize gain through
A11U2.
(3)
A12R2
“B1”
Maximize gain through
A12U2.
(4)
A12R12
“B2”
Maximize gain through
A12U4.
(5)
A12R7
“OFS”
Sets level detector so counter counts 1 GHz, -130 dBm.
(6)
A25R31
(Standard)
“OFST”
Adjust detector to dash
5342A display at overload.
(7)
A11R14,
A25R31
(Option 002)
“DET”
“OFST”
Adjust detector to take out
attenuation when input level
drops. For Option 002 only.
(8)
A3R8
—
A25R28
“BAL”
A25C11
—
A11R1
Adjust for maximum
sensitivity.
Can be done anytime
Model 5342A
Adjustments
Table 5-1. Adjustment (Continued)
NAME
REFERENCE
DESIGNATOR
NAME
6. Amplitude
Adjustments
(Option 002)
ORDER
Can be done anytime in following
order:
(1)
A16R21
—
Adjusts reference voltage to
3.200 volts for ADC on A16.
A16R29
—
Adjust loop gain. Set the voltage into the ADC for a specified
level of 100 kHz.
(2)
A16R26
—
Adjust dc offset. Set the voltage
into the ADC for a specified
level of 100 kHz.
(3)
A27R9
“CAL”
Adjusts the output of the
100 kHz detector on A27.
(4)
A27R10
7. Digital-toAnalog (DAC)
Adjustments
(Option 004)
PURPOSE
“High Level Cal’’Adjusts the output of the
100 kHz detector on A27 for
high levels.
A2R25
GAIN
A2R27
OFFSET
(5)
Adjust maximum (9.99V) DAC Can be done
anytime
output.
Adjusts minimum (0V) DAC
output.
5-12. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
5-13. Power Supply Adjustments
5-14. Adjust resistor A21R27 (20 kHz frequency) as follows:
a.
Place A21 on extender board. Monitor A21TP2 with an oscilloscope.
b.
Adjust A21R27 (bottom, right side pot) for a 50 µS ±1 µs period as shown:
c.
Replace A21 in instrument,
5-3
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-15. Adjust resistor A21R17, +5V (D) as follows:
With a 3465A Multimeter in the DAC VOLTS FUNCTION and 20V range, measure the dc
voltage of the -5.2V supply at XA21(5,5). Adjust A21 R17 for a -5.20 (-0.1, +0.05)V dc.
WARNING
PRIOR TO MAKING ANY VOLTAGE TESTS ON THE
A19 PRIMARY POWER ASSEMBLY, THE VOLTMETER
TO BE USED OR THE 5342A MUST BE ISOLATED
FROM THE POWER MAINS BY USE OF AN lSOLATION TRANSFORMER. A TRANSFORMER SUCH AS
AN ALLIED ELECTRONICS, 705-0084 (120V AC) MAY
BE USED FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT THE
TRANSFORMER BETWEEN THE AC POWER SOURCE
AND THE AC POWER INPUT TO THE 5342A.
5-16. Adjust resistor A19R5 (over-current threshold) as follows:
a.
Put A19 on extender board.
b. Apply power to 5342A via the isolation transformer.
c. Connect scope probe to A19TPJ and scope probe ground to A19TPG.
d. Adjust A19R5 for -1 volt amplitude on trailing edge of pulse as shown:
e.
Momentarily short +5V TP on A17 to ground. Observe red LED on A21 turn on and green
LED on A20 turn off for approximately 2 seconds.
f.
Remove isolation transformer and replace A19.
5-17. Main Synthesizer Adjustment
5-18. Adjust resistor A8R22 (Main VCO free-run frequency) as follows:
a.
Put 5342A in 10 Hz—500 MHz range,
the other, connect XA5(10), the Main OSC signal, to the direct count input of the 5342A
and measure the main VCO frequency,
b. With a clip lead, ground A9TP1.
c.
Adjust A8R22 for a 325 (±2) MHz reading.
d. Remove ground on A9TP1.
5-4
-
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-19.
Offset Synthesizer Adjustments
5-20.
Offset Synthesizer adjustments are made on assemblies A4 and A6 as follows:
a.
b.
5-21.
Adjust A4RI (Offset VCO free-run frequency) as follows:
1.
Put 5342A in 10 Hz-500 MHz range, 50Q. Using cable with BNC on one end, clip
leads on the other, connect XA4(10), the Offset OSC signal, to the direct count
input of the 5342A and measure the Offset VCO frequency.
2.
With a clip lead, ground A6TP1.
3.
Adjust A4RI for a 325 (±2) MHz reading.
4.
Remove ground on A6TP1.
Adjust A6R1, A6R2 (search sweep) as follows:
1.
Remove the A7 Assembly from the 5342A.
2.
Connect scope probe to A6TP1.
3.
Adjust A6R1 and A6R2 to obtain an 8V peak-to-peak (±0.8V) triangular waveform, centered around 0V, as shown. When adjusted properly, the period will be
7.5 (±2) ms,
IF Adjustment
5-22. Adjust resistor A25R28 (Preamp Gain) by connecting the equipment as shown below and
perform step a.
a.
Set 8620C to 75 MHz at -15 dBm. While monitoring the rear panel IF OUT power with the
436A Power Meter, adjust A25R28 “BAL” for maximum signal level as read on the 436A.
5-5
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-23. Adjust capacitor A25C11 (175 MHz rolloff) by connecting the equipment as shown below
and proceed:
a.
Set 5342A in AUTO mode, HOLD, and diagnostic mode 7 (SET, SET 7). Counter should
display 350.5 MHz indicating that the MAIN VCO is at 350.5 MHz.
b. Transpose IF OUT INT and IF OUT EXT cables on A25 (cables connected to A25J1 and J2).
This causes the IF output of A25 to be routed to the rear panel connector of the 5342A for
ease in connecting the signal to the spectrum analyzer.
5-6
c.
Set the spectrum analyzer for a center frequency of 100 MHz, 20 MHz/div., 300 kHz BW.
d.
Adjust the frequency of the 86290A (level ˜-15 dBm) for an IF around 10 MHz as seen on
the spectrum analyzer. Now change the 86290A frequency such that the IF increases. As
the IF approaches 175 MHz, the amplitude will roll off. The amplitude at 175 MHz must be
adjusted to be 10 (±1) dB less than the amplitude at 50 MHz (amplitude is essentially flat
from below 1 MHz out to 160 MHz).
e.
To adjust 86290A so that the IF is precisely 175 MHz, increase the 86290A frequency until
the IF produced by the Nth harmonic of the VCO mixing with the input is just equal in
amplitude to the IF produced by the (N±1)th harmonic of the VCO mixing with the input.
Since the VCO harmonics are spaced by 350 MHz, this only occurs when both IF’s are
equal to 175 MHz as seen in the following:
Model 5342A
Adjustments
NOTE
In the following step, needle-nose pliers can be used
to adjust A25C11 in the casting in those cases where
C11 is oriented the wrong way for using a tuning
wand.
f.
Sweep the 86290A over a narrow range so that the IF covers approximately 10 MHz to 200
MHz. Adjust A25C11 so that the response at 175 MHz is 10 (±1) dB down from flat part of
response as shown:
Return IF OUT INT and IF OUT EXT cables to original position.
5-24,
Adjust resistor A11R1 (“Amp” Gain) as follows:
a.
Apply 75 MHz at -20 dBm to 500 MHz-18 GHz input of 5342A.
b.
Monitor the IF LIM signal at XA11(12) with an RF voltmeter such as the 3406A. Adjust
A11R1 for maximum output signal.
5-25.
Adjust resistors A12R2, A12R12 (Gain) as follows:
a.
Connect a 75 MHz, -50 dBm signal to the 500 MHz-18 GHz input to the 5342A.
b.
Monitor the IF COUNT signal at XA12(8) with an RF voltmeter such as the 3406A and
adjust A12R2, “B1”, and A12R12,’’B2’’, for maximum observed output as indicated by the
voltmeter.
5-26.
Adjust resistor A12R7 (Sensitivity) as follows:
a,
Set 5342A to AUTO. Adjust A12R7 maximum ccw.
b.
Apply a 1 GHz, -30 dBm signal to the 500 MHz-18 GHz input of the 5342A,
c.
Set 5342A to MANUAL.
5-7
Model 5342A
Adjustments
d.
Measure the dc voltage at A12TP1 and record
e.
Disconnect the 1 GHz signal from the 5342A input.
f.
Measure the dc voltage at A12TP2 and adjust A12R7, “OFS”, for same voltage as recorded
in step b, within ±5 mV.
g.
Set 5342A to AUTO.
h.
Remove test leads and verify that counter counts 1 GHz at -30 dBm.
5-27.
Adjust resistor A25R31 (overload indication) as follows (Standard 5342A only):
a.
Apply a 1 GHz signal at +6.0 dBm to the 5342A 500 MHz-18 GHz connector.
b.
Turn A25R31 full clockwise (counter should display 1 GHz).
c.
Slowly turn A25R31 “OFST”, counterclockwise until the display of the counter fills with
dashes.
d.
Verify that counter counts 1 GHz, +5 dBm signal
5-28.
Direct Count Adjutment
5-29.
Adjust resistor A3R8 (Balance) as follows:
a.
Set 5342A to 10 Hz-500 MHz range and 50fL
b.
Apply a 1 MHz sine wave signal at a level of 25 mV rms.
c.
Monitor A3TP1 (output of U5) on scope and adjust A3R8 for a 50% duty cycle.
d.
Decrease input level further and adjust A3R8 for 50% duty cycle. Keep decreasing level
and adjusting A3R8 to the point where the counter no longer counts.
l
5-30.
5-31.
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
A24 Standard Oscillator. Adjust the standard oscillator as follows:
a.
Connect the rear panel FREQ STD OUT of the 5342A to the input of a high resolution frequency counter (reciprocal taking) such as an HP 5345A. The 5345A should be referenced
to an external frequency standard such as the HP 5061A Cesium Beam by connecting the
external standard to the external oscillator input of the 5345A.
b.
Remove the A24 oscillator and note the frequency offset marked on the label. If operation of the counter will be over the full temperature range, then the 10 MHz oscillator
must be offset by the marked amount in order to keep the oscillator frequency within the
manufacturer’s temperature specification. For example, if +3.6 Hz is marked on the label,
then the oscillator is adjusted for a frequency of 10.0000036 MHz at 25°C. If operation is
solely at 25°C, then the offset can be ignored.
c.
5-8
Reinstall A24 and adjust the oscillator for a 5345A display of the frequency determined in
step b.
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-32. Option 001 Oven Oscillator (10544A). Adjust the optional oscillator as follows:
NOTE
Allow 24-hour warmup for oven before this adjustment.
a.
Connect reference frequency standard to the external sync input of the oscilloscope.
b.
Connect rear panel FREQ STD OUT of the 5342A to Channel A of the scope.
c.
Adjust oscillator frequency for minimum sideways movement of the 10 MHz displayed
signal.
d.
By timing the sideways movement (in CM per second), the approximate offset can be
determined based on the oscilloscope sweep speed as shown in the following:
For example, if the trace moves 1 centimetre in 10 seconds and the sweep speed is
0.01 µs/cm, the oscillator signal is within 1 X 10-9 of the reference frequency.
5-9
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-33. OPTION 002 AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT ADJUSTMENTS
5-34. A16 Adjustments
5-35.
Adjust resistor R21 (A-to-D converter reference voltage) as follows:
a.
Place 5342A in AMPL mode and diagnostic mode 6 (see Table 8-8),
b.
Connect a DVM (HP 3465A) from test point labeled 3.2V (connects to pin 8 of A16U8) to
the common pin on the board.
c.
Adjust A16R21 (leftmost potentiometer on A16) for a DVM reading of +3.200 (±0.0005)V.
5-36.
a.
Set up equipment as in following diagram:
b.
Set the 5342A to 50, 10 Hz-500 MHz range, AMPL mode, and diagnostic mode 6.
c.
Set the 8601A to 100 MHz at approximately +20 dBm.
d.
With the 3400A measuring the ac voltage from the 100 kHz test point (output of A16U15)
to the common pin on the board, adjust the 8601A output level for an ac voltmeter
reading of 2.24 (±0.005)V rms.
e.
With the 3465A measuring the dc voltage from the VIN test point (A16U8(5)) to the
common pin on the board, adjust A16R29 (the rightmost potentiometer on A16) for a dc
level of 5.02 (±0.01)V dc.
5-37.
5-10
Adjust resistor R29 (Loop Gain) as follows:
Adjust resistor R26 (dc Offset) as follows:
a.
With the same set-up as above, set the 8601A for an output level of approximately
-28 dBm at 100 MHz.
b.
Adjust the 8601A output level for an ac voltage reading at the 100 kHz test point of 8.9
(±0.1) mV rms.
c.
Adjust R26 for a dc voltage reading at the VIN test point of 0.320 (±0.001)V dc.
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-38. A27 Adjustments (Resistors A27R9, A27R10)
a.
Set up the equipment as in the following diagram:
b. Set the 8601A to 10 MHz and, with the output connected to the 8481A, adjust the 8601A
output level for a reading on the 436A of -10.00 (±0.02) dBm.
c.
On the 5342A, press AUTO, SET, SET 6 (for diagnostic mode 6), AMPL. Select 1 MHz resolution. Select 50f2 position and 10 Hz-500 MHz range.
d. Connect the 8601A output to the 10 Hz-500 MHz input of the 5342A.
e.
Adjust A27R9 “CAL” (potentiometer toward front of instrument) so 5342A reads -10.00
(±-0) dBm.
f.
Reconnect 8601A output to 8481A Power Sensor and adjust 8601A output for +20.00
(±0.02) dBm reading on the 436A. Connect 8601A to 5342A.
g.
Adjust A27R10 “High Level Cal” (potentiometer toward rear of instrument) for a 5342A
reading of +20.0 (±0) dBm.
h. Go back to step b and check the 5342A reading so that both levels read correctly. The
“CAL” R9 adjustment affects both levels equally whereas the R10 “High Level Cal” affects
low levels only slightly.
5-11
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-39. OPTION 002/003 ADJUSTMENTS
5-40. All, A25 Adjustments (Resistors A11R14, A25R31)
a.
5-12
Set the equipment as in the following diagram:
b.
Set signal source to 1000 (±5) MHz at a level of +8 (±0.5) dBm as measured on 436A Power
Meter.
c.
Rotate A11R14, “DET”, fully ccw and A25R31, “OFFSET”, fully
d.
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range and AMPL mode,
e.
Connect a scope probe (or dc voltmeter) to the “ATT” test point on A16.
f.
Connect signal source to the 5342A RF input. Observe that the “ATT” test point goes
to approximately 6.5 (± 1.5)V dc. If not, switch RF signal off and back on.
g.
Adjust A25R31 slowly ccw just until “ATT” test point drops to approximately 1 (±1)V dc.
h.
Rotate A11R14 fully
i.
Adjust signal source amplitude to -2 (±0.5) dBm and reconnect to 5342A RF input. “ATT”
test point on A16 should remain at approximately 1 (±1)V dc.
j.
Adjust A11R14 slowly ccw just until “ATT” test point on A16 jumps to approximately
6.5 (±1.5)V dc.
k.
If necessary, repeat adjustment procedures.
CW
CW
.
.
Model 5342A
Adjustments
5-41. OPTION 004 DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG (DAC) ADJUSTMENTS
5-42. Set up the equipment as shown below, and proceed:
a.
Set the 5342A to the 500 MHz-18 GHz range, AUTO mode.
b. Connect DVM to DAC OUT, set DVM to 20V range.
c.
Set the generator to 999 MHz as indicated on 5342A display.
d. On 5342A keyboard, press:
NOTE
The DAC variable resistor adjustments “OFFSET”
(R27) and “GAIN ADJ” (R25) are located at the top
rear of the A2 Display Driver Assembly. Remove the
top cover of the 5342A to gain access to these adjustments located below the top of the front frame.
e.
Adjust “GAIN ADJ” and observe DVM for indication of 9.99 volts, dc.
f.
On 5342A keyboard, press:
g.
Adjust “OFFSET” and observe DVM for 0 volts, dc.
h. Repeat steps d and f and observe DVM for proper indication. Readjust, if necessary.
5-13
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
SECTION VI
REPLACEABLE PARTS
6-1. INTRODUCTION
6-2. This section contains information for ordering parts. Table 6-1 is a list of exchange assemblies, and Table 6-2 lists abbreviations and reference designations used in the parts list and
throughout the manual. Table 6-3 lists all replaceable parts for the standard 5342A in reference
designator order. Tables 6-4,6-5,6-6,6-7, and 6-8 list replaceable parts for Options 001,002,003,
004, and 011, respectively. Table 6-9 contains the names and addresses that correspond to the
manufacturer’s code numbers.
6-3. EXCHANGE ASSEMBLIES
6-4. Table 6-1 lists assemblies within the instrument that may be replaced on an exchange basis.
Exchange factory repaired and tested assemblies are available only on a trade-in basis; therefore,
the defective assemblies must be returned for credit. For this reason. assemblies required for
spare parts stock must be ordered by the new assembly part number.
Table 6-1. Exchange Assemblies
NAME
NEW HP PART NO.
EXCHANGE HP PART NO.
5088-7022
5088-7522
Option 001 Oven Oscillator
10544-60011
10544-60511
Option 002 U2 Multiplexer/
A16U3 PROM — Matched
05342-80005
(consists of matched 5088-7035
and A16U3 PROM)
05342-80505
(consists of matched 5088-7535
and A16U3 PROM)
Option 002 U2 Multiplexer
(must be ordered as matched
part 05342-80505)
5088-7035
5088-7535
Option 003 U2 Attenuator
5088-7038
5088-7538
U1 Sampler
6-5. ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
6-6. Table 6-2 lists abbreviations and reference designations used in the parts list, the schematics
and throughout the manual. In some cases, two forms of the abbreviation are used, one all in
capital letters, and one partial or no capitals. This occurs because the abbreviations in the parts list
are always all capitals. However, in the schematics and other parts of the manual, other abbreviation forms are used with both lower case and upper case letters.
6-1
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-2. Abbreviation and Reference Designations
6-2
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-2. Abbreviations and Reference Designations (Continued)
6-3
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
6-7. REPLACEABLE PARTS LIST
6-8. Tables 6-3 through 6-8 are the lists of replaceable parts and are organized as follows:
a,
Electrical assemblies and their components in alphanumerical order by reference
designation.
b. Chassis-mounted parts in alphanumerical order by reference designation (Table 6-3
only).
c.
Miscellaneous parts,
6-9, The information given for each part consists of the following:
a.
The Hewlett-Packard part number.
b. Part number check digit (CD),
c.
The total quantity (Qty) in each assembly.
d. The description of the part.
e.
A typical manufacturer of the part in a five-digit code.
f.
The manufacturer’s number for the part.
6-10. The total quantity for each assembly is given only once - at the first appearance of the
part number in the list for that assembly (A1, A2, etc.).
NOTE :
6-11. ORDERING INFORMATION *
Parts suppliers
use the following ordering data until a parts manual. is available.
6-12. 10 order a part listed in the replaceable parts table, quote the Hewlett-Packard part
number, the check digit, indicate the quantity required, and address the order to the nearest
Hewlett-Packard office. The check digit will ensure accurate and timely processing of your order.
6-13. To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts table, include the instrument
model number, instrument serial number, the description and function of the part, and the
number of parts required. Address the order to the nearest Hewlett-Packard Office.
6-14. DIRECT MAIL ORDER SYSTEM
6-15. Within the USA, Hewlett-Packard can supply parts through a direct mail order system.
Advantages of using the system are as follows:
a.
Direct ordering and shipment from the HP Parts Center in Mountain View, California.
b. No maximum or minimum on any mail order (there is a minimum order amount for parts
ordered through a local HP office when the orders require billing and invoicing).
c.
Prepaid transportation (there is a small handling charge for each order).
d. No invoices — to provide these advantages, a check or money order must accompany
each order.
6-16. Mail order forms and specific ordering information is available through your HP office.
Addresses and phone numbers are located at the back of this manual.
6-17. OPTION RETROFIT KITS
6-18. To order a retrofit kit for field installation of Options 001, 002, 003, 004, or 011 refer to
paragraph 2-25 for the part number of the option kit,
*Area calibration and repair centers, direct and general. support shops
a r e t o m a k e r e q u s t s f o r p a r t s t h r o u g h t h e l o c a l s u p p l y m i s s i o n . Many of
the raplaceable parts have n a t i o n a l s t o c k n u m b e r s a n d a r e a v a i l a b l e
A complete parts manual is being prepared.
through the supply system.
6-4
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
Mfr
Code
Description
053 U2. bOLIOl
b
1
DISPLAY AS St~EILY (S LRILS 17,?0)
0160 -U256
0160-3879
b
7
1
1
CA PA CITOR-FXO
CA PA C170R-FXO
1990. oun7
19’+0.0487
lQ90-01187
199n. oun7
R
lQf40-0Uf17
7
7
7
7
7
LEC-VISIPLE
LELI-VISIFILE
LED- VI SIf3LE
LED. VI S18LE
LEO-V ISIHLE
AI DSIO
AI OSI!
19 Q0-0UB7
19eo. rJun7
t990-oun7
1’?90-0517
1990. C15U(D
7
7
7
u
3
OSIZ
AI OS13
AI OSIU
AI Ds!5
AI OS16
IQvo. clsuo
1990-0540
199 Q-05U0
1990-0540
19 QQ.05U0
3
Aj0517
AfOSIE
AI DS19
410s?0
Al OS?!
41C!
Ale?
,t7u7uF +-20X 200Vo( ct~
.otuF +-.20% 100VOC CER
LUV-INT=IMCO
LUM-INTSIMCO
LUM.1N7%1MC0
LUw.l UT SIMCn
LuW. IN T* IMco
Mfr Part Number
2nu80
053u2.60001
lb5U6
28080
CW30 8 U73M
Olb O-387q
.? EIU8(I
28480
5082 -u58u
5082 -u58u
5082 -u58U
5082 -u50U
S082. I158U
28U80
2EIu80
284.s0
LED-VISIBLE LIJw-1h7,,M[o
LED-VISIBLE Ll)M-lb T, IMCO
LED-v IsIPLE LuM.lbdrz,Mco
LED-VISIBLE LU”4-Ih T=3hCD
DISPLAV-NUM-SEG l-CHAR .43-H
28U80
28u8o
28u8o
28u90
28u8o
so.5z-usnu
:
3
3
OISPLAV-kUM-SLG
OISPLAY-k UM-SEG
DISPLAY -M LJM-SEG
OISPLAV-tuUM-St G
OISPLAV-NUM-SEG
l-CHAR
1.CHAR
1.CMAR
l-CHAR
1-CH4R
.43-H
.u3-H
,43-H
,u3. H
,43-H
28U80
2842.0
28u80
28u80
28U80
S082-7650
5082 -7b50
5082.7650
5082-7650
5082-7650
1’?’90-0540
1990.05U0
lQQLI.05U0
19’+0.0540
lQQO.05U0
;
3
3
3
DISPLAV-IVUM. SEG
DISPLAV. NUM. SEG
OISPLAV-h UM-Sf G
DISPLAV-NUM-SEG
D1SPL4V-NU*-SLG
1-CHAR
!-CHAR
1-CHAR
l-CHAR
l-CHAR
,43-H
,43-H
,43-H
,U3-H
,43-H
28L!8u
28b80
28u80
28U80
.28U80
5082
5082 -76S0
5082.76S0
508 Z-7650
5082 -7b50
4105??
41D5~3
41 Ds2u
AI OS25
A1OS?6
lQ.3(1.05t7
1990.0517
1990.0517
1990.0517
lQQO.0517
(l
u
u
4
4
LED-v Is I$!LE LUtJ. IN T=3MCD IF=20MA. PAx
LED-v: sIi3LE LUM-XN713tAC0 IFx20MA-PAx
LED- VI SIPLE LUM-INTZ3MC0 IF=?o MA.PAx
LED-v IS18LE LUM-INTS3MC0 lF*.?u MA-MAx
LEO- VI SIm LE LUM-INTm3PCD IF=20MA.MAX
28U80
2SU80
28480
28U80
.28U80
5082 -U655
S082-U655
S082-U655
5082 -Ub SS
5082 -4b55
41J1
41J?
AIJ3
1.?50.0257
1?50.0?57
1250.1163
1
1
0
.?
CONNECTOR-RF SMEI M PC SO-OHM
C0NNEC70R-RF sMB v pc 50. OHN
CONNECT UR. RF LiNC ELM PC SO-OHM
.28U80
28480
28480
12 S0-0257
12 S0-02S7
12S0=1 163
A1!21
3
3
3
3
3
3
4!P3
AIQU
AIQ5
18 S3. IJ318
ln53.lJ318
1853.0318
1853.0318
1s!3. (3318
TRb$191S70R
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANsIsTOR
TRPNS1S70R
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
S1 PL)zsoo Mfl FTSboh+HZ
S1 Pos500M# FTs60MHz
sI PO S51JOMti FT.60MHz
sI PD=SOOMM FT*b OMHZ
S1 POs500Mti FT. b(l MHz
0U713
04713
04713
0U713
0U713
Mp$65b2
MPsbsbz
MF’SbSb2
Pp,5bS62
MpS6Sb2
41Q6
A1Q7
A!!28
A1Q9
41Q1o
18s3.0318
185 J.0318
ln53.1331n
ln53-0318
1853.031B
3
3
3
3
3
TRANSISTOR
7Rh N51570fi
TKANsls ToR
Transistor
7RANSISTOR
PNP
pNp
pNp
PNP
PNP
S1 PD=500Mw
sI p0X5110MM
sI P0S500Mti
gI P0B5UOMh
S1 PO*5UOMW
lTab OMHZ
FTm60Mhz
FTabo Phz
FT*b OMHz
F1~60MH2
04713
IJU713
04713
04713
Lru713
MpSb5b2
MPs6562
MPSb5b2
MPsbSb2
MPs6S62
1s53-0318
1853.0318
las3.lJ3t~
3
3
3
7RANSISTOR PNP S: PO*500MW F1?60MHZ
7RAN91cA70H
PNP S1 PD=500Mw F7UbOMHZ
7P) NSISTOR PNP S1 PD=500Mx FTab OMHz
04713
04713
OU713
MPSbSb2
MPS6S62
MP865b2
AtRI
AIR?
AIR I
AiRU
AtRs
0698.5075
06’?6-507S
0698 -S075
lnlo.ljono
0698.507S
0
e
B
b
B
RESIS70R 130 5X ,125P.
RESISTOR 130 5% ,12SW
RESISTOR 130 5% ,125w
NE TwOPK-RES 8-PIN-SIP
RtSISTOR 130 5X ,125W
CC TC*=330/+800
CC TCs-330/+800
Cc TCC-330/+800
,1.25 .PIN-$Pc G
CC TC==330/t800
01121
01121
01121
z0U80
01121
.291315
BB131S
SB1315
1810-0080
B0131s
AIRb
0bq8-5075
0698.507s
B
B
e
0
E
RESIS70R 130 5x ● 125W
RESISTOR 130 Sx ,125W
RESIS70R 130 5x ,125W
RESIS70R 130 5X ,125w
RESISTOR 13o 5X ,125w
cc 7c9.3Jo/+nolJ
cc Tc~.330/+so Ll
cc Tcs.330/+Eloo
CC TC=-33(J/+800
CC TCB=33U/+300
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
B141315
s0131s
88131s
081315
BB1315
RESIS70R 130 5% ,\?sw cc Tcw-310/+F30cl
NE TwoRK-REs 8-P IN. SIP ,lz5. PIN.5Pc G
RLSISTOR 27o SX ,!.?5w CC 7CI-330/+800
RESISTOR 150 SX ,12SW CC TCc-330/+80U
RESISTOR 130 5% ,125w CC TC==330/+800
01121
001315
iJbq8-5075
0
b
2
5
0
2s.480
01121
01121
01121
1810.0000
BB2715
BBISIS
801315
0b98-S075
obQa.5075
0675.10?1
e
0
8
RESISTOR 130 5X .125w CC 7c=-330/+800
RESISTOR 130 5X ,12SW CC TCm.330/+800
RESIS1OR lK 10x .125W CC 7C*-330/+800
01121
01121
01121
BB1315
BFA1315
BB1021
SOb(S-9U36
S060-9U36
50 b0-QU3b
50 b0-QU3b
SObO-Q43b
7
7
7
7
7
sWITc H, PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH, PUSHeU7TON
sw17CIi, PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH, PUSli BUT70N
SP, ITCH, PUS HEIU7TON
28u80
28480
2S480
28u8o
28480
5060 -qU3b
SO bO-qU3b
SO bO-9U3b
50 b0-943b
5061Z-9U36
5060 -9113b
S060-QUJ6
7
7
7
7
7
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
ShITCH,
SMITCH,
SWITCH,
.284s0
2S.480
28U80
28U80
2SU80
5060 -QU36
5060 -Q43b
5060 -Q43b
506(3=9436
41fl~b
A1OS7
A! DSII
AI
AIQZ
AIR?
AIR8
AIR9
AIHIO
0698.507S
06.98.5075
0698.5075
069.5.5075
1810-0080
0bq8.83SU
0bq8-3381
A1R16
A1R17
AiRIEI
AIS1
A!S2
AIS3
b!su
AISS
41S6
A1S7
AIS9
A1S9
AIS1O
b
I
I
3
2
PUSHBUTTON
PUSH8UT70tU
PUSHBUTTON
Pu5HBUTT0N
PUSHBUTTON
508? -U5EIU
5082 -uS8U
5082. U655
s082-7b50
-7b50
5060-9436
SObU-943b
5060-9436
5060-9436
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-5
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
41s11
HP Part
Number
Description
Qty
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
5obo.943e
51) bo.9436
50b0-Q436
sOb O-9U3b
SO bO-Q43b
S* ITCH, PUSHBUTTON
SNITCH, pushbutton
S* ITCH, pushbutton
SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON
28480
28U80
2BU80
28480
28u8o
50 b0-9U30
50 b0-9436
50b0.943b
50 b0-9U3b
50 bO=9U3b
h1820
SO bO=9Q3b
SObOw9U3b
S060-9036
S060.9U36
50 b0-9U3b
SWITCH, PUSH HUTTON
Sk ITch, PUSHBUTTON
S!41TCH, PUSI15U7TON
S* ITCH, PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH, Pushbutton
28480
28U80
28U80
28480
28480
5060 -9U36
5060 -qU3b
50b O=943b
50b0-9U3b
50 b0-9fA3b
AIS?I
AIS2P
Ais23
AI SZiI
50b0-’+43b
50 b!J-943b
310! -22’20
1101 -?220
SNITch, PUSHBUTTON
SW IrCHl pUSH8U7T0N
SW IT CH-SL OPOT-NS MINTR .5A 125v Ac/oc PC
ShITCH-SL OPOT-NS MIN7R .5A 125 VAC/DC PC
28480
284S.0
28480
28u80
SO bO=q43b
50 b0-943b
3101=2220
3101=22?0
AITPt
A11P2
12s!-0600
1251=0600
.?
COb, NE C70P-SGL CONT PIN 1.14 -MM-FISC-SZ S@
CONNECT OR-SGL CONT PIN l, IU-PM-BSC-SZ S0
284.90
2848o
1251-0600
1251-0600
If
SC REW. TPG U.U(I .188.1 N.Lc P4N.HO.P021
SOCK ET-IC 14-CONT OIP.SLOR
wAsHER. FL NM NO. 2 ,L194. IN.10 ,IE18. IN.OD
KEY CAP, PEARL GRAY
ULV CAP, PEARL GLP
28U.90
.?8U80
28480
,?8u80
.28080
Ob,?U-00V7
1200.0474
3050-0079
SO U1-027b
Soul -o?es
1
1
1
2
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
CAP,
CAP,
CAP,
CAP,
CAP,
,?.9080
284’s0
,?8U80
28u8o
28480
solJ1-0318
5oa1903@2
50 UI=OU50
so41-07tlAl
S041=0785
SO U1W0786
5041-0787
5041-0788
so41007a9
S04!-0802
I
1
1
1
I
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
CAP,
CAP,
CAP,
CAP,
CAP,
28460
,?8U80
284.s0
28480
,?8U80
50 U1-0766
5041-0787
S041-0788
50 U1-0789
SO UI.0802
5041-0803
S041.O.901A
50 U1=0805
053112.0001
0S3U,?.201C
!
!
1
I
I
KEv CAP. N.?
KEV CAP; R3
KEY CAP, hll
WIELO, INPU7
BLOCK, ANNUNCIATOR
28U80
28480
28US.O
,?8U80
28U80
5041 -0’503
5041-0804
5041.0905
0S3U2-00014
05342-20104
41s1?
4!s13
AIS!U
AIS!$
h1516
AIS17
AIS18
41s!9
2
AI MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
U.00Q7
062
1200 -0U74
305090079
seal.0276
50 U1.0285
SO L! I-031R
so41i.03u2
50 U1.0L!50
SOUI-0784
5041-0785
6-6
3
s
b
6
7
0
i
2
s
PUT
GLP
SG IITP
BLUE Q7R
S5
b 3[ 9
NT
#8
#0
a,
#l
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
; Qty
Mfr
Code
Description
Mfr Part Number
k2
053u.2-6000z
7
I
DISPLAY DRIVER ASSEMBLY
A.?CZ
A2C3
A2CU
A2C5
A2cb
I?cb
0160 -18?9
Q18fJ-023ci
0160-3879
018(J.171A3
oib O-387q
0180.0106
7
o
7
2
7
Q
5
1
CA PA CITUR.FXD
CPPACXTOti-FXD
CA PACITPR.FXD
CA P4CITCIR. FXD
CA Pbt IT OR-FXD
CA P6CITU*.$X@
A?C7
A.?cn
A?ce
A2C!0
A2CI i
ulbo-3P7.9
Oib O-3079
b
7
2
0180.1714
0160-3879
7
7
I
A2C12,C13,C14,C15
A2Ctb
A2C!7
bzCtS
42C19
O18O-O1O6
Olbfl-3@78
olbo.0573
olb O-0573
9
b
2
.2
A?C20
OlbO-0570
Q
1
CAp AC IT OR-FXD ??o PF +-Z’OX 100VDC cER
28480
Olb O-!)570
A2U!
18 S11.05b0
v
!
TRANSISTOR
00713
SPgb7U0
AzR,
42R2
A2R9
0757.0U20
1810.01?5
2100 -3b07
3
o
5
I
1
I
RESISTOR 750 1X .125N F TC=O+-1OO
NE IwORW-RES 8-PIN-SIP ,t25-PIN-SPCG
RESIST LIR-VAR CONTROL CCP lW 10% LIN
[NOT SUPPLIED WITH 0s342-b OO02, MUST BE
ORDERED SEPARATELY)
245U6
28U80
01121
c4.1/8. To.751-F
1810-0125
NPUN102P1O5UZ
b2R3
A2RU
A2R5
b2Rb
A2R7
0b83-51 05
0b83-2205
0b83-1015
Ob.93-2205
06.83-1025
u
e
7
9
9
1
:
Rks1970R 5! 5% ,25W FC TCC-UOO/+500
RESISTOR 22 5X .25w FC Tt~-u OO/+5n0
RESISTOR Ion 5X .25ti FC TCS-UOO/+500
RESISTOR 22 5X ,?5W FC TCm-400/+500
RESIS70R IK 5X ..?5N FC TC=-400/+600
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
CB5105
cS.2205
CE1015
CB220S
CB1025
A2R8
b2@,~
A2R, *
A2Rl~
12R,3
0b8J-2205
0683 -U725
0b83.2205
0b83-4725
0683-2205
Q
2
9
2
9
RESIS70R
RESISTOL!
RESISTOR
REsl STOR
RESISTOR
2? 5% ,?5w FC TCm-400/+5u0
u,7K 5% .25w FC TC=-UIJU/+700
22 5% .25w FC TCS-400/+500
~.7K 5% ,25w FC TCm-UUO/+700
22 5X .25w FC TC9-4001+500
01!21
01121
01121
01121
01121
CB2205
CBU725
CB2205
C0U725
CE12205
A2R1U
A2RI%
A~R!b
A2R17
A#R18
0b83-2205
9
9
9
7
2
RESISTOR 22 5X .25w FC TC9-UOO/+500
RESISTOR 22 5X .25W FC 7Cm-UOO/+500
REsIsTOR 22 5X .25w FC TC. -4 OO/+5OO
NE TwORK-RES Q-PIN-SIP .15-P IN-SPCG
RESISTOR U.7K 5X .25w FC TCs-uoo/+700
01121
01121
01121
28480
01121
CB2205
[02205
C82205
1810 -Olb U
CBU725
A2RI*
42R20
A2R?I
A2R22
A2RaU
0b83.4725
0b83-U725
0b83-1015
0b83.117>5
2
2
2
7
z
RESISTOR LI.7K 5X .25w FC TC.. UCIo/+7OO
RESISTOR U,7K 5X .25w FC TC. *U OO/+700
QESIs TOR U,7K 5X .25w FC 7cm-u OOl+700
RESISTOR 100 5X .25w
FC 7CI-400/+500
RESISTOR U.7K 5X .25w FC Tcm-u OO/+700
01121
01121
01121
ot!21
01121
CBU725
CBU725
C84725
CS1015
c!5u725
h2R2b
A2R28
b2R$5
0b81-&725
0b8$.A1725
0bB3-U725
2
2
2
RLSISTOR U.7K 5% .25w FC TCc-1100/+700
REs IsTOR ll,7K 5X ,25w FC 7Cs-UUO/+700
RESISTOR U,7K 5X .25v. FC TC=-UOO/+700
01121
01121
01121
CBU725
cB4725
cBu725
A2TP1
A2T02
As1P3
1251-0600
12 S1 -0600
i251-Ob OO
0.3
o
o
CO~,NEC70R-SGL CONT PIN 1.14 -MM-B SC-SZ S0
COb NE CT OR-SGL CONT PIN l.lu-MM.BSC. SZ SQ
CO NNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14 -MM. BSC. SZ SfJ
28480
28480
28U80
12 S1-Ob Oo
1251 -Ob OO
1251 -Ob OO
A2LAI
AzU2
A2u3
A2u4
A2U5
ln20*os39
1820.0Ub8
1R20.1uu3
18?0.0539
1820 -14!b
:
8
1
5
01295
01295
012Q5
01295
01295
sN71137N
SN74U5N
sN7u Ls2Q3N
SN7437N
SN7ULS14N
A2Ub
AsU7
A2U8
A2Uq
A?UIO
1820wtou9
1820 -0Ub8
ln?lJ.lo2@
1020. ! 144
1820.1200
o
5
5
b
s
IC BFR TTL NO N.INV HEX
IC DCDR TTL EC D. TO-OEC 4- TO.1O-L1NE
IC*OGTL, bUBIT RAM,l TL
IC GATE TTL LS NOR QuAO 2-INP
IC INv TTL LS MEx
01295
01293
01295
o12q5
Ol?qs
SN743b7N
SN7UU5N
SN7189N
sN711L$02h
SN74LSOSN
A2u1~
A8u1z
A2UIS
A2Ulb
A2U17
1RZO.1O2.5
1.520 -125U
[email protected]
1*20.l?SAI
Iai$o-lll?e
s
9
b
q
9
IC-DGTL,64RIT RbM, TTL
XC RFR TTL NO N-INV HcX
IC SCHWITT=TRIG TTL LS
xc BFR TTL NO N.INV HEX
xc Mux R/o bTA.s EL TTL LS
01295
2701 U
o12q5
27oiu
o12qs
SN7189N
DM80tJ5N
SN74LS132N
DMt3095N
8N7ilL8158N
A2U18
b?Ul Q
A?U2?
la~(l.lllz
1820=! 112
Ifizo. j8P5
n
@
?
012Q5
01?95
.27014
SN74L$7LIN
SN74LS7UN
Dk!74Ls173N
00000
28480
oROt R BY OtSCRIPTION
1200=OSb5
0b83-2205
oba3.2205
1810-o I6U
0b83-U725
0b83. U725
!
2
2
1
10
1
2
2
1
1
1
?
1
1
2
1
1
2
I
[S ERTES
1829)
,OIUF +.20% 100v DC CER
IuF+-20X 50v DC T~
,OIUF +-207, !oov Dc f-ER
,Iu F+-1OX 35VUC 7A
.oIuF +-,?OX IO OVDC cER
60 UP+-20X bvDC 16
CbPACITIJR-FXD IoOIIPF +-,?OX 10 QVDC CER
CbPACITOR-FXD ,OIIIF +-2o7, ~OOVOC CER
N07 AsSIGNED
CA PA CIILIR.FXO 330uF+. Iox 6VDC 1A
CA PbCITOR-?XO ,n!u F +-20x IO OVDC CER
NOT ASSIGNED
Cbp AC IT OR-Fx D
CAp AC17LIR-FX~
CAP AC IT OR.FXD
CA PA CITUQ-FXO
IC
IC
lC
XC
IC
bOUF+-20X bvOC TA
!OOOPF +-20x’ IOOVDC CER
u71Jo PF +-ZOX 100v DC CLR
u700PF +-20% 100VOC CER
NP~ S1 OARL PO W31OMW
BFR TTL NAND QUAD F.-INP
DCOR T7L BCO-TO=DEC u-TO-10-LINE
CNTR TTL LS BIN bSVNCHRO
BFli TTL NAND Oub O 2=INP
SC HMIT7=T~IG TTL LS INv HEx
1-INP
1.INP
NAND OUAO 2*INP
1.INP
2. TU. I.LINE QUAO
IC PF TTL LS D.TvPk PoS.kDGk. TRIG
IC FF TTL LS O-TYPE POS=EOGE-TRIG
XC RGTR TTL L.9 O-TYPE QUAD
.? Elusll
0534.2-60002
28480
Sbz!lv
ZE!U80
56289
28u8O
56289
olbo-3879
!50 D105xoo SOA2
0160*387Q
15 OD1OUX9II35A2
Otb O-3879
lSODb06XOOOblA2
28u80
284S.0
0160-3878
Oib O-3Ei79
5.5289
28u8o
1500337 X9006S2
0160-3879
5b28q
28480
28080
28480
150060 bXOOOb B2
0160.3878
Olb O-0573
Olbo-0573
A2 M$sc EL LA fvEOUs PbRTS
03410 =033b
l? IA O-05bS
k
5
I
SPAct R. RvT. oN ,31? -IN.LG .152 -IN-ID
SO CKET.l C 24-CONT OIP-SLOR
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-7
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
053uz-bnoo3
\
A3C2
A3CJ
Ascu
A3C5
0160.387Q
olbo.3n7Q
o!eo.3e78
olb(l.3P7m
OIRO. OUQO
r
r
>
>
i
A3C6
A3C7
A3Ca
A3C9
AJC1O*
oleo.~uoo
OlbO.387b
0160 -3u5u
(llb O-38?Q
OlbO-T87?
J
b~c!f
AsC!2
A3C!3
A3C1U
A3Ci~
OlbO.3P79
o~n”. pueo
olbo.3P79
Olb O-3.97Q
OlbO-387b
Ale!
Mfr
Code
Description
I
1
f
)
I
L
!
?
9
D! WEC7 COUNT AMPLIFIER AS9EMe
(SERIES !81b)
LY
Mfr Part Number
20480
05342 -bOO03
.oruF +.,?0% 100VOC CER
CA PA CITOR-6XD .o!uF +-t?ox !OOWOC CER
CAP AC IT OR-FXO 1000PF +-20% 100v OC CEB
CA PA C170R-FXO lQooPf +-20% 100VOC CER
CA PA C17UP.FXD 68uF+-II?X bVOC 7A
2tIu80
~Llu8n
2SU8n
Z8U8U
Olb O-3S7V
Ulb O-387*
Q0201
7VC686KO06WLF
C4PACITOR-FXO b811F+-10X bVoc 7b
c#04c JToQ.Fx O u7PF +.20X 200VOc cE!+
Cb0AC17um-FX9 22?P6 +-1(I% IKVOC CER
CAn AC IT OR.FXO .OIUF +.20% 10 LIVOC cEP
CAp AC II OR-FXO ?.>p~ +-.25PF 21Jo VOC CER
‘FACTORY SE LECTEO PART
CbPACITOQ. FXO .I)luF +-.201 100VOC CE@
CA PACIIOR. FXD bUUF+-10X bfOC 1A
C& PAC170R. FXO .o!uF +-20% l(Aov OC CEP
CA PA CITOL?.FXO .oIuF +-,20% 100VOC CEP
CBPAcl TOR. FXO L17PF +-.?OX 200vOC CEQ
Qozo!
z8u80
?8480
28U80
?PA!8u
Tf)Cb8bKO06nLf
Olb O-3878
Olb O-0128
olbo-3s7q
Olb O-3878
0160*387Q
CAP AC TTO17-FXO
28480
00201
2eu8(I
28U80
28U80
OlbO-3878
tllb O-3878
Olb O-387b
0160 -3USU
0160 -387~
0160-3872
Olb O-387v
70 C68bk OObwLF
Olb O-387v
Olb O-3979
Olb O-387b
A3C17
A3Cl@
A3CIQ
AsC20
Olb O-3878
0160.0128
olbo.387Q
Oib O-3878
olt.17.3P7v
$
5
r
5
?
CAP AC IT OR.FXO !OOOPF ● -?OX 100v OC CtR
CAp AC IT O@-FXD 2.2uF +-20% 50VOC cER
CbPACIIUR.PXO
,oIuF +-2ox IOOVCC CE@
cbPA[170R.Fx Q ,ooo Pt ..20x lo,, vOC cER
CA PA CITOR.FXD .(IIu~ +-?()% 100vOC CER
Znueo
2848u
28u80
.2Saeo
Z8U.SO
A3C?I
A3C?2
43CZ3
A3C2Q
A3C25
0180-049!
0160 -3?78
0!60-387Q
o!60.3a74
Olbo-3677
5
5
?
5
5
CA P4CITOQ.FXO
cAPAc IT OR&FXO
CAp AC IT OQ-F$O
CA PA CIT09.FXO
CA PA CITCR-FXO
!oUF+-20% z5VOC TA
jOOOPF +-2(Jx 1!30VOC
CEP
.o!UF +-.20% too VOC CkR
II)OOPF +-.?(IX Ioo VOC CER
lQoPF +-,20X 200vOC CER
20480
28U80
2.9U81J
2bu80
28480
Olb O.3878
Olb O-3879
Olb O-3S78
0160-3877
A3CZ6
0160-3878
5
cAPAc ITOB-FXo
InOOPF
?8ue@
olb O-3878
lQ(I1.1)040
laol-o~tl(l
1’+01.0535
1901-0535
IQ O1-,JIJ!30
1
1
a
0
3
l? IO OC. sWITcPXNG 30V 50MA 2N5 00.35
DIODE -.S*I1CHING
>OV 50~A .?NS 0(?-S5
@I flDE. SC MOTIXV
PIODE. SC UOTTKV
9100 E-sw ITCHING i30v ?OOMA .2NS 00-3S
?8u80
28u80
.28u.5n
28US0
zuu8fJ
1901.IJOUO
1901.0(3U0
1901.053s
1901-0535
lQO1.0C150
A3CR7
A3CI?R
1901.0535
1901.0535
1901.00s0
Q
o
3
OIOOE. SC HOTTKV
OIOnE.SCH07TKV
O1OUE.SWITCHING
.2 Elua!l
.2 EIU80
?8U80
1901.0535
1901.0535
1901.0050
A3E1
A3E2
Q170-002Q
Q170-flo29
3
3
CORE. SHIELDING BEAO
CORE= SMXELOING 8Eb0
28480
28U80
9170-0029
9170 -oozV
A3$!
2110 -0u36
3
FUSE
28U80
2110
A3L1
A3L,?
9100-178@
9100-17.58
6
b
CHOUE-k IOE OANO ZMAXCb130 OHMa 180 MHZ
CMCI(E-WIOE 8AN0 zMAxmb80 OMMd leo Wz
0211U
02114
VKZI)O
b3Ql
b3Q2
A3C13
A3Qu
A3Q5
185 U.0215
18s5-0081
ln55.ooel
lm53-oo15
185 U.05AJ6
1
!
1
7
1
7RANSISTOR NPN S! POa350Mw FTm300M14Z
7RANSISTOR J-FET N-C HAN O-MOOE S1
7RANSISTOR J.FET N-CHAN O-~OOE S1
TranSiStOr PNP SI P08ZOOMW F19500PHZ
71? AN S1S70R NPN sI ?0.7? PO*.20@M#
ou7i3
01?05
012Q5
.?eueo
28US0
SPS 3611
2N5ZU5
2N52u5
1853-0015
185 U.05U6
A3Qb
A30?
A3Q.13
A39Q
A3Q!0
1854.007!
1s54.0071
185 U.0071
18s4.0071
1R54-05A!6
?
7
7
7
!
TRANSISTOR
TRANSIS70D
7RANSISTOR
7RANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
2FIU80
28U80
28U80
,?8U80
28U80
185u-0071
1054.0071
185 U-0071
1850-0071
185 LI-05U6
A3R!
ASR2
A3R;
A3RU
A3R5
0b9Y.5180
ObQl).7ZU2
06.Q13.5U26
0bQ8.3U37
0757 -03e9
b
5
3
2
5
RESIS70D
Rf. SIS70R
RESIS1OFI
eES!STOP
BkSISTOR
2U S% ,1?5W CC 7C8=350/+13S7
1,78K !X ,OSW F 7CXO+-I O!?
!OK 10X ,125w CC TCr.350/+@57
133 1X .125W F TC8O*.1OO
82.5 1X .1Z5W F 7C8O*-1OO
01121
2U5iib
01121
2U5U6
21J5U6
SS2025
C3-1/i3.70=17Sl*G
BB1031
cU.118.10. I33R.F
c401/8-10-82145.P
A3Rb
A3R7
43R8
A3R9
A3R1o
0698 -S17b
Ob*8-SU2b
2100-3273
06 Q8.5566
06et3.6.29u
0
3
RESISTOR 51o 5X ,125w CC 7CD-330/+800
RESIS1OR 10K lfl% .125w CC TC8-350/+L157
@Es Is70P-TRMR 2K 10X C sIoE-AOJ 1-7RN
I? F-s Is70R .2. UK 5X . 125W cc Tc*-350/+e57
RESISTOR u7K 5X .125w CC tCS-a66/+875
01121
0112!
28US0
BL1511S
BB1031
2100-3273
sB2ui35
BBU735
A3R11
43R1Z
A3R13
83R1AI
A3Q1s*
0698 -b283
0608.3375
0b98=8373
07 S7.0280
07 S7-0316
.2
7
5
3
6
01121
01121
01121
2U54b
2U5t4b
SB1OO5
BL13305
5EIU7U5
cu. j/e.70.; ool. F
Cu-1/e*10-U2R2-F
A3R16*
A3R17
A3R!9
A3R\Q
43R20
Ob’?8.33?.!
06’+8-4102
0bQ8-629U
0
0
5
0
1
RESISTOR 10 5X .125w CC TC=-l?O/*QOO
RESISTOR 33 5X .125w CC 7C8-270/*5~0
aESISTOR U70K 5X .125* CC 7Cs-bOO/+1 137
RESIS70R lK lx ,125W F 7c8n+-loo
RESISTOQ 42,2 1X .125w F TC80+-100
‘FACTORY SELECTED PART
RtSISTOP 51 5X .125w CC lC8-270/+540
RESIS7L!R
?.ObK 1X .125W F 7C=O*-1OO
RESIS70@ UiU 5X ,li5W CC Tc=. #bb/+87S
QESISTOR 510 ‘5X ,125w CC lCm.330/+800
RtSIS70R 82o 5X .125w CC TC*-330/*800
.FACTORY SELECTED PART
01121
03888
01121
01121
01121
895105
PME55.1/i3 .70-2061-F
B84735
Seslls
BB13215
ASClb
I A,CR,
43CR2
A3CR3
A3CI?LI
A3CRS
A3CR6
06 V8-517b
0bQ8-5177
:
5
+-?0% 10u VOC CLR
POV 200MA
2NS 00-3S
,1A 1z5V PA S7-BLO ,348X.25 UL
P4PN
NPN
NPN
NPN
NPN
S1
sI
81
S1
S1
P01300WW F7m200Mu Z
00=300Mw F7m20014Hz
POD300MW FTm20uM14Z
PDS300VW FTc?OOMHZ
TO-72 P09200”w
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-8
01121
C! 121
0190-0491
-0U3b
,30/u.5
VK200 .?o/118
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
Description
A36?2\
A3U2?
A,Q~,
A3R~u
AJR~<
PESISTOR
@E SISTOR
~tSISTG@
RLSISTCII+
PLSIS1OR
I,?K 5% .125*
~7K 5% ,125.
4,3K 5X .125w
I,2K 5% .125*
I,E!K 5Y .125w
43122~
RLSIS70R
RkSISTOR
RESISTOR
RESIS70M
RLSISTOR
RESISTOP
RESISTO!i
RESISTOR
Mfr
Code
CC Tc*-350/+857
CC TC. -O bb/+S75
CC TC=O+S82
cc lcz.350/+857
CC TC=.35n/+.S57
Mfr Part Number
—.
111121
91121
011.?1
011. ?1
011.?1
E181.?25
Bt!u735
B943,2S
BB1225
BB1825
20 5X ,125* CC TCs-270/+5U0
1.2K 5X .125* cc Tc:.350/+.957
750 57, .125. CC lCm-330/+floo
Slo 5% ,125* CC TC=-330/+8(1Ll
U70K 5% .125w CC TC=-600/+! 137
01!21
011.zl
01121
0112!
01121
9B2005
BB12,?5
8B7515
tlnslls
B8u745
RESISTOR
UZ02 j% .125w F 7C=O+.1OO
27 5X .1?5w CC TC=-270/+5U0
b!,9 1% .125w F TC=O+- 100
200 5% .1?5w CC TCB-330/+800
I,2K 5X .125K CC TC. -35 O/*857
2U5Ub
01121
2U5Ub
01121
nii2i
CU.1/8.70-42R.2-F
Btl.2705
C4.1/8-70. b192-F
BB?o IS
881225
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
REs Is701+
RESISTOR
RtSISTOR
510 5X .!zsfi cc Tc=-330/+8r)o
750 57! ,125.+ CC TC=-330/+800
750 5% .I?5W cc Tc..33o/+8oo
27 5X .!25N CC TCB-270/+5Uo
4?.2 1% ,125K F TC=O+-1OO
01121
01121
01121
01121
2U54b
BB5115
BP. ?51S
f3B7515
BB2705
CL!.1/8-T0.42R2. F
0675.1021
Obqf!. b2U2
0683.5605
RF SISTOti
RESISTOR
RES1570R
RESIS70R
RESISTOR
27o 5% .125* cc lc=.330/+noo
lK 10% .125W CC TC8-330/+800
lK 10% .1?5w CC TCZ-330/+80CI
1,2K 5% .125!, CC TC=-350/+857
S6 5X .?5w FC TC=-40()/+50U
01121
01121
01121
01121
0112!
B132715
BB1021
BB1021
BB1225
CB5605
0e98.518cI
7U
0757.05QU
RESISTOR
RESIS1OR
RESISTOR
?K 5% .125ti CC TC=-350/+857
2o0 5X .12sW CC TC=-330/+801J
S1,1 lx .125w F TC=O+.1OO
01121
01121
2U5Ub
Bti2025
BB2015
c4. I/.9. To.5\Rl.F
A31P,
A31P2
A37P3
1~51-Ob OO
CON NE CT OR-SGL CON7 pIN ! .!4. MM. Bsc. sZ S(J
[ONNEC709. SGL CONT PIN 1 ,14. ”M-8sc. sZ so
COiw NE CT OB-SGL CONT PIk 1.lu-MM-BsC-SZ SQ
28480
2&4!80
28u.SO
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251 -Ob OO
A3ut
A3u2
A3u3
A3UU
A3u5
1820 -073b
IC
IC
Ic
IC
lC
28U80
0L1713
OIQze
z8u80
28u80
1820 -073b
MC1021bP
CA1458G
lB20-073b
1B20-09.S2
b3Ub
A3u7
1820..9982
28480
2.S080
1820-0982
18.20.0982
28U80
z8u00
28u80
28LJ80
0380-0970
1251-3205
30s0-0105
o53U2.2O1OI
A3R27
A3R2n
AJR?v
A3R3(l
0757.031b
0698.7080
0757.0?76
06 QP.5) 74
0698. bZU2
&3a3~
b3R37
A3R3a
AsR39
A3RU(I
tlbq,9.51 ?b
A3eu I
A3RIA>
A3RlA3
A3QUU
A3RUS
obq9. Fj354
A3RUb
b3Ru7
AsRue
0bqt3. b2Ul
flbqil.b~lll
vt. Qe.7080
0757.031b
0b75-!
021
0bQ8.51
l?51-Ob OO
1251 -ObOO
18?0.122U
lA~b.oj3Q
18z0.0736
1820.0Q82
lR20-n982
RL.SIS1OR
cK,7R
FICVR
lu5e
cNTP
oIFF
ECL ilIN’ DuAL
ECL LINE RCVR TPL 2-INP
(YP AMP ,?. DIP. P
CCL BIN DuAL
AMPL 16-O IP=c
xc oIFF AMPL 16- OIP.C
XC OIFF bMPL lb. OIP. C
A3 ‘I SC EL LA NEUUS PARTs
038 L?.0Q70
1251 -3?05
3050.0105
05342 -?0101
S7ANOOFF-HEX ,375.1 N-LG u-u Oll+D
CO~NECTOR-SGL CONT SKT .O??-IN. BSC-SZ
WPSHER-FL MTLC NO, U ,125-IN-IO
SCREW, GROUND
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*indicates factory selected value
6-9
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
; Qty
Mfr
Code
Description
Mfr Part Number
Z8UIIIJ
U53U2-b OOOU
CA PA CIILIP.FKD J,3uf+.20x 15v DC TA
CAP AC IT OR. FXD 6.8uF+-2u% 6VOC Ta
CAp AC II OR-FXD b. RUf+-20X OVDc Tb
CAp AC IT On-FXD !oOOPF +-20X 100VQc cER
CA P4CITOR-FXO b. F! Uf+-?OX bVOC 7A
sb?s~
562.Sq
5b?8q
.2s480
5b28q
150 D335XOO1542
1500t#.5xuo06A?
1500 bS5XOOOb AZ
0160-3878
j500t.85x~oob4?
z
b
b
b
b
Cbp AC IT UR-FXO
CA PA CITUR-FXD
CApb C170PWFX0
CA PA C17UR.FXD
CA P& CITOR-FXD
Sb?8V
28480
zSU80
28U.90
28U89
1500 b85XOOOb A2
Olb O-387.S
Olb O-3878
OlbO-3878
Olb O.3878
0160 -38?8
olbo.3.97e
Olb O-38747
OlbO-3878
ol@n. o,32@
b
b
b
b
b
CAp AC IT OR.~XD 1000PF +.20x IDOVOC
ChPACIT(XR.FXD 1000PF +.?ox IO OVDC
cApbc IToa-FXD 1000PF +.20X IOOVOC
CAph CITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20 X 100Voc
CA PA CITOR-FXO 22 LIF+-1OX 15Voc 1A
CER
CER
CER
cER
28480
Zeu.so
28480
ZAIU8U
5b289
Olb O-3878
OlbO-1878
Olb O-3878
0160-3878
15002 ?bX901582
kL!C 1 b
AuC17
AA!C18
AtICIQ
AAIC20
O! bO-3878
O! bcl-3fJ7~
01 bO=3S?8
Olb O.3877
OlbO-3877
b
b
b
5
s
PA CITOR.FXO 1000PF +-20x IOOVOC CER
PA CITOR-FXO !OOO?F +-20X 100 Vtjc cER
PACITOR-FXD 100upF +-2(JX 100VOC CtR
PA CITOR.FXO 100PF +-20% 200VDC, CLR
P4CITOR-FXD !no PF +-ZOX 200v OC CE~
z8u80
28480
?8U80
28480
28u8o
OlbO-3878
0160-3878
Olb O-387S
<,tb C1-3877
olbo-3877
AUCZI
AIICZ2
AIAC23
AIXC2U
bAlc25
olb O-$878
01 bO*3872
olbO=38713
Olb O-3S7@
OlbO.31177
b
o
:
s
c4pbc110R=$XD !OOOPF +-20X 100VCXC cER
CAp AC IT O@-FXD 2,?PF +-, z5PF zooi’bc CER
CA PA CITOR-FXO 1000PF +-2u X 100v DC CER
CApPCIToR-FXD
!OOOPF +-2(IX 100VDC CER
CA PA CITLJR. FXO 100PF +-2(Ix 200VOC CER
28u8O
28u8o
28U80
z8U80
28u8o
Olb O-3t378
01 bO-3872
Olb O-3878
Olb O-3878
0160-3877
AAICRI
A(ICR.3
A4CR3
1902.3171
0122=OOb5
0122 -00b5
7
7
7
OIODE. Z!VR IjV 5X 00-7 PO=.4W TC*+,062X
CA PA CITORIVIILTAGE VAR:2Q PF/-3v
CA PA CITORIVOLTAGE vARI?9 PF/-3v
z8U80
Z8U80
28U80
;902.3171
0122 -00b5
Ol,??-OObS
AAIE. I
9t70=OO!b
8
!
CORE. shielding 0E4D
2848o
v170. oolb
A4LI
A&LZ
AuI.3
AIXLU
4(AL5
9!00=2268
~100*22b6
9100=22b8
9100. ?2A,8
9100 -2?b8
q
v
q
Q
9
7
CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
IL. MLO 22uH
IL.MLO .22UH
IL-MLO 22uH
IL-MLD ??UH
IL.MLO ?.2uH
2s480
2EIu80
28480
2.9480
2.9480
QIOO-22b8
q100.22b8
qlOO. z2b.9
q100-2Zb8
9100-2268
A9Lb
AaL7
A4L8
AAIL9
9j00.2z Q7
9100.22b.9
9100.22b8
91 OO-22U7
4
9
Q
II
2
CO
CO
CO
CO
IL.MLO !OONH 10X Qz341 .09 SO X, ZSLG-NOM
IL.MLO 22UM IOX IJm US .09 SO X. Z5LG-NOM
IL.MLO 22UH 10X 0s4S ,0q50Xq25LG.NOM
IL-~LO 100NH IOX U=3AI .095 Dx,25LG.NOM
28u8o
28u8o
28U80
28u8o
91oo-22U7
9100.22b8
9100.22bS
9100-2247
AAIQI
AaQZ
1854-0071
!054.034s
7
8
1
1
7R4Ns IST0R NPN SI Pom300Mw F7.200MHz
TRANs XS70R NPN 2N5179 SI TO-72 POs200Mk
284.S0
04713
18 SU-0071
2ru517e
4@Ri
ACIR.3
AER3
41ARu
4aRs
2100 -2U89
0b98.3380
0b98.5U2b
0bV%5171j
0b98=917U
Q
4
3
2
8
1
I
1
t
I
RESIS70R. ?RMR SK IOX C SIOE-AOJ 1.7RN
RESISTOR 75 5X .125* CC TC=-270/+5U0
RESISTOR 10K IOX .125Lv CC TCS.350/+blS7
RESIS70R 1*5K 5x .l?5h CC 7C=-3S0/+857
RESIS70R 200 5X .125w CC Tc=-33c/+l!oo
30983
01121
0! 121
01121
01121
ET SOX502
BB7S05
081031
eais25
13 B201S
ACiRb
4uR7
AIAR8
AUR9
AuRIo
0b98-S999
0bQ8.59W
0b9#-S!72
0b911.s9Vt
0b9.5.S075
s
s
b
5
n
3
RESISTOR u,7K SX .125w CC ‘7 C=-3S0/+BS7
RESISTOR 11.7K 5X .125w CC TC=-3S0/+BS7
RESISTOR 13 5X ,125w CC TCm-270/+Sil@
*E SISTOR u.7K 5X ,12SW CC TC=-350/+BS7
RESIS70R 130 5X ,1.?Sk CC rC=-330/+8no
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
BBu725
B8u72S
89130S
S84725
BB1315
4uRi I
44R12
AuR13
A9RIU
AaR!s
0b98.337b
0b98*33?B
0b98-7212
ObQ1l.3376
0b98-S172
8
o
e
8
b
2
2
1
RESIS70R
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
REsIsTOR
RtSIS7DR
01121
01121
2U51tb
01121
01121
B8u305
B8S105
c3-1/8-To-loo R-c
8EIu305
881305
AUR!b
AuRI1
4uR18
0b98.S99b
0b98-So75
0b98-3J78
2
8
o
1
RESISTOR
5b0 5X .1251! CC Tc=-330/+i100
RESISTOR 130 5X .125h CC TCa-330/+8n0
RLSIs TOR 51 5X .12SW CC TCJ-270/+S40
01121
01121
01!21
BB5b15
i38i3i5
BBS105
4UUI
4UU2
1826-0372
182 b-0372
2
2
2
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
28U8LI
28u130
1826-0372
1826-037?
03 b3.0133
03$0=0970
OS3U2.2O1OI
o
9
3
2
I
t
CON TAc T. FINGER .13=w0 .oQ-FREE-HGT
STANDOFF-HEX ,375. IN.LG 4-L!07H0
SC PEti, GROUNO
28480
2.54s0
2Bu80
0363-0133
0380.0970
05342=20101
Au
0534? -bOOOU
Q
1
OFFSET
AIJc!
Auc?
AUC3
AA!CU
AUCS
0180.0210
0180.170!
(11 R13.17f)l
0160-3878
elan.1701
6
z
.?
b
?
I
u
41Atb
44C7
AuC8
AuC9
AuCto
01813.171)1
0160 -3(?78
OlbO-3878
OlbO.3878
OlbO-3878
AAIC1l
&u Cl?
AUC13
AUC14
AUC!S
15
!
3
!
1
2
a
2
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
VCO ASSEMBLY
U3
51
100
U3
13
(SLRIES 17?o)
6.8 Uf+-2U% bV@c 1A
1000PF +-20X 10 I7VDC CER
1000PF +-,?OX IuOVOC cER
Ioo(l PF +-20X 100VOC CER
1000PF +-,?OZ 100v DC CER
! ox Qmu5 .0950 x02 SLG. NOM
10X Qm45 .0950 x.25 LG-NOM
!(JX Q=45 ,0950 x.25 LG.koM
10X 0-45 .0q50x.25LG-NOM
IOX 0=0S .0q50X.25LG.NOM
5X
5X
1X
5X
5X
.12SW
,!254
,OSW F
,12SIV
.12SW
CC TC=.270/+5U0
CC TCm-270/+5U0
Tcmo+.loo
CC TC8..27O/+5UO
CC TC=.270/+SUO
AU MI SC EL LAtUEOUS pARTs
6-10
F!E-CU
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*indicates factory selected value
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
: Qty
45
053 U2.60005
o
I
45C !
A5C2
A5C3
Asc’r
45C5
Olb O-3878
0160-3878
01 b9-3878
0160.3878
Olmn. ozlo
b
b
b
b
b
10
A5cb
ASC7
45C.9
A5CQ
A5CI0
0100.3029
QlbO-3878
o! bO-3876
0160-3878
OlbO-3870
9
6
A!
b
b
2
Asclf
A5C1?
A5C13
A5Ct AI
Ascl S
olbo.3n7Q
OlbO-057b
OlbO-3@7b
OlbO-057b
Olb O-3.970
7
5
u
3
A$cib
ASc17
ASC!13
ASC!9
4SCZ0
OlbO-38711
Mfr
Code
Description
RF
MULTIPLEXER
ASSEMBLY
(SERIES
1720)
Mfr Part Number
z8u80
053 L12-b OO05
CE@
cER
CER
CER
28U8U
28G80
.zebeo
281JS0
5b28V
Olb O-1878
olb O-3878
0160-3878
Olb O-387B
1500335 xo015A2
CA PA CITOF7.FXO 7C5PF +-. SPF 100VOC CEn
CA PhCIIOR-FXD 10o OPF +.?0% lQovoc cER
CA PA CI1OR-FXO U7PF +-20% 200VOC CER
CAP AC IT OR-FXD tnnn PF +-ZOX ILJn VOC CER
CA PA CITOR.FXO Iono PF +.20x 10 UVDC CER
~8u8(l
2SU80
28480
284’90
28U80
Olb O-3029
0160-3078
Olb O-387b
0160-3878
Olb O-3878
:
b
CA PACITOP.FXO
CA PA CITOR. FXD
CA PAC170e-FXO
CA P4CITOR.FXD
CA PA CITOR.FXD
,OIUF +-20 X 100VOC CER
,luF +-20X 5uv OC CER
u7PF +-20X 200v DC CER
.1(JF +.2ox 50v DC CER
1000PF +..ZOX 100VDC CER
28u8o
28480
28u80
z8u80
28US0
0160-3879
Olb O-057b
0160.3876
0160-0576
0160-3878
OlbO-187q
0180.0210
OlbO-3879
0160.302’?
b
7
b
7
Q
CAP AC IT LIR.FXD 1000PF +-2ox 100VOC CER
CA PA CITOR.FXO ,mu F +-2ox IO OVOC CER
CAP AC IT OB-FXO 303 UF+-20X 15v OC 1A
CA P4CITOP.FXD ,o; uF +-20x 100v OC CER
CApACITOR.Px O 7,5PF +.,5PF 100v DC CER
28u8o
28u SO
5b289
28u80
.28U80
Olb O-3878
0160.3.579
1500335 xo015A2
0160-3879
0160-3029
Asc?q
AsCZ?
A5C23
ASC2AI
4SC25
OlbO-3878
OlbO-3878
OlbO-3878
OlhO-Q57b
olbo-3s.75
b
b
b
5
3
CAP AC IT OR.FXO lnno PF +.ZOX loov DC CER
C4Pb C170P-Fx O 1000PF +-20x 100VOC CER
CAP AC IT OR.FXO 1000PF +.ZOX 100vOC CER
CA PbCLTo R.FXO .IUF +.20!A 50v OC CER
CAPh CITOR.FXO ??PF +-5x
ZOOVDC CER 0+-30
z8U811
28U80
2B4180
z8U80
?8480
OlbO-3878
Olb O-3878
OlbO-3878
Olb O-0S7b
Olb O-3875
45c2b
45C27
ASC2*
45C2Q
olbo-3875
Olb O-387V
O! bO-3878
Qlbo-3F178
?
b
b
CbPACITO$f.FXO
CAp AcITOR-FXO
CAPACITOR.FXO
C4PAC1TOR.FXD
z8u811
28u8o
z8u80
28480
Olb O-3875
0160-3879
Olb O-3878
Olb O-3878
A5CRI
4SCR?
AsCRI
AsCRa
A5CRS
leo1-017Q
IQO1.017Q
lQOI.017Q
lQol.Q\7Q
1901-0179
7
7
7
00-7
00.7
00-7
00-7
00-7
2SU80
28u8o
28u8o
28480
28u80
1901.0179
1901-0179
1901.0179
1’+01.0179
1901-0179
&Sc Rb
lQOI.0179
750 PS 00-7
28U80
45Et
A5E2
9170-0029
9170.0029
4SLI
4SL2
4SL3
45L5
ASLb
QIOO-22b5
9100=2255
9100.2255
‘+1oo-2?55
Q1OO-22S5
b
u
u
u
u
AsL?
AsL8
A5LI0
ASLlt
AsL1?
9100-2248
9to0-225S
QIOO-226Q
9tO0-22bQ
Q1OO=225S
5
u
o
0
u
4SL13
ASL!a
ASLl5
AsL16
ASL!T
9100 4255
Q1OO.2255
!J1OQ.225S
q100-22b5
‘?1OO-2255
u
u
u
b
u
A5L!8
0S34Z-80001
8
4SQ1
4S02
AsQ3
1953.00s.9
1853 -00s8
la53.oos9
8
8
8
ASR!
4SRZ
ASR3
45Ru
45R5
Qb8J-\21S
!
1
u
0bq8.5172
0bQ8-3378
Q
7
1
b
o
45Rb
A5R7
A511@
ASRQ
A5R1O
0S.98-31 11
1I
0bQ8.517U
0b9R.3380
0698-3113
q
e
B
u
1
u
45R1 I
A5R12
ASR! 3
4SQ1 u
A5R15
ObqR.5Sbl
0b*8.5Q98
0698.S566
07s7-0398
0bQ8-5Sbl
7
u
0
u
7
a
1
1
1
0b83.200S
0698-3113
0b98-31
2
2
2
C4Pb C1T0P-FXD 1000PF ,-ZOX 100VOC
CA PbCITOR.FXD 1000PF +.ZOX IO OVDC
CAP AC I1OR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 10 IIVOC
CApb CIT0i2-r XO 1000pF +.ZOX IOOVDC
CA PACITOR-FXO 3,3 UF+-20X 15VOC 1A
7zPF +-5x 200v OC CER 0+.30
,oIUF +-2ox l(Jov OC CER
1000PF +-ZOX lonvDC CER
1000PF +-20x 100VOC CER
b
OIOOE-SWITCHING 15V
OIODE. SWITCHING lsV
OIOOE. SWITCHING 15V
OIOOE.SWXTCHING 15V
OIODE-SWITCHIQG 15v
7
OIOOE-SWITCHING lSV 50MA
2
:
COFE-SHIELOING BE40
CORE. SHIELDING BEAO
2s480
2S480
9170-0029
9170-0029
CO IL-MLD 10UM 1(IX QSbO .oQ50X.25LG. NoM
CCIIL-MLO U70NH IOX 0835 ,0950 x,z5LG. NoM
CO IL-MLO U70NH 10X 0.15 .0950 x.25 LG-NO~
CO IL.MLO 470NH 10X G=35 .0 Q50X.2SLG-NOM
CO IL-MLO 470NH 10X Q=35 .0950 x,25 LG.NoM
28U80
28U80
.?84.s0
28u8o
28u8o
q100-22b5
Q1OO.2255
9100-2255
9100-2255
91oo-2255
CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
120NH 10X Q83u .oQ5DX.25LG-NO*
u70NH 10% Qs35 .oQ50X.25LG-NOM
27UH 10X Q=US .OQSOX.25LG-NOM
27uH 10X Q=45 .0 Q5Dx.25LG-NOM
u70NH 10X Q=35 .0950 x.2 SLG-NOM
28480
28U80
20U80
zSl180
.28U8Q
91oo-2248
9100 -225S
91 OO-226Q
Qlo O=22bQ
Q1OO=2255
cox L-MLo a7QNH !OX 9.35 .0QsOX.25LG. NOM
Co IL-MLD u7QNH 10X Q*35 .0950 x.25 LG-NoM
CO IL.MLO U70NH 10X IA=35 .0 Q50X.25LG-NO*
CO IL.MLO 10UH 10X Q*b O .0950 X.25 LG-NOM
CO IL.MLO A170NH IOX 0=35 ,0950 X.25 LG-NOM
,28U80
28U80
.zBU80
2848o
28480
9100-2255
Q1OO-2255
91oo.2255
QIOO-22b5
Q1OO-2255
1
COIL. S-TURNS
2048o
053 U2-EIOOO1
3
TRANSISTOR PNP 91 P09300Mw FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP S1 PO*300MW FT*200MHZ
TRANSISTOR PMP S1 PO*300MW FTm ZOO MHZ
072b3
07i!b3
072b3
832248
8322U8
S322U8
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
.WESIS70R
1?0 5X .25w FC TC=-UOO/+bOO
20 5X ,25w FC TCs-UOO/+500
100 5X .125w CC TC*-270/+540
13 5X .125* CC 7CS-270/+540
51 5X .1z5w CC TCS-270/+540
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
CB1215
C82005
S81015
BB1305
BB5105
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESIS70R
RESISTOR
30 5X
30 5!s
zoo 5X
75 5%
100 5X
.125w CC TCs-270/+SfIO
,125w CC Tc=-27(J/+540
.125w CC TC=-330/+8no
.125w CC TC1-270/+5U0
.125~ CC TCU-?70/+5u0
01121
01121
011,?1
01121
01121
S83005
Bl13005
B82015
BB7505
BB1015
REs1970R
RESXSTOR
RESIS70R
RESIS70R
RkSIS70R
b,fl 5X ,125w CC TC=-120/+UOO
15 5X ,125w CC TC=-270/+540
240 5X ,125w CC TCm-330/+800
75 1X .125w F 7cSo+-lon
6.9 5X .125w CC TC0*120/+400
01121
01121
01121
2U5Ub
01121
B868G5
B81505
8B2U15
cu.1/8. To.75Flo.F
8SbBG5
;
1:
1
2
;
2
2
IL-MLO
IL-MLO
IL-MLO
IL-MLD
IL=MLO
50MA 75oPS
50MA 750 PS
50VA 7SOPS
50MA 750 PS
50MA 750 PS
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-11
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
.---, —Reference
Designation
—.. —. .,-. -..._. .—-
.“., —--------
.-. +—----
.—— ——..
. . . . . ..— —-—
HP Part
Number
; (’Jty
A5R!6
A5R1 7
bSRIR
4?.R!Q
45R>17
069!? .3113
dbqfl.t,~ul
06Q8.7P~R
06Q6.>37R
0b~8-l\ 1 I
$
7
0
v
4?. K? I
~snz?
A5R?I
b5R?u
A5R>5
o~qe.~jlj
0698.5174
ob~n.b>dl
0675-1021
06’?8.TIIJ
9
8
?
8
I
b5R2~
h%l?~~
bsk~n
06VR-3376
n
(76Q8.72~Fj
0698.3360
7
4
45!JI
~~ua
ASU3
45UU
!826-0372
185A.0059
1’958-0059
1826-037?
b5h!
?
?
1
RkSISTfl$l
RESISTOR
Mfr Part Number
100 5X .125w CC T[~-27(1/*5U[l
750 5% ,125* cc rc=-330/+900
U6U IX ,[$5,v F 1C*O+.1OO
RESIS1OR 51 5X ,125A CC lc=.270/+500
RF SISTOR 30 5% ,!?5.! CC Tc=-270/+5U0
0!1.?1
01121
2u5ub
01121
0112!
8BI015
B!37515
C3-1/8-TO-UbUR-G
tln5!05
El f13n(15
.1?5N cc Tc=.270/+5uo
,125W cc 7c=.330/+noo
.125W cc TC=.3301+RO0
,125* cc Tcs-330/*!loo
,125h cc Tc=-?70/+50v
01121
(111.?1
01121
0!!,?1
011.21
8830U5
tlH?o15
HE7515
BB1021
0blo15
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RcSISTOk
RESIS7UR
PESISTOH
PESI.$TOU
30 5%
.?00 51
750 5X
Ill lox
100 5%
1
RESISTOR 03 5x’ ,I?svf cc rc*. ?70/+5LJlr
RESJS70R L!bu 1% ,05* F TCc(l+.loo
RF. SISTOU 75 5X ,125!4 LC lCn-%70/+5fI()
01121
211S4b
01!21
en L!3(J5
C3-1/8-TO-4bUR-G
B87505
?
9
Q
?
?
2
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
TRANSISTOR ARRAY
TRANSISTOR ARRAY
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
28U80
28480
?8u8(I
?8480
182 b.0372
1858-0059
185.9-0059
]’s?6.0372
I) S3U2.601OO
b
1
C4HLE
28U80
0534,2 .bOIOO
0303.0133
(13rj~. oq70
0534? .?0101
0
Q
3
?
1
1
CON TACT. FINGER ,!3. wCI .o’+-FREL-HG7 13E-CV
ST AN OOFF. UFX .375 -l N.LG u.llo THrl
SC Rtw, CROUb D
28480
284S0
?80s0
0363-0133
0380 -0Q70
053u2.2010 I
ASSEMBLY,
VULTJPLEXER
A5 MIsCELL4NLL!US
6-12
Mfr
Code
Description
PARTS
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A6
05342-60006
1
1
OFFSET LOOP AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY
(SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60006
A6C1
A6C2
A6C3
A6C4
A6C5
A6C6
A6C7
A6C8
A6C9
A6C10
A6C11
A6C12
A6C13
0180-0228
0160-3879
0180-0210
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0210
0160-3879
0180-0228
0180-1701
0160-0125
0160-3879
0160-0162
0160-3879
6
7
6
7
7
6
7
6
2
3
7
5
7
2
6
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 22UF +-10% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100 VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 3.3UF +-20% 15VDCTA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 3.3UF +-20% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 22UF +-10% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 6,8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .022UF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
56289
28480
56289
28480
28480
56289
28480
56289
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
1500226X9015B2
0160-3879
150D335X0015A2
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D335X0015A2
0160-3879
150D226X901582
1500685X0006A2
0160-0128
0160-3879
0160-0162
0160-3879
A6CR1
A6CR2
A6CR3
A6CR4
1902-3193
1902-3193
1901-0040
1901-0040
3
3
1
1
2
DIODE-ZNR 13.3V 5% D0-7 PD=. 4W TC=+.059%
DIODE-ZNR 13.3V 5% D0-7 PD=. 4W TC=+.059%
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO=35
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO=35
28480
28480
28480
28480
1902-3193
1902-3193
1901-0040
1901-0040
A6Q1
A6Q2
A6Q3
A6Q4
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0020
1853-0020
4
7
4
4
3
1
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=150MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=150MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=150MHZ
28480
28480
28480
28480
1853-0020
1854-0071
1853-0020
1853-0020
A6R1
A6R2
A6R3
A6R4
A6R5
A6R6
A6R7
A6R8
A6R9
A6R10
A6R11
A6R12
A6R13
A6R14
A6R15
A6R16
A6R17
A6R18
A6R19
A6R20
A6R21
A6R22
A6R23
A6R24
A6R25
A6U1
A6U2
2100-2489
2100-2633
0757-0288
0757-0279
0757-0442
0757-0280
0757-0442
0757-0279
0757-0280
0757-0416
0757-0280
0757-0440
0757-0289
0757-0280
0757-0279
0757-0438
0757-0200
0757-0424
0757-0407
0757-0401
0698-3153
0757-0199
0757-0427
0757-0427
0757-0279
1820-1425
1820-0493
9
5
1
0
9
3
9
0
3
7
3
7
2
3
0
3
7
7
6
0
9
3
0
0
0
6
6
1
1
1
4
2
4
RESISTOR-TRMR 5K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1=TRN
RESISTOR-TRMR 1K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1=TRN
RESISTOR 9.90K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 3.16K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125 F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 3.16K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 511 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 7.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 13.3K 1% .125K F TC=0+-100
RESISOTR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISOTR 3.16K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125 F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.62K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 200 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 100 1% .125 F TC=+-100
RESISTOR 3.83K 1% .125 F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 21.5K 1% .125 F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.5K 1%.125W F 5C=0+-100
RESISTOR 3.16K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
IC SCHMITT-TRIG TYL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC OP AMP 8-DIP-P
30983
30983
19701
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
19701
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
01295
27014
ET50X502
ET50X102
MF4C1/8-T0-9091-F
C4-1/8-T0-3161-F
C4-1/8-T0-1002-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-1002-F
C4-1/8-T0-3161-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-511R-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-7501-F
MF4C1/8-T0-1332-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-3161-F
C4-1/8-T0-T111-F
C4-1/8-T0-5621-F
C4-1/8T0-1101-F
C4-1/8-T0-201-F
C4-1/8-T0-101-F
C4-1/8-T0-3831-F
C4-1/8-T0-2152-F
C4-1/8-T0-1501-F
C4-1/8-T0-1501-F
C4-1/8-T0-3161-F
5N74LS132N
LM307H
28480
28480
28480
1251-0600
5000-9043
5040-6852
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
A6 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
1251-0600
5000-9043
5040-6852
0
6
3
1
1
1
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-88C-8Z SQ
PIN:P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering, information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-13
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
A7
05342-60007
A7C1
A7C2
A7C3
A7C4
A7C5
A7C6
A7C7
A7C8
A7C9
A7C10
A7C11
A7C12
A7C13
A7C14
A7C15
A7C16
A7C17
A7C18
A7C19
A7C20
A7C21
A7C22
A7C23
A6C24
A7C25
A7C26
A7C27
A7C28
A7CR1
A7CR2
A7L1
A7L2
A7L3
A7L4
A7L5
A7L6
A7L7
A7L8
A7L9
A7L10
A7L11
A7Q1
A7Q2
A7Q3
A7Q4
A7Q5
A7Q6
A7R1
A7R2
A7R3
A7R4
A7R5
A7R6
A7R7
A7R8
A7R9
A7R10
A7R11
A7R12
A7R13
A7R14
A7R15
A7R16
A7R17
A7R18
A7R19
A7R20
A7R21
A7R22
A7TP1
A7U1
A7U2
A7U3
A7U4
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0155
0160-3879
0180-0155
0160-3878
0180-1701
0160-3879
0180-1701
0160-3878
1080-1701
0160-3878
0160-2879
0180-1701
0160-3875
0160-3875
1060-3878
1060-3878
0160-3879
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3878
1901-0518
1901-0518
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
1854-0345
1854-0092
1854-0092
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0345
0698-7101
0698-5426
0698-5426
0698-5180
0698-5181
0698-6294
0698-3378
0698-5075
0698-3113
0698-5172
0698-5567
0698-5174
0698-3113
0698-5565
0698-5180
0698-5180
0698-5180
0698-3378
0698-5075
0698-5172
0698-3113
0698-3379
1251-0600
1820-0630
1820-1208
1826-0372
1826-0372
6-14
C
D
Qty
2
1
Description
MIXER/SEARCH CONTROL ASSEMBLY
(SERIES 1720)
7
9
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
8
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF +-20% 20VDC TA
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
8
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF +-20% 20VDC TA
6
10
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 100VDC CER
2
4
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 6,8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
3
1
CAPACITOR-FXD 22PF +-5% 200VDC CER 0+-30
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
5
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 200VDC CER
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
5
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 200VDC CER
6
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
8
2
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
8
DIODE SCHOTTKY
9
8
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=45 .095DX.25LG-NOM
9
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=45 .095DX.25LG-NOM
4
3
COIL-MLD 100NH 10% Q=34 .095DX.25LG-NOM
9
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q-45 .095DX.25LG-NOM
9
COIL-MLD 10% Q=45 .095DC.25LG-NOM
4
COIL-MLD 100 NH 10% Q=34 .095DX.25LG-NOM
9
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=45 .095DX.25LG-NOM
9
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=45 .095DX.25LG-NOM
4
COIL-MLD 100 NH 10% Q=34 .095DX.25LG-NOM
9
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=45 .095DX.25LG-NOM
9
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=45 .095DX.25LG-NOM
8
2
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5179 SI TO-72 PD=200MA
2
2
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD*200MW FT=600MHZ
2
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD*200MW FT=600MHZ
7
2
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD*300MW FT=200MHZ
7
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PF*300MW FT=200MHZ
8
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5179 SI T0-72 PD=200MW
5
1
RESISTOR 3K 5% .125W cc TC=-350/+857
3
2
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
3
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
6
4
RESISTOR 2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
7
1
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
5
1
RESISTOR 47K 5% .125W CC TC=-466/+875
0
2
RESISTOR 51 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
8
2
RESISTOR 130 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
1
3
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
6
2
RESISTOR 13 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
3
1
RESISTOR 27K 5% .125W CC TC=-466/+875
8
1
RESISTOR 200 5% .125 CC TC=-330/+800
1
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
1
1
RESISTOR 2.2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
6
RESISTOR 2K 5% .125 CC TC=-350/+857
6
RESISTOR 2K 5% .125 CC TC=-350/+857
6
RESISTOR 2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
0
RESISTOR 51 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
8
RESISTOR 130 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
6
RESISTOR 13 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
1
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
1
1
RESISTOR 68 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
0
1
CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
3
1
IC MISC TTL
1
1
IC GATE TTL LS NOR TPL 3-INP
2
2
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
2
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
See introduction to this section for ordering, information
*Indicates factory selected value
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
28480
05342-60007
28480
28480
56289
28480
56289
28480
56289
28480
56289
28480
56289
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
04713
01295
28480
28480
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D225X0020A2
0160-3879
1S0D225X0020A2
0160-3878
150D685X0006A2
0160-3879
150D685X0006A2
0160-3878
15D0685X0006A2
0160-3878
0160-3879
150D685X0006A2
0160-3879
0160-3875
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3878
1901-0518
1901-0518
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
2N5179
1854-0092
1854-0092
1854-0071
1854-0071
2N5179
BB3025
BB1031
BB1031
BB2025
BB3625
BB4735
BB5105
BB1315
BB1015
BB1305
BB2735
BB2015
BB1015
BB2225
BB2025
BB2025
BB2025
BB5105
BB1315
BB1305
BB1015
BB8805
1251-0600
MC4044P
SN74LS27N
1826-0732
1826-0372
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
AB
ABC1
ABC2
ABC3
ABC4
ABC5
ABC6
ABC7
ABC8
ABC9
ABC10
ABC11
ABC12
ABC13
ABC14
ABC15
ABC16
ABC17
ABC20
ABC21
ABC22
ABC23
ABC24
ABC25
ABC26
ABC27
ABC28
ABC29
ABC41
ABC42
ABC43
ACL0
ABL1
ABL2
ABL3
ABLU
ABL5
ABL6
ABL7
ABL8
ABL9
ABL10
ABL11
ABL12
ACSF
ACOF
ADE1
ADE2
ADE3
ADE4
ADE5
ADE6
ADE7
ADE8
ADE9
ADE10
ADE11
ADE12
ADE13
ADE14
ADE15
ADE16
ADE17
ADE18
ADE19
ADE20
ADE21
ADE22
ADE23
ADU1
HP Part
Number
05342-60008
0160-0228
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0180-0210
0180-1701
0180-1701
0180-3075
0180-1701
0180-1701
0180-3876
0122-4069
0122-0065
1902-3179
9120-0016
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2267
9100.2268
0100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2268
0698-5174
0698-3394
0698.5172
0698-5994
0698-3376
0698-5079
0698-3374
0698-3374
0698-3342
0698-5352
0698-5635
0698-3942
0698-3942
0698-3942
0698-3942
0698-5136
0698-2212
0698-5132
0698-5615
0698-5385
0698-1576
0698-5426
2330-2489
0698-5936
7820-3622
0333-0133
0330-0020
0542-2010
C
D
Qty
1
6
6
6
5
6
5
0
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
2
2
6
2
2
6
7
7
7
8
9
9
9
9
9
4
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
7
6
6
6
5
6
8
0
6
6
6
8
5
5
5
0
6
6
6
6
6
6
1
1
14
2
2
2
6
4
3
Description
MAIN VCD ASSEMBLY (SERIES IT26)
CAPACITOR-FXD 22LF**104 15960 TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1006PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
4
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
1
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.28F +-.25RF 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
1
CAPACITOR-FXD 3.30F +-20% 15VDC TA
0
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.80F +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.80F +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.80F +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.80F +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
2
CAPACITOR: VOLTAGE VAR:29 PF/3V
CAPACITOR: VOLTAGE VAR:29 PF/3V
1
DIODE-2NR 5% 00.7 PDF, 48 TC49.0624
1
CORE, SHIELDING HEAD
4
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
3
COIL-MLD 100UH 10% Q*34 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 100UH 10% Q*34 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 100UH 10% Q*34 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q*45 .095DX, 25LG. NOM
1
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5179 31 TO-72 PD=200HW
1
TRANSISTOR NPN S1 PD=30007 FT-200MHZ
1
RES ISTOR 200 5X .125M CC TC=-130/4600
3
RESISTOR 43 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4540
3
RESISTOR 13 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4540
1
RESISTOR 560 5X .125M CC TC=-330/4800
RESISTOR 43 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4540
3
RESISTOR 130 5X .125M CC TC=-330/4800
3
RESISTOR 51 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4540
RESISTOR 43 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4800
1
RESISTOR 120 5X .125M CC TC=-330/4800
RESISTOR 13 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4540
RESISTOR 130 5X .125M CC TC=-330/4800
3
RESISTOR 4.71 5X .125M CC TC=-350/4857
RESISTOR 4.71 5X .125M CC TC=-350/4857
RESISTOR 4.71 5X .125M CC TC=-350/4857
RESISTOR 31 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4540
1
RESISTOR 100 05X .125M F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 13 5X .125M CC TC=-270/4500
RESISTOR 130 5X .125M CC TC=-330/4800
1
RESISTOR 75 5X .125M CC TC=-275/4500
RESISTOR 51 5X .125M CC TC=-RTC/4540
5
RESISTOR 10 5X .125M CC TC=-350/4859
1
RESISTOR 749 10X .125M C SIDEWADJ 1-TRW
1
RESISTOR 1.58 5X .125M CC TC=-350/4857
1
10 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
AB MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
2
CONTACT-FINGER 13-WD DD-FREE-HGT BB-CU
1
STANDARD 375-IN-LG 440THD
1
SCREW, GROUND
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
56289
28480
56289
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
24546
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
30413
01121
28480
05842-60806
1805224X441582
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3872
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3877
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
1500335X001542
1500685X000642
1500685X000642
0160-3878
1500685X000642
1500685X000642
0160-3878
0122-0065
0122-0065
1902-3171
0170-0016
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2265
9100-2268
9100-2268
9100-2247
9100-2268
9100-2268
2N5179
1854-0071
BB2015
BB4303
BB1305
BB5615
BB4305
BB1315
BB5105
BB4305
BB1215
BB1305
BB1315
BB4725
BB4725
BB4725
BB5105
C3-1/8-TO-100R-G
BB1305
BB1315
BB7505
BB5105
BB1031
BB50X502
BB1525
1828-0372
28480
28480
28480
0383-0133
0380-0970
05342-20101
6-15
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A9
05342-60009
4
1
MAIN LOOP AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY
S(SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60009
A9C1
A9C2
A9C3
A9C4
A9C5
A9C6
A9C7
A9C8
A9C9
A9C10
A9C11
A9C12
A9C13
A9C14
A9C15
A9C16
A9C17
A9C18
A9C19
0160-4084
0160-0165
0180-0210
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-1701
0160-3879
0160-0301
0160-0153
0160-0160
0160-4084
0140-0200
0180-0228
0180-0210
0160-3879
0160-0153
0180-0228
0160-0137
0160-3879
8
8
6
7
7
P
7
4
4
3D
8
0
6
6
7
4
6
4
7
2
1
2
5
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .056UF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR-FXD 3.3UF +-20% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD.01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .012UF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR-FXD 8200PF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 390PF +-5% 300VDC MICA
CAPACITOR-FXD 22UF +-10% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 3.3UF +-20% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR-FXD 22UF +-10% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .33UF +-20% 25VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
72136
56289
56289
28480
28480
56389
28480
28480
0160-4084
0160-0165
150D335X0015A2
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D685X0006A2
0160-3879
0160-0301
0160-0153
0160-0160
0160-4084
DM15F391J0300WV1CR
150D226X901582
150D335X001542
0160-3879
0160-0153
150D226X9015H2
0160-0137
0160-3879
A9CR1
A9CR2
A9CR3
A9CR4
1902-0049
1901-0040
1901-0040
1902-0049
2
1
1
2
2
2
DIODE-ZNR 6.19V 5% DO-7 PD.4W TC=+.022%
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
DIODE-ZNR 6.19V 5% DO-7 PD=.4W TC*+-22%
28480
28480
28480
28480
1902-0049
1901-0040
1901-0040
1902-0049
A9L1
A9L2
A9L3
9140-0131
9140-0131
9140-0131
5
5
5
3
COIL-MLD 10MM 5% Q=80 .24DX.74LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10MM 5% Q=80 .24DX.74LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10MM 5% Q=80 .24DX.74LG-NOM
28480
28480
28480
9140-0131
9140-0131
9140-0131
A9Q1
A9Q2
A9Q3
A9Q4
1853-0020
1853-0020
1853-0020
1854-0071
4
4
4
7
3
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=150MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=150MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=150MHZ
TRANSIS TOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
28480
28480
28480
28480
1853-0020
1853-0020
1853-0020
1854-0071
A9R1
A9R2
A9R3
A9R4
A9R5
A9R6
A9R7
A9R8
A9R9
A9R10
A9R11
A9R12
A9R13
A9R14
A9R15
A9R16*
A9R17
A9R18
A9R19
0757-0279
0698-6123
0757-0280
0757-0199
0698-5184
0757-0199
0698-6123
0698-5184
0698-3446
0757-0279
0757-0280
0698-3150
0757-0290
0757-0198
0757-0418
0683-1065
0757-0283
0757-0280
0757-0283
0
9
3
3
0
3
9
0
3
0
3
6
5
3
9
7
6
3
6
2
2
3
3
2
RESISTOR 3.16K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 20K 5% .125W CC TC=-466/+875
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125 F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 21.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 6.2K 5j% .125W CC TC=-350+857
RESISTOR 21.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 20K 5% .125W CC TC=-466/+857
RESISTOR 6.2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 383 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 3.16K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.37K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 6.19K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 21.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 619 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10M 5% .25W FC TC=-900/+1000
RESISTOR 2K 1% .125 F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
24546
01121
24546
24546
01121
24546
01121
01121
24546
24546
24546
24546
19701
24546
24546
01121
24546
24546
24546
C4-1/8-T0-3161-F
BB2035
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-2152-F
BB6225
C4-1/8-T0-2152-F
BB2035
BB6225
C4-1/8-T0-383R-F
C4-1/8-T0-3161-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-2371-F
M4C1/8-T0-6191-F
C4-1/8-T0-2152-F
C4-1/8-T0-619R-F
C81065
C4-1/8-T0-2001-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-2001-F
A9S1
1820-1325
5
1
IC SW CMDS BILATL QUAD
01928
CD4066AE
A9TP1
1251-0600
0
1
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-S2 SQ
28480
1251-0600
A9U1
A9U2
1820-1112
1820-0493
8
6
1
1
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC OP AMP 8-DIP-P
01295
27014
SN74LS74N
LM307N
28480
28480
5000-9043
5040-6852
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
A9 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
5000-9043
5040-6852
6
3
1
1
PIN: P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering, information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-16
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A10
05342-60010
7
1
DIVIDE-BY-N ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60010
A10C1
A10C2
HA10C3D
A10C4
A10C5
A10C6
A10C7
A10C8
A10C9
A10C10
A10C11
A10C12
A10C13
A10C14
A10C15
A10C16
A10C17
A10C18
A10C19
A10C20
A10C21
0180-1701
0180-0106
0180-1701
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0180-1701
0180-1701
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3875
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
2
9
2
6
6
6
2
2
6
6
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
1
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPA CITOR-FXD 60UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-20% 6VDCTA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 22PF +-5% 200VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
56289
56289
56289
28480
28480
28480
56289
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
150D685X0006A2
150D606X0006B2
150D685X0006A2
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
150D685X0006A2
150D685X0006A2
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3875
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
0160-3878
A10L1
A10L2
A10L3
A10L4
9100-2268
9100-1788
9100-1788
9100-1788
9
6
6
6
1
3
COIL,MLD 22UH 10% Q=45 .095DX .25LG-NOM
CHOKE-WIDE BAND ZMAX=680 OHM@ 180 MHZ
CHOKE-WIDE BAND ZMAX=680 OHM@ 180 MHZ
CHOKE-WIDE BAND ZMAX=680 OHM@ 180 MHZ
28480
2114
2114
2114
9100-2268
VK200 20/48
VK200 20/48
VK200 20/48
A10R1
A10R2
A10R3
A10R4
A10R5
A10R6
A10R7
A10R8
A10R9
A10R10
A10R11
0675-1021
0698-5996
0698-8073
0698-3114
0698-6242
0698-3380
0698-5177
0698-7101
0698-5565
0698-3376
0675-1021
8
2
2
2
3
4
1
5
1
8
8
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 560 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 1.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 300 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 1.2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 75 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 820 5% .125 cc TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 3K 5% .125 CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 2.2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 43 5% .125W CC TC-270/+540
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
BB1021
BB5615
BB1625
BB3015
BB1225
BB7505
BB8215
BB3025
BB2225
BB4305
BB1021
A10TP1
1251-0600
0
1
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
1251-0600
A10U1
A10U2
A10U3
A10U4
A10U5
A10U6
A10U7
A10U8
A10U9
A10U10
A10U11
A10U12
A10U13
A10U14
A10U15
A10U16
A10U17
1820-1251
1820-0630
1820-0069
1820-1112
1820-1225
1820-0736
1820-0693
1820-1429
1820-1429
1820-1196
1820-1195
1820-1888
1820-1429
1820-1429
1820-1196
1820-1195
1820-1196
6
3
2
8
4
0
8
0
0
8
7
5
0
0
8
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
IC CNTR TTL L8 DECD ASYNCHRO
IC MISC TTL
IC GATE TTL NAND DUAL 4-INP
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC FF ECL D-M/S DUAL
IC CNTR ECL BIN DUAL
IC FF TTL S D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD SYNCHRO
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD SYNCHRO
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
IC PRESCR EDL
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD SYNCHRO
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD SYNCHRO
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
01295
04713
01295
01295
04713
28480
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
04713
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
SN75LS196N
MC4044P
SN7420N
SN74LS74N
MC10231P
1820-0736
SN74S74N
SN74LS160N
SN74LS160N
SN74LS174N
SN74LS175N
MC12013L
SN74LS160N
SN74LS160N
SN74LS174N
SN74LS175N
SN74LS174N
28480
28480
5000-9043
5040-6852
15
1
3
2
1
A10 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
5000-9043
5040-6Y852
6
3
1
1
PIN: P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering, information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-17
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A11
05442-60011
8
1
IF LIMITER ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60011
A11C1
A11C2
A11C3
A11C4
A11C5
A11C6
A11C7
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0490
0180-0490
7
7
7
7
7
4
4
5
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
90201
90201
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
TDC686K006WLF
TDC686K006WLF
A11CR1
A11CR2
1901-0535
1901-0535
9
9
2
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
22840
22840
1901-0535
1901-0535
A11L1
A11L2
A11L3
9100-2247
9100-2265
9100-2265
4
6
6
1
2
COIL-MLD 100NH 10% Q=34 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 10% Q=60 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 10% Q=60 .095DX.25LG-NOM
28480
28480
28480
9100-2247
9100-2265
9100-2265
A11R1
A11R2
A11R3
A11R4
A11R5
A11R6
A11R7
A11R8
A11R9
A11R10
A11R11
A11R12
A11R13
A11R14
2100-3207
0698-7102
0698-5176
0698-7964
0698-3113
0698-5996
0698-3111
0698-7185
0698-7185
0698-3113
0698-7026
0875-1021
0698-5993
2100-3352
1
6
0
8
1
2
9
5
5
1
3
8
9
7
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
RESISTOR-TRMR 5K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRN
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 510 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 100K 5% .125W CC TC=-466/+875
RESISTOR 100 5% .1125 CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 560 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 30 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 220K 5% .125W CC TC=-600/+1137
RESISTOR 220K 5% .125W CC TC=-600/+1137
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 91 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 8.2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR-TRMR 1K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRN
28480
01121
01121
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
2100-3207
BB5125
BB5115
0698-7964
BB1015
BB5615
BB3005
BB2245
BB2245
BB1015
BB9105
BB1021
BB8225
2100-3352
A11TP2
A11TP3
A11TP4
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
0
0
0
3
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
A11U1
A11U2
1826-0065
1826-0372
0
2
1
1
IC 311 COMPARATOR 8-DIP-P
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
01295
28480
SN72311P
1826-0372
28480
28480
5000-9043
5040-6852
2
1
1
1
1
A11 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
5000-9043
5040-6852
6
3
1
1
PIN: P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering, information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-18
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
A12
A12C1
A12C2
A12C3
A12C4
A12C5
A12C6
A12C7
A12C8
A12C9
A12C10
A12C11
A12C12
A12C13
A12C14
A12C15
A12C16
A12C17
A12C18
A12C19
A12C20
A12C21
A12C22
A12C23
A12C24
A12CR1
A12CR2
A12CR3
A12CR4
A12L1
A12L2
A12L3
A12L4
A12L5
A12L6
A12L7
A12Q1
A12R1
A12R2
A12R3
A12R4
A12R5
A12R6
A12R7
A12R8
A12R9
A12R10
A12R11
A12R12
A12R13
A12R14
A12R15
A12R16
A12R17
A12R18
A12R19
A12R20
A12R21
A12R22
A12R23
A12R24
A12R25
A12TP1
A12TP2
A12TP3
A12TP4
A12TP5
A12TP6
A12TP7
A12TP8
A12TP9
A12TP10
HP Part
Number
05342-60012
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-2262
0160-3877
0160-2262
0160-3879
0160-3879
0150-0115
0160-4084
0180-0490
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0491
0180-0491
0180-0490
0180-0490
0160-3872
1901-0535
1901-0535
1901-0535
1901-0040
9100-2250
9100-2250
9100-2250
9100-2250
9100-2250
9100-1788
9100-1788
1854-0345
0698-7102
2100-2489
0698-3111
0698-3457
0757-0402
0757-0402
2100-2574
0698-7026
0698-7964
0698-5176
0757-0407
2100-2489
0757-0442
0698-3457
0757-0397
0698-7102
0698-3380
0698-8368
0698-5174
0698-3381
0698-3111
0698-5174
0698-3114
0698-3114
0675-1021
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
9
6
7
7
7
0
5
0
7
7
7
8
4
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
5
4
4
0
9
9
9
1
9
9
6
6
6
6
6
8
6
9
9
6
1
1
3
3
8
0
6
9
9
6
3
6
4
8
8
5
9
8
2
2
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
12
IF DETECTOR ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 16PF +-5% 500VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 16PF +-5% 500VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 27PF +-10% 500VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF+-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF+-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF+-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF+-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF+-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 10UF +-20% 25VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 10UF +-20% 25VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2PF +-25PF 200VDC CER
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
COIL-MLD 180NH 10% Q=34 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 180NH 10% Q=34 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 10% Q=60 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 10% Q=60 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 10% Q=60 .095DX.25LG-NOM
CHOKE-WIDEBAND ZMAX=680 OHM@ 180MHZ
CHOKE-WIDEBAND ZMAX=680 OHM@ 180MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5079 SI TO-72 PD=200MW
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR-TRMR 5K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRN
RESISTOR30 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 316K 1% .125W F TC=-+-100
RESISTOR 110 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 110 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR-TRMR 500 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRN
RESISTOR 91 5% .125w CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 100K 5% .125W CC TC=-466/+875
RESISTOR 510 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+600
RESISTOR 200 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR-TRMR 5K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRN
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 316K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 68.1 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 75 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 82 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 200 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 150 5% .125W CC TC=-300/+800
RESISTOR 30 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 200 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 300 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 300 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
90201
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
90201
90201
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
02114
02114
04713
01121
30983
01121
28480
24546
28546
30983
01121
28480
01121
24546
30983
24546
28480
24546
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
2
1
1
1
3
2
1
3
12
2
3
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
11
Mfr Part Number
05342-60012
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-2262
0160-3877
0160-2262
0160-3879
0160-3879
0150-0115
0160-4084
TDC686K006WLF
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0491
0180-0491
5DC686K006WLF
5DC686K006WLF
0160-3872
1901-0535
1901-0535
1901-0535
1901-0040
9100-2250
9100-2250
9100-2265
9100-2265
9100-2265
VK200 20/48
VK200 20/48
2N5179
BB5125
ET50X502
BB3005
0698-3457
C4-1/8-T0-111-F
C4-1/8-T0-111-F
ET50X501
BB9105
0698-7964
BB5115
C4-1/8-T0-201-F
ET50X502
C4-1/8-T0-1002-F
0698-3457
C4-1/8-T0-68R1-F
BB5125
BB7505
BB8205
BB2015
BB1515
BB3005
BB2015
BB3015
BB3015
BB1021
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
See introduction to this section for ordering, information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-19
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
A12TP11
1251-0600
0
A1201
A1202
A1203
A1204
A1205
1826-0065
1826-0372
1820-1225
1826-0372
1820-0765
0
2
4
2
5
1
2
1
A1206
A1207
A1208
A1209
A12010
1820-1322
1820-1197
1820-1285
1820-1285
1820-1193
2
9
6
6
5
1
1
2
A12011
A12012
A12013
A12014
A12015
1820-0174
1820-1255
1820-1112
1820-1204
1820-1193
0
0
8
9
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.1µ-MM-88C-37 SQ
28480
1251-0600
IC 311 COMPARATOR 8-DIP-P
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
IC FF ECL D-V/S DUAL
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
IC CNTR TTL BIN ASYNCHRO NEG-EDGE-TRIG
01295
28480
04713
28480
0295
SN72311P
1826-0372
MC10231P
1826-0372
SN74197N
IC GATE TTL S NOR QUAD 2-INP
IC GATE TTL LS NAND GUAD 2-INP
IC GATE TTL LS AND-OR-INV 4-INP
IC GATE TTL LS AND-OR-INV 4-INP
IC NTR TTL LS BIN ASYNCHRO
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
SN74502N
SN74LS00N
SN74LS54N
SN74LS54N
SN74LS197N
IC INV TTL HEX
IC INV TTL HEX 1-INP
IC FF TTL L8 0-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC GATE TTL L8 NAND DUAL 4-INP
IC CNTR TTL LS BIN ASYNCHRO
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
SN7400N
SN74368N
SN74LS74N
SN74L320N
SN74LS197N
28480
28480
5000-9043
5040-6852
A12 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
5000-9043
5040-6852
6
3
1
1
PIN, P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-20
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
A13
A13C1
A13C2
A13C3
A13C4
A13C5
A13C6
A13C7
A13C8
A13C9
A13C10
A13C11
A13C12
A13C13
A13C14
A13C15
A13C16
A13C17
A13C18
A13C19
A13C20
A13C21
A13C22
A13C23
A13C25
A13CR1
A13CR2
A13L1
A13L2
A1301
A1302
A13R1
A13R2
A13R3
A13R4
A13R5
A13R6
A13R7
A13R8
A13R9
A13R10
A13R11
A13R12
A13R13
A13R14
A13R15
A13R16
A13R17
A13R18
A13R19
A13R20
A13R21
A13R22
A13R23
A13R24
A13R25
A13R26
A13R27
A13R28
A13R29
A13R30
A13R31
A13R32
A13R33
A13R34
A13TP1
A13TP2
A13TP3
A13TP4
A13TP5
HP Part
Number
05342-60013
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-1746
0160-3879
0180-0106
0160-3879
0180-0106
1901-00400
1901-0040
9100-1788
9100-1788
1A54-0071
1854-0071
1810-0055
0683-4725
0683-4725
0683-5115
1810-0055
0683-2225
0683-4725
0683-4725
0683-1025
0683-1035
0683-4725
0683-1635
0683-6825
0683-2735
0683-4725
0683-1035
0683-6825
0683-1035
0683-3915
0683-1215
0683-1035
0683-2015
0683-3325
0683-5125
0683-6825
0683-6825
0683-1035
0683-1035
0683-1315
0683-5115
0683-3315
0683-1025
0683-5115
0683-5115
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
C
D
Qty
0
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
7
9
7
9
1
1
6
6
7
7
5
2
2
6
5
3
2
2
9
1
2
7
7
0
2
1
7
1
0
9
1
9
6
8
7
7
1
0
0
6
4
9
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
1
21
1
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
1
2
6
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
Description
COUNTER ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1SUF +-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPA CITOR-FXD 60UF +-20% 6VDC TA
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
CHOKE-WIDE BAND ZXAX=680 OHM@ 180 MHZ
CHOKE-WIDE BAND ZXAX=680 OHM@ 180 MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=300MN FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=300MN FT=200MHZ
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-SPCG
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 510 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-SPCG
RESISTOR 2.2K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 1K 5% .25M FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 16K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4800
RESISTOR 6.8K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 27K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4800
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 6.8K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 390 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 120 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 200 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 3.3K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RES ISTOR 6.8K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 6.8K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
RESISTOR 130 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 510 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 330 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 1K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 510 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
RESISTOR 510 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
Mfr
Code
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
56289
28480
56289
28480
28480
02114
02114
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
05342-60013
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D156X9D20H2
0160-3879
150D606X000682
0160-3879
150D606X000682
1901-0040
1901-0040
VK200 20/48
VK200 20/48
1854-0071
1854-0071
1810-0055
084725
084725
085115
1810-0055
082225
084725
084725
081025
081035
084725
081635
086825
082735
084725
081035
086825
081035
083915
081215
081035
082015
083325
085125
086825
086825
081035
081035
081315
085115
083315
081025
085115
085115
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-21
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
A13TP6
A13TP7
A13TP8
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
0
0
0
A13U1
A13U2
A13U3
A13U4
A13U5
A13U6
A13U7
A13U8
A13U9
A13U10
A13U11
A13U12
A13U13
A13U14
A13U15
A13U16
A13U17
A13U18
1820-0634
1820-0634
1820-1199
1820-1112
1820-1238
1820-1238
1820-1199
1820-1197
1820-1238
1820-1238
1820-1950
1820-1225
1820-1251
1820-1251
1820-1052
1820-1225
1820-1251
1820-1251
7
7
1
8
9
9
1
9
9
9
2
4
6
6
5
4
6
6
2
5000-9043
5040-6852
6
3
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
2
4
1
Description
Mfr
Code
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-B3C-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
IC CNTR MOS DECD
IC CNTR MOS DECD
IC INV TTL LS MEX 1-INP01295
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC MUXR/DATA-SEL TTL LS 4-TO-1-LINE DUAL
IC MUXR/DATA-SEL TTL LS 4-TO-1-LINE DUAL
IC INV TTL LS HEX 1-INP01295
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC MUXR/DATA-SEL TTL LS 4-TO-1-LINE DUAL
IC MUXR/DATA-SEL TTL LS 4-TO-1-LINE DUAL
IC GATE ECL OR-NOR 3-INP
IC FF ECL D-M’S DUAL
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO
IC XLTR ECL/TTL ECL-TO-TTL QUD 2-INP
IC FF ECL D-M/S DUAL
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO
28480
1820-0634
28480
1820-0634
SN74LS04N
01295
SN74LS74N
01295
SN74LS253N
01295
SN74LS253N
SN74LS804N
01295
SN74LS00N
01295
SN74LS253N
01295
SN74LS253N
04713
MC10212P
04713
MC10231P
01295
SN74LS196N
01295
SN74LS196N
04713
MC10125L
04713
MC10231P
01295
SN74LS196N
01295
SN74LS196N
A13 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
PIN: P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
28480
28480
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*indicates factory selected value
6-22
Mfr Part Number
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
5000-9043
5040-6852
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
A14
A14C1
A14C2
A14C3
A14C4
A14C5
A14C6
A14C7
A14C8
A14C9
A14C10
A14C11
A14C12
A14C13
A14C14
A14C15
A14C16
A14C20
A14C21
A14C22
A14C23
A14C24
A14C25
A14C26
A14C27
A14C28
A14CR1
A14CR2
A14CR3
A14L1
05342-60014
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0106
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-2743
0160-2743
0160-2743
0160-3879
0160-3651
0160-0106
0160-3651
0160-2743
1
7
7
7
7
9
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
7
3
9
3
2
1
13
0160-3878
0160-0571
0160-3878
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0040
9100-1788
6
0
6
1
1
1
6
2
1
A14Q1
1854-0574
A14R1
A14R2
A14R3
A14R4
A14R5
A14R6
A14R7
A14R8
A14R9
A14R10
A14R11
A14R12
A14R13
A14R14
A14R15
A14R16
A14R17
A14R18
A14R19
A14R20
A14R21
A14R22
A14R23
A14R24
A14S1
A14S2
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
05342-60014
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D606X0006B2
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-2743
0160-2743
0160-2743
0160-3879
0160-3651
150D606X0006B2
0160-3651
0160-2743
1
PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1840)
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF+-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 33PF +-10% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 33PF +-10% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 33PF +-10% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 68PF +-10% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF+-20% 6VOC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 68PF +-10% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 33PF +-10% 200VDC CER
NOT ASSIGNED
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 470PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 100VDC CER
DIODE-SWUTCGUBG 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
DIODE-SWUTCGUBG 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
DIODE-SWUTCGUBG 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
CHOKE-WIDE BAND 2MAX+680 OHM@ 180 VHZ
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
02114
0160-3878
0160-0571
0160-3878
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0040
VK200 20/48
5
1
TRANSISTOR NPN S1 PO+500MW FT=125MHZ
28480
1854-0574
0698-5426
1810-0055
0698-7027
1810-0164
0698-5426
1810-0055
0698-5999
0698-5999
0675-1021
0675-1021
0698-5999
0698-8127
0675-1021
0698-6283
0698-5426
0698-8127
0675-1021
0698-6283
0698-5999
0698-5426
0698-5180
3
5
4
7
3
5
5
5
8
8
5
7
8
2
3
7
8
2
5
3
6
4
2
1
1
01121
28480
01121
28480
01121
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
BB1031
1810-0055
BB1061
1810-0164
BB1031
1800-0055
BB4725
BB4725
BB1021
BB1021
BB4725
BB2205
BB1021
BB1005
BB1031
BB2205
BB1021
BB1005
BB4725
BB1031
BB2025
0698-5562
0675-1021
3101-1856
3101-1841
8
8
5
8
1
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-SPCG
RESISTOR 10M 10% .125W CC TC=-666/+1262
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-SPCG
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-SPCG
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .125W TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .125W TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .125W TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 22 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 10 5% .125W CC TC=-120/+400
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 22 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 10 5% .125W CC TC=-120/+400
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .125W TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 2K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
NOT ASSIGNED
RESISTOR 120 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W TC=-330/+800
SWITCH-SL 8-1A-NS DIP-SLIDE-ASSY .1A
SWITCH-SL 4-1A-NS DIP-SLIDE-ASSY .1A
01121
01121
28480
28480
BB1215
BB1021
3101-1850
3101-1841
A14TP1
A14TP2
A14TP3
A14TP4
A14TP5
A14TP6
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
A14U1
A14U2
A14U3
A14U4
A14U5
1818-0698
1820-1081
1820-1081
1818-0697
1820-1197
8
0
0
7
9
1
2
IC ROM MOS 2K x 8 18324
IC DRVR TTL BUS DRVR QUAD 1-INP
IC DRVR TTL BUS DRVR QUAD 1-INP
28480
18324
18324
28480
01295
1818-0698
NBT26B
NBT26B
1818-0697
8N74LS02N
2
4
2
3
4
5
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-23
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
A14U6
A14U7
A14U8
A14U9
1820-1144
1818-0706
1820-1255
1820-1202
6
9
0
7
1
1
1
1
IC GATE TTL LS NOR QUAD 2-INP
IC ROM MOS 3K X 8
IC INV TTL HEX 1-INP
IC GATE TTL LS NAND TPL 3-INP
01295
28480
01295
01295
A14U10
A14U11
A14U12
A14U13
A14U14
A14U15
1820-1199
1820-1425
1818-0135
1820-1208
1820-1240
1820-1199
1
6
8
3
3
1
3
1
1
1
2
IC INV TTL LS HEX 1-INP01295
IC SCHMITT-TRIG TTL L8 NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC NMOB 1K NAM STAT 360-NS 3-8
IC GATE TTL LS OR QUAD 2-INP
IC DCDR TTL S 3-TO-8-LINE 3-INP
IC INV TTL LS HEX 1-INP01295
8N74LS09N
01295
8N74LS132N
04713
MCM68A10L
01295
8N74LS32N
01295
8N74S138N
8N74LS04N
A14U16
A14U17
A14U18
A14U19
A14U20
1820-1368
1820-1072
1820-1368
1820-1112
1820-1240
6
9
6
8
3
2
1
1C DRVR TTK BUS DRVR HEX 1-INP
IC DCDR TTL S 2-TO-8-LINE DUAL 2-INP
IC DRVR TTL BUS DRVR HEX 1-INP
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC DCDR TTL S 3-TO-8-LINE 3-INP
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
A14U21
A14U22
A14U23
A14U24
1820-1480
1820-1197
1820-1804
1820-1199
3
9
5
1
1
IC MICPROC NMOS 8-B17
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC DRVR CLOCK DRVR
IC INV TTL LS HEX 1-INP01295
04713
MC6800L
01295
8N74LS00N
04713
MP06842
8N74LS04N
1
1
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
8N74LS02N
1818-0706
8N74368N
8474LS10N
8N74166N
8N748139N
8N74366N
8N74LS74N
8N74S138N
A14 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
1200-0552
5000-9043
5040-6852
4
6
3
1
1
1
SOCKET-IC 40-CONT DIP-SLDR
PIN,P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
A15
(SEE TABLE 6-8, OPTION 011)
A16
(SEE TABLE 6-5, OPTION 002) OR
TABLE 6-6, OPTION 003)
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-24
28480
28480
28480
1200-0552
5000-9043
5040-6852
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
A17
A17C1
A17C2
A17C3
A17C4
A17C5
A17C6
A17C7
A17C8
A17C9
A17C10
A17C11
A17C12
A17C13
A17C14
A17C15
A17C16
A17C17
A17C18
A17C19
05342-60017
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0291
0160-3879
0180-0106
0160-3879
4
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
7
9
7
1
26
A17CR1
1902-3182
0
A17Q1
A17Q2
1854-0560
1853-0036
A17R1
A17R2
A17R3
A17R4
A17R5
A17R6
A17R7
A17R8
A17R9
A17R10
A17R11
A17R12
A17R13
A17R14
A17R15
A17R16
A17R17
A17R18
A17R19
A17R20
A17R21
A17R22
A17R23
A17R24
A17R25
A17R26
A17R27
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
TIMING GENERATOR (SERIES 1720)
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1UF+-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF+-20% +VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
56289
28480
05342-60017
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D105X903582
0160-3879
150D606X000682
0160-3879
1
DIODE-ZNR 12.1V 5% DO-7 PD+.4W TC=+.064%
28480
1902-3182
9
2
1
1
TRANSISTOR NPN SI DARL PO=310MW
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=310MW FT=250MHZ
04713
28480
SPS6740
1853-0036
0683-1035
0698-5174
0698-5426
0698-5426
0698-5426
0698-5426
0675-1021
0675-1021
0698-7102
0698-5181
0698-7102
0698-5566
0698-7102
0698-5181
0698-5566
0698-5426
0698-5181
0698-5566
0698-7097
0698-5994
0675-1021
0698-5999
0698-5999
0683-1435
0698-5566
0698-5181
0698-7102
1
8
3
3
3
3
8
8
6
7
6
2
6
7
2
3
7
2
8
0
8
5
5
1
2
7
6
2
1
5
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC=-400/+700
RESISTOR 200 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 2.4K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 2.4K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 2.4K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 1M 5% .125W CC TC=-600/+1137
RESISTOR 6.8K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC=-400/+700
RESISTOR 2.4K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 5.1K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
CB1035
BB2015
BB1031
BB1031
BB1031
BB1031
BB1021
BB1021
BB5125
BB3625
BB5125
BB2425
BB5125
BB3625
BB2425
BB1031
BB3625
BB2425
BB1055
BB6825
BB1021
BB4725
BB4725
CB1035
BB2425
BB3625
BB5125
A17TP1
A17TP2
A17TP3
A17TP4
A17TP5
A17TP6
A17TP7
A17TP8
A17TP9
A17TP10
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
A17U1
A17U2
A17U3
A17U4
A17U5
A17U6
A17U7
A17U8
A17U9
A17U10
1820-1430
1820-1430
1820-1197
1820-1433
1820-1433
1820-1211
1820-1433
1820-1197
1820-1112
1820-1202
3
3
9
6
6
8
6
9
8
7
2
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
SN74LS161N
SN74LS161N
SN74LS00N
SN74LS164N
SN74LS164N
SN74LS86N
SN74LS164N
SN74S00N
SN74LS74N
SN74LS10N
1
3
3
4
7
4
1
1
2
IC CNTR TTL LS BIN SYNCHRO POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC CNTR TTL LS BIN SYNCHRO POS-EDGE-TRIG
5
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
3
IC SHF-RGTR TTL LS R-S SERIAL-IN PRL-OUT
IC SHF-RGTR TTL LS R-S SERIAL-IN PRL-OUT
1
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC SHF-RGTR TTL LS R-S SERIAL-IN PRL-OUT
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
2
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
1
IC GATE TTL LS NAND TPL 3-INP
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-25
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A17U11
A17U12
A17U13
A17U14
A17U15
1820-1442
1820-1197
1820-1197
1820-1197
1820-1112
7
9
9
9
8
1
ICCNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO
ICGATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
ICGATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
ICGATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
8N74L8290N
8N74L800N
8N74L800N
8N74L800N
8N74L800N
A17U16
A17U17
A17U18
A17U19
A17U20
1820-1180
1820-1225
1820-1254
1820-1196
1820-1255
0
4
9
8
0
1
1
1
1
1
IC CNTR MOS
IC FF ECL D-M/S DUAL
IC BFR TTL NDN-INV HEX 1-INP
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
IC INV TTL MEX 1-INP
50088
04713
27014
01295
01295
MK5009P
MC10231P
DM8095N
8N74L8174N
8N74368N
28480
28480
5000-9003
5040-6852
A17 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
5000-9043
5040-6852
6-26
6
3
2
2
PIN, P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
1
A18
05342-60018
5
A18C1
A18C2
A18C3
A18C4
A18C5
0180-0106
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0106
0160-3879
A18C6
A18C7
A18C8
A18C9
A18C10
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
TIME BASE BUFFER ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60018
9
7
7
9
7
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF+-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF+-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
56289
28480
28480
56289
28480
150D066X000682
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D606X000682
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-1714
0160-3879
7
7
7
7
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 330UF+-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D337X900682
0160-3879
A18C11
A18C12
A18C13
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-1714
7
7
7
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 330UF+-10% 6VDC TA
28480
28480
56289
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D337X900682
A18CR1
A18CR2
1901-0040
1901-0040
1
1
2
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
28480
28480
1901-0040
1901-0040
A18L1
A18L2
A18L3
9140-0179
9140-0179
9140-0179
1
1
1
3
COIL-MLD 22UM 10% Q=75 .155DX.375LG-NDM
COIL-MLD 22UM 10% Q=75 .155DX.375LG-NDM
COIL-MLD 22UM 10% Q=75 .155DX.375LG-NDM
28480
28480
28480
9140-0179
9140-0179
9140-0179
A18R1
A18R2
A18R3
A18R4
A18R5
0698-5178
0698-5181
0698-5178
0698-5181
0698-3113
2
7
2
7
1
2
RESISTOR 1.5K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 1.5K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
BB1525
BB3625
BB1525
BB3625
BB1015
A18R6
0690-5181
7
RESISTOR 3.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
01121
BB3625
A18TP1
1251-0600
0
CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SG
28480
1251-0600
A18U1
A18U2
A18U3
A18U4
A18U5
1820-0693
1820-1251
1820-1251
1824-1074
1820-1056
8
6
6
1
9
IC FF TTL S D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO
IC DRVR TTL NOR QUAD 2-INP
IC SCHMITT-TRIG TTL NAND QUAD 2-INP
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
SN74S74N
SN74LS196N
SN74LS196N
SN74128N
SN74132N
28480
28480
5000-9043
5040-6852
2
1
1
2
1
1
A18 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
5000-9043
5040-6852
6
3
PIN,P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTRO, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-27
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A19
05342-60019
6
1
PRIMARY POWER ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60019
A19C1
A19C2
A19C3
A19C4
A19C5
0180-2802
0180-2802
0180-2216
0180-1975
0180-1975
6
6
4
2
2
2
1
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 140UF+50-10% 250VDC AL
CAPACITOR-FXD 140UF+50-10% 250VDC AL
CAPACITOR-FXD 820PF +-5% 300VDC MICA
CAPACITOR-FXD 4UF+50-10% 350VDC AL
CAPACITOR-FXD 4UF+50-10% 350VDC AL
56289
56289
28480
56289
56289
39D147F250M94
39D147F250M94
0160-2216
390405F350EE4
390405F350EE4
A19C6
A19C7
0180-0106
0180-0106
9
9
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF+-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF+-20% 6VDC TA
56289
56289
150D606X000682
150D606X000682
A19CR1
A19CR2
1906-0069
1990-0543
4
6
1
1
DIODE-FW BRDG 40DV 14
OPTO-ISOLATOR LED-PXSTR IF=150MA-MAX
28480
28480
1906-0069
1990-0543
A19DS1
A19DS2
2140-0018
2140-0018
0
0
2
LAMP-GLOW A9A-C 90/58VDC 700UA T-2-BULB
LAMP-GLOW A9A-C 90/58VDC 700UA T-2-BULB
0046G
0046G
AGA-C
AGA-C
A19Q1
A19Q2
1854-0311
1854-0311
8
8
2
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N4240 SI TO-LL PD=35W
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N4240 SI TO-LL PD=35W
01928
01928
2N24240
2N4240
A19R1
A19R2
A19R3
A19R4
A19R5
0686-1045
0686-1055
0686-1045
0686-1005
2100-0552
9
1
9
1
3
3
1
RESISTOR 100K 5% .5W CC TC=0+882
RESISTOR 1M 5% .5W CC TC=0+1000
RESISTOR 100K 5% .5W CC TC=0+882
RESISTOR 10 5% .5W CC TC=0+412
RESISTOR-TRMR 50 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRN
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
E81045
E81055
E81045
E81005
2100-0552
A19R6
A19R7
A19R8
A19R9
A19R10
0683-3005
0698-0021
0813-0001
0686-1045
0686-1005
9
4
6
9
1
1
1
1
RESISTOR 30 5% .25W FC TC=-400/+500
RESISTOR 3.3 10% .5W CC TC=0+412
RESISTOR 1K 5% 3W PW TC=0+-20
RESISTOR 100K 5% .5W CC TC=0+882
RESISTOR 10 5% .5W CC TC=0+412
01121
01121
28480
01121
01121
C83005
E83361
0813-0001
E81045
E81005
A19R11
0686-1005
1
RESISTOR 10 5% .5W CC TC=0+412
01121
E81005
A19RT1
A19RT2
0839-0006
0839-0006
5
5
2
THERMISTOR DISC 10-DGN TC=-3.8X/C-DEG
THERMISTOR DISC 10-DGN TC=-3.8X/C-DEG
28480
28480
0839-0006
0839-0006
A19RV1
A19RV2
0837-0106
0837-0106
2
2
2
VARISTOR 150VRMS
VARISTOR 150VRMS
28480
28480
0837-0106
0837-0106
A19T1
A19T2
9100-3066
9100-3066
7
7
2
TRANSFORMER, POWER
TRANSFORMER, POWER
28480
28480
9100-3006
9100-3066
A19TP4
A19TP5
A19TP6
A19TP7
A19TP8
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
0
0
0
0
0
5
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
3
1
A19 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
6-28
0380-0342
1205-0085
1400-0486
1400-0776
7120-1340
9
8
7
8
6
4
2
3
1
4
STANDOFF-RVT-ON .125-IN-LG 6-32TMD
HEAT SINK TO-66-PKG
BRACKET-RTANG .312-LG X .375-LG .312-WD
CABLE TIE .01-4-DIA .19-WD NYL
WARNING LABEL
00000
28480
28480
28480
28480
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
5000-9043
5040-6852
05342-00019
6
3
0
1
1
1
PIN,P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
SHIELD, PROTECTIVE
28480
28480
28480
5000-9043
5040-6852
05342-00019
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
1205-0083
1400-0486
1400-0776
7120-1340
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A20
05342-60020
9
1
SECONDARY POWER ASSEMBLY (SWERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60020
A20C1
A20C2
A20C3
A20C4
A20C5
0180-1780
0160-0576
0160-0576
0180-1780
0160-0573
7
5
5
7
2
2
3
CAPACITOR-FXD 500UF+75-10% 10VDC AL
CAPACITOR-FXD .10F +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .10F +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 500UF+75-10% 10VDC AL
CAPACITOR-FXD 4700PF +-20% 100VDC CER
56289
28480
28480
56289
28480
39D507G010EJ4
0160-0576
0160-0576
39D507G010EJ4
0160-0573
A20C6
A20C7
A20C8
A20C9
A20C10
0180-1746
0180-0160
0180-1746
0180-0160
0160-0576
5
5
5
5
5
2
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 15RF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FSD 22UF+-20% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 15RF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FSD 22UF+-20% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
56289
56289
56289
56289
28480
150D156X902082
150D226X0035R2
150D156X902082
150D226X0035R2
0160-0576
A20C11
A20C12
0180-0651
0180-0651
9
9
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 1700UF+75-10% 10VDC AL
CAPACITOR-FXD 1700UF+75-10% 10VDC AL
09023
09023
UFT-1700-10
UFT-1700-10
A20CR1
A20CR2
A20CR3
A20CR4
A20CR5
1906-0079
1906-0051
1901-0784
1901-0784
1902-0522
6
4
0
0
6
1
1
2
DIODE-FW BRDG 100V 10A
DIODE-FW BRDG 100V 1A
1
DIODE-ZNR 1N53408 6V 5% PO=5W IF=1UA
28480
28480
28480
28480
04173
1906-0079
1906-0051
1901-0784
1901-0784
1N53408
A20DS1
1990-0485
5
1
LED-VISIBLE LUM-INT=800UCD IF=30MA-MAX
28480
5082-4984
A20L1
A20L2
A20L3
A20L4
A20L5
9100-3065
9140-0250
9140-0250
9100-3065
9140-0249
6
9
9
6
6
2
2
COIL 1MM Z=25 .3125DX,9LG=NDM SOR=100KHZ
COIL 1MM Z=25 .3125DX,9LG=NDM SOR=100KHZ
1
COIL 30UM Q=25 .4DX.875LG-NDM SRF=100KHZ
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
9100-3065
9140-0250
9140-0250
9100-3065
9140-0249
A20Q1
A20Q2
1826-0214
1826-0106
1
0
1
1
IC V RGLTR TD-220
IC 7815 V RGLTR TO-22004713
04713
MC7915CT
MC7815CP
A20R1
A20R2
A20R3
0683-4305
0684-0271
0683-1015
4
7
7
1
1
1
RESISTOR 43 5% .25W FC TC=-400/+500
RESISTOR 2.7 10% .25W FC TC=-400/+500
RESISTOR 100 5% .25W FC TC=-400/+500
01121
01121
01121
CB4305
CB27G1
CB1015
A20T1
9100-3064
5
1
TRANSFORMER, POWER
28480
9100-3064
1
A20 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
1205-0219
1251-0400
3050-0003
3050-0082
5000-9043
0
0
3
8
6
2
1
1
2
1
HEAT SINK SGL TO-66-PKG
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BBC-SZ SG
WASHER-FL NM NO. 6 .141-IN-ID .375-IN-00
WASHER-FL NM ND. 4 .116-IN-ID .188-IN-00
PIN,P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1205-0219
1251-0600
3050-0003
3050-0082
5000-9043
05342-00012
5040-6852
3
3
2
1
HEAT SINK, SOLID
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
28480
28480
05342-00012
5040-6852
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-29
TM 11-6625-3014-14
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C Qty
D
A21
A21C1
A21C2
A21C3
A21C4
A21C5
A21C6
A21C7
A21C8
A21C9
A21C10
A21C11
A21C12
A21C13
A21C14
A21C15
A21C16
A21C17
A21C18
A21C19
A21C20
A21C21
A21C22
A21CR1
A21CR2
A21CR3
A21CR4
A21CR5
A21DS1
A21L1
A21Q1
A21Q2
A21Q3
A21Q4
A21Q5
A21Q6
A21Q7
A21Q8
A21Q9
A21Q10
A21Q11
A21Q12
A21Q13
A21R1
A21R2
A21R3
A21R4
A21R5
A21R6
A21R7
A21R8
A21R9
A21R10
A21R11
A21R12
A21R13
A21R14
A21R15
A21R16
A21R17
A21R18
A21R19
A21R20
A21R21
A21R22
A21R23
A21R24
A21R25
A21R26
A21R27
A21R28
A21R29
A21R30
05342-60021
0180-0229
0180-0229
0180-0159
0180-0159
0180-0229
0180-0210
0180-0210
0180-0210
0180-0210
0180-1746
0180-1701
0180-0197
0160-0576
0180-0491
0180-2373
0180-2373
0160-0576
0160-3878
0160-0945
0180-2373
0160-0161
0180-0229
1902-0522
1906-0096
1902-0522
1902-0644
1901-0040
1990-0486
9100-2276
1854-0635
1854-0634
1854-0215
1853-0326
1853-0036
1853-0363
1826-0275
1826-0275
1854-0246
1853-0058
1854-0246
1853-0058
1854-0215
0757-0419
0757-0417
0698-3441
0757-0419
0757-0419
0698-3155
0698-5808
0698-3444
0811-1827
0757-0419
0698-3155
0811-1827
0757-0346
0698-3441
0698-3441
0698-0082
2100-3154
0757-0465
0698-0084
0757-0280
0698-0082
0757-0280
0698-3155
0698-3155
0757-0465
0698-3150
2100-3211
0757-0419
0698-3150
0698-0084
0
7
7
2
2
7
6
6
6
6
5
2
8
5
5
6
6
5
6
2
6
4
7
6
7
6
3
1
6
9
9
8
1
3
2
8
4
4
8
8
8
8
1
0
8
8
0
0
1
5
1
2
0
1
2
2
8
8
7
7
6
9
3
7
3
1
1
6
6
7
0
6
9
Description
1
4
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
5
1
3
5
1
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
2
2
1
SWITCH DRIVE ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1804)
CAPACITOR - FXD 33UF+-10% 10VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 33UF+-10% 10VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 220UF+-20% 10VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 220UF+-20% 10VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 33UF+-10% 10VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 3.3UF+-20% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 3.3UF+-20% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 3.3UF+-20% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 3.3UF+-20% 15VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 15UF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 6.8UF+-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 2.2UF +-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXD 10UF+-20% 25VDC TA
CAPACITOR - FXD 580UF+150-10% 35VDC AL
CAPACITOR - FXD 580UF + 150-10% 35VDC AL
CAPACITOR - FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXD 100PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXD 910PF +-5% 100VDC MICA
CAPACITOR - FXD 580UF +150-10% 35VDC AL
CAPACITOR - FXD .01UF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR - FXD 33UF +-10% 10VDC TA
DIODE - ZNR 1N5340B 6V 5% PD=5W IR=1UA
DIODE - FW BRDG 200V 2A
DIODE - ZNR 1N5340B 6V 5% PD=5W IR=1UA
DIODE - ZNR 1N5363B 30V 5% PD=5W TC=+29MV
DIODE - SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
LED - VISIBLE LUM - INT=1MCD IF=20MA-MAX
COIL-MLD 100UH 10% Q=50 .095DX .25 LG - NOM
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=50W
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=1W FT=50MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=350MW FT=300MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=1W FT=50MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=310MW FT=250MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=50W
IC 78L12A V RGLTR TO-92
IC 78L12A V RGLTR TO-92
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=350MW FT=250MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=350MW FT=250MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=350MW FT=300MHZ
RESISTOR 681 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 562 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 215 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 681 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 681 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4.64K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 316 1% .125W F TC= 0+-100
RESISTOR .1 10% 3W PW TC=0+-90
RESISTOR 681 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4.64K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR .1 10% 3W PW TC=0+-90
RESISTOR 10 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 215 1% .125W F TC= 0+-100
RESISTOR 215 1% .125W F TC= 0+-100
RESISTOR 464 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR-TRMR 1K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 17-TRN
RESISTOR 100K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.15K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 464 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=+-100
RESISTOR 4.64K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4.64K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 100K 1% .125W F TC=+-100
RESISTOR 2.37K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR-TRMR 1K 10% C TOP-ADJ 1-TRN
RESISTOR 681 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.37K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.15K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-30
Mfr
Code
28480
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
04713
04713
04713
28480
28480
28480
28480
03508
04713
04713
28480
28480
03508
04713
04713
04713
07263
04713
07263
04713
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
28480
24546
24546
28480
24546
24546
24546
24546
02111
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
28480
24546
24546
24546
Mfr Part Number
05342-60021
150D336X901082
150D336X901082
150D227X001082
150D227X001082
150D336X901082
150D335X0015A2
150D335X0015A2
150D335X0015A2
150D335X0015A2
150D156X9020B2
150D685X0006A2
150D225X9020A2
0160-0576
0180-0491
0180-2373
0180-2373
0160-0576
0160-3878
0160-0945
0180-2373
0160-0161
150D336X9010B2
1N5340B
MDA202
1N5340B
1902-0644
1901-0040
5082-4684
9100-2276
D44H5
MPS-U01
SPS 3611
1853-0326
1853-0036
X45H281
MC78L12ACP
MC78L12ACP
SPS 233
S32248
SPS 233
S32248
SPS 3611
C4-1/8-T0-681R-F
C4-1/8-T0-562R-F
C4-1/8-T0-215R-F
C4-1/8-T0-681R-F
C4-1/8-T0-681R-F
C4-1/8-T0-4641-F
C4-1/8-T0-4001-F
C4-1/8-T0-316R-F
0811-1827
C4-1/8-T0-681R-F
C4-1/8-T0-4641-F
0811-1827
C4-1/8-T0-10R0-F
C4-1/8-T0-215R-F
C4-1/8-T0-215R-F
C4-1/8-T0-4640-F
43P102
C4-1/8-T0-1003-F
C4-1/8-T0-2151-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-4640-F
C4-1/8-T0-1001-F
C4-1/8-T0-4641-F
C4-1/8-T0-4641-F
C4-1/8-T0-1003-F
C4-1/8-T0-2371-F
2100-3211
C4-1/8-T0-681R-F
C4-1/8-T0-2371-F
C4-1/8-T0-2151-F
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
A21R31
A21R33
A21R37
0698-0084
0757-0465
0698-3155
9
6
1
A21TP1
A21TP2
A21TP3
A21TP4
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
0
0
0
0
11
A21U1
A21U2
A21U3
A21U4
1820-0493
1820-0493
1826-0355
1826-0428
6
6
1
9
2
1
1
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
RESISTOR 2.15K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 100K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4.60K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
24546
24546
24546
CW-1/8-TO-2151-F
CW-1/8-TO-1003-F
CW-1/8-TO-4641-F
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
IC OP AMP 8-DIP-P
IC OP AMP 8-DIP-P
IC 555 8-DIP-P
IC 3524 MODULATOR 16-DIP-C
27014
27014
28480
01295
LM307N
LM307N
182640355
SG3524J
28480
28480
28480
1205-0273
5000-9043
5040-6852
A21 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
1205-0273
5000-9043
5040-6852
2
1
1
2
1
1
HEAT SINK SGL PLSTC-PWR-PXG
PIN,P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-31
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A22
05342-60022
1
1
MOTHERBOARD ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60022
A22J1
A22J2
1200-0785
1200-0785
5
5
2
SOCKET-IC 24-CONT DIP DIP-SLDR
SOCKET-IC 24-CONT DIP DIP-SLDR
28480
28480
1200-0785
1200-0785
A22Y1
9100-3067
8
1
TRANSFORMER, POWER
28480
9100-3067
A22W1
A22W2
A22W3
A22W4
A22W5
05342-60102
05342-60121
05342-60103
05342-60109
05342-60104
8
1
8
5
0
1
1
1
1
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, 1.0 MAG
CABLE ASSEMBLY, LF MB
CABLE ASSEMBLY, IF INT
CABLE ASSEMBLY, MICRO INT
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SHIELD
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
05342-60102
05342-60121
05342-60103
05342-60109
05342-60104
A22W6
A22W7
05342-60112
05342-60111
0
9
1
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SHIELD
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER
(INCLUDES LINE SWITCH)
28480
28480
05342-60112
05342-60111
A22XA3
A22XA4
A22XA5
A22XA6
A22XA7
1251-1626
1251-2034
1251-2034
1251-2034
1251-1626
2
8
8
8
2
5
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 12-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 10-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 10-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 10-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 12-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-1626
1251-2034
1251-2034
1251-2034
1251-1626
A22XA8
A22XA9
A22XA10
A22XA11
A22XA12
1251-1626
1251-1626
1251-1365
1251-1626
1251-1365
2
2
6
2
6
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 12-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 12-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 22-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 12-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 22-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-1626
1251-1626
1251-1365
1251-1626
1251-1365
A22XA13
A22XA14A
A22XA14B
A22XA15A
A22XA15B
1251-1365
1251-2026
1251-2026
1251-2026
1251-2026
6
8
8
8
8
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 22-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 18-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 18-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 18-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 18-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-1365
1251-2026
1251-2026
1251-2026
1251-2026
A22XA16
A22XA16B
A22XA17
A22XA18
A22XA19
1251-2026
1251-2034
1251-2026
1251-2034
1251-2582
8
8
8
8
1
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 18-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 10-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 18-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 10-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 24-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-2026
1251-2034
1251-2026
1251-2034
1251-2582
A22XA20
A22XA21
A22XA24
1251-1365
1251-1365
1251-2034
6
6
8
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 22-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 22-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 10-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
28480
28480
28480
1251-1365
1251-1365
1251-2034
0380-0383
1251-2205
5040-0170
8
5
6
5
2
1
STANDOFF-RVT-ON .125-IN-LG 6-32-THQ
POLARIZING KEY-PC EDGE CONN
GUIDE, PLUG-IN PC BOARD
28480
28480
28480
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
A23
0960-0400
2
1
POWER MODULE, UNFILTERED
28480
0960-0444
A24
05341-60047
9
1
10 MHZ OSCILLATOR ASSY (SERIES 1804)
28480
05341-60047
A24C1
A24C2
0160-2143
0180-0552
6
9
1
1
CAPACITOR-FXD 2000PF +80-20% 1MVDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 220UF+-20% 10VDC TA
28480
28480
0160-2143
0180-0552
A24L1
9100-2430
7
1
COIL-MLD 220UM 10% Q=55 .156DX.375LG-NOM
28480
9100-2430
A24Y1
0960-0394
1
1
CRYSTAL
28480
0960-0394
6-32
5
6
6
1
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
1251-2205
5040-0170
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
C
D
Qty
A25
A25C1
A25C2
A25C3
A25C4
A25C5
A25C6
A25C7
A25C8
A25C9
A25C10
A25C11
A25C12
A25C13
A25C14
A25C15
A25C16
A25C17
A25C18
A25C19
A25C20
A25C21
A25C22
A25C23
A25C24
A25C25
A25C26
A25C27
A25C28
A25C29
A25C30
A25C31
A25C32
A25C33
A25C34
A25C35
A25C36
A25CR1
A25CR2
A25CR3
A25CR4
A25CR5
05342-60025
0180-0230
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-2263
0121-0445
0180-0230
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-2260
0160-2265
0160-2260
0160-0576
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-0230
0180-0230
0160-3879
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-3029
0160-3029
1901-0535
1901-0535
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0040
4
0
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
5
0
7
7
7
6
8
3
8
5
7
7
7
0
0
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
1
1
1
1
4
15
A25L1
A25L
A25L3
A25L4
A25L5
A25L6
A25L7
A25L8
A25L9
A25L10
A25L11
A25L12
A25L13
A25L14
05342-80002
05342-80002
9100-0346
9100-0346
05342-80002
05342-80002
9100-0346
9100-2265
9100-2265
9100-2247
9100-2247
9100-2247
9100-2265
9100-2265
9
9
0
0
9
9
0
6
6
4
4
4
6
6
4
A25Q1
A25Q2
A25Q3
A25Q4
A25Q5
A25Q6
A25R1
A25R2
A25R3
A25R4
A25R5
A25R6
A25R7
A25R8
A25R9
A25R10
1854-0591
1854-0591
1854-0071
1854-0071
1853-0058
1853-0020
0698-3113
0698-5176
0675-1021
0698-3114
0698-8073
0698-8354
0698-6000
0698-6123
0698-6681
05342-80004
6
6
7
7
8
4
1
0
8
2
2
2
1
9
4
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
8
2
2
3
3
4
3
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
PREAMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1804)
CAPACITOR-FXD 1UF+-20% 50VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 13PF +-5% 500VDC CER 0+-30
CAPCITOR-V TRMR-CER 4.5-20PF 160V
CAPACITOR-FXD 1UF+-20% 50VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 13PF +-5% 500VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD 13PF +-5% 500VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD 13PF +-5% 500VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPA CITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1UF+-20% 50VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1UF+-20% 50VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 100PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 7.5PF +-.5PF 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 7.5PF +-.5PF 100VDC CER
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DD-35
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DD-35
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DD-35
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
05342-60025
150D105X0050A2
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-2263
0121-0445
150D105X0050A2
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-2260
0160-2265
0160-2260
0160-0576
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D105X0050A2
150D105X0050A2
0160-3879
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-3029
0160-3029
1901-0535
1901-0535
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0040
COI, 3-TURNS
COI, 3-TURNS
COIL-MLD 50NH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 50NH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COI, 3-TURNS
COI, 3-TURNS
COIL-MLD 50NH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 100NH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 100NH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 100NH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
COIL-MLD 10UH 20% Q=40 .095DX.25LG-NOM
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
05342-80002
05342-80002
9100-0346
9100-0346
05342-80002
05342-80002
9100-0346
9100-2265
9100-2265
9100-2247
9100-2247
9100-2247
9100-2265
9100-2265
25403
25403
28480
28480
07263
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
8FR-90
8FR-90
1854-0071
18544-0071
832248
1853-0020
BB1015
BB5115
BB1021
BB5015
BB1625
BB2715
BB2725
BB2035
BB91G5
05342-80004
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PO=180MW FT=4GHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PO=180MW FT=4GHZ
2
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PO=300MW FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PO=300MW FT=200MHZ
1
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PO=300MW FT=200MHZ
1
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PO=300MW FT=150MHZ
3
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
2
RESISTOR 510 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
1
RESISTOR 1K 10% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
1
RESISTOR 300 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
1
RESISTOR 1.6K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
1
RESISTOR 270 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
1
RESISTOR 2.7K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
1
RESISTOR 20K 5% .125W CC TC=-466/+875
2
RESISTOR 9.1 5% .125W CC TC=-120/+400
4
RESISTOR, MODIFIED
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-33
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
RESISTOR, MODIFIED
RESISTOR 560 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR, MODIFIED
RESISTOR, MODIFIED
RESISTOR 560 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
28480
01121
28480
28480
01121
05342-80004
BB5615
05342-80004
05342-80004
BB5615
RESISTOR 130 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 9.1 5% .125W CC TC=-120/+400
RESISTOR 30 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 82.5 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+500
01121
01121
01121
24546
01121
BB1315
BB9165
BB3005
C4-1/8-T0-82R5-F
BB1015
A25R11
A25R12
A25R13
A25R14
A25R15
05342-80004
0698-5996
05342-80004
05342-80004
0698-5996
1
2
1
1
2
A25R16
A25R17
A25R18
A25R19
A25R20
0698-5075
0698-6681
0698-311
0757-0399
0698-3113
8
4
9
5
1
1
A25R21
A25R22
A25R23
A25R24
A25R25
0698-5562
0757-0180
0757-0038
0698-3113
0698-3111
8
2
3
1
9
2
1
1
RESISTOR 120 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 31.6 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 100 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 30 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
01121
28480
24546
01121
01121
BB1215
0757-0180
C4-1/8-70-5111-F
BB1015
BB3005
A25R26
A25R27
A25R28
A25R29
A25R30
0698-3378
0698-5562
2100-3207
0757-0485
0757-0485
0
8
1
0
0
1
RESISTOR 51 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 120 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR-TRMR 5K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRM
RESISTOR 681K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 681K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
BB5105
BB1215
2100-3207
0757-0485
0757-0485
A25R31
A25R32
A25R33
A25R34
A25R35
2100-3274
0757-0469
0698-7966
0698-5176
0698-7241
2
0
0
0
4
1
1
1
RESISTOR-TRMR 10K 10% C SIDE-ADJ 1-TRN
RESISTOR 150K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 680K 5% .125W CC TC=-60/+1137
RESISTOR 510 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 1.62K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
28480
24546
01121
01121
28480
2100-3274
C4-1/8-T0-1503-F
BB6845
BB5115
0698-7241
A25R36
A25R37
A25R38
A25R39
A25R40
0757-0027
0698-7259
0698-7253
0698-7259
0698-7253
6
4
8
4
8
1
2
3
RESISTOR 365 1% .5W F TC=0+-25
RESISTOR 9.09K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 9.09K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
28480
24546
24546
24546
24546
0757-0027
C3-1/8-T0-9091-G
C3-1/8-T0-5111-G
C3-1/8-T0-9091-G
C3-1/8-T0-5111-G
A25R41
A25R42
A25R43
A25R44
A25R45
0698-7250
0698-7253
0698-7243
0698-5994
0698-8373
5
8
6
0
5
1
RESISTOR 3.83K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.96K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 6.8K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 470K 5% .125W CC TC=-600/+1137
24546
24546
24546
01121
01121
C3-1/8-T0-3831-G
C3-1/8-T0-5111-G
C3-1/8-T0-1961-G
BB6825
BB4745
A25TP1
A25TP2
A25TP3
A25TP4
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
0
0
0
0
4
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.114-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.114-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.114-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.114-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
28480
28480
28480
28480
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
A25U1
A25U2
A25U3
A25U4
1826-0372
1826-0372
1826-0065
1826-0054
2
2
0
5
2
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
IC 5 GHZ LIMITER/AMP
IC 311 COMPARTOR 8-DIP-P
IC GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2-INP
28480
28480
01295
01295
1826-0372
1826-0372
8N72311P
8N7400N
A25W1
A25W2
A25W3
05342-60108
05342-60107
05342-60107
4
3
3
1
2
CABLE ASSEMBLY, RF
CABLE ASSEMBLY, PREAMP/DRIVER
CABLE ASSEMBLY, PREAMP/DRIVER
28480
28480
28480
05342-60108
05342-60107
05342-60107
1200-0647
1250-0901
1400-0486
2190-0033
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
A25 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
1200-0647
1250-0901
1400-0486
2190-0033
2950-0007
8
2
7
4
4
1
2
3
1
1
SOCKET-XSTR 3-CONT TO-18 DIP-SLDR
CONNECTOR-RF SMB M SGL-HOLE-FR 50-DNM
BRACKET-RTANG .312-LG X .375-LG .312-WD
WASHER-LK INTL 7 5/16 IN .314-IN-ID
NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 5/16-32-THD .094-IN-TMK
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
05342-00006
05342-00007
05342-20103
5
6
5
1
1
1
COVER, PREAMPLIFIER28480
BRACKET, SAMPLER
SHELL, CONNECTOR
05342-00006
28480
05342-00007
28480
05342-20103
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-34
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A26
05342-60026
5
1
SAMPLER DRIVER ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60026
A26C1
A26C2
A26C3
A26C4
A26C5
0160-4536
0160-3879
0160-3876
0160-3879
0160-3876
5
7
4
7
4
1
6
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 27PF +-5% 500VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 47PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 47PF +-20% 200VDC CER
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
0160-4536
0160-3879
0160-3876
0160-3879
0160-3876
A26C6
A26C7
A26C8
A26C9
A26C10
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-1745
0160-3879
0160-3879
7
7
4
7
7
1
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1.5UF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
0160-3879
0160-3879
150D155X9020A2
0160-3879
0160-3879
A26C11
A26C12
A26C13
A26C14
0160-0576
0160-4542
0160-4082
0160-4082
5
3
6
6
1
1
2
CAPACITOR-FD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 15PF +-5% 50VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 1000PF 20% 200V CER
CAPACITOR-FDTHRU 1000PF 20% 200V CER
28480
28480
28480
28480
0160-0576
0160-4502
0160-4082
0160-4082
A26CR1
A26CR2
1901-0796
1901-0179
4
7
1
1
DIODE-SWITCHING 15V 50MA 750PS D0-7
28480
28480
1901-0796
1901-0179
A26J1
A26J2
05342-20109
05342-20108
1
0
1
1
SUPPORT, CONNECTOR OUTPUT
SUPPORT, CONNECTOR INPUT
28480
28480
05342-20109
05342-20108
A26L1
9100-0346
0
1
COIL-MLD 50NH 20% Q=40 .0950K.25LG-NDM
28480
9100-0346
A26Q1
1854-0071
7
1
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
28480
1854-0071
A26R1
A26R2
A26R3
A26R4
A26R5
A26R6
A26R7
A26R8
0757-0384
0698-7101
0698-5179
0757-0180
0698-3111
0698-4132
0698-6648
0698-3437
8
5
3
2
9
6
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RESISTOR 20 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 3K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 1.8K 5% .125W CC TC=-350/+857
RESISTOR 31.6 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 30 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 62 5% .125W CC TC=-270/+540
RESISTOR 620 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800
RESISTOR 133 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
19701
01121
01121
28480
01121
01121
01121
24546
MF4C1/8-T0-20R0-F
BB3025
BB1825
0757-0180
BB3005
BB6205
BB6215
C4-1/8-T0-133R-F
A26TP1
A26TP2
0360-1682
0360-1682
0
0
2
TERMINAL-STUD SGL-TUR PRESS-MTG
TERMINAL-STUD SGL-TUR PRESS-MTG
28480
28480
0360-1682
0360-1682
A26U1
1858-0060
2
1
TRANSISTOR, ARRAY
28480
1858-0060
A26W1
05342-20107
9
1
CABLE, COAX, OUTPUT28480
05342-20107
A26 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
0380-0486
0520-0127
0570-0007
0570-0024
1205-0011
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
SPACER-RND .5-IN-LG .086-IN-ID
SCREW-MACH 2-56 .188-IN-LG PAN-HD-POZI
SCREW-MACH 0-80 .188-IN-LG FIL-HD-SLT
SCREW-MACH 0-80 .25-IN-LG FIL-HD-SLT
HEAT SINK TO-5/TO-39-PKG
28480
00000
00000
00000
28480
0380-0486
1250-0901
1250-1353
05342-00009
05342-00011
05342-00013
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONNECTOR-RF SM8 M SGL-HOLE-FR 50.0MM
CONNECTOR-RF SMA M UNMTD 50.0MM
CONTACT, DIODE
HOUSING, SAMPLER DRIVER
COVER, SAMPLER DRIVER
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1250-0901
1250-1353
05342-00009
05342-00011
05342-00013
05342-00016
05342-40001
1
1
1
1
HEAT SINK, SILICONE
DIODE MOLDER
28480
28480
05342-00016
05342-40001
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
1205-0011
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-35
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
CHASSIS PARTS
B1
3160-0209
4
1
FAN.TBAX 45.CAM 115V 50/60.HZ1.5-THK
28480
3160-0209
F1
F1
2110-0360
2110-0421
2
6
1
1
FUSE .75A 250V SLO-BLO 1.25X.25 UL IEC
FUSE .375A 250V SLO-BLO 1.25X.25 UL
75915
75915
313.750
313.375
FL1
9135-0042
6
1
FILTER-LINE WIRE LEAD-TERMS
28480
9135-0042
J2
J3
J4
J5
1250-0083
1250-0083
1250-0083
1250-0083
1
1
1
1
4
CONNECTOR-RF BNC FEM SGL-HOLE-FR 50-OHM
CONNECTOR-RF BNC FEM SGL-HOLE-FR 50-OHM
CONNECTOR-RF BNC FEM SGL-HOLE-FR 50-OHM
CONNECTOR-RF BNC FEM SGL-HOLE-FR 50-OHM
28480
28480
28480
28480
1250-0083
1250-0083
1250-0083
1250-0083
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
5020-8815
5020-8816
5020-8837
5004-0423
5061-1940
0
1
6
0
4
1
1
2
1
1
CASTING, FRONT FRAME
CASTING, REAR FRAME28480
STRUT, CORNER
TOP COVER
BOTTOM COVER
28480
5020-8815
5020-8816
28480
5020-8837
28480
5001-0423
28480
5061-1940
MP6
MP7
MP8
MP9
MP11
05342-00001
5342-20102
05342-20405
5001-0439
5040-7201
0
4
7
8
8
1
1
1
2
4
PANEL, REAR
PANEL, FRONT
HOUSING, MAIN
TRIM, FRONT SIDE
FOOT (STANDARD)
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
05342-00001
05342-20102
05342-20105
5001-0439
5040-7201
MP12
MP13
MP14
MP16
MP17
5040-7203
05342-00002
05342-00003
05342-00004
05342-00005
0
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
TRIM: TOP ½
PANEL, SUB
COVER, CASTING
SHIELD, PROTECTIVE
SHIELD, PFI
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
5040-7203
05342-00002
05342-00003
05342-00004
05342-00005
MP18
MP19
05342-00008
05342-00010
7
1
2
1
BRACKET, MOTHER BOARD
PLATE, PATCH
(DELETE FOR OPTION 011)
28480
28480
05342-00008
05342-00010
P1
1251-4735
0
1
CONNECTOR 42-PIN PRESSURE TYPE
28480
1251-4735
S1
S2
S3
S4
3103-0056
3101-2306
3104-2306
9
2
2
1
2
PART OF A22W7 (LINE SWITCH)
SWITCH-THRM FXD +167F 154 OPN-DN-RISE
SWITCH-SL DPDT-N3 STD .54 125VAC/DC
SWITCH-SL DPDT-N3 STD .54 125VAC/DC
28480
28480
28480
3103-0056
3101-2306
3101-2306
U1
5088-7022
1
1
SAMPLER ASSEMBLY
28480
5088-7022
W1
W2
W3
8120-2482
8120-0664
05342-60105
0
6
1
1
1
1
CABLE ASSY-COAX 5,512-IN-LG
CABLE ASSY 26AWG 24-CNDCT
CABLE ASSEMBLY, IF EXT
28480
28480
28480
8120-2482
8120-0664
05342-60105
MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
0370-1005
0530-0592
0520-0139
0624-0078
1400-0015
2
8
0
6
8
1
3
2
2
3
KNOB-BASE-PTR 3/8 JGK .125-IN-ID
RETAINER-PUSH ON TUB EXT .14-IN-DIA
SCREW-MACH 2-56 .875-IN-LG PAN-MD-POZI
SCREW-TAG 6-32 .375-IN-LG PAN-MD-POZI
CLAMP-CABLE .25-DIA .375-WD STL
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
0340-1005
0510-0592
1400-0053
1460-1345
2680-0172
3050-0050
8120-1378
4
5
1
0
1
1
2
2
1
1
CLAMP-CABLE .172-DIA .375-WD NYL
TILT STAND SST
SCREW-MACH 10-32 .375-IN-LG 100 DEG
WASHER-FL MTLC 7/16 IN .5-IN-ID
CABLE ASSY 18AWG 3-CNDCT JGK-JKT
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1400-0053
1460-1345
2680-0172
3050-0050
8120-1378
5040-7219
5040-7220
5060-9604
05342-00020
8
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
STRAP, HANDLE, CAP-FRONT
STRAP, HANDLE, CAP-REAR
28480
28480
28480
28480
5040-7219
5040-7220
5060-9804
05342-00020
GUARD, CABLE
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*indicates factory selected value
6-36
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
0624-0078
1400-0015
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-4. Option 001 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation
A24
HP Part
Number
10544-60011
C
D
Qty
1
Description
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR ASSEMBLY
Mfr
Code
28480
Mfr Part Number
10544-60011
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-37
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-5. Option 002 Replaceable Parts
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
C
D
A16
05302-60038
9
A16C1
A16C2
A16C3
A16C4
A16C5
A16C6
A16C7
A16C8
A16C9
A16C10
A16C11
A16C12
A16C13
A16C14
A16C15
A16C16
A16C17
A16C18
A16C19
A16C20
A16C21
A16C22
A16C23
A16C24
A16C25
A16C26
A16C27
A16C28
A16C29
A16C30
A16C31
A16C32
A16C33
A16C34
A16C35
A16C36
A16C37
A16C38
A16C39
A16CR1
A16CR2
A16CR3
A16CR4
A16CR5
A16K1
A16L1
A16L2
A16Q1
A16Q2
A16Q3
A16Q4
A16Q5
A16Q6
A16Q7
A16Q8
A16Q9
A16Q10
A16Q11
A16Q12
A16Q13
A16R1
A16R2
A16R3
A16R4
A16R5
A16R6
A16R7
A16R8
A16R9
A16R10
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-0490
0160-0579
0160-0576
0160-4401
0160-0576
0180-0491
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-0576
0180-0491
0160-0576
0180-0491
0160-3879
0140-0159
0160-2205
0160-3704
0140-0190
0170-0040
0170-0040
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-0579
0160-0128
0160-3879
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-3879
0160-0128
0160-3879
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-3879
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0731
1902-0064
1901-0040
0490-0617
9140-0131
9140-0131
1853-0058
1853-0058
1853-0058
1854-0246
1854-0246
1854-0246
1853-0058
1854-0246
1853-0058
1854-0691
1854-0691
1854-0691
1850-0071
0698-7260
0698-7260
0757-0399
0698-7260
0698-7260
0698-7260
0698-7234
0698-4243
0698-7252
0757-0407
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
4
5
5
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
7
8
1
7
7
9
9
5
4
5
5
4
5
5
5
3
7
5
5
7
1
1
7
1
1
4
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
7
7
7
5
6
7
6
6-38
Qty
1
Description
AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT ASSEMBLY
(SERIES 1812)
10
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
3
CAPACITOR=FXD 68UF +-10% 6 VDC TA
15
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
1
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-10% 100VDC POLYP
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
3
CAPACITOR=FXD 10UF +-20% 25VDC TA
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .10UF +-20% 25VDC TA
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD 10UF +-20% 25VDC TA
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
1
CAPACITOR=FXD 3000PF +-2% 300VDC MICA
1
CAPACITOR=FXD 120PF +-5% 300VDC MICA
1
CAPACITOR=FXD .015UF +-5% 50VDC
1
CAPACITOR=FXD 39PF +-5% 300VDC MICA
2
CAPACITOR=FXD .47UF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR=FXD .47UF +-10% 200VDC POLYE
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD 66UF +-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
1
CAPACITOR=FXD 2.2UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
3
DIODE=SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
DIODE=SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
1
DIODE=PWR RECT 400V 1A
1
DIODE=ZNR 7.5V 5% DO=7 PO=4W TC=+.05%
DIODE=SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
1
RELAY=REED 1C 250MA 28VDC 5VDC-COIL
2
COIL-MLO 10MH 5% Q=60 .240X.74LG.NOM
COIL-MLO 10MH 5% Q=60 .240X.74LG.NOM
5
TRANSISTOR PNP 81 PD=300MN FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP 81 PD=300MN FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP 81 PD=300MN FT=200MHZ
4
TRANSISTOR PNP 81 PD=350MN FT=250MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP 81 PD=350MN FT=250MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN 81 PD=350MN FT=250MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP 81 PD=300MN FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN 81 PD=350MN FT=250MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP 81 PD=300MN FT=200MHZ
3
TRANSISTOR NPN 81 TO-92 PD=350
TRANSISTOR NPN 81 TO=92 PD=350MN
TRANSISTOR NPN 81 TO=92 PD=350MN
1
TRANSISTOR NPN 81 PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
9
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
2
RESISTOR 82.5 1% .125W F TC=0=-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
1
RESISTOR 825 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
2
RESISTOR 1.96K 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
1
RESISTOR 4.64K 1% .05W F TC=0=-100
1
RESISTOR 200 1% .125W F TC=0+=100
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
28480
05342-60038
28480
0160-3879
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
72136
28480
28480
72136
56269
56269
28480
90201
28480
28480
90201
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
07263
07263
07263
04713
04713
04713
07263
04713
07263
28480
28480
28480
28480
24544
24544
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
0160-0576
0180-0491
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-0576
0180-0491
0160-0576
0180-0491
0160-3879
DM19F302G0300WV1CR
0160-2205
0160-3704
DM56390J0300WV1CR
292P47392
292P47392
0160-0576
T0C686K006WLF
0160-0576
0160-0576
TOC686K006WLF
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-0128
0160-3879
0160-0576
0160-0576
0160-3879
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0731
1902-0064
1901-0040
0190-0617
9140-0131
9140-0131
832248
832248
832248
8PB 233
8PB 233
8PB 233
832248
8PS 233
332248
1850-0691
1854-0691
1854-0691
1854-0071
C3-1/6=TO=1002=G
C3-1/6=TO=1002=G
C4-1/8=TO=82R5=F
C3-1/6=TO=1002=G
C3-1/6=TO=1002=G
C3-1/6=TO=1002=G
C3-1/6=TO=4258=G
C3-1/6=TO=1961-G
C3-1/8=TO=8641-G
C4-1/8=TO=201=F
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-5. Option 002 Replaceable Parts)
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
A16R11
A16R12
A16R13
A16R14
A16R15
A16R16
A16R17
A16R18
A16R19
A16R20
A16R21
A16R22
A16R23
A16R24
A16R25
A16R26
A16R27
A16R28
A16R29
A16R30
A16R31
A16R32
A16R33
A16R34
A16R35
A16R36
A16R37
A16R38
A16TP1
A16TP2
A16TP3
A16TP4
A16TP5
A16TP6
A16TP7
A16TP8
A16TP9
A16TP10
A16TP11
A1601
A1602
A1603
A1604
A1605
A1606
A1607
A1608
A1609
A16010
A16011
A16012
A16013
A16014
A16015
A16016
A16017
A16018
C
D
Qty
0698-7243
0698-7236
0757-0418
0698-7260
0757-0399
0698-7236
0698-7260
0698-7260
0698-7260
0698-7332
2100-3122
0757-0424
0757-0438
0698-3154
0698-3150
2100-3103
0698-0084
0757-0260
2100-3095
0757-0422
0757-0440
0757-0440
0757-0421
0698-6619
0757-0421
0698-6362
0757-0421
0698-3155
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
0360-0535
1820-1199
1820-1144
05342-80005
1818-0468
1820-1195
1820-1439
1820-1439
1820-1995
1820-1207
1820-1442
1826-0316
1826-0471
1826-0480
1820-0477
1820-0224
1826-0371
1826-0480
1826-0472
6
7
9
7
5
7
7
7
7
4
9
7
3
0
6
6
9
3
5
5
7
7
4
8
4
8
4
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
6
2
0
7
2
2
5
2
7
4
2
3
6
1
1
3
3
1
11
0360-0065
1200-0424
1200-0525
1200-0552
1200-0565
5000-9043
5040-6552
05342-60122
0890-0706
0890-0983
2200-0155
2190-0005
0360-0042
1400-0249
1
9
1
4
9
6
3
2
0
5
4
0
4
0
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
7
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Description
RESISTOR 1.96K 1% .05 F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 619 1% .125W F TC+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .5W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 82.5 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR-TRMR 100 10% C SIDE-ADJ 17 TRN
RESISTOR 1.1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4.22K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.37K 1% .125W F TC=+-100
RESISTOR-TRMR 10K 10% C SIDE+ADJ 17-TRN
RESISTOR 2.15K 1% .125W F T=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=+-100
RESISTOR-TRMR 200 10% C SIDE-ADJ 17-TRN
RESISTOR 909 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 7.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 7.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 825 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 15K .1% .125W F TC=0+-25
RESISTOR 825 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K .1% .125W F TC=0+-25
RESISTOR 825 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4.64K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
IC INV TTL LS HEX 1-INP
IC GATE TTL LS NOR QUAD 2-INP
PROW (WATCHED PAIR)
IC NMOS B192-BIT ROM 45C-NS 3-S
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
IC MUXR/DATA-SEL TTL LS 2-TO-1-LINE
IC MUXR/DATA-SEL TTL LS 2-TO-1-LINE
IC 7550 CONVB AD-DIP-C
IC GATE TTL LS NAND 8-INP
IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASNCHRO
IC REF AMPL TO-5
IC OP AMP TO-94
IC SWITCH 16-DIP-F
IC OP AMP 8-DIP-P
IC OP AMP TO-99
IC OP AMP TO-99
IC SWITCH 16-DIP-P
IC OP AMP TO-99
A16 MISCELLANEIOUS PARTS
TERMINAL-STUD FKD-TUR SWGFRM-MTG
SOCKET-IC BLK 14 CONTACT
SOCKET-IC 20-CONT DBL STRP DIP-SLDR
SOCKET-IC 40-CONT DIP-BLDR
SOCKET-IC 24-CONT DIP-BLDR
PINIP.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR,ORANGE
KIT,WIRES
TUBING-KS .093WD/.048-RCVD .02 WALL
TUBING-KS .125WD/.062-RCVD .02 WALL
SCREW-MACH 4.40 1-IN-LG PAN-HD-POZI
WASHER-LK EXT T NO.4 .116-IN-ID
TERMINAL-SLDR LUG PL-MTG FOR-#6-SCR
CABLE TIE .062-.625-DEA .091-WD NYL
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
28480
02111
24546
24546
24546
24546
02111
24546
24546
02111
24546
24546
24546
24546
28480
24546
28480
24546
24546
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
01295
01295
28480
18324
01295
01295
01295
24355
01295
01295
27014
06665
27014
27014
27014
27014
27014
27014
C3-3/8-T0-1961-G
C3-3/8-T0-1001-G
C3-3/8-T0-619R-F
C3-3/8-T0-1002-G
C3-3/8-T0-8245-F
C3-3/8-T0-1001-G
C3-3/8-T0-1002-G
C3-3/8-T0-1002-G
C3-3/8-T0-1002-G
0698-7332
43P101
C4-1/8-T0-1101-F
C4-1/8-T0-5111-F
C4-1/8-T0-4221-F
C4-1/8-T0-2371-F
43P103
C4-1/8-T0-7501-F
C4-1/8-T0-7501-F
43P201
C4-1/8-T0-9098
C4-1/8-T0-7501-F
C4-1/8-T0-7501-F
C4-1/8-T0-8258-F
0698-6362
C4-1/8-T0-8258-F
0698-6362
C4-1/8-T0-8258-F
C4-1/8-T0-4641-F
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
SN74L525BN
SN74L525BN
05342-60005
B2S2708 PROGRAMMED
SN74LS175N
SN74L36BN
SN74L36BN
AD7550BD
SN4L830N
SN4L8290N
LH0070-14
OP-07CJ
LF13333N
LM301AN
LH0002CH
LF2564
LF13333N
LH0D44ACH
28480
23884
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
28480
0360-0065
CSA2900-14B
1200-0525
1200-0552
1200-0565
5000-9043
5040-6852
05342-60122
0890-0706
0890-0983
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
2190-0005
0360-0042
1400-0249
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-39
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-5. Option 002 Replaceable Parts)
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A27
05342-00027
6
1
LOW FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE MODULE
28480
05342-60027
A27C1
A27C3
A27C4
A27C4
A27C5
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-0576
0160-3879
0160-3879
7
7
5
7
7
5
CAPACITOR - FXD .01UF +-20% 1000 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXD .01UF +- 20% 100 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXD .1UF +- 20% 50 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXD .01UF +-20% 100 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXD .01UF +- 20% 100 VDC CER
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
0160-3879
0160-0579
0160-0576
0160-3879
0160-3879
A27C6
A27C7
A27C8
A27C9
A27C10
0160-3879
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-3926
7
6
6
6
5
CAPACITOR - FXD .01UF +- 20% 100 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXDT THRU 1000PT +- 20% 200 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXDT THRU 1000PT +- 20% 200 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXDT THRU 1000PT +- 20% 200 VDC CER
CAPACITOR - FXDT THRU 1000PT +- 20% 200 VDC CER
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
0160-3879
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-4082
0160-3926
A27CR1
A27CR2
A27CR3/CR4
1901-0639
1901-0639
1906-0208
4
4
3
2
2
DIODE - PIN 110V
DIODE - PIN 110V
DIODE SCHOTTKY
(MATCHED PAIR)
28480
28480
28480
5082-3080
5082-3082
1906-0206
A27J1
A27J2
1250-0901
1250-0901
2
2
2
CONNECTOR - RF SMB M SGL - MOLE - FR 50 - OHM
CONNECTOR - RF SMB M SGL - MOLE - FR 50 - OHM
28480
28480
1250-0901
1250-0901
A27R1
A27R2
A27R3
A27R4
A27R5
0757-0402
0757-0418
0757-0418
0757-0418
0757-0401
9
9
9
9
0
1
3
RESISTOR 10 K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 619 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 619 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 619 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 100 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-619R-F
C4-1/8-TO-619R-F
C4-1/8-TO-619R-F
C4-1/8-TO-101-F
A27R6*
A27R7
A27R8
A27R9
A27R10
0698-7202
0757-0401
0698-3435
2100-3053
2100-3095
7
0
0
5
5
1
1
1
1
RESISTOR 38.3 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 100 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 38.3 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR TMR 20 20% C SIDE - ADJ 17 - TRN
RESISTOR TMR 200 10% C SIDE - ADJ 17 - TRN
24546
24546
24546
02111
02111
C3-1/8-TO-38R3-G
C3-1/8-TO-101-F
C3-1/8-TO-10R3-F
43P200
43P201
05342-00015
05342-20110
4
4
1
1
COVER
HOUSING
28480
28480
05342-00015
05342-20110
U2
05342-80005
2
WF AMP ASSY
28480
05342-8005
W1
W2
W3
8120-2660
05342-60119
8120-2516
4
7
1
CABLE ASSY
CABLE ASSY , LF 50
CABLE ASSY , SEMIRIGID
28480
28480
28480
8120-2668
05342-60119
8120-2316
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-40
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-6. Option 003 Replaceable Parts
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
A16
05342-60037
8
1
EXTENDED DYNAMIC RANGE ASSEMBLY
(SERIES 1720)
28480
05342-60037
A16C1
A16C2
0180-0490
0180-0490
4
4
2
CAPACITOR-FXD 68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 68UF +-10% 6VDC TA
90201
90201
TDC686KDD06WLF
TDC686KDD06WLF
A16CR1
1901-0040
1
1
DIODE-SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO-35
28480
1901-0040
A16Q1
A16Q2
A16Q3
1852-0058
1852-0058
1854-0246
8
8
8
2
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=350MW FT=250MHZ
07263
07263
04713
S32248
S32248
SPS 233
A16R1
A16R2
A16R3
A16R4
A16R5
0757-0407
0757-0442
0757-0399
0757-0418
0757-0442
6
9
5
9
9
1
3
2
1
RESISTOR 200 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 82.5 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 619 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
C4-1/8-TO-201-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-82R5-F
C4-1/8-TO-619R-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
A16R6
A16R7
A16R8
A16R9
A16R10
0757-0280
0757-0399
0698-3155
0757-0442
0757-0421
3
5
1
9
4
1
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 82.5 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 4.64K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 825 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
C4-1/8-TO-1001-F
C4-1/8-TO-82R5-F
C4-1/8-TO-4641-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-825R-F
A16TP1
A16TP2
0360-0535
0360-0535
0
0
2
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
TERMINAL TEST POINT PCB
00000
00000
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
9
1
1
1
CABLE ASSY, SEMIRIGID
28480
8120-2516
TUBING-MS .093-0/.046-HCVD .02-WALL
KIT, WIRES
28480
28480
0890-0706
05342-60123
ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY
28480
5088-7038
A16W1
8120-2516
1
1
1
A16 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
0890-0706
05342-60123
U2
5088-7038
0
3
1
1
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-41
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-7. Option 004 Replaceable Parts
Reference
HP Part
Designation Number
C
D
Qty
1
6
1
2
Description
A2
A2C2
A2C3
A2C3
A2C4
A2C5
A2C6
A2C7
A2C8
A2C9
A2C10
A2C12-C15
A2C11
A2C16
A2C17
A2C18
A2C19
A2C20
A2J2
A2Q1
A2R1
A2R2
A2R3
A2R4
A2R5
A2R8
05342-60026
0160-3879
0180-0230
0180-0106
0160-3879
0180-1743
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3879
0180-1714
7
7
0
9
7
2
7
6
7
7
7
0160-3879
0180-0106
0160-3878
0160-0573
0160-0573
0160-0570
1250-0257
1854-0560
0757-0420
1810-0125
0683-5105
0683-2205
0683-1015
2100-3607
7
9
6
2
2
9
1
9
3
0
4
9
7
5
A2R6
A2R7
A2R6
A2R10
A2R11
A2R12
A2R13
A2R14
A2R15
A2R16
A2R17
A2R18
A2R19
A2R20
A2R21
A2R22
A2R23
A2R24
A2R25
A2R26
A2R27
A2R28
A2R29
A2R30
A2R31
A2R32
A2R33
A2R34
A2R35
A2TF1
A2U1
A2U2
A2U3
A2U4
A2U5
A2U6
A2U7
A2U8
A2U9
A2U10
A2U11
A2U12
A2U13
A2U14
A2U15
0683-2205
0683-1025
0683-2205
0683-4725
0683-2205
0683-4725
0683-2205
0683-2205
0683-2205
0683-2205
1810-0164
0683-4725
0683-4725
0683-4725
0683-4725
0683-1015
0683-4785
0683-4725
2100-2655
0683-4725
2100-2655
0683-4725
0683-1035
0683-1845
0683-1845
0683-2745
0683-2745
0683-3925
0683-4725
1251-0600
1820-0539
1820-0468
1820-1443
1820-0539
1820-1416
1820-1049
1820-0468
1820-1028
1820-1144
1820-1200
1820-1025
1820-1254
1820-1425
1820-1194
1820-1216
9
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
9
1
RESISTOR 1K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4600
9
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
2
11
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
9
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
9
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
9
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
9
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
9
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
7
1
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-8PCG
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
7
RESISTOR 100 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
1
2
RESISTOR-TRMR 100K 10% C TOP-ADJ 1-TRN
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25M FC TC*-400/4700
1
RESISTOR-TRMA 100K 10% C TOP-ADJ 1-TRN
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
1
1
RESISTOR 10K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
1
2
RESISTOR 180K 5% .25W FC TC*-800-4900
1
RESISTOR 180K 5% .25W FC TC*-800/4900
2
2
RESISTOR 270K 5% .25W FC TC*-800/4900
2
RESISTOR 270K 5% .25W FC TC*-800/4900
2
1
RESISTOR 3.9K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
2
RESISTOR 4.7K 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4700
0
1
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-S2 SQ
1
2
IC BFR TTL NAND QUAD 2-INP
5
2
IC DCDR TTL BCD-TO-DEC 4-TO-10-LINE
8
1
IC CNTR TTL LS 8IN ASYNCHRO
1
IC BFR TTL NAND QUAD 2-INP
5
1
IC SCHMITT-TRIG TTL LS INV HEX 1-INP
0
1
IC BFR TTL NON-INV HEX
5
IC DCOR TTL BCD-TO-DEC 4-TO-10-LINE
5
2
IC-DGTL, 64BIT RAM, TTL
6
1
IC GATE TTL LS NOR QUAD 2-INP
5
1
IC INV TTL LS HEX
5
IC-DGTL, 64BIT RAM, TTL
9
2
IC BFR TTL NON-INV HEX 1-INP
6
1
IC SCHMITT-TRIG TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
6
3
IC CNTR TTL LS BIN UP/DOWN SYNCHRO
3
1
IC DCDR TTL LS 3-TO-8-LINE 3-INP
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
2
1
DISPLAY DRIVER ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1826)
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1UF +-20% 50VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR .1UF +-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 330UF +-10% 6VDC TA
NOT ASSIGNED
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 60UF +-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 4700PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 4700PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 220PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CONNECTOR-RF 8MB M PC 50-OHM
TRANSISTOR NPN SI DARL PD-310MW
RESISTOR 750 1% .125W F TC-04-100
NETWORK-RES 8-PIN-SIP .125-PIN-BPCG
RESISTOR 51 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
RESISTOR 22 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
RESISTOR 100 5% .25W FC TC*-400/4500
RESISTOR-VAR CONTROL CCP 1M 10% LIN (Not supplied
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
28480
28480
56289
56289
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
05342-60028
0160-3879
1500105X0050A2
1500606X0006B2
0160-3879
150D104X9035A2
0160-3879
0160-3878
0160-3879
0160-3879
1500337X900652
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
24546
28460
01121
01121
01121
01121
0160-3879
150D606X000682
0160-3878
0160-0573
0160-0573
0160-0570
1250-0257
SP56740
C4-1/0-T0-751-F
1810-0125
CB3105
CB2205
CB1015
WP4N102P105U2
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
73138
01121
71138
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
27014
01295
01295
01295
CB2205
CB1025
CB2205
CB4725
CB2205
CB4725
CB2205
CB2205
CB2205
CB2205
1B10-0164
CB4725
CB4725
CB4725
CB4725
CB1015
CB4725
CB4725
B2PR100K
CB4725
82PR100K
CB4725
CB1035
CB1845
CB1845
CB2745
CB2745
CB3925
CB4725
1251-0600
8N7437N
8N7445N
8N74L8293N
8N7437N
8N74LS14N
8N74367N
8N7445N
8N7189N
8N74L802N
SN74LS05N
8N7189N
DM8095N
8N74LS132N
8N74LS193N
SN74LS138N
with 05342-60028, must be ordered separately)
6-42
MODEL 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-7. Option 004 Replaceable Parts (Continued)
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
A2U16
A2U17
A2U18
A2U19
A2U20
A2U21
A2U22
A2U23
1820-1250
1820-1426
1820-1112
1820-1112
1820-1194
1820-1194
1820-1885
1813-0092
9
9
6
6
6
6
2
*
A2*1
05342-60106
2
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part Number
1
1
IC BFR TTL NON-INV HEX 1-INP
IC MUXR/DATA-SEL TTL LS 2-TO-1-LINE QUAD
IC FF TTL LS D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC FF TTL D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC CNTR TTL LS BIN UP/DOWN SYNCHRO
IC CNTR TTL LS BIN UP/DOWN SYNCHRO
IC AGTR TTL LS D-TYPE QUAD
IC DAC-60 CONV 24-DIP-C
27014
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
27014
86175
DM8095N
SN74LS158N
SN74LS74N
SN74LS74N
SN74LS193N
SN74LS193N
DM74LS173N
DAX80-CCD-V
1
CABLE ASSY, OUTPUT
28460
05342-60106
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
1200-0565
1200-0600
05342-60124
1
2
A2 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
0380-0336
1
5
SPACER-RVT-ON .312-IN-LG .152-IN-ID
00000
1200-0565
1200-0646
05342-00124
9
7
4
1
1
1
SOCKET-IC 24-CONT DIP-SLDR
SOCKET-IC 24-CONT DIP-SLDR
KIT, WIRES
28480
28480
28480
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
6-43
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-8. Option 001 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation
HP Part
Number
C
D
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
HP-IB ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF+-20% 6VDC TA
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR=FxD *01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CHOKE.WIDBAND ZMAXB660 OHM@ 180 MHZ
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
02114
05342-60015
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
1500606X000682
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
VK200 20/48
RESISTOR 51.1 1% .125W F TC=0+=100
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-8PCG
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-8PCG
NETWORK-RES 9-PIN-SIP .15-PIN-8PCG
CONNECTOR-8GL CONT PIN .04-IN-6SC-32 RND
CONNECTOR-8GL CONT PIN .04-IN-6SC-32 RND
24548
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
C4-1/8-T0-5181-F
1810-0164
1810-0164
1810-0164
0360-0124
0360-0124
IC GATE TTL L8 NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC GATE TTL L8 NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE PO8-EDGE-TRIG
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE PO8-EDGE-TRIG
IC GATE TTL L8 NOR QUAD 2-INP
IC GATE TTL L8 NOR QUAD 2-INP
IC GATE TTL L8 EXCL-DR QUAD 2-INP
IC GATE TTL L8 NOR QUAD 2-INP
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POPS-EDGE-TRIG
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POPS-EDGE-TRIG
IC DCDR TTL L8 3-TO-8 LINE 3-INP
IC GATE TTL L8 NOR TTL 3-INP
IC INV TTL L8 HEX 1-INP
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC AG7R TTL D-TYPE 4-BIT
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG COM
IC GATE TTL L8 NAND QUAD 2-INP
IC DRVR TTL BUS DRVR DEX 1-INP
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC FF TTL L8 J-K BAR POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG PRL-IN
IC MISC QUAD
ROM 32 X 8 OC
SOCKET-IC 16 CONT DIF DIP-SLDR
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG PRL-IN
IC MISC QUAD
ROM 32 X 8 OC
SOCKET-IC 16 CONT DIF DIP-SLDR
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG PRL-IN
IC MISC QUAD
IC FF TTL L8 J-K BAR POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC DRVR TTL BUS DRVR DEX 1-INP
IC MISC QUAD
IC GATE TTL L8 NAND TRL 3-INP
IC COMPUTER TTL L MAGTD 5-BIT
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC FF TTL L8 D-TYPE POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC GATE TTL L8 NA ND QUAD 2-INP
PIN, P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR
EXTRACTOR, ORANGE
HP-1B INPUT ASSEMBLY (SERIES 1720)
CONNECTOR 24-PIN F MICRORIBBON
0KT=IC, 14 PIN, PC M7G1 RT AGLE CONT
SWITCH--8L 7-1A-N8 DIF-SLIDE-ASSY *1A
CABLE ASSY 26AWG 24-CNDCT
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
01295
34335
04713
01295
28480
34335
04713
01295
28480
38335
04713
01295
01295
04713
01295
07261
01295
01295
01295
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
BN74L800N
BN74L802N
BN74L874N
BN74L874N
8N74L802N
BN74L802N
BN74L886N
BN74L802N
BN74L874N
BN74L874N
BN74L5138N
BN74L827N
BN74L804N
BN74L874N
BN74173N
BN74L8174N
BN74L803N
BN74366N
BN74L874N
BN74L8109N
BN74L8374PC
MC3496P
28480
00000
28480
28480
0380-0644
A15
A15C1
A15C2
A15C3
A15C4
A15C5
A15C6
A15C7
A15C8
A15C9
A15C10
A15C12
A15C13
A15C1
05342-60015
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-3879
0160-0106
0160-3879
0130-3879
0160-3879
0100-1788
2
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
9
7
7
7
6
1
11
A15R1
A15R2
A15R3
A15R4
0787-0390
1810-0164
1810-0164
1810-0164
0360-0124
0360-0124
0
7
7
7
3
3
1
3
1820-1197
1820-1144
1820-1112
1820-1112
1820-1144
1820-1144
1820-1211
1820-1144
1820-1112
1820-1112
1820-1210
1820-1206
1820-1199
1820-1112
1820-0570
1820-1196
1820-1198
1820-1368
1820-1112
1820-1282
1820-1997
1820-1659
1816-1154
1200-0473
1820-1997
1820-1669
1816-1155
1200-0473
1820-1997
1820-1689
1820-1282
1820-1368
1820-1689
1820-1202
1820-0904
1820-1112
1820-1112
1820-1197
5000-9043
5040-6852
05342-60029
1251-3283
1200-0485
3101-1973
0120-1966
9
6
6
8
6
6
8
6
8
5
3
1
1
6
6
6
6
6
2
4
8
A15U1
A15U2
A15U3
A15U4
A15U5
A15U6
A15U7
A15U8
A15U9
A15U10
A15U11
A15U12
A15U13
A15U14
A15U15
A15U16
A15U17
A15U18
A15U19
A15U20
A15U21
A15U22
A15U23
A15U24
A15U25
A15U26
A15U27
A15U28
A15U29
A15U30
A15U31
A15U32
A15U33
A15U34
A15U35
A15U36
A29
A29J1
A29J2
A29S1
A29W5
0380-0644
1830-1098
2190-0034
05342-00017
6-44
1
7
4
9
8
7
4
0
8
7
4
3
6
4
7
4
8
8
9
6
3
6
1
2
7
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
8
2
3
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A29 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
4
2
STANDOFF-METRIC SHORT STUD MOUNTS FOR
4
2
CLEVIS 0.070-IN W SLTS 0.454-IN PIN CTR
5
2
WASHER-LK HLCL NO. 10, 194-IN-ID
8
1
PLATE, PATCH
See introduction to this section for ordering information
*Indicates factory selected value
Mfr Part Number
BN748180N PROGRAMMED
1200=0473
BN7465374PC
MC3446P
BN748100N PROGRAMMED
1200-0473
BN74L8374PC
MC3446P
BN74L8109N
BN74366N
MC3446P
BN74L810N
93L24PC
BN74L874N
BN74L874N
BN74L800N
5000-9043
5040-6852
05342-60029
1251-3283
1200-0485
3101-1973
8120-1966
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
2190-0034
05342-00017
Model 5342A
Replaceable Parts
Table 6-9. Manufacturers Code List
MFG NO.
MANUFACTURER
NAME
ADDRESS
ZIP CODE
90021
00000
Any Satisfactory Supplier
0046G
Norelco North Amer Philips Ltg Corp
Los Angeles, CA
01121
Allen-Bradley Co
Milwaukee, WI
53204
01295
Texas Instr Inc Semiconductor Cmpnt Div
Dallas, TX
75222
01926
RCA Corp Solid State Div
Somerville, NJ
08876
02111
Spectrol Electronics Corp
City of Ind, CA
91745
02114
Ferroxcube Corp
Saugerties, NY
12477
03508
GE Co Semiconductor Prod Dept
Syracuse, NY
13201
03888
KDI Pyrofilm Corp
Whippany, NJ
07981
04713
Motorola Semiconductor Products
Phoenix, AZ
85062
06665
Precision Monolithic Inc
Santa Clara, CA
95050
07263
Fairchild Semiconductor Div
Mountain View, CA
94042
09023
Cornell-Dubilier Elek Div Fed Pac
Sanford, CA
27330
16546
U.S. Capacitor Corp
Burbank, CA
18324
Signetics Corp
Sunnyvale,
19701
Mepco/Electra Corp
Mineral Wells, TX
2388A
No M/F Description for this Mfg No.
91504
CA
94086
76067
24355
Analog Devices Inc
Norwood, MA
02062
24546
Corning Glass Works (Bradford)
Bradford, PA
16701
25403
Amperex Elek Corp Semicon & MC Div
Slatersville, RI
02876
27014
National Semiconductor Corp
Santa Clara, CA
95051
28480
Hewlett-Packard Co Corporate HQ
Palo Alto, CA
94304
30983
Mepco/Electra Corp
San Diego, CA
92121
34335
Advanced Micro Devices Inc
Sunnyva!e, CA
94086
50088
Mostek Corp
Carrollton, TX
75006
56289
Sprague Electric Co
North Adams, MA
01247
72136
Electro Motive Corp Sub IEC
Willimantic, CT
06226
73138
Beckman Instruments Inc Helipot Div
Fullerton, CA
92634
75915
Littelfuse Inc
Des Plaines, IL
60016
8E175
Burr Brown Co
Huntsville, AL
35801
90201
Mallory Capacitor Co
Indianapolis, IN
46206
6-45
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
SECTION VII
MANUAL CHANGES
7-1. INTRODUCTION
7-2. This section contains information necessary to adapt this manual to apply to older
instruments.
7-3. MANUAL CHANGES
7-4. This manual applies directly to Model 5342A Microwave Frequency Counters with serial
number prefix 1840A.
7-5. As engineering changes are made, newer instruments may have serial prefix numbers
higher than those listed on the title page of this manual. The manuals for these instruments will be
supplied with MANUAL CHANGES sheets containing the required information.
MANUAL DESCRIPTION
CHANGE DATE: July 19, 1979
INSTRUMENT:
5342A Microwave Freq. Counter
Operating and Service Manual
(This change supersedes all earlier dated
changes)
SERIAL PREFIX:
1840A
●
FEB. 1979
DATE PRINTED:
05342-90013
HP PART NO:
MICROFICHE NO: 05342-90014
●
IF YOUR INSTRUMENT
HAS SERIAL PREFIX
OR SERIAL NUMBER
MAKE THE
FOLLOWING CHANGES
TO YOUR MANUAL
1904A
1
1916A
1,2
Make all changes listed as ERRATA.
Check the following table for your
instrument’s serial prefix or serial number
and make listed change(s) to manual.
IF YOUR INSTRUMENT
HAS SERIAL PREFIX
OR SERIAL NUMBER
MAKE THE
FOLLOWING CHANGES
TO YOUR MANUAL
➤ NEW OR REVISED ITEM
ERRATA
Page 1-5, Table 1-4, Recommended Test Equipment:
Add Frequency Counter capable of frequency measurements up to at least 350 MHz for troubleshooting A8, A9,
and A10 Main Loop Synthesizer. The HP Model 5345A Electronic Counter is recommended. Use Channel A input
set for 50Q input impedance.
/8440-8643-8647/9081-8626/E/
7-1
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
➤ ERRATA (Cont’d)
Page 8-113, Table 8-15, Main Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting:
Change text of first paragraph in step 2 to the following:
2. To test if the A8 Main VCO is operating properly, put the 5342A in MANUAL mode, 500 MHz - 18 GHz range,
and set the MANUAL center frequency to the values in the following table. Connect a coax cable, with
5345A measurement indicates the correct MAIN OSC frequency for each of the MANUAL center frequencies selected.
Page 6-32, Table 6-3, A24 (05341-60047) Replaceable Parts:
Add A24 MISCELLANEOUS; 0380-0044; CD=6; SPACER 0.25 INCH; 28480; 0380-0044.
Page 8-179, Figure 8-39, A16 (OPTION 002) Schematic Diagram:
Change color of cable to J7 pins 2 and 13 from ORN to RED.
Page 6-7, Table 6-3, A2 Replaceable Parts:
Change “Reference Designation” for A2C6 (part number 0180-0106) from “A2C6” to A2C1.
Page 6-42, Table 6-7:
Change “Reference Designation” for A2C3 (part number 0180-0106) from “A2C3” to A2C1.
Add A2C12, C14, C15; 0180-0230; CD=0; CAPACITOR-FXD 1UF ±20%, 50VDC TA; 56289; 150D105X0050A2.
Add A2C13; 0160-3879; CD=6; CAPACITOR-FXD 0.01 UF ±20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-3879.
Page 8-187, Figure 8-43, P/O A22 Motherboard Schematic:
Change reference designation for “OVEN TRANSFORMER” from “T4” to T1.
Add troubleshooting information in attached Table 1 on aprons of schematic diagrams as specified in the table.
Page 6-41, Table 6-6, Option 003 Miscellaneous Replaceable Parts:
Add 5000-9043; CD=6; PIN: P.C. BOARD EXTRACTOR; 28480; 5000-9043.
Add 5040-6852; CD=3; EXTRACTOR, ORANGE; 28480; 5040-6852.
Page 8-149, Figure 8-24, A2 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS table:
Change “C19” under “Deleted:” to C9.
➤
7 - 2
Page 1-2, Table 1-1, Specifications:
Change 10544A Short Term Stability to <1 X 10-10 for 1 second average time.
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
ERRATA (Cont’d)
Table 1. Troubleshooting Information
7-3
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
ERRATA (Cont’d)
7-4
Table 1. Troubleshooting Information (Continued)
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
ERRATA (Cont’d)
Table 1. Troubleshooting Information (Continued)
7-5
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
ERRATA (Cont'd)
7-6
Table 1. Troubleshooting Information (Continued)
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
CHANGE 1 (1904A)
Pages 6-33 and 6-34, Table 6-3, A25 (05342-60025) Replaceable Parts:
Change A25 from SERIES 1804 to SERIES 1904.
Delete A25C32 capacitor HP Part No. 0160-4082.
Delete A25CR3 and CR4 diodes HP Part No. 1901-0040.
Delete A25Q3 transistor HP Part No. 1854-0071.
Delete A25R35 resistor HP Part No. 0698-7241.
Delete A25R37 resistor HP Part No. 0698-7259.
Delete A25R38 resistor HP Part No. 0698-7253.
NOTE: The above parts serve no electrical function on circuit board assembly A25.
Page 8-191, Figure 8-45, A25 Schematic Diagram:
Change series number at top of diagram from 1804 to 1904.
Delete A25C32, CR3, CR4, Q3, R35, R37, and R38.
Make appropriate changes in REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS table and TABLE OF ACTIVE ELEMENTS.
Page 6-36, Table 6-3, Miscellaneous Replaceable Parts:
Add 1400-0985; CD=1; CLAMP, RIBBON CABLE; 28480; 1400-0985.
CHANGE 2 (1916A)
Page 6-5, Table 6-3, Al (05342-60001] Replaceable Parts:
Change Al from SERIES 1720 to SERIES 1916.
Change A1DS1 thru A1DS8 to 1990-0670 in HP Part Number and Mfr Part Number columns.
Change CD column from “7” to “0”.
Page 8-149, Figure 8-24, Al Schematic Diagram:
Change SERIES 1720 at top of Al diagram of Display Assembly to SERIES 1916.
7-6. OLDER INSTRUMENTS
7-7. To adapt this manual to older instruments having a serial prefix lower than 1840A, perform
the backdating that applies to your instruments serial prefix as listed in Table 7-I below.
Table 7-1. Manual Backdating
If Instrument has Serial Prefix
Make the Following Changes to Manual
1828
1812
1808
1804
1720
1
1,2
1,2,3
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4,5
CHANGE 1
Page 6-7, Table 6-3, A2 Replaceable Parts:
Change A2 series number from 1828 to 1804.
Delete “A2C20: 0160-0570: CAPACITOR-FXD 220PF 20% 100VDC CER: 28480:0160-0570”.
Change A2R22’ from 0683-1015 1
to “0683-2015; RESISTOR-FXD 200 5%’ .25 FC TC=-400/+600;
0160G; CB2015”,
Change A2U13 from 1820-1425 to “1820-1197; IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP; 0169H;
SN74LS00N”.
Change A2U22 from 1820-1885 to “1820-0574; IC FF TTL D-TYPE COM CLEAR QUAD; 0340F;
DM8551N”.
Page 8-149, Figure 8-24, A1 and A2 Schematic Diagram:
Change A2 series number from “1828” to “1804”.
Change the value of resistor A2R22 from 100 to 200 ohms.
Delete capacitor C20 from A2U8, pin 3.
7-7
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
CHANGE 2
Page 6-23, Table 6-3, A14 Replaceable Parts:
change A14 series number from 1840 to 1812.
Change A14U7 part number from 1818-0706 to 1818-0331, Annotate that the older part number
(1818-0331) is obsolete and the new part number (1818-0706) is the recommended replacement,
Page 8-175, Figure 8-37, A14 Schematic Diagram:
Change A14 series number from “1840” to “1812”,
CHANGE 3
Page 6-23, Table 6-3, A14 Replaceable Parts:
Change A14 series number from 1812 to 1808,
Delete “A14C28; 0160-3878; CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF ±20% I00VDC CER; 28480; 0160-3878”.
Page 8-175, Figure 8-37, A14 Schematic Diagram:
Delete A14C28 (1000PF) from U11A, pin 3.
Change series number (top of diagram) from “1812” to “1808”,
Page 6-23, Table 6-3, A16 Replaceable Parts:
Change A16 part number from 05342-60038 to 05342-60016 in the HP and Mfr part number columns.
Change “(SERIES 1812)” to “(SERIES 1720)”.
Delete A16J7; 1200-0424; SOCKET IC BLK 14-CONTACT; 23880; CSA2900-14B.
Change A16J1-J6 Description column from “NOT ASSIGNED” to “CONNECTOR, RF, 28480; 1250-1565”
Page 6-38, Table 6-5, Option 002 Replaceable Parts:
Change A16 part numbers in HP and Mfr part number columns from “05342-60038” to “05342-60016”.
NOTE
The 05342-60038 circuit board is electrically identical to the
05342-60016 and uses the same parts except for the six
coaxial cables and connector, The two boards are not interchangeable due to the difference in interconnection. The
cable differences are listed below.
Delete “A16W1; 8120-2668; CABLE ASSY W/PLUG; 28480; 8120-2668”.
Add the following cable assemblies:
05342-60113; CABLE ASSY, GRAY/BLUE; 28480; 05342-60113
05342-60114; CABLE ASSY, GRAY/BROWN; 28480; 05342-60114
05342-60115; CABLE ASSY, GRAY/RED; 28480; 05342-60115
05342-60116; CABLE ASSY, GRAY/ORANGE; 28480; 05342-60116
05342-60117; CABLE ASSY, GRAY/YELLOW; 28480; 05342-60117
05342-60118; CABLE ASSY, GRAY/GREEN; 28480; 05342-60118
Page 6-41, Table 6-6, Option 003 Replaceable Parts:
Change A16 part numbers in HP and Mfr columns from “05342-60037” to “05342-60016”,
Page 8-179, Figure 8-39, A16 Schematic Diagram:
Change A16 part number and series number (top of diagram) from “(05342-60038) SERIES 1812”to read
“(05342-60016) SERIES 1720”.
At left edge of diagram change the pin numbers of connector J7 to J numbers as follows:
CHANGE
FROM
7-8
J3 Pin Numbers
J Number
1 and 14
2 and 13
4 and 11
5 and 10
3 and 12
6 and 9
J1
J2
J5
J6
J4
J3
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
CHANGE 4
Page 6-23, Table 6-3, A14 Replaceable Parts:
Change the series number from “1808” to “1804”.
Change A14R5 from “0698-5426; RESISTOR 10K 10% .125W CC TC=350/+857; 0160G; BB1031” to read
“0698-7097; RESISTOR 1M 5% .125W CC TC=-600\+1137; 0160G; BBI055”.
Add “A14C25; 0160-3879; CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF ±-20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160.3879”,
Add “A14R22; 0698-5174; RESISTOR 200 5% .125W CC TC=-330/+800; 0160G; BB2015”.
Add “A14R23; 0698-5562; RESISTOR 120 5% .125W CC TC=-300/+800; 0160G; BB1215”.
Delete “A14R24; 0675-1021; RESISTOR 1K 10% ,125W CC TC=-330/+800; 0160G; BBI021”.
Delete “A14Q1; 1854-0574; TRANSISTOR, NPN SI PD=500 MIN FT=125 MHz; 28480; 1854-0574”.
Page 8-175, Figure 8-37, A14 Schematic Diagram:
Change the series number (top of page) from “1808” to "1804”.
Replace the input circuit of U11A (left side of diagram) with the following circuit:
CHANGE 5
Page 6-7, Table 6-3, A2 Replaceable Parts:
Change A2 series number from “1804” to “1720”.
Delete “A2C17; 0160-3878; CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-3878”,
Delete “A2C18; 0160-0573; CAPACITOR-FXD 4700PF +-20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-0573”.
Delete “A2C19; 0160-0573; CAPACITOR-FXD 4700PF +-20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-0573”.
Page 8-149, Figure 8-24, A2 Schematic Diagram:
Change A2 series number (top of diagram)from “1804” to “1720”.
Delete A2C17 (1000P) from U9, pin 1 (top left part of diagram),
Delete A2C18 and C19 (4700P) from U13, pin 1 (top left part of diagram),
Page 6-8, Table 6-3, A3 Replaceable Parts:
Change A3 series number from “1804” to “1720”.
Delete “A3C26; 0160-3878; CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-3878”,
Page 8-153, Figure 8-26, A3 Schematic Diagram:
Change A3 series number (top of diagram) from “1804” to “1720”,
Delete A3C26 (1000P) from U2 pin 4.
Page 6-30, Table 6-3, A21 Replaceable Parts:
Change A21 series number from “1804” to “1720”.
Change A21R14 (215) from 0698-3441 to “0757-0280 RESISTOR 1K 1% ,125W F TC=0+-100; 0329B;
C4-1/8-TO-1001-F”.
Page 8-187, Figure 8-43, A21 Schematic Diagram:
Change A21 series number (top right of diagram) from “1804” to “1708”,
Change A21R14 from 215 to 1K.
Page 6-33, Table 6-3, A25 Replaceable Parts:
Change A25 series number from “1804” to “1720”.
Delete “A25C35; 0160-3029; CAPACITOR-FXD 7.5PF +-.5PF 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-0329”.
Delete A25C36; 0160-3029; CAPACITOR-FXD 7.5PF +-.5PF 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-3029”.
Page 8-191, Figure 8-45, A25 Schematic Diagram:
Change A25 series number (top of diagram) from “1804” to “1720”,
Delete A25C35 (7.5PF) and A25C36 (7.5PF) from junction of R9, R16, and R17.
7-9
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
CHANGE 5 (CONT’D)
Page 6-23, Table 6-3, A14 Replaceable Parts:
Change A14 series number from “1804” to “1720”.
Delete A14C25; 0160-3879; CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% I00VDC CER; 28480; 0160-3879.
Delete A14C26; 0160-3879; CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-3879.
Delete A14C27; 0160-0571; CAPACITOR-FXD 470PF +-20% 100VDC CER; 28480; 0160-0571.
Delete A14R22; 0698-5174; RESISTOR 2005% .125W CC TC=-300/+800; 01607; BB2015.
Delete A14R23; 0698-5562; RESISTOR 1205% .125W CC TC=-300/+800; 01607; BB1215.
Change A14U1 in both HP part number and Mfr part number columns from “1818-0698” to “1818-0329”
Change A14U4 in both HP part number and Mfr part number columns from “1818-0697” to “1818-0330”
Page 8-94, Table 8-9, A14 Troubleshooting:
Select the signatures as follows:
Signal Name
Location
Signature
LDO
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
LD5
LD6
LD7
A14A(3)
A14A(4)
A14A(6)
A14A(6)
A14A(7)
A14A(8)
A14A(9)
A14A(10)
AA7C
9UH5
A4PF
F1P9
P1P9
A0A6
312H
54C7
Signal Name
Location
Signature
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U3(9)
U3(12)
U3(4)
U3(7)
U3(12)
U3(9)
U3(7)
U3(4)
1PFC
2945
127F
7779
5779
163C
87CH
P227
Page 8-95, Table 8-9, A14 Troubleshooting:
Select the signature as follows:
Page 8-95, Table 8-9, A14 Troubleshooting:
Select the signature obtained when the START and STOP of the 5004A is on R2 test point as follows:
Signal Name
Location
Signature
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U4(23)
U4(22)
U4(21)
U4(20)
U4(19)
U4(18)
U4(17)
U4(16)
FAA3
9597
UHU3
A6A8
196H
24F6
A956
92F1
Page 8-96, Table 8-9, A14 Troubleshooting:
Select the signatures as follows:
Signature
Signal Name
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
7-10
U1(23)
U1(22)
U1(21)
U1(20)
U1(19)
UI(18)
U1(17)
U1(16)
6P3H
HP60
P686
65P0
A520
P903
H4UC
Model 5342A
Manual Changes
CHANGE 5 (CONT’D)
Page 8-175, Figure 8-37, A14 Schematic Diagram:
Change A14 series number (top of diagram) from “1804” to “1720”.
Delete C26 (1000P) and C27 (470P) from U17(15) to circuit common.
Delete R22 (
) between U11(1) and +5V (left middle of diagram).
Delete C25 (.001) between U11(1) and circuit common.
Delete R23 (12011) between U11(1) and circuit common.
Page 6-32, Table 6-3, A24 Replaceable Parts:
Change A24 series number from “1804” to “1432”.
Change A24L1 from “9100-2430” to “9140-0179; COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=55 .155DX ,375LG; 0217B;
15-4445-7J”.
Change A24L1 from “9100-2430” to “9140-0179; COIL-MLD 22UH 10% Q=55 .155DX .375LG; 0217B;
15-4445-7J”,
Delete “A24C2; 0180-0552; CAPACITOR-FXD 220UF +-20% 10VDC TA; 28480; 0180-0552”.
Page 8-189, Figure 8-44, A24 Standard 10 MHz Oscillator Assembly Schematic Diagram:
Change A24 (Standard) series number from 1804 to 1432.
Change L1 from 220UH to 22UH,
Delete C2 (220UF) from L1 to circuit common.
7-11
Model 5342A
Service
SECTION VIII
SERVICE
8-1.
INTRODUCTION
8-2. This section provides service information and symbol descriptions, theory of operation,
troubleshooting procedures, and schematic diagrams. The arrangement of content of this
section is described in detail below. Refer to the Table of Contents for specific page and paragraph numbers.
a.
Schematic Diagram Symbols and Reference Designations. Describes the symbols used on
schematic diagrams and reference designators used for parts, subassemblies and
assemblies.
b.
Identification Markings. Describes the method used by Hewlett-Packard for identifying
printed-circuit boards and assemblies.
c.
Safety Considerations. Describes the safety considerations applicable during maintenance, adjustments, and repair.
d.
Signal Names. Lists signal mnemonics, names, source, destination, and function for 5342A
signals.
e.
Disassembly and Reassembly Procedures Describes removal of covers, front frame,
assemblies to gain access to parts.
f.
Factory Selected Components. Lists procedures for replacement of parts whose values
are selected at time of manufacture for optimum performance.
g.
Service Accessory Kit 10842A. Describes the use and function of kit (extender boards)
used for testing pc boards.
h.
Logic Symbols. Description of logic symbols used on schematics.
i.
Theory of Operation. Includes block diagram description of overall operation, special
function descriptions, and detailed circuit operation explanations.
j.
Assembly Locations. Describes and illustrates location of assemblies, adjustments, front
and rear panel components by reference designators.
k.
Troubleshooting Procedures. Provides troubleshooting techniques, recommended test
equipment, and troubleshooting tables arranged to isolate trouble to an assembly and
then to the component level.
1.
Schematic Diagrams. A diagram for each assembly is included, arranged in order of
assembly number. A component locator photo is included adjacent to each diagram. The
schematic diagrams contain tables of reference designations, tables of active elements
(by part number), voltage measurements and signature analyzer signatures, where
applicable.
8-3. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SYMBOLS AND REFERENCE DESIGNATORS
8-4. Figure 8-1 shows the symbols used on the schematic diagrams. At the bottom of Figure8-1,
the system for reference designators, assemblies, and subassemblies is shown.
8-5. Reference Designations
8-6. Assemblies such as printed-circuits are assigned numbers in sequence, A1 A2, etc. As
shown in Figure 8-1, subassemblies within an assembly are given a subordinate A number. For
8-1
Model 5342A
Service
example, rectifier subassembly Al has the complete designator of A25A1. For individual components, the complete designator is determined by adding the assembly number and subassembly number if any. For example, CR1 on the rectifier assembly is designated A25A1CR1,
8-7. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS ON PRINTED-CIRCUIT BOARDS
8-8. HP printed-circuit boards (see Figure 8-7) have four identification numbers: an assembly
part number, a series number, a revision letter, and a production code.
8-9. The assembly part number has 10 digits (such as 05342-60001) and is the primary identification. All assemblies with the same part number are interchangeable. When a production
change is made on an assembly that makes it incompatible with previous assemblies, a change in
part number is required. The series number (such as 1720A) is used to document minor electrical
changes. As changes are made, the series number is incremented. When replacement boards are
ordered, you may receive a replacement with a different series number. If there is a difference
between the series number marked on the board and the schematic in this manual, a minor
electrical difference exists. If the number on the printed-circuit board is lower than that on the
schematic, refer to Section Vll for backdating information. If it is higher, refer to the looseleaf
manual change sheets for this manual. If the manual change sheets are missing, contact your local
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office, See the listing on the back cover of this manual.
8-10. Revision letters (A, B, etc.) denote changes in printed-circuit layout. For example, if a
capacitor type is changed (electrical value may remain the same) and requires different spacing
for its leads, the printed-circuit board layout is changed and the revision letter is incremented to
the next letter. When a revision letter changes the-series number is also usually changed. The
production code is the four-digit seven-segment number used for production purposes.
8-2
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-1.
8-3
Model 5342A
Service
8-11. Assembly Identification
8-12. The assembly number, name, and Hewlett-Packard part number of 5342A assemblies are
listed in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1. Assembly Identification
ASSEMBLY
—
NAME
HP PART NO.
A1
A2
A2
A3
A4
Keyboard Display
Display Driver
( Option 004 (DAC Display Driver
Direct Count Amplifier
Offset VCO
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
RF Multiplexer
Offset Loop Amplifier
Mixer/Search Control
Main VCO
Main Loop Amplifier
05342-60005
05342-60006
05342-60007
05342-60008
05342-60009
A10
A1 1
A12
A13
A14
Divide-by-N
IF Limiter
IF Detector
Counter
Processor
05342-60010
05342-60011
05342-60012
05342-60013
05342-60014
A15
A16
A16
A17
A18
Option 011 HP-16
Option 002 Amplitude Measurements
Option 003 Extended Dynamic Range
Timing Generator
Time Base Buffer
05342-60015
05342-60038
05342-60037
05342-60017
05342-60018
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
Primary Power
Secondary power
Switch Drive
Motherboard
Power Module
05342-60019
05342-60020
05342-60021
05342-60022
05342-60023
A24
A24
A25
A26
U1
Oscillator
Option 001 Oscillator
Preamplifier
Sampler Driver
Sampler
05341-60047
10544-60011
05342-60025
05342-60026
5088-7022
U2
U2
A27
A29
Option
Option
Option
Option
5088-7035
5088-7038
05342-60027
05342-60029
002
003
002
011
—.
High Frequency Amplitude Module
Attenuator
Low Frequency Amplitude Module
HP-IB Interconnection
05342-60001
05342-60002
05342-60028
05342-60003
05342-60004
8-13. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
8-14, Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety
standards, this manual contains information, cautions, and warnings which must be followed to
ensure safe operation and to retain the instrument in safe condition. Service and adjustments
should be performed only by service-trained personnel.
ANY INTERRUPTION OF THE PROTECTIVE
(GROUNDING) CONDUCTOR (INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE INSTRUMENT) OR DISCONNECTION OF
THE PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINAL IS LIKELY TO
MAKE THE INSTRUMENT DANGEROUS. INTENTIONAL INTERRUPTION IS PROHIBITED.
8-4
Model 5342A
Service
8-15. Any adjustment, maintenance, and repair of the opened instrument under voltage should
be avoided as much as possible and, when inevitable, should be carried out only by a skilled
person who is aware of the hazard involved.
8-16. Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been
disconnected from its source of supply.
8-17. Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specified type
(normal blow, time delay, etc.) are used for replacement. The use of repaired fuses and the shortcircuiting of fuseholders must be avoided.
PRIOR TO MAKING ANY VOLTAGE TESTS ON THE
A19 PRIMARY POWER ASSEMBLY, THE VOLTMETER
TO BE USED OR THE 5342A MUST BE ISOLATED
FROM THE POWER MAINS BY USE OF AN lSOLATION TRANSFORMER. A TRANSFORMER SUCH AS
AN ALLIED ELECTRONICS, 705-0084 (120V AC) MAY
BE USED FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT THE
TRANSFORMER BETWEEN THE AC POWER SOURCE
AND THE POWER INPUT TO THE 5342A.
8-18. Safety Symbols
8-19. The following safety symbols are used on equipment and in manuals:
Instruction manual symbol. The product will be marked with this symbol
when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in
order to protect against damage to the instrument.
Indicates dangerous voltage (terminals fed from the interior by voltage
exceeding 1000 volts must be so marked).
Protective conductor terminal. For protection against electrical shock in
case of a fault. Used with field wiring terminals to indicate the terminal
which must be connected to ground before operating equipment.
Low-noise or noiseless, clean ground (earth) terminal. Used for a signal
common, as well as providing protection against electrical shock in case
of a fault. A terminal marked with the symbol must be connected to
ground in the manner described in the installation (operating) manual,
and before operating the equipment.
Frame and chassis terminal. A connection to the frame (chassis) of the
equipment which normally includes all exposed metal structures.
Alternating current (power line).
Direct current (power line).
Alternating or direct current (power line).
The WARNING signal denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure,
practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in personal injury.
The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating
procedure, practice, or the like, which if not correctly performed or
adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the
product.
8-5
Model 5342A
Service
8-20. SIGNAL NAMES
8-21. Table 8-2 is a list of signal names used in the 5342A. The list is in alphabetical order and
includes the mnemonics for cross-reference with the schematic diagram signal names. A description of the function of each signal and the source and destination is included in the table.
Table 8-2. Signal Names
8-6
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-2 Signal Names (Continued)
MINEMONIC
NAME
FROM
TO
FUNCTION
CHECK
Check Output
XA10(11)
XA11&7, 7
75 MHz signal sent from A1C
Divide-by-N to All IF
Limiter when 5342A is in
CHECK mode,
CLOCK
(CLK)
Clock
XA17(4)
XA14B(8, 8)
DIRECT A
Direct Count
A Output
XA3(2)
XA13(7)
1 MHz TTL clock sent from
A17 Timing Generator to A14
Microprocessor clock
generator to derive 1 and
ø2 from MPU.
Divide-by-two output of
Direct Count Amplifier
Assembly to A13 Counter
Assembly.
DIRECT B
Direct Count
B Output
XA3(1)
,XA13(14)
Divide-by-four output of
Direct Count Amplifier
Assembly to A13 Counter
Assembly.
DIV N
Divide-by-N
XA8(5)
XAI0(8)
Signal from A8 Main VCO
to Al0 Divide-by-N.
DØ
Data 0
XA14A(3)
XA9(9), XAI0(15), XA13(1),
XA14A(3), XA15A(3),
XA16A(3), XA17(10),
A22J1(20), X22W4(11)
D1
Data 1
XA14A(4)
XA10(16), XA13(2),
XA17(11), A22J1(19),
A22W4(12)
D2
Data 2
XA14A(5)
XA10(17) XA13(3),
XA15A(5), XA16A(5),
XA17(12), A22J1 (18),
A22W4(13)
D3
Data 3
XA14(6)
XA10(18), XA13(4);
XA15A(6), XA16A(6),
XA17(13), A22J1 (17),
A22W4(14)
D4
Data 4
XA14A(7)
XA10(15), XA12(15, 15),
XA15A(7), XA16A(7),
XA17(11), A22J1 (5),
A22W4(15)
D5
Data 5
XA14A(8)
XA10(16), XA12(16, 16),
XA15A(8), XA16A(8),
XA17(10), A22J1 (6),
A22W4(16)
D6
Data 6
XA14A(9)
XA10(17), XA12(17, 17)
XA15A(9), XA16A(9),
XA17(9), A22J1 (7),
A22W4(23)
D7
Data 7
XA14A(10)
XA10(18), XA12(18, 18),
XAI5AJ10), XA16A(10),
XA17(8), A22J1(8),
A22W4(24)
EXT IN
External Input
REQ ON
F requency On
J2 (rear panel) XA18(10)
XA16B(3)
U2
Data Lines
Signal from an external
source via J2 on rear panel
to A18 Time Base Buffer
Assembly
Option 002 signal from
A16 board to U2 HF Amp
to select frequency
measurement.
8-7
Model 5342A
Service
TO
FUNCTION
MNEMONIC
NAME
FROM
HECL RST
(HECLR)
High ECL Reset
XAI3(10)
XA3(4)
High signal from A13 Counter Assembly that resets the
main gate on A3 Direct
Count Amplifier Assembly.
HDSP WRT
(HDSP)
High Display
Write
XA14B(10)
XA2(3)
High signal from A14 Microprocessor causes data from
bus to be written into RAM
on A2 Display Driver. When
signal goes low, contents of
RAM are displayed.
HSRCH EN
High Search
Enable
XA7(2)
XA6(8)
High signal from 500 kHz
detector on A7 sent to
Search Generator on A6 if
the offset VCO frequency is
not 500 kHz less than the
main VCO frequency.
IF
Intermediate
Frequency
A25J1
XA11(1), via A22W3
A25 Preamplifier output to
All IF Limiter Assembly.
IF COUNT
Intermediate
Frequency to
Counter
XA12(8)
XA13(7)
A12 IF Detector output to
A13 Counter Assembly
IF LIM
Intermediate
Frequency
Limiter Output
XA11(12)
XA12(1)
All IF Limiter output to
A12 IF Detector Assembly.
IF OUT
Intermediate
Frequency
output
A25J2
j4 (rear panel) via W3
A25 Preamplifier intermediate frequency output to
rear panel connector.
ISOLATOR
Optical Isolator
XA19(18, 18)
XA20(15, 15), XA21(17, 17)
Signals excessive current
load to the U3 Timer Overcurrent shutdown circuit.
Low Amplitude
LAMPEN
Enable
Option 002)
XA16B(1)
XA14B(Z
Signal from A16 Amplitude
Assembly to notify A14
Microprocessor that Option
002 is present.
AMP MTR Low Amplitude
Meter
Option 002 )
XA14B(13)
XA16B(2)
Signal from A14 Microprocessor Assembly to write data
or read data from Option 002
A16 Amplitude Assembly.
Low Counter
Read
XA14B(2)
XA13(6)
Signal from A14 Microprocessor to A13 Counter Multiplexer circut to read contents of A or B counter to the
data bus (depending upon
the state of the AS line).
Low Counter
Write
XA14B(3)
XA13(7)
Signal from A14 Microprocessor to A13 Counter FF circuit that selects either IF or
Direct B to be counted.
Low Digital-toAnalog
XA14B(3
XA2U15(4, 5)
Signal from A14 Microprocessor that loads data into
U15 Buffer register on A2
board (Option 004) for
conversion to analog.
LCTR RD
LCTR WRT
9
LDA
8-8
Table 8-2. Signal Names (Continued)
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-2. Signal Names (Continued)
TO
FUNCTION
MNEMONIC
NAME
FROM
LDIRECT
Low Direct
XA13(14)
LDIR
Gate
Low Direct Gate
XA17(4)
LDVRST
Low Device
Reset
XA14B(4)
LEXT
Low External
LFM
Low Frequency
Modulation
LFRERUN
(LFRUN)
Low Free Run
XA14B(7
A14S2 (Ground)
Low signal cause MPU on
A14 Microprocessor to continuously increment the
addresses on the address bus
(for diagnostic purposes).
LHP-IB
Low HP
Interface Bus
XA14B(14)
XA15B(6)
Low signal from decoder on
A14 Microprocessor to enable reading from and
writing to A15 HP-IB
(Option 011).
LIF Gate
Low lntermediate Frequency Gate
XA17(5)
XA13(16)
Low signal from A17 Timing
Generator that enables counter A or B on A13 Counter
Assembly (depending upon
the state of the LO switch
signal).
LIRQ
Low Interrupt
Request
XA2J1(1)
XA14A(13)
Low signal from A2 Display
Driver or HP-IB Option 011
that interrupts A14 Microprocessor.
LKBRD
LKBR)
Low Keyboard
XA14B(9)
XA2(4)
Low signal enables A2 Display
Driver to send keyboard
information to A14
Microprocessor.
LO FREQ
Local Oscillator
Frequency
A26J2
A5 Multiplexer Local OscilIator output to A26 Sampler
Driver.
XA16B(7)
Signal from A13 Counter that
switches A27 LF Amp or U2
HF Amp to A16 board
measurement circuits.
XA3(5)
Low signal from A17 Timing
Generator that enables the
direct count main gate on
A3 Direct Count Amplifier
Assembly.
XA2J1(9)
Temporary low signal from
A14 Microprocessor to A2
Display that blanks the display during power up.
S4 (rear panel) XA18(9)
Low signal from rear panel
switch (EXT/l NT) in EXT
position that selects external
oscillator input to A18 Time
Base Buffer instead of
internal oscillator.
S3 (rear panel) XA17(12)
Low signal from rear panel
switch (CW/FM) in FM
position that selects long
prs and illuminates FM indicator on display.
A4W1
8-9
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-2. Signal Names (Continued)
MNEMONIC
NAME
FROM
LO Switch
Local Oscillator
Switch
XA17(1)
XA5(5), XA13(8)
Low signal from A17 Timing
Generator that switches A5
Multiplexer between Main
VCO and Offset VCO synchronously with switching
between Counter A and B
on A13 Counter Assembly.
LOVL (OL)
Low Overload
A25C29
XA12(14)
Low signal from A25 Preamplifier ampltiude detector
to A12 IF Detector bus driver
to indicate input signal level
to 5342A exceeds +5 dBm
(or 20 dBm).
LPD READ
(LPDRD)
Low Power
Detect Read
XA14B(9)
XA12(13)
Low signal from A14 Microprocessor to A12 IF Detector
that causes A12 to output
data to the bus.
LPD WRT
Low Power
Detect Write
XA14B(10)
XA12(14),
XA9(9)
Low signal from A14 Mircoprocessor to A12 IF Detector
that causes A1 2 to detect
input signal power level.
When high, selects narrow or
wide filter on A9 Main Loop
Amplifier, depending upon
the state of data bit DO.
LPOS SLOPE
(LPOS SL)
Low Positive
Slope
XA6(8)
XA7(2)
Low signal from A6 Search
Generator to A7 Mixer/
Search Control prevents
loop from locking on upper
sideband when offset VCO
is 500 kHz greater than
main VCO.
LPWR RST
Option 002)
Low Power
Reset
XA11(4,4)
A25C34
Reset signal from A11 IF
Limiter to A25 Preamplifier
amplitude detector.
LTIM RD
(LTMRD)
Low Timing
Read
XA14B(6)
XA17(8)
Low signal from A14 Microprocessor that results in data
transfer from A17 Timing
Generator to A14 via the
data bus.
Low Timing
Write
XA14(7)
XA17(9)
Low signal from A14 Microprocessor that clocks data
into the Input Register on
A17 Timing Generator.
Low Synch
High
XA14B(11)
XA10(14)
Low to high transition from
A14 Microprocessor decoder
that loads the high order
bits into the N register on
the A10 Divide-by-N
Assembly.
LTIM WRT
(LTMWRT)
LSYNHI
(LSYH)
8-10
TO
FUNCTION
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-2. Signal Names (Continued)
. ,
MNEMONIC
NAME
FROM
LSYNLO
(LSYL)
Low Synch
Low
XA14B(12)
XA10(14)
Low
A14
that
into
LXROM
Low External
ROM
XA15A(16),
XA16A(16)
XA14A(16)
Not used.
MAIN
Main Phase
Error 1
XA10(1)
XA9(12)
MAIN
Main Phase
Error 2
XA10(1)
XA9(12)
Phase error signals from
A10 Divide-by-N assembly
to A9 Main Loop Amplifier
that control the A8 Main
Main VCO.
MAIN CTRL
Main Control
XA9(6)
XA8(1)
Control voltage signal from
A9 Main Loop Amplifier
that controls the frequency
of the A8 Main VCO.
MAIN OSC
Main Oscillator
XA8(7)
XA5(10)
A8 Main VCO output to A5
RF Multiplexer Assembly.
MAIN VCO
Main Voltage
Controlled
Oscillator
XA8(3)
XA7(12)
A8 Main VCO output to A7
Mixer/Search Control
Assembly that is mixed with
the signal from A4 Offset
VCO.
OFFSET
Offset Phase 1
XA7(1)
XA6(10)
OFFSET
Offset Phase 2
XA7(1)
XA6(10)
A7 Mixer/Search Control
outputs that are processed
by A6 Offset Loop Amplifier
to develop OFFSET CONTROL signal.
OFS CNTRL
Offset Control
XA6(6)
XA4(5)
A dc control voltage signal
from A6 Offset Loop Amplifier to A4 Offset VCO
Assembly.
OFS OSC
Offset
Oscillator
XA4(10)
XA5(1)
A4 Offset VCO output to A5
RF Multiplexer Assembly.
OFS VCO
Offset Voltage
Controlled
Oscillator
XA4(7)
XA7(9)
A7 Offset VCO output to A7
Mixer/Search Control
Assembly.
500 kHz
500 kilohertz
XA18(3)
XA7(7), XA10(5, 5)
500 kHz signal from A18
Time Base to the phase detector on A7 and to ÷10 circuit on A10 Divide-by-N
Assembly.
1 MHz
1 Megahertz
XA18(1)
XA12(10), XA17(6)
1 MHz signal from A18 Time
Base to A12 IF Detector and
to the prs generator on A17
Timing Generator.
XA18(5)
J3 (rear panel)
10 MHz signal from A18Time
Base to FREQ STD OUT connector on rear panel.
10 MHz OUT 10 Megahertz
out
TO
FUNCTION
to high transition from
Microprocessor decoder
loads low order bits
N register.
8-11
Model 5342A
Service
8-22. DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
8-23. Before performing any of the following disassembly or reassembly procedures, the following steps must be performed.
a.
Set LINE ON-STBY switch to STBY position.
b.
Remove line power cable from Input Power Module (A23).
8-24.
Top Cover Removal
8-25.
To remove the top cover proceed as follows:
a.
Place 5342A with top cover facing up.
b.
At top rear of instrument remove pozidrive screw from rear cap retainer and remove
retainer,
c.
Slide top cover back until free from frame and lift off.
d.
To gain access to pc assemblies remove screws from top plate and remove plate.
8-26.
Bottom Cover Removal
8-27.
To remove the bottom cover proceed as follows:
a.
Place 5342A with bottom cover facing up.
In the following step, the two front plastic feet must
be removed from the bottom panel to avoid damage
to internal wiring.
b.
Remove two front plastic feet from bottom cover, Lift upon back edge of plastic foot and
push back on front edge of plastic foot to free foot from bottom cover.
c.
Loosen captive pozidrive screw at rear edge of bottom cover.
d.
Slide bottom cover back until it clears the frame. Reverse the procedure to replace the
cover.
8-28.
8-29.
FRONT FRAME REMOVAL
To remove front frame from main housing of the instrument, proceed as follows:
a.
Remove top and bottom covers as described in preceding paragraphs,
b.
Remove nut from type N connector on front panel.
c.
Remove two screws from front of each side strut attaching front panel frame.
d.
From bottom front of instrument, remove coax cable by pulling off connectors from A1J1
and A1J3. Remove cable strap connector from A2 Display Driver board. Note orientation
of connector pins for reference during reassembly,
In the following step, note the cable attached to the
power LINE switch and avoid stress on cable connections during removal of front panel frame.
8-12
Model 5342A
Service
e.
Slowly slide front panel frame off while pressing type N connector rearward through
panel.
f.
The front panel frame (containing assemblies A1 and A2) can now be moved freely within
limits of the power cable, as shown in Figure 8-2.
8-30. Removal of Al Display Assembly and A2 Display Drive Assembly from
Front Panel Frame
8-31. To remove A1 and A2 assemblies, remove frame as described in above paragraph and
proceed as follows:
a.
Remove the A1-A2 assemblies (combined) from front panel frame by removing the nut
from the front panel BNC connector and removing the 5 large attaching screws from A2
Display Driver board,
b. Separate the Al and A2 assemblies by removing the two nuts attaching plug P1 on the Al
Display assembly. Do not remove the attached screws from A2 Display Driver assembly.
c.
Reassembly procedures are essentially the reverse of the disassembly procedures.
8-32. Replacement of LED’s in Front Panel Switches
8-33. To replace a defective LED in a front panel pushbutton switch, remove and separate the Al
and A2 boards as described in the preceding paragraphs, and proceed as follows:
a.
Pull off the switch cap that covers the defective LED.
b.
Use a short length (approximately 2 inches) of heat-shrink tubing that will fit over the
replacement LED. Apply heat to the tubing to make a tight fit.
c.
Unsolder the connections to the defective LED on the Al board. Slide the heat-shrink
tubing over the defective LED and withdraw.
d.
Place the replacement LED into the heat-shrink tubing and insert into the switch. Solder
the leads to the board.
8-34.
Removal of U1 Sampler, A25 Preamplifier, and A26 Sampler Driver
8-35.
Remove U1, A25, and A26 as follows:
a.
Remove 5342A bottom panel by loosening screw at rear, remove two front feet and slide
panel rearward.
b.
Refer to Figure 8-22 and locate assemblies at bottom front of instrument.
c.
Pull off coax cables from A1J1, A1J3, A25J1 (IF OUT INT), and A25J2 (IF OUT EXT).
d.
Disconnect rigid coax from U1 Sampler by loosening attaching nut.
e.
Remove nut on front panel type N connector and remove rigid cable to allow access.
f.
Remove W2 cable strap connector at A22 motherboard and move cable strap to one side
to allow access.
g.
Remove 5 screws attaching A25 mounting bracket (four corner and one middle screw)
and withdraw bracket (and attached assemblies) from intrument.
h.
Remove A26 from bracket by removing the 2 smalI attaching bolts and nuts. Separate A26
from U1 by loosening the interconnecting hex connector from U1. Remove the cover
from A26 to gain access to components,
i.
Remove U1 by removing one small bolt and nut, Pull U1 up out of socket.
j.
Assembly procedures are essentially the reverse order of the disassembly.
8-13
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-2.
8-14
Model 5342A
Service
8-36. FACTORY SELECTED COMPONENTS
8-37. Some component values are selected at the time of final checkout at the factory. These
values are selected to provide optimum compatibility with associated components and are
identified on schematics and parts lists by an asterisk (*). The recommended procedure for
replacing a factory-selected part is as follows:
a.
Refer to paragraphs 8-38 through 8-45 for test procedures required for selection of
critical value parts.
b.
For factory selected components that are not listed in paragraphs 8-38 through 8-45, use
the original value,
c.
After replacing parts, perform the test specified for the circuit in the performance and
adjustment sections of this manual to verify correct operation.
8-38. Procedure for Selecting Resistor R15 on Direct Count Amplifier A3
8-39. If resistor A3R15 is not properly selected for value (average value 42.2 ohms), the 5342A
may exhibit a miscount at the low frequency direct count input for frequencies near 500 MHz.
To properly select A3R15, perform the following:
a.
Set the 5342A to the 10 Hz-500 MHz RANGE and select 1 kHz RESOLUTION.
b.
With assembly A3 on an extender board, monitor A3U4(14) with an oscilloscope.
c.
The signal at A3U4(14) must go positive by 100 mV (±25 mV).
d. To determine the value of A3R15, first decide how much the actual upper voltage level at
A3U4(14) must change in order to fall between +75 mV to +125 mV. For every 5 mV
increase required, the value of A3R15 must be increased by 1 ohm and for every 5 mV
decrease, the value of A3R15 must be decreased by 1 ohm. For example, if the actual
voltage only goes positive by 25 mV, then a 75 mV increase is required. Increase A3R15
by
1
e.
Use a 1%, 0.125W resistor for A3R15, The following are HP part numbers for resistors
which may be used.
Value
Part No.
8-15
Model 5342A
Service
8-40. Procedure for Selecting Resistor R16 and Capacitor C10 on Direct Count Amplifier A3
8-41. If resistor A3R16 and capacitor A3C10 are not the proper value, the 5342A will exhibit miscount at low levels for frequencies near 10 Hz at the high impedance direct count input. This miscount is caused by leakage of the 300 MHz synthesizer frequency into the low frequency input.
To select A3R16 and A3C10, perform the following:
a.
With the 5342A set to the 10 Hz—500 MHz range, impedance select set to
1 Hz
resolution, apply a 10 Hz signal at a level of 50 mV rms. if the counter properly counts
10 Hz, leave A3R16 at 510 (0698-3378) and A3C10 at 2.2 pF (0160-3872).
b. If the counter miscounts change A3R16 to
(0160-3874).
(0698-5176) and change A3C10 to 10 pF
8-42. Procedures for Selecting Resistor R16 on Main Loop Amplifier A9
8-43. Whenever a repair is made in the main synthesizer loop consisting of assemblies A9, A8,
and A10, it may be necessary to change the value of resistor A9R16. If A9R16 is not the proper
value, the counter will miscount at high frequencies. This miscount will be independent of input
8-16
a.
Test setup:
b.
Set the signal generator to 18 GHz and approximately -10dBm. Place the 5342A to AUTO
and observe 18 GHz count.
c.
Set 5342A to MANUAL and observe the 5342A rear panel IF OUT on the spectrum
analyzer. Set spectrum analyzer SCAN WIDTH to 5 MHz and observe the following:
Model 5342A
Service
d. Reduce input signal level until counter no longer counts 18 GHz but displays all zeros.
The IF OUT on the spectrum analyzer should appear as:
e.
If the spectrum analyzer display remains as in the first photo, or if the IF is centered as
shown below, then change A9R16 to 15 MO (0683-1565).
IF THIS IS CENTERED, THEN
CHANGE A9R16 to 15 ML?.
8-44. Procedure for Selecting Resistor A16R2 on A16 Assembly (Option 002 or 003)
8-45. When replacing resistor A16R2 (average value
10K ohms) select the original factory
selected value that is labeled on U2 assembly (part of Option 002 or 003).
8-17
Model 5342A
Service
8-46. SERVICE ACCESSORY KIT 10842A
8-47. The 10842A Service Accessory Kit contains 10 special extender boards (Figure 8-3)
designed to aid in troubleshooting the 5342A, The following paragraphs describe equipment
supplied, replaceable parts and operation.
8-48. Equipment Supplied
8-49. Table 8-3 lists the boards contained in the 10842A Service Accessory Kit with their general
description and usage. The kit is shown in Figure 8-3.
Table 8-3. 10842A Kit Contents
HP PART NO. I
QTY. I
DESCRIPTION FOR USE
05342-60030
1
10 pin X2 Extender Boards for A4, A5, A6, and A18 assemblies.
05342-60031
1
12 pin X2 Extender Boards for A3, A7, A8, A9, and All assemblies.
05342-60032
1
15 pin X2 Extender Boards for the A24 assembly.
05342-60033
2
18 pin X2 Extender Boards for the A17 assembly.
05342-60034
2
22 pin X2 Extender Boards for A10, A12, A13, A20, A21 assemblies.
05342-60035
1
24 pin X2 Extender Boards for the A19 assembly,
05342-60036
1
Double 18 pin X2 Extender Boards for the A14 assembly.
05342-60039
1
Keyed double 18 pin X2 Extender Boards for the A15 HP-16 assembly.
NOTE
For the Option 002 and 003 A16 assembly, use one
05342-60030 (10 pin X2) Extender Board and one
05342-60033 (18 pin X2) Extender Board,
8-50. Replaceable Parts
8-51. The only replaceable parts in the 10842A kit are the two integrated circuits and five
switches on the 05342-60036 extender board. Table 8-4 lists the HP part number and description
of those parts. Refer to Section VI for ordering information,
Table 8-4. Replaceable Parts for Extender Board 05342-60036
8-18
Ref.
DESIG.
HP PART NO.
QTY.
U1
1820-1197
1
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INPUT
01698
SN74LS00N
U2
1820-1281
1
IC DCDR TTL LS 2-TO-4-LINE DUAL 2-INPUT
01698
SN74LS139N
S1
3101-1856
1
SWITCH-SL-8-1A-NS DIP-SLIDE-ASSY .1A
28480
3101-1856
S2
3101-1856
1
SWITCH-SL-8-1A-NS DIP-SLIDE-ASSY .1A
28480
3101-1856
53
3101-1856
1
SWITCH-SL 8-1A-NS DIP-SLIDE-ASSY .1A
28480
3101-1856
54
3101-1213
1
SWITCH-TGL SUBMIN DPST ,5A 120VAC PC
28480
3101-1213
55
3101-1675
1
SWITCH-TGL SUBMIN DPST .5A 120VAC/
DC PC
28480
3101-1675
DESCRIPTION
MFR PART NO.
Model 5342A
Service
●
Figure 8-3. 10842A Service Accessory Kit
8-19
Model 5342A
Service
8-52. Using Extender Board 05342-60036
8-53. The following paragraphs describe the general operation of the extender board
(05342-60036), Included is a description of the 3 DIP switches (S1, S2, and S3) the two toggle
switches (S4 and S5) and test points R1, R2, and R3. Figure 8-4 shows the signals present at R1, R2,
and R3, Figure 8-5 is the schematic diagram of the extender board.
8-54. The 05342-60036 extender board is used for troubleshooting the A14 Microprocessor
Assembly in the 5342A. This extender board not only allows operation of A14 outside the instrument casting but it also permits:
a.
Isolation of the 16-line address bus and the 8-line data bus from the rest of the
instrument.
b.
Generation of START/STOP signals for performing signature analysis on individual
ROM’s on A14,
c.
Manual control of the microprocessor reset.
8-55. The S1 switch (leftmost switch) opens the data bus. With all switches up, the switches are in
the closed position. The S2 and S3 switches open the 16 lines of the address bus.
8-56. Test points R1, R2, and R3 are used in taking signatures of the A14 ROM outputs as
described in Table 8-9. U1 and U2 decode address lines to generate signals which bracket the
addresses of each specific ROM. The signal at R1 is Iow only when ROM U1 is enabled. The signal
at R2 is low only when ROM U4 is enabled. The signal at R3 is Iow only when ROM U7 is enabled.
8-57. If the A14 Microprocessor is put into free-run as described in Table 8-9, the signals shown
in Figure 8-4 should be observed at test points R1, R2, and R3 on the extender board.
Figure 8-4. Extender Board (05342-60036) Test Points R1, R2, and R3
8-20
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-5. Extender Board (05342-60036) Schematic Diagram
8-21
Model 5342A
Service
8-58. LOGIC SYMBOLS
8-59. Logic symbols used in this manual conform to the American National Standard ANSI
Y32.14-1973 (IEEE Std. 91-1973). This standard supersedes MIL-STD-806B. In the following paragraphs logic symbols are described. For further descriptions refer to HP Logic Symbology
manual, part number 5951-6116.
8-60. Logic Concepts
8-61. The binary numbers 1 and 0 are used in pure logic where 1 represents true, yes, or active
and 0 represents false, no, inactive. These terms should not be confused with the physical
quantity (e.g., voltage) that may be used to implement the logic, nor should the term “active” be
confused with a level that turns a device on or off, A truth table for a relationship in logic shows
(implicitly or explicitly) all the combinations of true and false input conditions and the result
(output). There are only two basic logic relationships, AND and OR. The following illustrations
assume two inputs (A and B), but these can be generalized to apply to more than two inputs.
AND Y is true if and only if A is true and B is
true (or more generally, if all inputs are
true).
Y=1 if and only if A=1 and B=1
y=A•B
TRUTH TABLE
EQUIVALENT
SYMBOLS
OR Y is true if and only if A is true or B is true
(or more generally, if one or more input(s)
is (are) true).
Y=1 if and only if A=1 or B=1
Y=A+B
TRUTH TABLE
EQUIVALENT
SYMBOLS
8-62. Negation
8-63. In logic symbology, the presence of the negation indication symbol o provides for the
presentation of logic function inputs and outputs in terms independent of their physical values,
the Ø-state of the input or output being the l-state of the symbol referred to the symbol
description.
8-22
Model 5342A
Service
EXAMPLE 1
EXAMPLE 2
EXAMPLE 3
EXAMPLE 4
says that Z is not true if A is true and B is true or that Z is true if A and B are not both true.
z=AB or Z=AB. This is frequently referred to as NAND—(for
— NOT AND).
says that Z is true if A is not true or if B is not true. Z=A+B. Note that this truth table is
identical to that of Example 1. The logic equation is merely a DeMorgan’s transformation
of the equations
— —in Example 1. The symbols are equivalent.
also share common truth table and are equivalent transformations of each other.
The NOT OR form (Example 3) is frequently referred to as NOR.
NOTE
In this manual the logic negation symbol is NOT used.
8-64. Logic Implementation and Polarity Indication
8-65. Devices that can perform the basic logic functions, AND and OR, are called gates. Any
device that can perform one of these functions can also be used to perform the other if the relationship of the input and output voltage levels to the logic variables 1 and 0 is redefined
suitably.
8-66. In describing the operation of electronic logic devices, the symbol H is used to represent a
“high level”, which is a voltage within the more-positive (less-negative) of the two ranges of
voltages used to represent the binary variables. L is used to represent a “low level”, which is a
voltage within the less-positive (more-negative) range.
8-67. A function table for a device shows (implicitly or explicitly) all the combinations of input
conditions and the resulting output conditions.
8-68. In graphic symbols, inputs or outputs that are active when at the high level are shown
without polarity indication. The polarity indicator symbol
denotes that the active (one)
state of an input or output with respect to the symbol to which it is attached is the low level.
NOTE
The polarity indicator symbol “
“ is used in this manual.
8-23
Model 53424
Service
NEGATIVE alternatively, by assigning the relationship H=Ø, L=1 at both input and output, Device #l
can perform the OR function and Device #2 can perform the AND function. Such a conLOGIC
sistent assignment is referred to as negative logic. The corresponding logic symbols would
be:
DEVICE #2
DEVICE #l
8-69. MIXED LOGIC. The use of the polarity indicator symbol (
) automatically invokes a
mixed-logic convention. That is, positive logic is used at the inputs and outputs that do not have
polarity indicators, negative logic is used at the inputs and outputs that have polarity indicators.
This may be shown either of two ways:
Note the equivalence of these symbols to
examples 1 and 2 and the fact that the
function table is a positive-logic translation
(H=1, L=Ø) of the NAND truth table, and
also note that the function table is the
negative-logic translation (H=Ø, L=1) of the
NOR truth table, given in Example 3.
This may be shown either of two ways:
Note the equivalence of these symbols to
examples 3 and 4 and the fact that the
function table is a positive-logic translation
(H=1, L=Ø) of the NOR truth table, and
also note that the function table is the
negative-logic translation (H=Ø, L=1 ) of the
the NAND truth table, given in Example 1.
8-70. It should be noted that one can easily convert from the symbology of positive-logic
distinctive shape alone. To convert from the symbology of negative-logic, a polarity indication
shape or vice versa.
8-71. It was shown that any device that can perform OR logic can also perform AND logic and
vice versa. DeMorgan’s transformation is illustrated in Example 1 through 7. The rules of the
transformation are:
1.
At each input or output having a negation (o) or polarity ( ) indicator, delete the
indicator.
2. At each input or output not having an indicator, add a negation (o) or polarity (
indicator.
3. Substitute the AND symbol
for the OR symbol
)
or vice versa.
These steps do not alter the assumed convention; positive-logic stays positive, negativeIogic stays negative, and mixed-logic stays mixed.
8-24
Model 5342A
Service
8-72. The choice of symbol maybe influenced by these considerations: (1) The operation being
performed may best be understood as AND or OR. (2) In a function more complex than a basic
gate, the inputs will usually be considered as inherently active high or active low (e.g., the J and K
inputs of a J-K flip-flop are active high and active low, respectively). (3) In a chain of logic, understanding and the writing of logic equations are often facilitated if active low or negated outputs
feed into active low or negated inputs.
8-73. Other Symbols
8-74.
Additional symbols are required to depict complex logic diagrams, as follows:
Dynamic input activated by transition from a low level to a high level. The
opposite transition has no effect at the output.
Dynamic input activated by transition from a high level to a low level. The
opposite transition has no effect at the output.
Exclusive OR function. The output will assume its indicated active level if and
only if one and only one of the two inputs assumes its indicated active level.
Inverting function. The output is low if the input is high and it is high if the input
is low. The two symbols shown are equivalent.
Noninverting function. The output is high if the input is high and it is low if the
input is low. The two symbols shown are equivalent.
OUTPUT DELAY. The output signal is effective when the input signal returns
to its opposite state.
EXTENDER. Indicates when a logic function increases (extends) the number
of inputs to another logic function.
FLIP-FLOP. A binary sequential element with two stable states: a set (1) state
and a reset (0) state. Outputs are shown in the 1 state when the flip-flop is set.
In the reset state the outputs will be opposite to the set state.
RESET. A 1 input will reset the flip-flop. A return to 0 will cause no further
effect.
SET. A 1 input will set the flip-flop. A return to 0 will cause no further action.
TOGGLE. A 1 input will cause the flip-flop to change state. A return to 0 will
cause no further action.
8-25
Model 5342A
Service
J INPUT.
Similar to the S input except if both J and K (see below) are at 1, the
flip-flop changes state.
K INPUT. Similar to the R input (see above).
D INPUT (Data). Always dependent on another input (usually C). When the
C and D inputs are at 1, the flip-flop will be set. When the C is 1 and the D is 0,
the flip-flop will reset.
Address symbol has multiplexing relationship at inputs and demultiplexing
relationship at outputs.
8-75. Dependency Notation “C” “G” “V” “F”
8-76. Dependency notation is a way to simplify symbols for complex IC elements by defining
the existence of an AND relationship between inputs, or by the AND conditioning of an output
by an input without actually showing all the elements and interconnections involved. The
following examples use the letter “C” for control and “G” for gate. The dependent input is
labeled with a number that is either prefixed (e.g., 1X) or subscripted (e.g., X1). They both mean
the same thing. The letter “V” is used to indicate an OR relationship between inputs or between
inputs and outputs with this letter (V). The letter”F” indicates a connect-disconnect relationship.
If the “F” (free dependency) inputs or outputs are active (1) the other usual normal conditions
apply. If one or more of the “F” inputs are inactive (0), the related “F” output is disconnected
from its normal output condition (it floats).
The input that controls or gates other inputs is labeled with a “C” or a “G”,
followed by an identifying number. The controlled or gated input or output is
labeled with the same number. In this example, “1” is controlled by “G1. ”
When the controlled or gated input or output already has a functional Iable (X
is used here), that label will be prefixed or subscripted by the identifying number.
If a particular device has only one gating or control input then the identifying
number may be eliminated and the relationship shown with a subscript.
If the input or output is affected by more than one gate or control input, then the
identifying numbers of each gate or control input will appear in the prefix or
subscript, separated by commas. in this example “X” is controlled by “G1”
and “G2.”
8-26
Model 5342A
Service
8-77. Control Blocks
8-78. A class of symbols fcr complex logic are called control blocks. Control blocks are used to
show where common control signals are applied to a group of functionally separate units.
Examples of types of control blocks follow.
Register control block. This symbol is used with an associated array of flip-flop
symbols to provide a point of placement for common function lines, such as a
common clear.
Shift register control block. These symbols are used with any array of flip-flop
symbols to form a shift register. An active transition at the inputs causes left
or right shifting as indicated.
Counter control block. The symbol is used with an array of flip-flops or other
circuits serving as a binary or decade counter. An active transition at the +1 or
-1 input causes the counter to increment one count upward or downward, respectively. An active transition at the ±1 input causes the counter to increment
one count upward or downward depending on the input at an up/down control.
Selector control block. These symbols are used with an array of OR symbols to
provide a point of placement for selection (S) or gating (G) lines. The selection
lines enable the input designated 0, 1 , . . . .n of each OR function by means of a
binary code where S0 is the least-significant digit. If the 1 level of these lines is
low, polarity indicators (h) will be used. The gating lines have an AND relation
with the respective input of each OR function: G1 with the inputs numbered 1,
G2 with the input numbered 2, and so forth. If the enabling levels of these lines
is low, polarity indicators (
) will be used.
Output selector control block. This symbol is used with a block symbol having
multiple outputs to form a decoder. The selection lines enable the output designated 0, 1, . . . . n of each block by means of a binary code where S0 is the leastbe used.
8-27
Model 5342A
Service
8-79. Complex Logic Devices
8-80. Logic elements can be combined to produce very complex devices that can perform more
difficult functions. A control block symbol can be used to simplify understanding of many complex devices. Several examples of complex devices are given here. These examples are typical of
the symbols used in schematic diagrams in this manual.
Reference Designation
A2U2, A2U7
Part Number
1820-0468
SN7445N
Description
BCD TO DECIMAL DECODER/DRIVER
The output which is low will correspond to the binary weighted input. The minus
signs at the output indicate that the element is capable of supplying LOW’s only,
Reference Designation
A2U3
Part Number
1820-1443
SN74LS293N
Description
4-BIT BINARY COUNTER
This binary counter has four master-slave flip-flops and gating for which the count
cycle length is divide-by-eight. The counter has a gated zero reset. To use the maximum count length, the pin 11 input is connected to the pin 9 output. The input
count pulses are applied to the pin 10 input.
Reference Designation
A2U8, A2U11
Part Number
1820-0428
SN7489
Description
64-BIT READ/WRITE MEMORY
This memory has an array of 64 flip-flop memory cells in a matrix to provide 16 words
of 4 bits each, Information present at the data input (pins 4,6, 10, 12) is written into
memory by holding both the memory enable (pin 2) and write enable (pin 3) LOW
while addressing the desired word at the BCD weighted inputs (pins 1, 13, 14, 15).
The complement of the information written into memory is read out at the four outputs by holding memory enable (pin 2) LOW, write enable (pin 3) HIGH and selecting the desired address,
8-28
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A2U12, A2U16
Part Number
1820-1254
DM8095N
Reference Designation
A14U16, A14U18
Part Number
1820-1368
DM8096N
Reference Designation
A2U6
1820-1049
DM8097N
Reference Designation
A14U8
Part Number
1820-1255
DM8098N
Description
HEX BUFFERS - HEX INVERTERS
The buffers (8095-8097) and inverters (8096-8098) convert standard TTL or DTL outputs to THREE-STATE outputs. The 8095 and 8096 control all six devices from
common inputs (pins 1 and 15 LOW). The 8097 and 8098 control four devices from
one input (pin 1 LOW) and two devices from another input (pin 15 LOW).
Reference Designation
A2U17
Part Number
1820-1428
74LS158
Description
2-LINE TO 1-LINE DATA SELECTOR/MULTIPLEXER
This quad two input multiplexer selects one of two word inputs and outputs the data
the data when enabled. The level at pin 1 selects the input word. The outputs are
LOW when pin 15 is LOW.
8-29
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A2U18,A2U18, A9U1,
A10U4, A12U13, A13U4,
A14U9 A15U3, A15U4,
A15U9, A15U10, A15U14,
A15U19, A15U34, A15U34,
A17U9, A17U15
Part Number
1820-1112
SN74LS74N
Description
DUAL D-TYPE FLIP-FLOP
The dual D-type flip-flop consists of two independent D-type flip-flops. The information present at the data (Dc) input is transferred to the active-high and active-low
outputs on a low-to-high transition of the clock (C) input. The data input is then
locked out and the outputs do not change again until the next low-to-high transition of the clock input. The set (S) and reset (R) inputs override all other input conditions: when (S) is low, the active-high output is forced high; when reset (R) is low,
the active-high output is forced low. Although normally the active-low output is the
complement of the active-high output, simultaneous low inputs at the set and reset
will force both the active-low and active-high outputs to go high at the same time on
some D-type flip-flops. This condition will exist only for the length of time that
both set and reset inputs are held low. The flip-flop will return to some indeterminate state when both the set and reset inputs are returned to the high state.
Reference Designation
A1U22
Part Number
1820-0574
DM8551N
Description
4-BIT D-TYPE REGISTERS
C inputs is loaded
When both data-enable inputs (9 and 10) are LOW, data at the D
into the flip-flops on the next positive transition of the clock (pin 7), When both outputs control inputs (pins 1 and 2) are LOW, data is available at the outputs. The outputs are disabled by a HIGH at either output control input. The outputs then
represent a high impedance.
8-30
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A10U1, A13U13, A13U14
A13U17, A13U18
Part Number
1820-1251
SN74LS196N
Description
50/30 MHz PRESETTABLE DECADE COUNTER/LATCH
The Decade Counter consists of a divide-by-two and a divide-by-five counter
formed by connecting pin 5 to pin 6 and taking the output from pin 12.
The outputs may be preset to any state by making “C” active low and entering the
desired data at the “Dc ” inputs. The outputs at pins 5, 9, 2, and 12 will then correspond to the data inputs independent of the state of the count-up clocks at pins 6
and 8. An active high signal at pin 1 then enables the counter by Iatching the parallel
data into the counter. The count-up clock at pin 8 clocks the 2
counter and pin 6
clocks the
counter. When the counter is clocked at pins 8 or 6, the outputs will
change on the negative-going edge of the signal. An active low at the “R” (reset)
input (pin 13) causes all the outputs to go low independent of the counting state.
Reference Designation
A10U8, A10U9,
A10U13, A10U14
Part Number
1820-1429
74LS160
Description
SYNCHRONOUS DECADE COUNTER
This synchronous presettable decade counter has four master slave flip-flops that
are triggered on the positive-going edge of the clock pulse (pin 2). A LOW at the
load input (pin 9) disables the counter and causes the outputs to agree with the
setup data after the next clock pulse regardless of the levels at the enable inputs
(pins 7 and 10). The clear function (pin 1) is asynchronous and a low level clear input
sets all outputs low regardless of the levels of the clock, load or enable inputs. Both
count enable inputs (pins 7 and 10) must be HIGH to count and the pin 10 input is fed
forward to neable the carry output (pin 15).
8-31
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A10U10, A10U15, A10U17
Part Number
1820-1196
SN74LS174N
Reference Designation
A1W11, A10U16
Part Number
1820-1195
SN74LS175N
Description
HEX/QUAD D-TYPE FLIP-FLOPS
Information at the D inputs is transferred to the outputs on the positive-edge of the
clock pulse (pin 9). Clock triggering occurs at a particular voltage level. The hex FFs
have single outputs, the quad FFs have complementary outputs.
Reference Designation
A12U10, A12U15
Part Number
1820-1193
SN74LS197N
Description
30 MHz PRESETTABLE BINARY
COUNTERS/LATCHES
This counter consists of four master-slave flip-flops that form a divide-by-two and a
divide-by-eight counter. The outputs may be preset to any state by placing a low on
pin 1 and entering the desired data. The outputs will change to agree with the inputs
regardless of the state of the clocks. When used as a high-speed 4-bit ripple-through
counter, the output of pin 5 must be externaly connected to the clock 2 input (pin
6). The input count pulses are applied to the clock 1 input (pin 8). Simultaneous
divisions by 2, 4, 8, and 16 are performed at output pins 12, 2, 9, and 5, respectively.
When used as a 3-bit ripple-through counter, the input count pulses are applied to
the clock 2 input (pin 6). Simultaneous frequency divisions by 2, 4, and 8 are available at the Q B. Qc, and QD outputs. Independent use of flip-flop A is available if the
load and clear functions coincide with those of the 3-bit ripple-through counter.
8-32
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A13U1, A13U2
Part Number
1820-0634
Description
SIX DECADE COUNTER
The six decade counter is an MOS, 6 digit, 10 MHz ripple-through counter with
buffer storage for each of the 6 decades. The circuit has one set of BCD (positive
logic (8421) outputs that may be switched from digit-to-digit by means of a 3-to-6
line decoder. An overflow output (pin 7) and a fifth decade carry output (pin 6) is
also available. When the transfer input (pin 4) is held LOW, the decimal count of a
selected decade can be transmitted through its own decade storage buffer to the
BCD outputs by means of the 3-to-6 line decoder which is controlled by the BCD
inputs.
Reference Designation
A13U5, A13U6
A13U9, A13U10
Part Number
1820-1238
SN74LS253N
Description
DUAL 4-INPUT MULTIPLEXER
Input states on pins 2 and 14 are decoded according to their weighting modifiers to
form AND gates (GO through G3) in the common control block. The data inputs have
numeric modifiers to indicate the specific gate which must be active for that input to
be selected. The output on pin 7 will be HIGH IFF the selected input is HIGH and
the inhibit input on pin 1 is LOW. Similarly, the ouptut on pin 9 will be HIGH IFF
the selected input is HIGH and the inhibit input on pin 15 is LOW. If an inhibit input
(pin 1 or 15) is HIGH the corresponding output (pin 7 or 9) will be LOW regardless of
the state of the selected input.
8-33
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A14U2, A14U3
Part Number
1820-1081
8T26
Description
QUAD BUS DRIVER/RECEIVER
The bus driver/receiver consists of four pairs of inverting logic gates and two
buffered common enable inputs (pins 1 and 15). A LOW on the input enable (pin 1)
enables the receiver gates. A HIGH on the bus enable (pin 15) input allows input
data to be transferred to the output of the driver, and a LOW forces the output to a
high impedance state.
Reference Designation
A15U23
Part Number
1816-1154
Reference Designation
A15U26
Part Number
1816-1155
Description
READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) WITH 32 ADDRESSES
Address selection is determined by the five upper inputs which are decoded into
32 possible addresses (AW through A31) corresponding to the weighing modifiers at
the inputs. Input modifier F (pin 15) gates the outputs. Stored data will be read from
the selected memory address if F is active (LOW). The output data (pins 1-7 and 9)
are active HIGH.
8-34
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A16U6, A16U7
Part Number
1820-1439
SN74LS258N
This quad two input multiplexer selects one of two word inputs and outputs the
data when enabled. When pin 15 is LOW, the level at pin 1 selects the input word.
The outputs are LOW. When pin 15 is HIGH, the outputs are off (high impedance).
Reference Designation
A17U4, A17U5, A17U7
Part Number
1820-1433
SN74LS164N
Description
8-BIT PARALLEL OUT SERIAL SHIFT REGISTER
This 8-bit shift register has gated serial inputs and an asynchronous clear. A LOW at
one or both gated serial inputs (pins 1, 2) inhibits entry of data and resets the first FF
to the low level at the next clock pulse (pin 8). A high-level input (pin 1 or 2) enables
the other input which will then determine the state of the first FF. Data is serially
shifted in and out of the 8-bit register during the positive-going transition of the
clock pulse. Clear is independent of the clock and occurs when pin 9 is LOW.
8-35
Model 5342A
Service
Reference Designation
A17U11
Part Number
1820-1442
SN74LS290N
8-81.
THEORY
OF
OPERATION
8-82, The following theory of operation is introduced with a description of the unique
harmonic heterodyne technique used in the 5342A, Then the overall operation is described with
a simplified block diagram, followed by discussions of FM tolerance, automatic amplitude discrimination, and sensitivity. The function and relationships of the major assemblies are described
next (to a complete block diagram), followed by a detailed description of the circuits on each
assembly with reference to the schematic diagrams.
8-83.
HARMONIC
HETERODYNE
TECHNIQUE
8-84. The HP 5342A Frequency Counter uses a harmonic heterodyne down-conversion technique to down convert the microwave input frequency into the range of its internal, lowfrequency counter. This technique combines the best performance characteristics of heterodyne
converters and transfer oscillators to achieve high sensitivity, high FM tolerance, and automatic
amplitude discrimination.
8-85, All microwave counters must down convert the unknown microwave frequency to a low
frequency signal which is within the counting range of an internal low frequency counter
(typically 200 to 500 MHz). Heterodyne converters down convert the unknown signal, f x , by
mixing it with an accurately known local oscillator frequency, f L O, such that the difference freq u e n c y , flF ( = f x - fLO if fx > fLO a n d = fLO - fx if fx < fL O) is within the counting range of the low
frequency counter. The counted frequency, flF, is then added (or subtracted if f x < fL O) to/from
the local oscillator frequency to determine the unknown frequency.
8-86. Like heterodyne converters, transfer oscillators also mix the unknown signal with harmonics of an internally generated signal, fvco. When one of the harmonics of the VCO signal,
N Ž fV C O , mixes with the unknown to produce zero beat, then the VCO frequency is measured by
the low frequency counter. After determining which harmonic produced zero beat, the measured VCO frequency is multiplied by N (fx = N•fV C O ). One of the major differences between
the heterodyne technique and the transfer oscillator technique is the fact that the heterodyne
8-36
Model 5342A
Service
converter employs a filter to select only one harmonic of the internal oscillator to mix with the
unknown whereas the transfer oscillator mixes the unknown simultaneously with all harmonics
of the internal frequency.
Figure 8-6. Harmonic Heterodyne Technique
8-87. Figure 8-6 is a simplified block diagram of the harmonic heterodyne technique. In this
technique, all of the harmonics of an internal oscillator (a programmable frequency synthesizer
locked to the counter’s time base) are simultaneously mixed with the unknown signal by the
sampler and sampler driver (samplers are like harmonic mixers except that the conduction angle
is much narrower — the sampling diodes in the HP5342A sampler, for example, conduct for only
a few picosecond during each period of the sampling signal) .The output of the sampler consists
of sum and difference frequencies produced by each harmonic of the internal oscillator mixing
with the unknown. The programmable frequency synthesizer is incremented in frequency until
one of the outputs of the sampler is in the counting range of the low frequency counter. The IF
detector detects when the IF is in the range of the low frequency counter and sends a signal
which causes the synthesizer control to stop incrementing the frequency of the frequency
synthesizer. The IF is then counted by the low frequency counter. The unknown frequency can
be determined from the relation: fx = N•f1 ± flF 1
where fx =
unknown frequency
N =
harmonic of frequency synthesizer which mixed with unknown to
produce countable IF
f1 =
programmed frequency of synthesizer
fIF1
=
IF produced by N•f1 mixing with fx
8-88. The frequency, f1, of the programmable synthesizer is known since it is known where
indexing of the synthesizer was stopped. The IF, flF1, is known since it is counted by the low frequency counter. Still to be determined are the N number and the sign (±) of the IF (the sign of flF1
will be (+) if N•f1 is less than fx ; the sign of fIF1 is (-) if N•fx is greater than f x ) .
8-37
Model 5342A
Service
8-89. To determine N and the sign of flF1 , one more measurement must be taken with the
flF2 , which is counted by the low frequency counter. N is determined by the following:
8-90. Referring to Figure 8-7, it is seen that if fx is greater than N•f1 , then flf1 , produced by
mixing N•f1 with fx , will be less than fIF2 , produced by mixing N•f2 with f x , since f2 is less
Figure 8-7. Frequency Relationships
8-91. If flF2 is less than flF2 , then N is computed from
If flF2 is greater than fIFl , then N is computed from
8-92, The unknown frequency is then computed from the following:
8-38
Model 5342A
Service
8-93. Since the frequency of the synthesizer is known to the accuracy of the counter’s time base
and the IF is measured to the accuracy of the counter’s time base, the accuracy of the microwave
measurement is Iimited only by the time base error and ±1 count error.
8-94.
HP
5342A
OVERALL
OPERATION
8-95. If all signals into the counter could be guaranteed to have little or no FM, then the counter
could operate quite simply as described previously. However, many signals in the microwave
region, such as those originating from microwave radios, have significant amounts of frequency
modulation. To prevent FM on the signal from causing an incorrect computation of N, the
harmonic heterodyne technique is implemented as shown in Figure 8-8 which is a simplified
block diagram of the HP 5342A. The differences between Figure 8-8 and the block diagram of
Figure 8-6 a r e :
a.
Two synthesizers which are offset by precisely 500 kHz.
b.
Two counters.
c.
A multiplexer which multiplexes between the two synthesizer frequencies - when f 1 i s
driving the sampler driver, the IF 1 produced is measured by counter A and when f 1 drives
the sampler driver, the IF 2 produced is measured by counter B.
d.
A pseudorandom sequence generator which controls the multiplexer during N
determination.
8 - % . The overall operating algorithm for the block diagram of Figure 8-8 is as follows: With the
multiplexer having selected the main oscillator output, the main oscillator frequency, f 1 , is swept
from 350 MHz to 300 MHz in 100 kHz steps (the offset oscillator frequency, f 2 , is maintained at f1 500 kHz by a phase-locked loop) until the IF detector indicates the presence of an IF signal in the
range of 50 MHz to 100 MHz. At this point, the synthesizer stops its sweep and the counter starts
the harmonic number (N) determination. A pseudorandom sequence (prs) output by the prs
Figure 8-8. HP 5342A Simplified Block Diagram
8-39
Model 5342A
Service
generator switches between the main oscillator and offset oscillator as well as counter A and B so
that counter A accumulates flF1 (produced by N•f1 mixing with fx) and counter B accumulates f IF2
(produced by N•f2 mixing with fx). The pseudorandom switching prevents coherence between
the switching rate of the multiplexer and the modulation rate of the FM from producing an
incorrect computation of N. Of course, during the sequence, each counter is enabled for exactly
the same total amount of time. The N number and sign of the IF are computed as previously
described since counter A accumulates flF1, and counter B accumulates flF2. The prs (pseudorandom sequence) is then disabled, the main oscillator is selected, and the frequency of f IF1 is
measured in counter A to the selected resolution.
8-97. The total measurement time, then, consists of these three components: sweep time, N
determination time, and gate time. The period of the sweep is 150 ms which is the worst case time
to detect a countable IF. The normalprsfor N determination lasts for 360.4 ms (a rear panel switch
selects a longer prs for higher FM tolerance). The gate time required depends on the resolution.
For 1 Hz resolution, the gate is 1 second. For gate times from 10 Hz to 100 kHz, the gate time is
4 s/Hz so that 1 kHz resolution is achieved in 4 ms. 1 MHz resolution takes a 10-microsecond gate
time.
8-99. FM TOLERANCE
8-99. The worst case normal mode FM tolerance is 20 MHz p-p and occurs when the period of
the modulation is near the period of the pseudorandom sequence which is 360.4 milliseconds.
When the FM exceeds 20 MHz p-p, the computation of N may be in error by ±1 (round off error).
For FM is excess of 20 MHz p-p, a wide range FM mode with a long prs is selectable (via a rear
panel switch) which provides a worst case FM tolerance of 50 MHz p-p. In this case, however, the
limiting factor is not round off in the computation of N but the allowable range of frequencies in
the IF.
8-100. During the sweep, the frequency of the main oscillator is adjusted until fIF1 and fIF2 both
fall within the range of 50 MHz to 100 MHz. In the worst case, when the IF occurs at 100 MHz or
50 MHz, the signal may deviate by a maximum of 25 MHz before crossing the band-edge of allowable IF frequencies. This gives a worst case FM tolerance of 50 MHz peak-to-peak. For the wide
range FM, the period of the long pseudorandom sequence is 2.096 seconds which means that
acquisition time is significantly longer for the wide range FM mode.
8-101. AUTOMATIC AMPLITUDE DISCRIMINATION
8-102. The HP 5342A has the ability to automatically discriminate against lower amplitude signals in its range of 0.5-18 GHz in favor of the highest amplitude signal in the range. Thus, if there
is 20 dB separation (typically better than 10 dB) between the highest amplitude signal and any
other signal in the 0.5-18 GHz range, the counter automatically measures the highest amplitude
signal.
8-103. Amplitude discrimination is a feature of the HP 5342A because of two design features:
the bandwidth of the preamplifier, which is 175 MHz, means that there are no gaps between the
power spectrums produced by mixing harmonics of the oscillator with the input; and limiting of
8-40
Model 5342A
Service
all IF signals produced by inputs greater than the counter’s sensitivity means that the IF is at the
frequency of the largest amplitude signal in the input spectrum and is frequency modulated by
the lower amplitude signals. (This is the well known AM to PM conversion characteristic of
limiters. The bandwidth and roll off of the preamp are chosen so that the PM does not introduce
errors into the count. )
8-104. If there were gaps, then there could be a signal in the 0.5-18 GHz range which would
not appear in the down converted IF. Thus, this signal, even if it were the largest, could not
be measured.
8-105. SENSITIVITY
8-106. The limiting factor in determining the sensitivity of the HP 5342A is the effective noise
bandwidth of the IF. Since the IF signal to noise ratio must be kept at a value which insures that
there are no noise induced errors in counting the IF signal, the noise bandwidth of the IF determines the noise power; and, therefore, sets the minimum input signal level.
8-107. The IF Detector detects two parameters: one output is true if the IF signal is in the range
of 50 MHz to 100 MHz and the input power level is greater than approximately -30 dBm; the
other output is true if the IF signal is in the range of 25 MHz to 125 MHz and the input power
level is greater than approximately -30 dBm. The detector thus insures that the input signal is
sufficiently large to produce an IF with an acceptable signal to noise ratio. The 50 to 100 MHz IF
output is used when sweeping since, to achieve the specified FM tolerance, the counter must
center the IF somewhere in the range of 50 to 100 MHz. The 25 to 125 MHz output is used to
ensure that the IF signal does not exceed those limits and that the input does not drop below
-30 dBm. Either of these events occurring could cause a wrong computation for N.
8-108. The reason the IF is restricted to a 25 to 125 MHz bandwidth is examined in the following:
the actual bandwidth of the IF is 175 MHz (set by the A25 Preamplifier) which is required for automatic amplitude discrimination. However, the counter restricts the countable IF to frequencies
less than 125 MHz so as to prevent generating two IF signals - one generated by “N” times the
main oscillator frequency and the other generated by “N±1” times the main oscillator frequency.
If two IF signals are generated, then incorrect counting may result. By restricting the IF signal to
be less than 125 MHz, the upper torie is of a high enough frequency as to be sufficiently attenuated by the 175 MHz bandwidth of the preamplifier so that no errors are introduced. Consider
what would happen if IF frequencies to 175 MHz were allowed. Take the example of a 760 MHz
input signal. By mixing with the second harmonic of 300 MHz, an IF of 160 MHz is produced. The
input also mixes with the third harmonic of 300 MHz to produce another IF signal at 140 MHz.
Neither signal is greatly attenuated by the 175 MHz bandwidth of the preamp as shown below
and miscounting results because of interference between the two tones.
8-41
Model 5342A
Service
8-109. By limiting the IF to frequencies less than 125 MHz, the problem described in paragraph
8-108 does not occur. For the case of a 725 MHz input, the second harmonic of 300 MHz produces
an IF of 125 MHz (the maximum allowable IF) and the third harmonic produces an IF of 175 MHz.
But the IF signal at 175 MHz is attenuated by the175 MHz bandwidth of the preamplifier as shown
below so as to prevent errors in counting.
8-110. HP 5342A BLOCK DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION
8-111. Figure 8-9 is a block diagram of the HP5342Ashowingthe major assemblies of the instrument. There are five major sections: The direct count section, the synthesizer section, the IF
section, the time base section, and the control section. Each of these are discussed in the
following paragraphs.
8-112. Direct Count Section
8-113. The direct count section consists of the A3 Direct Count Amplifier assembly and the A13
Counter assembly. Frequencies less than 500 MHz may be measured directly by the direct count
input. The input signal, which is applied to the front panel BNC connector, is amplified and conditioned by the input amplfier on A3. The direct count main gate, also on A3, is enabled for a
specific period of time (determined by the resolution selected) by the LDIR GATE signal from
A17. During the time that the A3 main gate is enabled, counts pass through the main gate to
Counter A on the A13 Counter assembly where they are totalized. At the conclusion of the gate
time, the A14 Microprocessor assembly reads the contents of Counter A and sends the result to
Al Display along with the correct annunciators and decimal point. The microprocessor continually reads the status of a hardware flag on A17 which indicates the end of the sample rate
delay. At the end of the delay, the measurement process begins again.
8-114. Synthesizer Section
8-115, The synthesizer section consists of a main oscillator and an offset oscillator to provide
two output frequencies to A5 RF Multiplexer in the range of 300 MHz to 350 MHz which are
locked to the counter’s 10 MHz time base. The frequency is selected with 100 kHz resolution by
the A14 Microprocessor. The main oscillator is formed by the A8 Main VCO assembly, the A9
Main Loop Amplifier assembly, and the AlO Divide-by-N assembly. The microprocessor controls
the division factor N in A10 which determines the main oscillator frequency. The offset oscillator
consists of the A4 Offset VCO assembly, the A7 Mixer/Search Control assembly, and the A6 Offset Loop Amplifier assembly. The offset loop is phase locked at a frequency 500 kHz below the
main VCO frequency. Figure 8-10 is a block diagram of the synthesizer section which is described
in the following paragraphs.
8-116. Main Loop Operation
8-117. A buffered signal from the A8 Main VCO is fed back to the A10 Divide-by-N assembly.
The division factor, N, is programmed by the A14 Control assembly and is chosen by the relation
N= programmed frequency/50 kHz, For example, if the program requests a frequency of 346.7
MHz, then N would be equal to 6934 (=346,7/0.05), When the main loop is locked, the output of
the divide-by-N circuitry on A10 is 50 kHz, This is compared to a 50 kHz signal which is derived
8-42
Model 5342A
Service
from the time base and the phase error is sent to the A9 Main Loop Amplifier. The phase error
signals, available at XA10(1) and (1) are used by the main loop to drive the VCO frequency to the
programmed frequency.
8-118. The A9 Main Loop Amplifier sums and integrates the two phase detector outputs of A10.
The error signal is then passed through one of two low pass filters. When the HP 5342A is searching for an input signal in the range of 500 MHz to 18 GHz, the main loop VCO is programmed to
step from 350 MHz to 300 MHz in 100 kHz steps in approximately 90 milliseconds. To achieve this
fast search rate, a wideband low pass filter of approximately 2 kHz bandwidth is selected. When
the counter is actually making a measurement by opening the main gate and counting the IF frequency, a narrow band low pass filter of approximately 100 Hz bandwidth is selected to achieve
high spectral purity in the VCO output.
8-119. The error signal at the output of A9 drives the A8 Main VCO to a frequency which minimizes the error signal. Three buffered outputs are provided: one output is fed back to the A10
Divide-by N; another goes to the A5 RF Multiplexer; the third goes to the A7 Mixer/Search
Control assembly and is used by the OFFSET LOOP to set the offset VCO to a frequency which is
exactly 500 kHz below the Main VCO frequency.
8-120. Offset Loop Operation
8-121. The frequency of the main V,CO and the frequency of the offset VCO are fed to a mixer
on the A7 Mixer/Search Control asembly. The difference frequency at the output of the mixer is
fed to a phase detector and a 500 kHz detector. The 500 kHz detector sends a search enable
(HRSC EN) signal to the search generator on the A6 Offset Loop Amplifier if the offset VCO frequency is not 500 kHz less than the main VCO frequency .The search signal on A6 is a ramp waveform which drives the offset VCO to a frequency which is 500 kHz less than the main VCO frequency. When the 500 kHz detector on A7 detects the presence of 500 kHz, the search is stopped.
The phase detector on A7 compares the difference frequency out of the mixer with a 500 kHz
reference derived from the time base. The phase error signal is sent to A6.
8-122. The A6 Offset Loop Amplifier sums and integrates the two outputs of the phase detector
on A7. This error signal keeps the offset VCO on a frequency which is 500 kHz below the main
VCO frequency. To get the difference frequency out of the mixer on A7 into the capture range of
the phase-locked loop formed by A7, A6, and A4, a search generator on A6 is turned on in the
absence of a 500 kHz difference frequency. The generator sweeps the offset VCO over its range
until the VCO is 500 kHz less than the main VCO (the LPOS Slope signal generated on A6, prevents the loop from locking on the upper sideband where the offset VCO is 500 kHz greater than
the main VCO). At this point the search generator is disabled and the output of the phase
detector on A7 keeps the loop locked.
8-123. The offset VCO has two buffered outputs: one goes to the A5 RF Multiplexer and the
other is fed back to the A7 Mixer/Search Control assembly.
8-124. IF Section
8-125. The IF section amplifies the output of the U1 sampler and routes this IF to A13 for counting. It also provides digital outputs which indicate that the IF signal is of sufficient amplitude to
be counted and that it is in the proper frequency range. The A25 Preamplifier assembly provides
high gain amplification (approximately 42 dB) for the output of the sampler (the sampler has a
-48 dB conversion efficiency which means that an input signal at a level of Ø dBm will yield an IF at
approximately -48 dBm). The All IF Limiter assembly limits the amplitude of the IF signal. The
A12 IF Detector assembly detects both the amplitude of the IF as well as the frequency of the IF.
During the sweep, the microprocessor monitors the state of the 50 MHz-100 MHz detector output of A12 and stops sweeping when that detector is true. At the conclusion of the N determination the latched 25 MHz-125 MHz detector output is checked. If this detector is true, then the
IF signal never varied beyond the 25-125 MHz range nor did it drop too low in amplitude. It the
detector is false, then the computation of N maybe incorrect and the algorithm specifies that the
sweep start at a frequency 100 kHz lower than where it previously stopped sweeping.
8-43
Model 5342A
Service
8-44
Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-10.
Model 5342A
Service
8-45
Model 5342A
Service
8-126. Time Base/PSR Section
8-127. The time base section consists of the A24 Oscillator assembly which provides a 10 MHz
sine wave to the A18 Time Base Buffer assembly. A18 provides TTL compatible 10 MHz, 1 MHz,
and 500 kHz outputs to the rest of the counter. The A17 Timing Generator assembly uses the
1 MHz signal to provide gate times from 1 microsecond to 1 second in decade steps as well as
generate a pseudorandom sequence during the N determination portion of the algorithm. Based
on the position of the rear panel FM switch, the microprocessor selects a short prs (360.4 ms long)
for 20 MHz p-p FM tolerance (CW) or a long prs (2.096 seconds long) for 50 MHz p-p FM
tolerance (FM).
8-128. Control Section
8-129. The control section is made up of the A14 Microprocessor assembly, the A2 Display
Driver assembly, and the A1 Keyboard/Display assembly. The program stored in ROM on the A14
assembly controls the operating algorithm of the instrument. The A1 assembly is used by the
operator to interface with the stored program. Via the A1 keyboard, the operator selects operating modes (AUTO, MANUAL, CHECK), resolution and offsets. The A1 assembly also displays
measurement results. The A2 Display Driver assembly controls A1 and provides the interface with
the A14 Microprocessor.
8-130. DETAILED THEORY OF OPERATION
8-131, The detailed theory of operation is provided in the following paragraphs in numerical
order of the assemblies,
8-132. A1 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY AND A2 DISPLAY DRIVER ASSEMBLY
8-133, The A1 ,Display assembly and A2 Display Driver assembly shown in Figure 8-24 operate
together to provide the user interface with the microprocessor. For a description of microprocessor operation, refer to paragraph 8-228. The keyboard on the Al Display permits the operator to input commands to the microprocessor. The display on the Al Display is used by the
microprocessor to display measurement results, error codes, and other information to the operator, As an example, consider what occurs when the SET key is pressed by the operator. Pressing
the key generates an interrupt to the microprocessor. The program stops executing the current
program and jumps to a subroutine to find out which device caused the interrupt and why. The
subroutine determines that the keyboard generated the interrupt. Circuitry on A2 tells the
microprocessor that the SET key was pressed. The program then sends commands to A2 to cause
the light in the SET key to blink as well as the
code to be displayed, both of which act as
prompters to the user, All of this occurs very quickly and is virtually transparent to the user.
8-134. The A2 Display Driver assembly is driven by a 6 kHz clock (scan clock) formed by Schmitt
trigger U5E, feedback resistor R7, and capacitor C5. This clock is continuously running and outputs a TTL signal with a positive pulse width of approximately 40 ps, The output of the scan clock
goes through a jumper (which maybe removed to allow testing with a Iogic pulser to simulate the
clock) and drives decade counter U3. The outputs of U3 are decoded by U13C and U6 to reset the
U3 outputs to all TTL low after 13 clocks have been counted. These 13 states correspond to the
11 digits and 2 annunciator lines which need to be driven in the display.
8-135. The output of the U3 counter passes through 3-state driver U6. The purpose of U6 is to
force invalid states into column scanner U2 and U7 so that on power-up, (when LDVRST goes
low) the display is blank. On reset, the input to U10 goes Iow and the control to U6(1) goes high,
which forces U6 to the high Z state. Pull up resistors R2(C,D,G,F) put state 16 into U7 and state 7
into U2. Since these states are out of the normally operating range of the scanners, all display
digits and annunciators are blanked.
8-46
Model 5342A
Service
8-136. In normal operation, U6(1) is low and the output of the 13 state counter drives BCD-todecimal decoders U2 and U7. These two devices forma column scanner whose low output turns
on, one at a time, Al driver transistors Q13, Q10, Q9, Q8, Q7, Q6, Q5, Q4, Q1, Q2, Q11, Q12 for a
period of approximately 166 µS ( kHz). For example, when the 13 state counter reaches 0111
(7), then U7(9) goes low, turning on transistor AIQ4 and applying +5.OV to the LED digit AI DS14.
Whatever segment inputs are low will thus be momentarily lighted. The correct code to be input
to the LED digit is stored in TTL RAM A2U11 and U8. U8 and U11 each can store sixteen 4-bit
words. When the 13 state counter is in state 0111,then the inputs to RAM U11 and U8 are at 0111
and the desired digits code for DS14 is output, through A2U1 and U4, to the selected digit. Limiter
resistors R8, R13, R15, R16, R6, R4, R11, and R14 limit the current through the LED segments when
the NAND gate output (U4 and U1) goes low. When the 13 state counter reaches 1000, then the
input to U2 looks like 0000 and U2(1) goes low which applies +5.0 volts to Q1 and lights DS13.
When the 13 state counter reaches 1100 (12, 13th state since started at 0), then the input to U2 is
0010 and U2(5) goes low and one or more annunciator lights are turned on according to the
code stored in RAM U11, U8.
8-137. HDSPWRT comes in at A2J1(3). When this signal is high, data is written into RAM U8, U11
from the microprocessor for display. When HDSPWRT goes low, the output of U13D is low and
quad multiplexer U17 selects its “l” inputs. Thus, the output of the 13 state counter increments
through 13 locations in RAM and causes the contents of RAM to be displayed. When HDSPWRT
is high, U17 selects its “0” inputs. The write enable inputs to U11 and U8 pin 3 are enabled and
data appearing on the D0 through D7 data lines is stored at the addresses appearing on the AØ
through A3 address lines. Segments are labeled as shown below. DO lines sends (a) segment information; D1 sends (b), D2 sends (c), D3 sends (d). Segments (a), (b), (c), and (d) are stored in U11.
The D4 data lines sends (e) segment information, D5 sends (f), D6 sends (g), D7 sends decimal
point. Segments (e), (f), (g), (alp) are stored in U8. For example, if it were desired to display 2 in
the DS21 or least significant digit, then segments (a), (b), (g), (e), and (d) must be lighted.
To light these segments the following action occurs. In address location 1111 (the output of U17
is inverted in U11, 1 (=D1) 1 (=D2) 0 (=D3) 1 (=D4) are stored. In address location 1111 in U8,
1 (=D1) 0 (=D2) 1 (=D3) 0 (=D4) are stored. When the 13 state counters puts out ØØØØ, then the
output of U11 will be 1101 (5,7,9, 11) and the output of U8 will be 1Ø1Ø (5,7,9,11 ). The column
scanner has output U7(1) low and all other outputs high (U2(10) is also low but it is not connected
to any digit). Thus +5.0 volts is applied to DS21 and the correct segment inputs to DS21 are
grounded to turn on segments (a), (b), (g), (e), and (d) which forms a digit 2. The DO—D3 data lines
and A0, A1 address lines are also connected from driver U17 to the Option 004 (DAC) circuit on
A2 assembly, Figure 8-25. Refer to paragraph 8-340 for Option 004 circuit description.
8-138. Keyboard Operation
8-139. When a key (pushbutton switch) is depressed, it is not immediately recognized but must
wait until the column scanner reaches that particular key. However, since the scan rate is 6 kHz,
this is much faster than the operator can depress and withdraw his finger. When the column
scanner places a low on the line connected to the key which has been depressed, a low pulse is
generated on the output of A2U5(6), This pulse is called KEY and when low, indicates that a key
has been depressed.
8-47
Model 5342A
Service
8-140. With KEY low and SCAN low, U9(1) goes high which clocks latch U22 and causes it to
store the address (0000 to 1100) of the column of the key which was pushed. Since there are two
keys per column, another line is used to indicate top or bottom row, The output of U9(1 ), which
clocks U22, also clocks U19A. U19A(5) will be low if a top row key is pushed and will be high if a
bottom row key is pushed. In this manner, the microprocessor determines exactly which key has
been depressed.
8-141. Flip-flop U18A is also clocked by the output of U9(1). Its output at U18A(5) will be high
anytime that a key is pushed. It is reset to low when the 13 state counter reaches the end of the
scan at state 1100. The low signal at U2(5) causes the output of U9(10) to go momentarily low and
reset U18A. The End of Scan signal at the output of U9(13) clocks U19B and, if U18A(5) is high, will
clock a high into U19B(9). This output is the Key Down signal. Key Down high goes to U22(9, 10)
and inhibits other addresses from being latched. U19B(9) is also used as part of the Recall subroutine. To recall a value, the recalled value will be displayed as long as its associated key is
depressed. The program examines the output of U19B(9) and if it remains high, continues to
display the recalled value. When the key is released, U19B(9) will be reset by End of Scan and the
program, upon detecting this, stops displaying the recalled value and displays the original display
(e.g., frequency).
8-142. Flip-flop U18B stores the interrupt. U19B(9) going high at the end of the scan clocks a
high into U18B(9). This is inverted by U10 and becomes LIRQ which interrupts the microprocessor. The program jumps to a service routine which, upon determining that the keyboard
has requested service, issues a low keyboard read command LKBRD. This signal enables threestate latch U22 which puts out its contents onto the bus. LKBRD also enables the three-state
buffer U12 which puts out the contents of U19A, U18B, and the position of the front panel
RANGE switch. The program determines which key was pressed and acts accordingly. The LKBRD
also resets the interrupt flip-flop U18B.
8-143. Processor looks at J1(15) to check if operation is in direct mode (10 Hz-500 MHz) or 500
MHz-18 GHz mode.
8-144. Capacitor C7 is used to differentiate the positive transition of HDSPWRT to produce the
write pulse to U8(3) and U11(3).
8-145. A3 DIRECT COUNT AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY
8-146. The input signal is applied to the BNC connector and switch S23 on the Al Display
assembly as shown in Figure 8-24 (upper left of Al schematic). Switch S23 routes the signal
8-48
Model 5342A
Service
amplifier U7 either on or off, depending upon which signal path has been selected by switch S23.
8-147.
maximum input), clamping
diodes CR8, CR5, and the limiting diode bridge formed by CR3, CR4, CR6, CR7 which limit the
output to 1 volt peak-to-peak.
8-148.
C8, R13, clamping diodes CR1, CR2, source follower Q3, and emitter follower Q1. Field effect
transistor Q2 is biased as a current source for Q3.
8-149. Balanced amplifier U7 provides complementary outputs of the input signal increased in
amplitude by times 2. These complementary outputs drive differential amplifier U6 which provides amplification of times 10 so that the overall gain from U7 input to U6 output is approximately times 20. A portion of the output of U6 is integrated by U3, C17 to provide a dc voltage
proportional to amplitude. This voltage provides AGC to U7 so that the input to Schmitt trigger
US remains relatively constant. The output of U5 is a 0V to -650 mV signal which is divided -by-2 in
U4 and divided-by-2 in U1. The main gate on U4 passes the output of U5 on to the dividers only
when it is enabled by the LDIR GATE signal from A17 going low.
8-150. The DIRECT A output passes through EECL to TTL converter formed by Q8, Q9 to A13
where it is ready by the microprocessor. The DIRECT B output passes through EECL to ECL converter U2 to A13 where it is counted by the A counter.
8-151. HECL RSET high clears U4, U1 before LDIR GATE opens the main gate for counting.
8-152. A4 OFFSET VCO
8-153. The A4 OFFSET VCO (Figure 8-27) is essentially identical to the A8 MAIN VCO assembly
described in paragraph 8-172, with the exception that A4 has one less buffer amplifier. The OFS
approximately 300 mV rms, Measure with a high impedance RF millivoltmeter, such as the
HP 411A.
8-154. A5 RF MULTIPLEXER ASSEMBLY
8-155. The AS RF Multiplexer assembly shown in Figure 8-28, receives two input signals: MAIN
assembly, MAIN OSC (if LO SWITCH is TTL high) or OFFSET OSC (if LO SWITCH is TTL low) is
gated to the output of A5 and becomes the LO FREQ signal which drives the A26 Sampler Driver.
8-156.
R7, R6, and R22, R21, R20, both signals are amplified by differential amplifiers; U1 amplifies OFFSET OSC and U4 amplifies MAIN OSC. The amplified outputs pass through ac coupling capacitors
C6 and C20, respectively, and then are either blocked or passed by diode switches. The offset
channel switch is composed of CR3, CR1, CR2, and the main channel switch is composed of CR5,
CR6, CR4. With the LO SWITCH signal TTL high, the base of Q3 increases to approximately 3.8
volts which decreases the current through the Q3 emitter. Since the differential amplifier formed
by Q2, Q3 is driven by constant current source Q1, the current through the Q2 emitter increases
since the total current must remain constant. This causes the voltage dropped across R27 to
decrease (because the current decreased) so that the collector of Q3 is at -0.8 volts. Since the
voltage dropped across R18 increases, the collector of Q2 goes to +0.8 volts. The -0.8 volts at the
Q3 collector is passed through the decoupling network L1, L2, C2 which prevents the 300–350
8-49
Model 5342A
Service
MHz signal in one channel from passing through the switching network over to the other
channel. A -0.8 volt at the cathode of CR1 causes CR1 to be foreward biased and CR2, CR3 to
be reversed biased, thereby blocking the OFFSET OSC signal. The +0.8 volt at the cathode of
CR6 reverse-biases CR6 and forward-biases CR5 and CR4, thus permitting the MAIN OSC
signal to pass in to the differential amplifier U2. With LO SWITCH TTL Iow, the current
through Q3 increases and the operation is reversed.
8-157. The output of the U2 differential pair drives common emitter amplifier U3 which uses
one-half of a differential transistor pair. The output, at a level of approximately +15 dBm, is ac
coupled through C25 and sent to the A26 Sampler Driver.
8-158. A6 OFFSET LOOP AMP/SEARCH GENERATOR ASSEMBLY
8-159. The A6 Offset Loop Amplifier/Search Generator assembly (Figure 8-29) consists of:
a.
A filter and amplifier which condition the phase error signal from A7 for locking the
offset loop.
b. A search signal generator which drives the offset VCO such that the difference frequency
between the offset VCO and the main VCO is within the capture range of the offset
phase-locked loop, A signal, called LPOS Slope, is generated on A6 which prevents the
loop from locking up when the offset VCO is 500 kHz above the main VCO; this insures
that the offset VCO is always 500 kHz below the main VCO.
8-160. The search generator consists of transistor Q4, Schmitt trigger NAND gates U1A, U1B,
U1D, diodes CR3, CR4, and the integrator formed by operational amplifier U2 and integrating
capacitor C10. This integrator is also used by the error signals from A7 and is part of the compensation for the phase-locked loop.
8-161. Variable resistors R1 (SWEEP CENTER FREQ) and R2 (SWEEP RANGE) are adjusted to
provide a triangular waveform at test point TP1 of -4 to +4 volts which corresponds to a VCO
search frequency range of approximately 380 MHz to 270 MHz.
8-162. With HSRCH EN low, both diodes CR3 and CR4 are reversed-biased and the search
generator is effectively isolated from the integrator U2. With HSRCH EN low, the loop is maintained in a locked condition by the phase error signals at XA6(10) and XA6(10). These signals are
summed and integrated by U2 and then filtered by the low pass filter formed by R21, C12, and
R20. The error signal drives the offset VCO to maintain a constant 500 kHz offset.
8-163. Two voltage regulators convert the +15 and -15 volt inputs to +12 and -12 volts, respectively. The +12 volt regulator consists of transistor Q2, diode CRI, resistors R4, R6, and capacitors
C1 and C3. The -12 volt regulator consists of transistor Q3, diode CR2, resistors R8 and R11, and
capacitors C8 and C6.
8-164. When the 500 kHz detector on A7 detects that there is not a 500 kHz difference frequency
present, the HSRCHEN at XA6(8) goes TTL high and enables U1A and U1B. Since U1D(13) is tied to
+5v, it is already enabled. The threshold voltages for U1D(12) are 0.8 volts and 1.6 volts which
means that a logic 1 condition is not recognized until the input to U1D(12) moves from below 0.8
volts up through 1.6 volts. A logic Ø condition does not occur until the signal moves from above
1,6 volts down through 0.8 volts. Assuming a 0.8 volt level at U1D(12) to start with, the operation is
as follows: U1D(11) is high, which drives U1B(6) low and U1A(3) high. With U1A(3) high, Q4 is
turned off and CR4 is reversed-biased since the voltage at U2 inputs is at +1.5 volts. Since U1B(6) is
low, CR3 is forward-biased and sinks current from the integrating capacitor C10. This causes the
voltage at the output of operational amplifier U2(6) to increase linearly until the voltage at U1A(2)
crosses above 1.6 volts. With the output of U1A(3) high, the LPOS Slope signal is high and prevents the loop from locking up on an offset VCO signal which is 500 kHz higher than the main
VCO. This is so because with LPOS Slope high, the offset VCO is changing from its high fre8-50
Model 5342A
Service
quencies to lower frequencies. A 500 kHz difference frequency resulting from this sweep would
be on the upper sideband. With LPOS Slope low, the offset VCO is changing from low frequencies to higher frequencies. A 500 kHz difference resulting from this sweep only occurs if the
offset VCO frequency is 500 kHz less than the main VCO frequency.
8-165. When the sweep ramp present at U1D(12) crosses above the upper threshold of 1.6 volts,
the output of U1D(11) goes low, U1B(6) goes high and U1A(3) goes low. This causes Q4 to conduct
which forward-biases CR4. Since U1B(6) is high, CR3 is reversed-biased. Current is now supplied
through CR4 to the intergrating capacitor C10. This causes the output of U2(6) to decrease
linearly. Since U1A(3) is low, LPOS Slope is TTL Iow and the loop is allowed to lock once a 500 kHz
difference frequency is detected on A7. When lock is achieved, HSRCH EN goes TTL low which
causes U1B(6) and U1A(3) to both go TTL high, thereby reverse-biasing both CR4 and CR3. The
voltage at the output of U2(6) is therefore maintained at that level which achieved lock. The
timing diagram for this operation is shown in Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11. Timing Diagram or A6 Search Generator Operation
8-166. A7 MIXER/SEARCH CONTROL ASSEMBLY
8-167. The output of the main loop VCO, which comes in at XA7(12), Figure 8-30, is amplified by
differential pair U4 to a level of approximately +5 dBm and is half-wave rectified by transistor Q6
whose base-emitter junction is used as the rectifying diode. The output of the offset VCO, which
comes in at XA7(9), is amplified by U3 to a level of approximately Ø dBm and is applied to the base
of Q1. Since Q1 is being alternately turned on and off by the Main VCO signal appearing at the
Q1 emitter, the output appearing across R15 contains the sum and difference frequencies fMAIN ±
fOFFSET (if fMAIN > fOFFSET) or fOFFSET ± fMAIN (if fOFFSET > fMAlN). Since Q2 is a low frequency
8-51
Model 5342A
Service
transistor, the sum frequency is attenuated and only the difference frequency is amplified. Attest
point TP1, the difference frequency at an amplitude of Ø to 5V is available.
8-168. To insure that the offset phase-locked loop locks up only when a 500 kHz difference frequency is produced by the Main VCO being 500 kHz greater (not less) than the offset VCO frequency, three control signals are produced which control the search enable flip-flop U2. When
the HSRCH EN output at XA7(2) is TTL high, the triangle search waveform on A6 is enabled.
HSRCH EN goes low when the U2(3,4,5) inputs are all low. This occurs when the following
conditions are met:
The output of the 500 kHz detector is low.
a.
b. The U1(2) equal frequency output is low.
The LPOS Slope signal from A6 is low.
c.
8-169. The 500 kHz detector consists of the low-pass filter formed by resistors R5, R6, and
capacitor C16, a full-wave rectifier formed by diodes CR1, CR2, and capacitor C22, and emitter
follower Q3. For signal less than approximately 1 MHz, the full-wave rectifier produces a level at
the base of transistor Q4 sufficient to turn Q4 on. This developes a voltage across resistor R3
which turns transistor Q5 on. The collector of Q5 then drops from a TTL high to a TTL low.
8-170. U1 is a phase detector which produces fixed amplitude variable duty cycle pulse trains at
its two outputs. The duty cycle of the pulse train is proportional to the phase difference between
amplified by A6 to provide a dc control voltage to the A4 OFFSET VCO. When the frequency at
U1(1) is less than or equal to the 500 kHz reference frequency at U1(3), U1(2) goes TTL low. A TTL
low at U2(4) is necessary but not sufficient to disable the search waveform on A6.
8-171. The third input to the NOR gate on U2 is the LPOS Slope signal from A6. This signal is TTL
low when the search signal from A6 is sweeping the A4 VCO from low frequencies to high frequencies. Consequently, if a 500 kHz difference frequency is obtained and LPOS Slope is low,
then the offset VCO must be 500 kHz less than the main VCO.
8-172. A8 MAIN VCO ASSEMBLY
8-173. The synthesizer uses two voltage controlled oscillators which are essentially identical in
operation (A8 and A4). The oscillator circuit shown in Figure 8-31 consists of transistor Q1, feedback capacitor C7, and varactor diodes CR1 and CR2. Resistors R14 and R13 provide dc bias for
Q1. Capacitor C11 resonates with the inductance of ferrite bead E1 to provide a low impedance
path to ground for frequencies in the range of the VCO, thus eliminating parasitic oscillations.
Transistor Q1, which is operating a common base mode for the VCO frequency range, has a
portion of the output signal at its emitter fed back to its collector via capacitor C7. This positive
feedback sets up oscillations at a frequency equal to the parallel resonant frequency of the tank
circuit formed by varactor diodes CR1 and CR2 and the inductance of a metal trace on the A8
board. By changing the MAIN VCO CONTROL voltage at A8(1), the capacitance of the varactors
change which changes the resonant frequency of the tank circuit and hence the frequency of
oscillation. The modulation sensitivity of the VCO is approximately -12.5 MHz/volt, For a MAIN
VCO CONTROL voltage at A8(1) of +2 volts, the VCO frequency should be approximately 300
MHz while a control voltage of -2 volts results in an output frequency of approximately 350 MHz.
8-174. A voltage regulator, consisting of 11-volt Zener diode CR3, transistor Q2, resistors R21,
R22, R23, and capacitor C1, is used to provide low noise dc power to the oscillator circuit since
any noise on the power supply of the oscillator will degrade the oscillator’s spectral purity.
Potentiometer R22 is used to adjust the output-voltage of the voltage regulator circuit so that the
free -run frequency of the VCO (i.e., the frequency with Ø volts at the MAIN VCO CONTROL
A8(1) input) is 325 MHz ±2 MHz. The nominal voltage which achieves this free-run frequency is
8.5 volts and is measured at the junction of C20 and CR2. Inductor L8, capacitors C23 and C16, and
resistor R19 provide further filtering for the dc power to the VCO.
8-52
Model 5342A
Service
8-175. The output of the VCO is sent to three buffer amplifier U1, U2, and U3. Capacitor C4 is a
dc blocking capacitor. The differential transistor pairs contained in U1, U2, and U3 provide +6 dB,
+8 dB, and +6 dB gain, respectively. The gain is determined by the dc current flowing through the
emitters of the transistors. This current is set by the networks connected to pin 3 of the IC.
Decoupling networks L7 and C15, L1 and C3, L4 and C8, L11, C22, C24, C25, C26 isolate the -5.2
volt power from the RF signal. Decoupling networks L5 and C10, L2 and C5, L9 and C14, and L12,
C18, C27, C28, C29 isolate the +5 volt power from the RF signal. The output of each buffer
amplifier, after removal of the dc component by dc blocking capacitor C17, C6, or C12, is transmitted to other parts of the instrument over a 500 microstrip transmission line. The ground plane
of the microstrip board is connected to the ground plane of the motherboard. The output at
XA8(5) and XA8(3) should be approximately 250 mV rms while the output of XA8(7) should be
approximately 500 mV rms.
8-176. A9 MAIN LOOP AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY
8-177. The two variable duty cycle pulse outputs from the phase detector on A10, Main
and Main ,
are summed and integrated by U2 on the A9 Main Loop Amplifier assembly,
shown in Figure 8-32. Bidirectional switch U3(B, C, and D) controlled by D flip-flop U1B,
selects the compensation for the phase-locked loop by selecting one of two feedback paths
around operational amplifier U2 and by selecting one of two low pass filters in the output.
When the HP 5342A is searching for an input signal, the wideband filter is selected. When
the HP 5342A is making an actual measurement, the narrowband filter is selected.
8-178. When the least significant bit of the data bus from A14(DØ), is a logic 1 and the LPD
Write address is decoded on A14 so that LPD Write goes high, then U1(8) goes low which selects
the wideband filter consisting of inductors L1, L2, capacitors C2, C12, C16, C11, and C1. With
U1(8) low and U1(9) high, transistor Q3 is turned on and provides +5.6 volts to control pins U3(6)
to turn on the switch; transistor Q2 is turned off, thus providing a -5.6 volt level to control pins
U3(5) and U3(12) to turn off the switch.
8-179. When DØ is a logic Ø and LPD Write goes high, U1(9) goes low and U1(8) goes high. This
selects the narrowband filter consisting of L3, C8, C9, and C10 and also selects the R15 feedback
resistor connected to U2. With U1(9) low, Q2 is turned on so that +5.6 volts is applied to control
pins U3(5) and U3(12) to turn on the switch. With U1(8) high, Q3 is off and -5,6 volts is applied to
control U3(6) to turn off the switch.
8-180. The voltage regulator consisting of transistor Q4, diode CR4, resistors R10, R11, and
capacitor C17 converts +15 volts to +5.6 volts and the voltage regulator consisting of transistor
Q1, diode CR1, resistors R1, R3, and capacitor C3 converts -15 volts to -5.6 volts.
8-181. A10 DIVIDE-BY-N ASSEMBLY
8-182. The A10 Divide-by-N assembly is essentially a programmable frequency divider and
phase detector. As shown in Figure 8-33 the output of the A8 Main VCO enters at DIV N XA10(8),
and is initially divided by two by the ECLD flip-flop U6. The divider chain formed by U12, U9, U13,
U14, and U8 divides the output of U6(4) by N. The division factor N is programmed from the A14
Microprocessor assembly via the data bus lines. The output of the divider chain goes from
U8 through U3B to the U2 phase comparator where it is compared to a 50 kHz reference frequency. The phase error outputs of the U2 phase comparator, MAIN
and MAIN
are conditioned by the A9 Main Loop Amplifier and cause the A8 MAIN VCO to go to that frequency which, when divided by N in the divider chain on A10, produces a 50 kHz output.
8-183, Registers U10, U15, and U7A provide storage for the BCD encoded N data sent from A14
and registers U16, U11, and U17 provided buffer storage for the N data. Decade divider U1 outputs a 50 kHz reference frequency to U2 against which the N divided VCO frequency is compared.
8-53
Model 5342A
Service
8-184. The N divider chain formed by U12, U9, U13, U14, and U8 is programmed by the A14
Microprocessor assembly with a 4-digit positive-true BCD encoded number which is the 9’s
complement of the desired main VCO frequency, The main VCO frequency may be programmed with 100 kHz resolution. To program the main VCO to a frequency of 342.6 MHz, for
example, the program would want N to be 6573 (9’s complement of 3426). The actual overall
division factor is
342.6
— = 6852
0.050
8-185. Since the data bus is only 8-bits wide, the 4-bit BCD encoded N number is divided into
two 2-bit bytes. The two more significant bits form the upper byte and the two Iower significant
bits form the lower byte. The upper byte is first loaded into U17 when LSYH, decoded on A14,
goes high. Since the range of VCO is 270 to 380 MHz, the most significant digit of the N number
will be either a 6 or 7 (9’s complement of 3 and 2, respectively). In BCD, this means that only the
least significant bit of the BCD encoded most significant digit of the N number need be sent. If
the most significant digit of N is 6, then the D4 input will be a low. If MSD of N is 7, then D4 will be
high, U7A stores the D4 bit and presents it to U8 which represents the most significant digit of
the N number.
8-186 The lower byte is loaded into U16 and U11 when LSYL, decoded on A14, goes high. The
data, which has been temporarily stored in U16, U11, and U17, is next transferred to U10, U15,
and U7A by the operation of U4A and U4B. When LSYL goes high, a high is clocked into U4A(5)
and is presented to U4B(12). The next positive transition at U4B(11) causes’ U4B(8) to go low,
which clears U4A(5). The following positive transition at U4B(11) then clocks U4B(8) high. The
low to high transition of U4B(8) loads the data into U10, U15, and U7A. Figure 8-12 shows the
timing of this operation.
Figure 8-12.
8-187.
8-54
Model 5342A
Service
8-188. The most significant bit in the upper byte is used to indicate the CHECK condition. If
U17(12) is low, the D flip-flop U5 is enabled and the output of U6 is again divided by two. In
CHECK mode, the main VCO is programmed to 300 MHz. The CHECK signal at XA10(11) is 300
MHz divided by four so that the 5342A displays 75 MHz in CHECK. In CHECK, the following outputs should be present:
LSB
U16(15)
U16(10)
U16(2)
U16(7)
1
Ø
Ø
1
U11(7)
U11(2)
U11(15)
U11(10)
1
Ø
Ø
1
LSB
U17(2)
U17(5)
U17(7)
U17(10)
1
Ø
Ø
1
LSB
U17(15)
U17(12)
Ø
Ø
—
—
Least significant BCD digit
(9’s complement of Ø)
MSB
Digit 2 (9’s complement of Ø)
MSB
Digit 3 (9’s complement of Ø)
MSB
Most significant digit
CHECK
8-189. Before the divider chain formed by U12, U9, U13, U14, and U8 can be explained, the two
following divide-by-N techniques must be discussed:
Two modulus prescaler technique.
A counter (divider) chain utilizing 9’s complement.
8-190.
Two Modulus Prescaler Technique
8-191.
The two modulus prescaler technique is illustrated below.
8-192. At first, the scaler control line is set to a low level so that the two modulus prescaler can
operate as a ÷ (P+1) prescaler. Therefore, it generates a pulse every P+1 input pulses. After
(P+1) X D input pulses occur, the second counter (÷D) reaches zero since it was preprogrammed
to D at first. When the content of the second counter (÷D) gets to zero, it generates a pulse which
changes the level of the scaler control line high and disables the ÷D counter (itself) at the same
time. So, actually, the output of ÷D is not a pulse but a level change, Therefore, after this change
occurs, the ÷D counter stops counting and keeps the new state which lets the two modulus prescaler operate as a ÷P prescaler.
8-55
Model 5342A
Service
8-193. When the level change occurs, the content of the ÷Np counter (which was preprogrammed to Np) is Np-D since D pulses have passed by so far. So, the ÷Np counter will reach zero
after receiving (Np-D)ŽP input pulses (fin). As soon as the ÷Np counter gets to zero, it generates
a pulse at fout terminal.
8-194. Therefore, the total input pulses (fin) necessary to get one output pulse is:
(P+1)ŽD+pŽ(Np-D)
(1)
8-195. For example, if we choose 10 as P and 100A + 10B + C as Np, equation (1) becomes as
follows:
11D+10(100A+10B+C)-D
=1000A+100B+10C+D
(2)
NOTE
The output is also used as a loading pulse to initiate
the next dividing cycle.
8-196. Now, we have a complete programmable divider chain which can be programmed to any
dividing ratio expressed by equation (2). The only limitation on this technique is as follows:
Np>D
(3)
8-197. This limitation doesn’t matter for our application because
8-198. Counter (Divider) Chain Utilizing 9's Complement
8-199. A counter chain utilizing 9’s complement numbers is illustrated below. In the explanation above, we used down counters to achieve ÷D and ÷Np. In the actual circuit, however, up
counters (74LS160) are used for that purpose. The up counter generates a positive pulse when
used for that purpose. The up counter generates a positive pulse when it reaches a state 9. Therefore, a divide-by-D can be realized if it is preprogrammed to 9-D at first. Then, it generates a pulse
after getting D input pulses. One comment to note is that after generating an output pulse (after
getting D pulses), it will operate as a divide-by-10 divider unless it is present (loaded to D again).
Remarks:
8-56
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
TA, TB, and TC are outputs of ÷A, ÷B, and ÷C.
TC. for ÷A is look forward connection.
÷B and ÷C operate as divide-by-10 after their first dividing cycle.
A, B, C, and D are numbers to be loaded.
U9 is preset to 9 in check. Output is high so it is always disabled and
always ÷10.
Model 5342A
Service
8-200. A two-pulse period of f1 is used to load the divider chain since one pulse period is not
long enough to load the divider chain. The load pulse is provided by U7B. As soon as the fout
pulse (negative pulse) appears, LOAD goes low because of CLR input and stays low when the
next f1 pulse comes in because of the low input to D input. LOAD goes high when the second f1
comes in because of a high input to D input. As long as LOAD is low, the counter chain is inhibited and the state of each divider agrees with the number to be loaded. Since we use a twopulse period for loading, we have to decode 997 (999-2) for the ÷Np chain to get a correct dividing
ratio as a whole. The BCD output of U13 is decoded to detect 7 for this purpose. The output of
U8 which corresponds to 99X (X = don’t care) is AND’ed with the decoded 7 to get the fout pulse.
Since a NAND gate is used, the output pulse is a negative pulse.
8-201. When CHECK mode is selected, the MPU writes to the A10 Divide-by-N assembly to
enable D flip-flop U5 and to select a 300 MHz main oscillator frequency. With LSYNHI going low,
bit D7 low at U17(13) is clocked in to cause U17(12) to go low, thus enabling U5(÷2). When CHECK
is not selected, U17(12) is high so that U5 is disabled and the CHECK output at XA10(11) is
inhibited.
8-202. A11 IF LIMITER ASSEMBLY
8-203. The All IF Limiter assembly, shown in Figure 8-34, provides an additional 14 dB gain to
the IF signal over a bandwidth of 0.1 to 175 MHz. For high amplitude signals, the output of A11
is amplitude limited. The 14 dB amplification is provided by differential pair U2. Potentiometer
R1, “AMP”, is used to maximize the gain through U2 by balancing the currents through the
differential pair. The 75 MHz CHECK signal from A10 enters the IF circuitry at XA11(7,7). CHECK
should not be selected when a signal at the type N input connector is present.
8-204. The All assembly also generates a LPWR RST signal which is sent to the A25 Preamplifier
assembly to control attenuation for Options 002 and 003. This signal, when low, resets an RS latch
on A25 which causes input attenuation, (provided by pin diode attenuators in the Amplitude
Option 002 and Extended Dynamic Range Option 003) to be reduced by approximately 15 dB.
The attenuation is increased by 15 dB by a detector on A25 which detects when the signal level
into the counter exceeds +5 dBm.
8-205. As shown in Figure 8-34, detecting diode CR1 and capacitor C2 detect the negative halfcycle of the IF signal. This dc level is sent to voltage comparator U1 which compares the detected
level with a reference level set by the “DET” potentiometer, R14. For input signals greater than
approximately -15 dBm, the detected IF appearing at U1(3) will be more negative than the reference voltage at U1(2) and the output at U1(7) will be TTL high. When the input level to the
counter drops below about -15 dBm, U1(7) will go TTL low which means that LPWR RST is low.
The LPWR RST signal causes the RS latch on A25 to be reset, thus reducing the attenuation of the
pin diode attenuator if it was set initially by a high level signal (greater than +15 dBm). The pin
diode attenuators are present only when the Amplitude Option 002 or Extended Dynamic Range
Option 003 is present. Of course, when neither option is present, the LPWR RST has no effect.
Resistor R4 on U1 provides hysteresis of about 1 dB in IF signal amplitude so that the output of U1
does not go high again until the IF amplitude increases by 1 dB over the level where it caused
LPWR RST to go low.
8-206. A12 IF DETECTOR ASSEMBLY
8-207. The A12 IF Detector assembly shown in Figure 8-35, further amplitude limits the IF signal
by amplifying it an additional 28 dB before sending it to the A13 Counter assembly to be counted.
A level-detecting diode detects if the input signal level is of sufficient amplitude to be counted.
A digital filter provides two outputs which indicate: 1) the IF is in the range of 48 MHz to 102 MHz,
and 2) the IF is in the range of 22 MHz to 128 MHz. The program reads these filter outputs and
stops the sweep when the IF is in the range of 48 MHz to 102 MHz. The 22 MHz to 128 MHz output
is latched and is reset if the input power to counter drops below a preset level or if the IF leaves
the range of 22 MHz to 128 MHz. This output is examined at the conclusion of the N determi8-57
Model 5342A
Service
nation routine to insure that the count during the prs was not invalidated by a power drop-out
or excessive FM deviation.
8-208. The IF signal enters differential pair U2 and is amplified by approximately 14 dB. The
output at U2(5) passes through a 125 MHz low pass filter formed by C5, L1, C10, L2, C7, and is
detected by CR1 and C1. The voltage across C1 is presented to the inverting input of voltage
comparator U1, which, due to the positive feedback provided by resistor R9, exhibits approximately 5 mV hysteresis. The OFFSET potentiometer R7 is adjusted so that the output of U1(7) goes
low when the input signal to the counter drops below -32 dBm (for a 1 GHz input).
8-209. The other IF output of U2, U2(8), is ac coupled through C11 to differential pair U4 where
it is amplified by another 14 dB. Potentiometer R12, (B2) is used to equalize (balance) the currents
through the two emitters of the transistor pair. This is done by adjusting R5 for maximum gain
through the stage. Potentiometer R2, (B1) is adjusted in a similar manner. U4 has two outputs:
U4(5) and U4(8). The output at U4(5), IF COUNT, appears at XA12(8) and is sent to the A13 counter
to be counted. The output at U4(8) is ac coupled by capacitor C16 to a digital filter.
8-210. The digital filter consists of U6, U5, U10, U8, U9, U11, U14, and U15, The filter counts the
IF signal for a period of 4 microseconds and, based on the number of counts totalized during the
4 microseconds, sets two qualifiers which indicate if the IF is within the necessary frequency
range. The counters are reset every 8 microseconds and the counting of the IF begins again. This
process of counting the IF for 4 microseconds, setting the qualifiers, and resetting the counters
after 8 microseconds occurs continuously.
8-211. The IF signal output is prescaled by 4 in U3A (÷2) and U3B (÷2). The ECL output of U3(15)
is translated to TTL levels by transistor Q1. This signal is then counted for 4 microseconds. The
NOR gate U6 is enabled for a period of 4 microseconds by U6(2) going low for 4 microseconds.
This 4-microsecond gate is generated by divider U15 which divides a 1 MHz input by 8. The input
is from the A18 Time Base Buffer. During the 4-microseconds gate time, the count is totalized by
binary counters U5 and U10. The contents of the counters are decoded by U8, U9 such that if the
IF frequency is in the range of 48 MHz to 102 MHz (the U5 and U10 counters count 48 to 102
counts during the 4-microsecond gate), U6(13) [TP5] will be high. If the IF is in the range of 22
MHz to 128 MHz, U6(10) [TP6] will be high. Dual flip-flop U13 is loaded with this qualifier information every 8 microseconds by a clock signal from U11(12) [TP4]. After a 1-microsecond delay,
the U5, U10 counters are reset by a low level from U14(6). Figure 8-13 shows the timing for the
filter.
Figure 8-13. Filter Timing on A12 IF Detector
8-58
Model 5342A
Service
8-212. When the instrument is sweeping, the A14 Microprocessor issues LPDREAD which
enables the three-state buffer/driver U12, and data from A12 is placed onto the data bus. The
48-102 MHz detector output (D6) is examined and when D6 is low (TP8 high), the microprocessor stops sweeping the main oscillator. After the sweep has stopped, the microprocessor
issues LPDWRT which sets the U7(11) output of the latch formed by U7C and U7D to the low state.
U7(11) [TP10] goes low when LPDWRT goes low since U13(5) is high (since U6(13) is high, then
U6(10) must also be high).
8-213. The program then begins the N determination. At the conclusion of the N determination, the microprocessor sends LPDREAD and examines the latched 22—128 MHz detector D7.
If the input power has dropped below -32 dBm or if the IF has exceed the range of 22 MHz to
128 MHz, then U13(5) will have been low at some time and the U7(11) output of latch U7C, U7D
will have been reset to a high. If the D7 bit read by the microprocessor is Iow, then the N determination is considered invalid and the sweep routine is recentered at a point 100 kHz lower in frequency than when it previously stopped searching.
8-214. At different points in the algorithm, the microprocessor issues LPDREAD and examines
bit D4, LOVL. If this bit is high, then the input signal level to the counter exceeds +5 dBm and the
microprocessor sends dashes (— — — —) to the 5342A display.
8-215. A13 COUNTER ASSEMBLY
8-216. The IF Count signal enters the A13 Counter Assembly shown in Figure 8-36 at XA13(17)
and is capacitively coupled via C10 into the main gate of the counter, U11C. U11 is a high-speed
ECL AND gate. When U11(9) and U11(10) are both low (-0.8V = high; -1.5V = low), the gate is
enabled and the IF Count signal is passed through the gate to be counted. Flip-flop U4B selects
either the IF Count signal at XA13(17) or the Direct B signal from the direct count amplifier at
XA13(14) to be counted. If in direct count mode, the microprocessor sets the D1 bit to logic Ø and
writes to the counter so that LCTRWRT (low counter write) will clock a logic Ø into U4(9). When
operating in the 500 MHz—18 GHz range, D1 will be Iogic 1 and the U4(9) output will be a logic 1.
This enables U11B and disables U11C.
8-217. There are two operating modes, one during and one after acquisition. During acquisition
the A5 multiplexer is switched between the two LO’s. In synchronism with the A5 multiplexer
switching, the IF signal on the A13 Counter assembly is switched between counter A (U17, U13,
and U1) and counter B (U18, U14, and U2). Thus, counter A accumulates counts only during the
time that the main VCO is producing the IF and counter B accumulates counts only during the
time that the offset VCO is producing the IF. After acquisition, the pseudorandom switching
between VCO’S stops and the multiplexer selects the main VCO. The IF is then measured by
counter A with a gate time determined by the desired resolution.
8-218. The LO Switch signal comes in at XA13(8) and, after passing through TTL to ECL converters, drives U12A and U12B to switch the IF between counter A and counter B. When LO
Switch is high, counter A is selected and LO Switch is low, counter B is selected.
8-219. The 8-decade channel A counter consists of decade counter U17 (the least significant
decade), decade counter U13, and 6-decade counter U1. The 8-decade channel B counter consists of decade counter U18 (least significant decade), decade counter U14, and 6-decade
counter U2.
8-220. To output the contents of the 8 decades to the microprocessor, each counter has outputs
which pass through multiplexer. The counter A multiplexer consists of 4-Iine-to-1-line data
selectors U5A, U5B, U9A, U9B. The counter B multiplexer consists of U6A, U6B, U10A, and U10B.
If the LCTRRD (low counter read) signal goes low and if A5 = logic 1, then the A counter multiplexer is enabled (otherwise the three-state outputs are in the high Z state) and the contents of
8-59
Model 5342A
Service
the A counters are output on the data lines to the microprocessor. With LCTRRD low and the
A5 = logic Ø, then B counter multiplexer is enabled and its contents are output on the data lines.
8-221. After passing through main gate U11, the signal is switched to either the A counter or the
B counter by gates associated with ÷2 flip-flop U12A and U12B. If the A counter is selected, the IF
signal is divided by 2 by U12B and divided by 2 again by U16B. The output of U16B(14) passes
through ECL to TTL level converter U15. The outputs of these first two binaries are connected
to the “0” data inputs of the multiplexer and are read first by the microprocessor.
8-222. For example, the output of the first binary in the A counter chain U12B(14) is connected,
via an ECL to TTL converter, to U9A(6). Consequently, the state of the A counter’s two least significant binaries is read by the microprocessor by sending LCTRRD low, A5 = logic 1, and A3 = A4 =
logic 1 (the inverter U7 causes the “0” data inputs of the multiplexer to be connected to the
multiplexer outputs). The outputs of the first decade counter following the binaries are read in a
similar fashion, These outputs are connected to the “l” data input of the multiplexer. For
example, to read the first decade of the A counter, LCTRRD goes low with A5 = logic l,A3 is set to
logic 0 and A4 is set to logic 1 (because of the inversion, the “l” data iputs to the multiplexer are
selected). To read the last six decades, the “3” data inputs of the multiplexer are selected by
setting A3 = A4 = logic 0. The AØ, Al, and A2 address lines used to address the decades in U2 (if
A5 = logic 0) or U1 (A5 = logic 1). To address the least significant decade in U1, for example, the
logic state of the address lines would be:
8-223. The Direct A input at XA13(7) is the output of the first high-speed binary located on the
A3 Direct Count Amplifier. The Direct B input is the output of the second high-speed binary on
A3 and it drives the A counter when making direct count measurements. The state of the first and
second binaries on A3 are connected to the “0” data inputs of U5A and U5B on A13 and are read
first for direct count measurement. The state of the ÷4 output from A3, which causes the output
of A13U11C(4), passes through an ECL to TTL converter formed by Q2 and Q3 before going to
U5B(10). Therefore, in direct count, the signal is divided by 4 on A3 and then divided by 4 in
U12A, U16A on A17, before passing to the decade counters U17, U13, and U1.
8-224. After counting, the decades are reset by writing to A13 counter board with DØ= logic Ø.
This causes U4(5) to go low to reset U18, U17, and U13. U4(6) goes high to reset U2and U1 as well
as U12 and U16.
8-225. A14 MICROPROCESSOR ASSEMBLY
8-226. The A14 Microprocessor (MPU) assembly shown in Figure 8-37 contains in ROM the
operating algorithm of the instrument. This assembly controls the measurement cycle, performs
numerical computations for frequency measurements, and interfaces with many of the other
assemblies.
8-227. The A14 MPU assembly uses the Motorola 6800 MPU (U21). The application in the HP
5342A is described in the following paragraphs.
8-228. Microprocessor
Operation
8-229, The HP 5342A uses U21 for control and computation purposes. An expanded block diagram of U21 is shown in Figure 8-14, The 16-bit address bus allows the MPU to address up to 64K
memory locations, The data bus is 8 bits wide and is bidirectional. Data on the bus is read into the
internal MPU registers when the Read/Write control line is low. All operations are synchronized
to a two-phase nonoverlapping 1 MHz clock, ø1 and 4J2. Each instruction requires at least twoclock cyles for execution. The HP 5342A utilizes the following additional 6800 control lines:
8-60
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-14. A1421 Expanded Block Diagram
a.
RESET — This input is used to reset and start the MPU from a power-down condition,
resulting from a power failure or an initial start-up of the processor. If a positive edge is
detected on the input, this will signal the MPU to begin the reset sequence. This will start
execution of a routine to initialize the processor from its reset condition. All the higher
order address lines will be forced high. For the restart, the last two (FFFE, FFFF) locations
in memory will be used to load the program counter. During the restart routine. the
interrupt mask bit is set and must be reset before the MPU can be interrupted by IRQ.
b . N O N M A S K A B L E I N T E R R U P T ( N M I ) — A low-going edge on this input request that a
nonmask-interrupt sequence be generated within the processor. As with the lNTERRUPT REQUEST signal, the processor will complete the current instruction that is being
executed before it recognizes the NMI signal. The interrupt mask-bit in the Condition
Code Register has no effect on NMI. The Index Register, Program Counter, Accumulators, and Condition Code Register are stored away on the stack. At the end of the cycle,
a 16-bit address will be loaded that points to a vectoring address which is located in
memory locations FFFC and FFFD. An address loaded at these locations causes the MPU
to branch to a nonmaskable interrupt routine in memory, NMI has a high impedance
pullup internal resistor, however, a 3
external resistor to Vcc should be used for
wire-OR and optimum control in interrupts, Inputs lRQ and NMI are hardware interrupt
lines that are sampled during Ø2 and will start the interrupt routine on Ø1 following the
completion of an instruction.
8-61
Model 5342A
Service
c.
INTERRUPT REQUEST (IRQ) — This level sensitive input requests that an interrupt sequence be generated within the machine. The processor will wait until it completes the
current instruction that is being executed before it recognizes the request. At that time, if
the interrupt mask bit in the Condition Code Register is not set, the machine will begin an
interrupt sequence. The Index Register, Program Counter, Accumulators, and Condition
Code Register are stored away on the stack. Next the MPU will respond to the interrupt
request by setting the interrupt mask bit high so that no further interrupts may occur. At
the end of the cycle, a 16-bit address will be loaded that points to a vectoring address
which is located in memory locations FFF8 and FFF9. An address loaded at these locations
causes the MPU to branch to an interrupt routine in memory. The HALT line must be in
the high state for interrupts to be recognized. The IRQ has a high impedance internal
pullup; however, a 3
external resistor to Vcc should be used for wire-OR and
optimum control of interrupts.
d. Valid Memory Address (VMA) — This output indicates to peripheral devices that there is
a valid address on the address bus. In normal operation, this signal should be utilized for
enabling peripheral interfaces. This signal is not three-state. One standard TTL load and
30 pF may be directly driven by this active high signal.
e.
Read/Write (R/W)
— This TTL compatible output signals the peripherals and memory
devices whether the MPU is in a Read (high) or Write (low) state. The normal standby
state of this signal is Read (high). Three-state Control going high will turn Read/Write to
the off (high impedance) state. Also, when the processor is halted, it will be in the off
state. The output is capable of driving one standard TTL load and 130 pF.
8-230. The MPU (U21) is driven by a two-phase clock, 41 at U21(3) and 42 at U21(37). As shown
in Figure 8-37, the two-phase clock is derived from the 1 MHz input at XA14B(8, 8). Switch S2
allows a 1 MHz clock to be used (normal operation) or a 500 kHz clock (debugging purposes). The
switch must be set as shown for 1 MHz operation or 500 kHz operation.
8-231. The 1 MHz signal now passes through the delay generator formed by U22A, U22B, and
U24F which delays 42 with respect to 01, The @l clock driver consists of U23A and B and the @2
clock driver consists of U23C and D.
8-232, The address outputs of U21 pass through three-state inverting line drivers U16, U18, and
U8. Since the Bus Available control line, U21(7), is Iow, the three-state drivers are always enabled.
(In direct memory access (DMA) applications, which are not implemented in the HP 5342A, Bus
Available goes high indicating that the MPU has stopped and that the address bus is available.)
The address lines drive RAM U12 and ROM U1, U4, and U7. The U12 RAM occupies 128 memory
locations from ØØ8Ø to ØØFF. To see how this is implemented, consider what happens when the
address ØØ8Ø is output by the MPU:
A15 A14 A13 A12
8-62
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
Model 5342A
Service
After going through the inverting line drivers U16, U18, and U8, the address lines become:
A15 A14 A13 A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
AØ
8-233. To address a location in RAM, all the enable inputs must be true. Consequently, U12(11)
must be low, U12(12) must be low, U12(14) must be low, U12(10) must be high, U12(13) must be
high, and U12(15) must be low. The seven address inputs then select one of 128 locations in the
RAM. For the case of ØØ8Ø sent out by the MPU, it is seen that U12(11) goes low when the inputs to
U22D are both high (VMA high indicating that the address data on the address bus has settled and
is valid data and Ø2 high); U12(12) is low since the inputs to U9B (inverted A15, A14, A13) are all
high; U12(14) is low since the inputs to U9C (inverted A12, A11, A10) are all high; U12(10) is high
since the inputs to U5D are both high (inverted A9 and LFRERUN); U12(13) is high since inverted
A8 is high; U12(15) is low since inverted A7 is low. Thus, due to the inversion, ØØ8Ø on the address
bus from the MPU accesses location ØØFF in RAM. In a similar fashion, memory assignments are
made to ROM U1 (78ØØ to 7FFF), ROM U4 (7ØØØ to 77FF), and ROM U7 (68ØØ to 6FFF).
8-234. The address lines are decoded by device decoding circuitry on A14. in some instances,
further decoding occurs at a particular device (for example, on the A13 Counter assembly). The
MPU treats an external device just like a memory location. To pass information between the
registers of the MPU and the registers of an external device (such as the count registers on the A13
Counter assembly), the program writes or reads data from (or to) the location associated with the
device. Address decoding circuitry decodes the address output from the MPU and generates a
strobe which enables the register on the device. For example, to read data from the A1 keyboard,
LKBRD goes low which enables the three-state bus driver A1U12 to drive the data bus and send
keyboard information back to the MPU. The address location assigned to reading the keyboard
is ØØ1Ø. When ØØ1Ø is output by the MPU, address decoding causes U20(7) to go low. Since only
one device can drive the data bus at a time, all other device code outputs are high (so that the
device buffers on these devices are in the high Z state). To see how ØØ1Ø causes U20(7) to go low,
consider that the inverted address lines at the output of inverter buffers U16, U18, U8 will be:
A15
1
A14
A13
1
1
A12
1
1
A11
1
A10
1
A9
1
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
AØ
1
1
1
Ø
1
1
1
1
Since AØ, A1, and A2 are all high, these inputs to U20 will cause 7 to be decoded and U20(7) to go
low provided that the control inputs U20(4) and U20(5) are both low. U20(5) goes low when the
inputs to U22D are both high (VMA high and Ø2 high). U20(4) is low when U17 decodes the
address output by the MPU and the address in the range of ØØ1Ø to ØØ17. U17(11) is low when
U17(14) is high and U17(13) is low, provided that the control input U17(15) is low. Since inverted
A3 is high and inverted A4 is low, the U17(11) output will be low provided that U17(15) is low.
U17(15) is Iow provided that U13A(2) and U13A(1) are both low. U13A(1) is Iow since inverted A5 is
high. Inverted A15, A14, A13, A12, A11, A10 all high is decoded by U9A, U9B, and U13C. A9 is also
high. Thus U14 is enabled. Since inverted A8, A7, A6 are all high, the decoded 7 output U14(7)
goes low. In summary, U14(7) goes low only when inverted A15, A14, A13, A12, A11, A10, A9,
A8, A7, A6 are all high. Inverted A5 high, A4 low, A3 high is decoded by U17B. Inverted A2, A1,
and AØ all high is decoded by U20.
8-235. The eight bidirectional data bus lines coming out of U21 pass through an eight-section
switch, S1, which allows each line in the data bus to be opened for troubleshooting purposes.
Resistor pack R6, with individual pull-up resistors connected to the data lines, together with two
lines connected to ground via CR2 and CR3 (these lines connected to ground only when
LFRERUN is ground by switch S2), cause a CLB (clear accumulator B) instruction to be presented
to the MPU when the switch S1 is opened and LFRERUN is grounded. This causes the MPU to
continuously increment the addresses on the address bus from the least significant address (ØØØØ)
to the most significant address (FFFF) for diagnostic purposes when using the 5004A Signature
8-63
Model 5342A
Service
Analyzer. LFRERUN grounded forces the Clear B instruction and also causes U15E(10) to go low
which disables RAM U12. With S1 opened, feedback is broken between the ROM outputs and
the MPU inputs which is a necessary condition for taking signatures with the HP 5004A Signature
Analyzer. If LXROM (Low External ROM) is grounded, the ROM’s U1, U4,and U7 will be disabled
by U6A(1) going low and the address lines can now be used to drive external memory residing in
the upper 32K of the memory map.
8-236. The power up reset circuitry formed by Schmitt trigger U11A, U11B, and inverter U15F
provides a low reset pulse to the MPU reset input U21(40) and a LDVRST output to the A2 Display
Driver to blank the display during power-up. The length of the low reset is determined by the
time constant of resistors R5, R3, and capacitor C5 (400 milliseconds).
8-237. The LAMP EN input at XA14B(2) is used to indicate the presence or absence of the A16
Amplitude assembly (Option 002) since program execution will be different if this option is installed. If Option 002 is present in the HP 5342A, LAMP EN will be grounded. The LAMP EN line is
connected to three-state line driver U8 and the output connects to the D1 line of the data bus. To
check if Option 002 is present, the MPU sends out address 0018 which causes the output of
U11C(8) to go low and strobe a high (if LAMP EN is low) onto D1 of the data bus.
8-238. The eight data lines, after passing through switch S1, pass through bidirectional inverting
line drivers U3, U2. When data is being written out to the external devices (or to RAM), U21(34)
goes low which causes U12(16) to go low and U3(15), U2(15) to go high (and U3(1), U2(1) low)
thereby enabling the drivers which write to external devices. When data is being read from
external devices (or RAM), U21(34) goes high which causes U12(6) to go high and U3(1), U2(1)to
go low (and U3(15), U2(15) high). This enables the drivers in U2, U3, which read data from
external devices.
8-239. The memory assignments are summarized in Figure 8-15. Ordinarily, when power on, the
MPU executes the instructions in FFFF and FFFE. Since the A14 MPU assembly has the A15 address
line configured as “don’t care”, the MPU in the HP 5342A executes 7FFF and 7FFE after the power
on reset.
Figure 8-15. Memory Arrangement
8-64
Model 5342A
Service
8-240. A15 OPTION 011 HP-IB ASSEMBLY
8-241. The A15 Option 011 HP-IB assembly is described under OPTIONS in paragraph 8-346.
8-242. A16 OPTION 002 AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENTS ASSEMBLY AND
A16 OPTION 003 EXTENDED DYNAMIC RANGE ASSEMBLY
8-243. The A16 Option 002 Amplitude Measurements assembly is described under OPTIONS in
paragraph 8-296. The A16 Option 003 Extended Dynamic Range assembly is described in paragraph 8-331.
NOTE
The A16 slot is used for either the Option 002 or 003
pc assembly. Only one of these options can be installed in an instrument.
8-244. A17 TIMING GENERATOR ASSEMBLY
8-245. The A17 Timing Generator shown in Figure 8-41 has the following functions: during
acquisition, it generates the pseudorandom sequence used to switch the A5 Multiplexer and the
A13 counters for N determination; after acquisition, it generates gate times for the measurement
of the IF on A13; between measurements, its sample rate circuitry determines when to begin a
new measurement.
8-246. The DØ through D5 data lines from the microprocessor data bus transmit data from the
microprocessor to the hex D-type register U19 when the LTIMWRT signal (decoded on A14) goes
low. LTIMWRT returning high clocks the data into the register. The data lines also transmit data
back to the microprocessor from hex three-state driver U18 which drives the data bus when
LTIMRD (decoded on A14) goes low.
8-247. Pseudorandom Sequence Generation
8-248. During acquisition, after a countable signal has been detected and the sweep stopped,
the N number must be computed. By measuring the IF 1 frequency which occurs when the Nth
harmonic of the main VCO mixes with the unknown frequency and then measuring the IF2 that
occurs when the Nth harmonic of the offset VCO mixes with the unknown, the harmonic
number N can be determined. N equals (IF 1-IF2)/500 kHz where 500 kHz is the precise frequency difference between the main VCO and the offset VCO. To speed the process of determining N, two counters (on A13) are used, counter A and counter B. To prevent coherence between FM on the unknown signal and the switching rate between counters from causing an incorrect computation of N, the switching between counter A and B (which is synchronous with the
switching in A5 between the main VCO and the offset VCO) is done in a pseudorandom fashion.
Two different sequence lengths are possible: 1) the normal or short pseudorandom sequence
(prs) which lasts for a total time of 360.4 milliseconds (counter A and counter B are open for 163.83
ms each — there’s ~32.8 ms of “dead” time). This short prs gives a worst case FM tolerance of
20 MHz peak-to-peak; or 2) the long prs, which is selected by a rear panel switch, lasts for a total
time of 2.096 seconds (counter A and counter B are open for 524 ms each in addition to 1.048
seconds of “dead” time). This long prs gives FM tolerance of 50 MHz peak-to-peak.
8-249. To begin the pseudorandom sequence, the microprocessor writes to A17 and sets
U19(15) high (prs enable), U19(12) low (gate time disable), U19(7) high (for 1 MHz prs clock), and
U19(5) high for the long prs or sets U19(2) high for the normal prs. For the short prs, a 100 kHz prs
clock is used and U19(7) is low. Decade divider U11 divides down the 1 MHz input to 100 kHz
which appears at U10(8). For the long prs, a 1 MHz prs clock is used and U19(7) is high. Since
U11(1, 3) are both high, the counter is preset to 9 so that U11(9, 8) are both high which
enables U10. Thus the 1 MHz input appears at U10(8) and becomes the prs clock.
8-65
Model 5342A
Service
8-250. The prs generator consists of shift registers U7, U4, U5, 4-bit counters U2, U1, and logic
gates U6, U3. When U19(15) (prs enable) goes high, the output of U14(11) goes high which
releases the reset signal from all the components of the prs generator and starts the sequence.
To generate the sequence, data is shifted through the shift register formed by U5, U4, and U7.
Feedback taps exclusively “OR” two of the shift register outputs to generate the next input. This
feedback generates the prs. For the short prs, U3B(4) is high and U6A is used to perform the
exclusive “OR” function (the output of U7(6) is not used for the short prs), For the long prs,
U3A(1) is high and U6B performs the exclusive “OR”. The data is then fed back to the input of the
shift register at US(1, 2) via inverter U3C.
8-251. The short prs is 15 bits long and stops after 14 consecutive highs in the sequence are
detected. The long prs is 20 bits long and stops after 19 consecutive highs in the sequence are detected. The detection of the number of consecutive highs in the sequence is performed by presettable counters U2 and U1. For the short prs, “1” is preset into U2 (least significant counter) and
“15” is preset into U1 (most significant counter) by a low level on U2(9) and U1(9). When a high
appears in the sequence, the U2 counter is incremented by the prs clock at U2(2). When a low
appears in the sequence, U2 and U1 are reset to the initial preset conditions and counting up
begins again. After 14 consecutive highs in the prs, U2 has counted to “15" and the carry output
U2(15) has enabled U1 so that the 14th clock causes the carry output U1(15) to go high. This causes
U8A(3) to go low which resets the latch formed by U14A and U14B so that U14D(11) goes low to
reset U7, U4, U5, U2, and U1.
8-252. For the long prs, operation is similar: this time “12” is preset in U2 and “14” is preset into
U1 so that after 19 consecutive 1’s in the prs, the carry out of U1 sets U14A(3) Iow so that U14D(11)
is low and clears the prs generator.
8-253. To allow sufficient settling time for the multiplexer on A5 after switching, 2 microseconds
of dead time are added to each transition in the sequence which means that the transitions of
the LIF GATE signal (which enables counter A or counter B on A13) are delayed with respect to
the LO Switch signal which switches the A5 multiplexer and switches between counter A and
counter B on A13 as shown below:
8-254. The dead time in the LIF GATE signal is generated by D flip-flops U9A, U9B, exclusive
“OR” U6D, and D flip-flop U15A. The dead time is generated when U6D(11) goes high for two
periods of the 1 MHz clock. With U6D(11), high, U10B is disabled and the prs clock at U10C(8)
remains high. The reset input to U15A(1) is low during the prs generation so that U15A(5) is low.
When the preset input U15A(4) goes low also, the output goes high for the time that the preset
8-66
Model 5342A
Service
signal is high (both Q and Q outputs go high when preset and clear inputs are both low). When
U6D(11) goes high to disable the prs clock for 1 µs, U15A(5) goes low for 2 µs. The low is presented
to U17A(7) and on the next clock at U17A(6), the low at U17A(7) is clocked into the output so that
LIF GATE goes low to enable counting on A13.
8-255. The following timing diagram for the long prs generation (prs clock = 1 MHz) will help
clarify the operation:
8-256. When the prs is over, U14D(11) goes low. When the A17 board is read by the microprocessor, LTIM RD goes low and three-state drivers U18 are enabled. If the prs is over, U18(5) is low
and the program detects this, causing the next program segment to be executed.
8-257. Gate Time Generation
8-258. Gate times for measuring the IF signal after acquisition and N determination are generated by time base generator U16, D flip-flops U15 and U17. To generate gate times from 10 µs to
1-second, the microprocessor writes to A17 to set U19(21) (gate time enable) high, U19(10) (sets
LO SWITCH to high which selects counter A and the main loop VCO) high, U19(15) low (prs
disabled), and a 3-bit resolution code on U19(7, 5, 2) which selects the division factor of the
decade dividers in U16.
8-67
Model 5342A
Service
8-259. For gate time generation, divider U11 divides the 1 MHz clock input to 100 kHz. Since
U14(8) is high, the 100 kHz passes through gate U12D to U16(3). The 100 kHz signal at U16(3) will
be divided by a factor of 100 to 105, depending upon the resolution code at U16(14, 13, 12) and will
appear at the output U16(1):
U16(14) U16(13) U16(12)
1
Ø
Ø
Ø
1
Ø
Ø
Ø
1
1
Ø
Ø
1
1
1
Ø
Ø
Ø
U16(1)
1
10
100
1
10
100
Hz
Hz
Hz
kHz
kHz
kHz
8-260. Since U15B(8) is high, the low to high transition at U15(3) clocks a high into U15A(5).
U15A(6) low then presets U15B(8) low so that after one period of the divided U16 output, a low is
clocked into U15A(5). After passing through a TTL to ECL level shifter, the gate signal is clocked
into the high-speed ECL D flip-flop U17A and U17B. U17A and U17B act as the main gate flip-flop
for the counter. U17A is used for measurements in the 0.5—18 GHz range and U17B for direct
measurements below 500 MHz.
8-261. U15A(6) goes low when the gate time has expired and this is sent to three-state driver
U18A(2). When LTIM RD goes low, U18A(3) low indicates to the microprocessor that the gate
time is over and that the program may advance to the next operation.
8-262. Sample Rate Generation
8-263, The sample rate rundown is initiated by writing a low into U19(2) followed by writing a
high into U19(2). During the time that U19(2) is low, C16 is charged toward +5 volts through the
saturated transistor Q2. The voltage at the base of Q1 is sufficient to turn on Q1, which generates
a TTL high at U18C(6), With U19(2) high, the charge on C16 is discharged through R16 and the
1
SAMPLE RATE pot R9 on A2 until the voltage at the base of Q1 turns off the transistor, thus
producing a TTL low at U18C(6). The microprocessor reads this data and upon detecting the low,
advances to the beginning of the measurement algorithm, For infinite sample rate the SAMPLE
RATE pot is adjusted to 1
position so that the leakage through R16 and the SAMPLE RATE pot
is less than the charging current flowing through R19.
8-264, U18E, U18F, and U20 are not currently used but are reserved for future use.
8-265, The LFM signal at XA17(12) will be low if the rear panel FM switch is on. This will cause bit
D3 to be low when the MPU reads the timing generator and tells the program to set the FM light
on the front panel as well as select the long prs.
8-266. A18 TIME BASE BUFFER ASSEMBLY
8-267. The A18 Time Base Buffer assembly shown in Figure 8-42, provides logic to select a
10 MHz signal from either the internal 10 MHz standard (A24) or from a 10 MHZ external standard
applied to the 5342A rear panel. A rear panel switch generates an LEXT signal which, when TTL
low, disables gate U5C (and hence the internal 10 MHz) and enables gate U5A which allows the
external standard to pass through gate U5B.
8-268. The 10 MHz output of U5B is divided by 10 in U3 to provide a 1 MHz output to A12 IF
Detector and to the prs generator on A17 Timing Generator. Dividers U2 and U1 divide-by-20 to
provide a 500 kHz output to the phase detector on A7 Mixer/Search Control assembly and to the
diyide-by-10 circuit on A10 Divide-by-N assembly.
8-68
Model 5342A
Service
8-269. A19, A20, A21 POWER SUPPLY
8-270. The power supply used in the 5342A is a high efficiency switching regulator which
is made up of the A19 Primary Power Assembly, the A20 Secondary Power Assembly, and the
A21 Switch Drive Assembly. The ac line voltage is directly rectified on A19. Consequently,
A19 is isolated from the rest of the instrument and care must be exercised when voltage measurements are made on A19. A19 measurements should be made by supplying power to the
5342A via an isolation transformer.
8-271. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM. Figure 8-16 is a simplified block diagram of the 5342A
power supply. As shown in the diagram, the supply consists of six major elements: an input
rectifier-filter, a pair of push-pull switching transistors (A19Q1, Q2), an RF transformer
(A20T1), output rectifiers and associated linear voltage regulators, a pulse width control feedback network, and current limiting circuitry.
8-272. VOLTAGE REGULATION LOOP. Regulation is accomplished primarily by switching
transistors Q1 and Q2 under control of a feedback network consisting of the A21U4 20 kHz
oscillator/pulse width modulator, and the switch drive transformers on A19. The schematic
diagram is shown in Figure 8-43. If the 5V (D) output (digital supply) voltage attempts to decrease, the +5V sense signal drops which causes an error signal (difference between +5V sense
and +5V reference set by A21R17) to drive a pulse width modulator (part of U4) and increase
the pulse width of the 20 kHz outputs of A21U4. Conversely, for an increase in the voltage of
+5V (D), the pulse width of the A21U4 outputs decrease. The net result of controlling the pulse
width of the 20 kHz output is to control the duty cycle of the output waveforms of Q1, Q2, and
hence the duty cycle of the rectangular waveform delivered to the LC filter in the +5V (D)
output. The LC filter averages this rectangular waveform to produce a dc output level which
is proportional to the duty cycle of the input waveform.
8-273. The feedback provided by the +5V (D) sense signal establishes a controlled input to
the primary of A20T1. Other taps on the secondary of A20T1 are rectified, filtered, and delivered to individual linear voltage regulators to provide +5V (A) output (analog supply), -5.2V,
+15V, -15V, and +12V.
8-274. The oven transformer output is rectified and filtered to provide power to the control
circuits U3, U4 on A21 and oven power when the Option 001 oven oscillator is installed. These
oven transformer voltages are available whenever the 5342A is plugged into the line voltage,
regardless of the position of front panel power switch.
8-275. CURRENT LIMITING. Total current load is sensed by resistor A19R5 and a signal is
sent, via, optical isolator CR2, to the A21U3 Timer which acts as an overcurrent shutdown circuit. When excessive current is drawn, the output of U3 turns off the 20 kHz oscillator on U4
for approximately 2 seconds.
8-276. For output voltages other than the +5V (D) output, excessive current may or may not
cause A21U4 to turn off since the current limiting circuitry built into the individual linear reguIaor may shutdown the output before the U3 Timer has time to shutdown the 20 kHz oscillator in U4.
8-277. When the hold-off output of U3 is TTL high, the 20 kHz oscillator on U4 is disabled.
This high level causes a red LED to light which indicates overcurrent shutdown. When this
occurs, the green LED on A20 turns off, indicating the absence of +5V (D).
8-69
Model 5342A
Service
8-70
Figure 8-16. A19, A20, and A27 Power Supply Block Diagram
Model 5342A
Service
8-278. A22 MOTHERBOARD
8-279. The A22 Motherboard contains the XA (Assembly No.) connectors for the plug-in
printed circuit assemblies (cards) and provides interconnections between the cards. The
motherboard also contains terminals and connectors for interconnection of assemblies to
the front and rear panels.
8-280. A23 POWER MODULE
8-281. The A23 Power Module is mounted on the rear panel of the 5342A and contains a
connector for a power cable, a fuse and a pc card. The pc card can be inserted in any one of
four positions to select 100-, 120-, 200-, or 240-volt ac operation. The schematic diagram of the
power module is shown in Figure 8-43 and a detailed description is contained in paragraph 2-6.
8-282. A24 OSCILLATOR ASSEMBLY
8-283. The A24 oscillator board contains a 10 MHz crystal oscillator that supplies the internal
signal to the A18 Time Base Buffer Assembly. An Option 001 A24 board contains an ovencontrolled crystal oscillator (10544A) that results in higher accuracy and longer time periods
between calibration. Refer to the specification listed in Table 1-1. The schematic diagrams for
both oscillators is shown in Figure 8-44.
8-284. A25 PREAMPLIFIER
8-285. The A25 Preamplifier Assembly shown in Figure 8-45, combines the two outputs from
the sampling diodes in the U1 Sampler and provides approximately 42 dB gain for the sampler
output. This gain remains approximately flat out to 125 MHz and rolls off by 8 to 10 dB at 175
MHz. This roll-off for frequencies above 125 MHz prevents interference between the difference frequency produced by the desired Nth harmonic of the VCO mixing with the unknown
and the difference frequency produced by the (N±1) harmonic of the VCO mixing with the
unknown. Refer to paragraph 8-105 for a detailed description of sensitivity.
8-286. A level detecting diode (CR1) detects RF level and is used to indicate overload to the
microprocessor. The detected RF output is also used for controlling current sources on A25
which are used to control pin diode attenuators in the Amplitude Option (002) and Extended
Dynamic Range Option (003).
8-287. The two sampler outputs are combined in C5 and C9 at the input and are passed to
the first stage of amplification. High frequency transistor Q22 and its associated circuitry provide approximately 10 dB gain. Resistors R6 and R7 provide negative feedback to stabilize
Q2’s operating point. Emitter resistors R14 and R13 are low inductance strip resistors and also
provide negative feedback for gain stabilization. The amplified output of Q2 is coupled
through dc blocking capacitor C7 to a similar stage of amplification built around Q1. The
output of this second stage is approximately 24 dB greater than the input from the sampler
and is coupled through C8 to a 3 dB pad, consisting of R9, R17, and R16, which provides a well
defined driving impedance for all subsequent filter and amplifier stages. The signal then
passes through an elliptic function filter consisting of L3, L4, L6, C10, L5, L7, and C11. This filter
reduces the 500 MHz bandwidth of the first two stages to something less than 175 MHz.
Variable capacitor C11 is adjusted to provide the required roll-off at 175 MHz. Differential
pair U1 provides approximately 14 dB gain.
8-288. The output of U1 passes through a 200 MHz low-pass filter whose major purpose is to
filter out the fundamental sampling frequencies of the main oscillator and offset oscillator
which appear in the output of the sampler. Differential pair U2 provides another 14 dB gain
and the output is coupled through capacitor C26 to the A11 IF Limiter Assembly.
8-71
Model 5342A
Service
8-289. Diode CR1 rectifies the output of the 175 MHz elliptic filter and provides an output
which is proportional to the amplitude of the RF input signal. This level is fed to voltage comparator U3, which, due to the positive feedback provided by R33, has hysteresis and operates
like a Schmitt trigger. When the dc level from the detecting diode CR1 rises above the level
at U3(2), set by “OFST” potentiometer R31, the output of U3 goes TTL high which causes
U4(3) to go low. This output, called LOVL, is sent to the A12 IF Detector where it is buffered
and read by the microprocessor. If LOVL is low, then the microprocessor sends dashes to the
counter display. Potentiometer R31 is adjusted so that LOVL goes low when the RF into the
counter exceeds about +5 dBm. When U4A(3) goes low due to the RF input level exceeding
+5 dBm, the RS latch formed by U4B and U4D is set so that U4B(6) is TTL high. This causes
U4C(8) to go low which turns off transistor Q4. With Q4 turned off, the voltage at the base of
Q5 goes to +15 volts and Q5 is turned off. The current source formed by Q6, R41, R39, CR5,
and R40 is always on. By turning off the current source formed by Q5 and R36, the current
flowing through the pin diode attenuator (Options 002, 003 only) is decreased and the diode
resistance increases by approximately 15 dB. This allows signals up to approximately +20 dBm
to be measured if Option 002 or 003 is present. For signals less than +5 dBm U4C(8) is high, Q4
is on and the Q5 current source is on. Since more current flows through the pin diode, its resistance is less (by 15 dB). A LPWR ST signal from A11 resets the RS latch U4B, D when the input
power level drops below about -15 dBm.
8-290. A26 SAMPLER DRIVER ASSEMBLY
8-291. The A26 Sampler Driver shown in Figure 8-46 converts the LO FREQ sine wave signal
into a negative spike waveform at the same frequency as the LO FREQ signal input. The spike
goes from +0.7V dc to about -8V dc with a slew rate of approximately 8 picoseconds/volt. This
fast transition is used to turn on the sampling diodes in the sampler for a few picoseconds and
is necessary in order to produce useable harmonics of the VCO frequency up beyond 18 GHz.
8-292. The input frequency, in the range of 300 to 350 MHz, is applied to a common collector amplifier formed by one-half of transistor pair U1 (ac coupling for the LO FREQ signal is
provided on the A5 RF Multiplexer). The otuput is taken off the emitter of the 1st transistor,
through R5, and is applied to the common emitter formed by the other half of U1. Matching
network R1, L1, C3, L3, L2, C1 is used to match the output impedance of U1 to the step recovery diode CR1.
8-293. AGC is provided by coupling part of the U1 output through CR5 to detecting diode
CR2. The detected dc voltage which appears across C10 is used to cause transistor Q1 to conduct more or less current, thereby changing the gain through the first transistor in U1. The
gain is changed in such a fashion as to cause the A26 output at the SMA connector A26J1 to
have little change in amplitude for variations in input signal amplitude. The output is sent to
U1 Sampler.
8-294. OPTIONS THEORY (OPTIONS 002, 003, 004, AND 011)
8-295. The following paragraphs contain the theory of operation for the 5342A options as
follows:
a.
Option 002 Amplitude Measurements
b. Option 003 Extended Dynamic Range
c.
Option 004 Digital-to-Analog Conversion (DAC)
d. Option 011 Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB)
8-72
Model 5342A
Service
8-296. OPTION 002 AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENTS OVERALL THEORY
8-297. Introduction
8-298. The 5342A measures amplitude by multiplexing the counter input signal (either at the
0.5 to 18 GHz high-frequency input or 10 Hz to 500 MHz low-frequency input) between the
normal counting circuits and the amplitude measuring circuits. An amplitude measurement
takes approximately 100 milliseconds.
8-299. The multiplexing is performed by the U2 High Frequency Amplitude Assembly for
the 0.5 to 18 GHz input or by the A27 Low Frequency Amplitude Assembly for the direct count
input (when the 50fl - lMf2 switch is in the 500 position). The A16 Amplitude Assembly completes the assemblies required for amplitude measurements.
8-300. Block Diagram
8-301. Figure 8-17 is a simplified block diagram of the amplitude measurement option. The
incoming 0.5 to 18 GHz rf signal is applied to the rf detector diode inside the U2 assembly.
Since the transfer function of the detector diode changes with input level and temperature,
a feedback circuit using two diodes in thermal proximity is used. The feedback circuit linearizes the transfer characteristic between the rf input voltage and the dc voltage output to the
analog to digital converter and compensates for the temperature drift of the detector diode.
8-302. The rf detector is driven by the input signal and the 100 kHz detector is driven by a
variable amplitude 100 kHz signal generated on the A16 Amplitude Assembly. The feedback
loop adjusts the amplitude of the 100 kHz signal so that the output of the 100 kHz detector is
equal to the output of the RF detector. The amplitude of the 100 kHz signal is determined, log
converted, corrected by calibration data stored in PROM, and is output to the display as the
amplitude of the rf input signal in dBm.
8-303. The amplitude of the 100 kHz signal is determined by measuring (with an analog to
digital converter) the dc control voltage which determines the amplitude of the 100 kHz signal.
The dc control voltage, which is developed by the error amplifier, drives a linear modulator
which varies the amplitude of the 100 kHz signal. The proportionality constant between control
voltage input and the amplitude of the 100 kHz output is known and is used by the program
residing in ROM to compute the level of the 100 kHz signal.
8-304. Further linearization of the diode characterization is provided by a programmable
ROM which is specifically programmed to compensate for a particular U2 assembly. Thus, the
PROM and U2 assembly form a matched pair unique to each instrument with option 002.
8-305. OPTION 002 DETAILED THEORY
8-306. U2 High Frequency Amplitude Assembly (5088-7035)
8-307. The U2 assembly is a thin film hybrid circuit built on a sapphire substrate and placed in
a hermetically sealed package. It is not field repairable. This assembly is the microwave front
end which switches the microwave input signal between the U1 Sampler for frequency measurements and the U2 detectors for amplitude measurements. It also can provide approximately
15 dB attenuation to the signal which is routed to the U1 Sampler,
8-308. The microwave signal enters at U2J1, as shown in Figure 8-39, and passes through dc
blocking capacitor Cl. PIN diodes CR1 and CR2 switch the signal either to the U1 sampler or
the U2CR3 Shottky diode detector. A positive signal at the FREQ on input (approximately 2.5
volts and 30 mA when “on” and approximately +0.7 volts when “off”) turns on CR1 and routes
8-73
Model 5342A
Service
8-74
Figure 8-17. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Block Diagram
Model 5342A
Service
the microwave signal to U212 RF OUT (CR2 is off since the AMPL ON signal is at +0.7 volts). A
positive signal at the AMPL ON input (approximately +2.5 volts) turns on CR2 and routes the
signal to detector CR3 CR1 is off in this model. The detected microwave signal, DETECTED
RF (HF), exists through feedthrough capacitor C10. This dc level can vary from -500 µV (for inputs
around -30 dBm) up to -2 volts (for +20 dBm inputs).
8-309. The 100 kHz (HF) input from A16 is detected by Shottky diode CR4 which is in thermal
proximity to CR3. The DETECTED 100 kHz (HF) output is sent to A16 for comparison with the
detected microwave signal.
8-310. A27 Low Frequency Amplitude Assembly
8-311. This assembly, shown in Figure 8-39, performs the same function as the U2 assembly
by switching the input signal (in the range of 10-520 MHz) between the A3 Direct Count Amplifier for frequency measurements and A27CR3 Shottky diode detector for amplitude measurements. The frequency range for amplitude does not go below 10 MHz due to the storage time
of the PIN diodes.
8-312. When the AMPL. SEL. input is +15 volts, CR1 is turned on via R4 to ground and CR2 is
turned off. This routes the input signal to A3 for frequency measurements. When AMPL SEL is
-15 volts, CR2. is turned on via R3 to ground and CR1 is turned off.This routes the input to Shottky
diode detector CR3.
8-313. Detector CR4 detects the 100 kHz input and the detected output is sent to A16 for comparison with the detected low frequency signal. Variable resistors R9 and R10 are used to compensate for differences between matched. detector diodes CR3 and CR4j and the insertion loss
of the PIN diode switch
8-314. A16 Amplitude-Assembly
8-315. The A16 Amplitude Assembly, shown in Figure 8-39, consists of the analog feedback
loop, the analog to digital converter (which digitizes the dc output voltage from the feedback
loop), the- switching circuitry required for the U2 and A27 assemblies, and the digital circuitry
including the: U4- ROM containing the amplitude measuring algorithm.
8-316. ANALOG LOOP, The analog feedback loop consists of U18 differential error amplifier,
U14; transistors Q10, Q11, Q12 and associated circuitry for generating the 100 kHz feedback.
signal, range amplifier U12 switch U17 and relay K1.
8-317. The LDIRECT signal sent to transistor Q13 from Counter Assembly A13 is set low by the
microprocessor if the front panel RANGE switch (read by the microprocessor from A2U12, pin 9)
is in the 10 Hz-500 MHz position. LDIRECT low causes relay K1 and bilateral switch U17 to connect the A27 low frequency module. 100 kHz input and the two detector outputs to the A16
cicuits. LDIRECT high causes the U2. multiplexer inputs and outputs to be-connected to the
A 16 circuits. Since the front end is being switched between frequency measurements and amplitude measurements, the output of either detector appears as a negative pulse train. To prevent switching the front end during troubleshooting, use diagnostic mode 5 or 6. Diagnostic
modes are described in Table 8-8.
8-318. Consider circuit operation for the case where the front panel RANGE switch is in the
0.5 to 18 GHz position. In this case, the DETECTED RF (HF) signal from U2 is connected to the
inverting input of U18 and the DETECTED 100 kHz (HF) signal from U2 is connected to the noninverting input of U18. The 100 kHz (HF) input is connected through U18 and associated circuits
to buffer U15. The dc voltage difference between-the detected 100 kHz signal and the detected
microwave signal is amplified by U18. However, the negative feedback of the loop causes the
8-75
Model 5342A
Service
difference between the detected RF and detected 100 kHz to be very small. Although the voltage difference is amplified by the very high gain of U18, the U18 output voltage stays within the
dynamic range of U18 because the difference is extremely small. When a frequency measurement is being made, the output of U18 is shorted to its input by switch U1312,3) to prevent U18
from saturating.) The output of U18 drives U14 which converts the input voltage to a current by
driving Q11. The current flowing through Q11 sets the gain of differential pair Q10, Q12 and
this gain is directly proportional to the Q11 current. The 1 MHz input to A16 is applied to decade
divider U10 and the 100 kHz output is amplified by differential pair Q10, Q12. The output of
Q10, Q12 is filtered by the 100 kHz active filter U16 to produce a 100 kHz sinewave. Since this
signal must drive 50 ohms on the U2 assembly (or A27assembly), it first passes through buffer
driver U15. The gain of the loop is adjusted by resistor R29.
8-319. The voltage at the input to U14(3) is directly proportional to the amplitude of the microwave signal since the voltage at U14(3) determines the amplitude of the 100 kHz signal. The voltage at U12(3) is equal to the voltage at U14(3) due to the feedback around U14. Amplifier U12
amplifies this voltage by X1 (for input levels above about -2 dBm) or by X16 (low range for levels
below about -2 dBm). The gain of U12 is controlled by Low Range bilateral switch U13 which is
controlled by the LLRNG bit output of U5(14). If U5(14) is low, then U12 amplifies by X16 [U13(7, 6)
open and U13(I0, 11) closed]. If U5(14) is high, then U12 amplifies by X1 [13(7, 6) closed, and
U13(10, 11) open]. Any dc offset in the loop and in U12 is corrected by adjusting resistor R26.
8-320. U8 ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER. The output of U12 feeds the U8 analog to
digital converter which converts the dc voltage at U8(5) to a 13-bit, 2’s complement, digital word.
The microprocessor, after detecting the end of the A to D conversion, reads the digital word in
two 8-bit bytes. The input power is computed and displayed. ROM U4- contains the firmware
subroutine which controls the amplitude measurement process and PROM U3 contains the
corrections for frequency (as. measured by the counter) and level (as measured by the U8 Analog
to Digital Converter).
8-323. Register U5 is used by the microprocessor to write to the A16 Amplitude Assembly.
U1(10) clocks the data on the data lines into U5 when the LAMP MTR signal is low and the LR/HW
signal goes low to high.
8-322. U5(3) contains the START CONVERSION input to U8. When START, CONVERSION
go-high, U8’S digital logic is initialized and BUSY is latched high. When START Conversion
returns low, the conversion begins.
8-323. U5(6) controls the HIGH BYTE ENABLE. (HBEN) input of U8 and the-STATUS ENABLE
(STEN) input of U8. When HBEN is high, the high order data bits (five most significant bits) appear
at U8(29, 30, 31,32, 33). HBEN low causes these outputs to float (high Z state). STEN high enables
the status bits BUSY, and OVERRANGE (OVRG). BUSY indicates conversion complete.
The microprocessor waits 40 ms after the START pulse and then continually reads the BUSY bit
U8(36) until the bit is low (conversion complete). if conversion complete does not occur within
140 ms, error message E16.1 is displayed. When U8(36) is high, the conversion is in progress
(approximately 40 ins), The overrange bit, OVRG, at U8(34) goes high if the input voltage has
exceeded the plus or minus full scale voltage by at least 1/2 LSB.
8-324. Register US(7) controls the Low Byte Enable (LBEN) input of U8. When LBEN is high, the
low order data bits (eight least significant bits) appear at U8(21, 22,23,24, 25, 26,27, 28). LBEN low
causes these outputs to float. After the microprocessor determines that the conversion is over,
the high order bits are read and then the low order bits are read.
8-325. Muitiplexers U6 and U7 are used to switch between the output of U8 and the output of
PROM U4. When U2(4) goes low, the three-state outputs of U6 and U7 are enabled. U2(4) goes
low when LAMP MTR and LR/HW are both low or when U1(2) goes high, U1(2) goes high when
the correction data in PROM U4 is being read. The signal at U6(1) and U7(1) determines which
8-76
Model 5342A
Service
output will be read by the microprocessor. If U2(5) is high, then the U8 ADC outputs are selected
U6(3, 6, 13, 10) and U7(3, 6, 13, 10). If U2(5) is low, then the U4 PROM outputs are selected. The
output of U8 is first read by the microprocessor by having U6, 7(1) high. Then U6, 7(1) goes low
and the correction is read from U4 for that particular frequency and level.
8-326. MULTIPLEX CONTROL. Transistors Q1 through Q9 and associated circuitry are responsible for controlling the rf signal multiplexing in U2 and A27. In addition, this circuitry controls
the attenuation of the pin diode U2 CR1 to allow 0.5 to 18 GHz frequency measurements at
levels to +20 dBm.
8-327. When a frequency measurement is made, the microprocessor sets U5(10) high which
not ony closes switch U13(2, 3) but also turns on transistor Q8 and Q7. With the collector of Q7
near +15V, Q5 is turned on and Q3 is turned off. The emitter of Q3, which is the Amplitude Select
(AMPL SEL) signal sent to A27, will be near +15 volts, thereby routing the low frequency input
signal to the A3 Direct Count Assembly for a frequency measurement. With U5(10) low, Q8 and
Q7 are off. The base of Q5 and Q3 is pulled toward -15 volts, which turns off Q5 and turns on Q3.
The emitter of Q3 drops to near -15V which causes A27 to route the low frequency input signal
to the A27CR3 detector for an amplitude measurement.
8-328. Consider what happens at the same time for the U2 Assembly. For amplitude measurements, U5(10) is low and U5(11) is high. U5(11) high turns on Q6. Since there is no signal into the
sampler, the current source on A25 is sourcing high current (approximately 30 mA), via the AT1
signal input, to the collector of Q6. Since Q6 is on, this current does not greatly raise the voltage
at the base of Q9 so that Q9 is on, applying approximately +2.5 volts to the AMPL ON input of U2.
Since U5(10) is low, U1(6) is high and Q1 is turned off. Since Q6 is on, Q4 is off and Q2 is off.
The FREQ ON output therefore floats near ground.
8-329. For frequency measurements and no attenuation, U5(10) high and U5(11) low cause Q6
to be off and Q1 to be on. Since attenuation is not wanted, the high current from AT1 develops
a voltage across R10 which is sufficient to raise the base of Q9 toward +5 volts, thereby turning
Q9 off so that AMPL ON floats near ground. Since Q6 is off, Q4 is on and Q2 is on. Both Q2 on
and Q1 on cause a high level of current to be supplied to the PIN diode U2CR1 at a level near
+2.5 volts. The high current through the diode provides little attenuation to the microwave
signal.
8-330. For frequency measurements with attenuation, the current supplied by AT1 drops to
a very low level which causes the voltage at the collector of Q6 to be near ground. This means
that Q9 is on, Q4 is off and Q2 is off. Q1 is still on so that FREQ ON is still at +2.5 volts but with Q2
off, a lower level of current is being driven through PIN diode U2CR1. This low level of current
increases the diode’s attenuation by approximately 15 dB.
8-331.
OPTION
003
EXTENDED
DYNAMIC
RANGE
8-332. Extended Dynamic Range Option 003 provides automatic attenuation of input signals
in the 500 MHz to 18 GHz range. This option extends the dynamic range of operation to 42 dB for
signals in the 500 MHz to 12.4 GHz range and to 35 dB for signals in the 12.4 GHz to 18 GHz range.
8-333. When the input signal level to the high frequency range input of the 5342A exceeds
approximately +5 dBm, the high level is detected by a circuit in A25 Preamplifier Assembly as
shown in the block diagram, Figure 8-18. The detector turns off the current source to the A16
circuit which causes diode CR2 in the U2 assembly to conduct heavily and attenuate the input
signal. When the input signal level drops to approximately -15 dBm, the Low Power Reset (LPWR
RST) signal is generated by the detector circuit on All IF Limiter Assembly. The LPWR RST signal
resets the detector circuit in A25 Preamplifier and allows the current source to turn on the current to the A16 circuit. This causes diode CR1 in the U2 assembly to conduct heavily and pass
the input signal to U1 Sampler,
8-77
Model 5342A
Service
8-78
Figure 8-18. Option 003 Extended Dynamic Range Block Diagram
Model 5342A
Service
8-334. The schematic diagram for the Option 003 is shown in Figure 8-40. The A16 assembly
shown in the diagram plugs into the same connector used for Option 002 A16 Amplitude Assembly and the U2 assembly is installed inside the high frequency input connector as is a similar
module used by Option 002. Therefore, only one of these options can be installed in the same
instrument.
8-335. A detailed description of the operation of Option 003 circuit shown in the schematic
diagram is provided in the following paragraphs.
8-336. For low attenuation of the input signal, a high level current is supplied from the current
source in A25 Preamplifier Assembly to pin B3 on A16 Extended Dynamic Range Assembly. See
Figure 8-40. This current turns on transistor A16Q3 which turns on Q1 and provides current from
the +5V supply thru transistor Q1 and resistor R3 to feedthru capacitor C5 on U2 Attenuator
Assembly via A22 Motherboard. This current passes thru coil U2L2, diode CR1 and coil L1 to
ground. Diode CR1 is turned on heavily with approximately 30 mA of current. This allows the
input signals (RF IN) at J1 to flow freely thru diode CR1, capacitor C2 to RF OUT (to U1 Sampler).
This is the low attenuation mode.
8-337. For the high attenuation mode, there is little or no current from the current source supplied to A16B3. In this case, transistor Q3 will not be turned on and transistor Q2 will be turned
on by a base current being drawn thru resistor R6, diode CR1 and resistor R4 to the -5V supply.
For this high attenuation mode transistor Q2 is turned on, Q1 is turned off. With transistor Q2 on,
current is drawn from the +5v supply thru Q2, and resistor R7 to feedthru capacitor C7 on U2 via
A22 motherboard. This current passes thru coil U2L3, diode CR2 and coil L1 to ground. Diode
CR2 is turned on heavily with approximately 30 mA of current. This causes the input signals
(RF IN) to flow freely thru diode CR2, capacitor C4 and dissipate in resistors R9 and R7 to ground.
8-338. In addition to turning on diode CR2 heavily for the high attenuation mode, diode CR1
is turned on lightly (with less than 1 mA of current) to act like a resistor of 100 to 200 ohms to
allow a small amount of signal to pass through diode CR1 and capacitor C2 to RF OUT and to U1
Sampler, providing 15 to 18 dB of attenuation. The current that turns diode CR1 on very lightly
is provided from the +5V supply thru resistor R2 and R3 to U2C5, L2, CR1 and L1.
8-339. The current thru diode CR1 is determined by the value of resistor A16R2 which is
selected at the factory during manufacture to produce the correct amount of attenuation in
the high attenuation mode, This value is labeled on the outside of the U2 assembly.
8-340. OPTION 004 DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERSION (DAC)
8-341. The digital-to-analog (DAC) conversion option (004) provides an analog output at the
rear panel DAC OUT connector. Any group of three consecutive digits on the front panel display
may be selected to produce an analog output of from 0 to 10 volts, dc as described in Figure 3-5.
This conversion is performed by the circuit shown in Figure 8-25, The components of this circuit
are added to the A2 Display Driver Assembly to provide Option 004,
NOTE
The following description assumes a knowledge of
the theory of operation of Al Display, A2 Display
Driver (paragraph 8-132) and A14 Microprocessor
(paragraph 8-225).
8-342. The four data lines, D0-D3, and two address lines A0, A1 are connected to the input of
the DAC circuit as shown in Figure 8-25. These lines from A14 Microprocessor are connected
via U16 on A2 assembly as shown in Figure 8-24. The only other signal input to the DAC circuit is
the Load Digital Analog (LDA) signal from Decoder U17 on A14 Microprocessor.
8-79
Model 5342A
Service
8-343. Data lines D0-D3 are connected to counters U14, U20 and U21 which act as buffer registers (control lines connected to +5V). When LDA is low, the Ao and A1 lines are decoded by U15
to provide a clock signal to the buffer registers. Each of the buffer registers provides a 4-bit output to the 12-bit digital-to-analog converter U23. Register U14, U20 and U21 provide the least-,
next- and most-significant digit, respectively, to U23 for conversion to analog voltage which is
output at pin 15 to the DAC OUT connector.
8-344. The GAIN ADJ variable resistor R25 and OFFSET variable resistor R27 are internal service
adjustments to set the high and low limits of the DAC output voltage. Refer to paragraph 5-41
for adjustment procedures.
8-345. To keep incremental changes in the DAC output as small as possible, the 5342A should
be operated in the manual mode with minimum required resolution and as fast a sample rate
as possible. If operating with a low sample rate or high resolution (1 Hz is highest) and a rapidly
changing counted input, the DAC output will change in large increments. The AUTO operating
mode may also have a similar effect with a resultant loss of smoothness in the DAC output.
8-346. OPTION 011 HEWLETT-PACKARD INTERFACE BUS (HP-IB)
8-347. Introduction
8-348. The A15 HP-IB Assembly serves as an interface between the microprocessor on A14
and the device controlling the lines of the HP interface bus as shown in Figure 8-38. The A15
HP-IB consists of seven interface registers (which are used by the microprocessor for interpreting
commands and data, sending status, sending data, interpreting interrupts, etc.), two command
decoding ROM’s, source handshake circuitry, and acceptor handshake circuitry.
8-349. Interface Registers
8-350. There are seven interface registers on A15 which are used by the A14 microprocessor
to communicate with the device controlling the HP interface bus. A register is selected by the
microprocessor when the microprocessor sends that particuIar register’s address. This address
is decoded by 1-of-8 decoder U11, Decoder U11 is enabled by the LHPIB signal (decoded from
address lines on A14) and the phase 2 clock, Ø2, also from A14. A particular register is selected
by decoding the two-least-significant address lines of the microprocessor, LAO and LA1, in addition to the read/write line, LR/HW also from A14. The following table shows which register is
selected for each combination of the three inputs to U11, provided U11 is enabled by LHPIB and
42.
Ull(l)
U11 OUTPUT
ENABLES
U11(2)
U11(3)
(LA1)
(LAØ)
GOES LOW
REGISTER
(LR/HW)
o
o
o
o
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
U11(15)
U11(14)
U11(13)
U11(12)
U11(11)
U11(10)
U11(9)
U11(8)
U30 STATE IN
U15 COMMAND IN
U18 INTERRUPT IN
U27 DATA IN
——
U16 CONTROL OUT
U24 STATUS OUT
U21 DATA OUT
8-351. State in buffer U30 is read by the microprocessor when the microprocessor wants to
determine the state of the interface. Listen flip-flop U20B, talk flip-flop U20A, serial poll mode
flip-flop U29B, remote flip-flop U29A, and service request flip-flop U9A are all buffered by U30.
Buffer U30 is enabled by U11(15) going low.
8-352, Command In register U15 is read by the microprocessor whenever an addressed command is sent by the controller.
8-80
Model 5342A
Service
8-353. Interrupt In buffer U18 is read by the microprocessor in response to an interrupt. The
output of the interrupt buffer indicates why the A15 assembly generated the interrupt (LIRQ
low).
8-354. Data In register U27 stores programming codes which have been sent over the HP-IB
by the controller. Data In register U27 is clocked by decoding ROM U23(5) which sets Data
flip-flop U19A. After one byte of ASCII program data has been clocked into U27, an interrupt
is generated by A15 and the microprocessor reads the U18 Interrupt In buffer to find out why
the interrupt was generated. Since U18(2) is high, the microprocessor knows that program data
is ready to be read from U27. The microprocessor then reads U27. If the byte completes a code
(for example, the “5” of the code “SR5”), the microprocessor executes the code and then continues executing the operating program. If the byte does not complete a code, the microprocessor waits until the completed code has been sent.
8-355. Control Out register U16 is used by the microprocessor to control the HP-IB board.
For example, in response to a front panel reset, the microprocessor returns A15 to local control
by setting U16(10) low then high, which resets the remote flip-flop U29B. On power up, U16(2)
is set low then high which resets Serial Poll FF U29B, Talk FF U20A, and Listen FF U20B. When
measurement data is sent to the HP-IB, the microprocessor sets U16(12) low which sets the EOI
control line of the HP-IB low after the final byte of the data message is sent (i.e., after CR, LF).
8-356. Status Out register U24 is used by the microprocessor to send a status byte when the
serial poll mode is ordered by the system controller. The microprocessor sends octal 120
(01010000) to indicate that it has pulled on SRQ (bit 7) and that a measurement has been completed (bit 5).
8-357. Data Out register U21 is used by the microprocessor to output measurement data, one
byte at a time, to the HP-IB. U21 is clocked by the Address Decoder U11 and is enabled by Serial
Poll FF U29B being set low (not serial poll mode).
8-358 Command Decoding ROM’s
8-359. Decoding ROM’s U23 and U26 decode bytes sent over the data lines of the HP-IB. The
acceptor handshake operates when LATN is low (address information is being sent) or when
the Listen flip-flop has been set. Decoding ROM U23 is enabled only during the acceptor handshake cycle. The outputs of the ROM’s generate interrupts, set or reset various control flags,
and are read by the microprocessor via Command in register U15.
8-360. During the acceptor handshake, U1C(8) goes low for one period of the Ø 2 clock just
prior to the HDAC signal going high, thus enabling U23 (U26 is always enabled). The byte on
the data lines of the HP-IB appears at the inputs to U23 and U26. The ROM outputs change
accordingly.
8-361. If the Unlisten command is given, U26(1) goes low and U23(2) goes high to clock
Unlisten FF U20B, causing it to be reset. If a talk address other than the 5342A’s talk address is
sent, U23(1) goes high to clock into the U20A Talk FF the output of Address Comparator U33,
Since the 5342A’s talk address was not sent, U33(14) is low and the U20A Talk FF is set low. If the
5342A’s listen address is sent, U23(2) goes high to clock a high from U33(14) into Listen flip-flop
U20B.
8-362. Now that the 5342A is addressed to listen, consider what occurs when program data is
sent. When program data appears at the inputs to ROM’s U23 and U26, output U23(5) goes low
to set the Data flip-flop, U19A. When U23(5) returns high, Data In register U27 is clocked and the
data byte is stored in U27. At the same time that U23(5) goes low, U23(6) goes low which resets
Interrupt flip-flop U14A and causes LIRQ (the output of U17B) to go low and interrupt the
microprocessor. The microprocessor reads Interrupt In buffer U18 (which clears interrupt FF
8-81
Model 5342A
Service
U14A), determines that program data is in U27, and reads U27. When U27 is read (U27(1) goes
low), the U19A Data flip-flop is reset in preparation for the next byte,
8-363. Consider what occurs when an addressed command or universal command is sent by
the controller. If a command is sent, U23(4) goes low which sets Command flip-flop U14B. When
U23(4) returns high, it clocks into Command In register U15 the decoded outputs from U26
as follows:
Command
U26(4)
U26(5)
U26(6)
U20(9)
8-364. At the same time that U23(4) goes low, U23(6) goes low. This sets Interrupt flip-flop
U14A and causes LIRQ to go low, whch interrupts the microprocessor. The microprocessor
reads Interrupt In buffer U18, determines that a command code is in U15, and reads U15. The
microprocessor determines which command was sent according to the table and acts
accordingly.
8-365. When the serial poll enable signal is sent, U26(2) goes high and U23(3) goes high to
clock Serial poll flip-flop U29B to the high state. When the serial poll disable signal is sent, U26(3)
goes low and U23(3) goes high to clock U29B to the low state.
8-366. Acceptor Handshake
8-367. The acceptor handshake is enabled by U1B(4) low (LATN control line of bus is low,
indicating address information is being sent) or U1 B(5) low (the 5342A has been addressed to
listen). When the talking device puts data on the HP-IB data bus and pulls LDAV low indicating
data valid, the acceptor handshake causes HDAC to go high (indicating that the data has been
read into U27). After the data in U27 has been read by the microprocessor, the acceptor handshake causes HRFD to go high, indicating that U27 has been read by the MPU and that the
MPU is ready to receive the next data byte.
8-368, A timing diagram of a typical acceptor handshake is shown below, The talker places
a data byte on the eight data lines and, after allowing for settling, pulls LDAV low to indicate
to the listener (5342A in this case) that there is valid data on the data bus. The first positive transition of the
2 clock after LDAV goes low, clocks a high into flip-flop U3B(9). This causes the
input to U3A(2) to go high. On the next clock, U3A(5) goes high and U3A(6) goes low, U3A(5)
high and U3B(9) high cause U1C(8) to go low which enables ROM U23. When ROM U23 is
enabled, Data flip-flop U19A(5) is set high which causes U32(12) to go high (HRFD goes low)
and also clocks the data into U27. Simultaneously, LIRQ goes low to interrupt the microprocessor. The next
2 clock causes U3B(9) to return low, thus disabling U23, Since U3B(9) is low and
U3A(6) is low, HDAC goes high, indicating to the talking device that the data has been accepted
(read into U27) and maybe removed from the data lines, The talker then removes the data from
the bus and takes LDAV high to indicate that there is not valid data on the bus. U3A(2) goes
low when LDAV goes high. On the next positive transition of
2, the low at the input to U3A
is clocked into the output, causing U3A(5) to go low and U3A(6) to go high. This causes HDAC
to return low. After the microprocessor reads the Interrupt In register U18 and determines
that data is stored in U27, the U27 Data In register is read by the MPU, This causes the U19A
data flag to be reset and also causes HRFD to go high, indicating that the Data In register has
been read and is ready for another data byte, The handshake process then repeats as described.
8-82
Model 5342A
Service
8-369. Source Handshake
8-370. The source handshake controls the LDAV control line of the HP-IB in response to the
state of the HDAC and HRFD control lines which are controlled by the acceptor handshake
circuitry in the listening device. When the 5342A operating program finishes a measurement,
the microprocessor reads State In buffer U30 to see if the counter has been addressed to talk.
If the counter has been addressed to talk, the microprocessor reads Interrupt In buffer U18 to
determine the state of Data Out flip-flop U9B. If U9B(9) is high, then the previous data byte
has been accepted by the listener and a new data byte maybe written into Data Out register U21.
When a data byte is written into U21, U9B(9) is reset low and the source handshake logic sets
LDAV low, two
2 periods later. When the listener sets HDAC high, U9B(9) goes high on the
next positive transition of the
2 clock. Since the listener has accepted the data, a new data
byte is written into U21. However, LDAV will not go low again until the listener sets HRFD high
to indicate that it is ready for more data. Data Out register U21 is always enabled if the Serial Poll
FF U29 is set low. The output data bus drivers, U22, U25, U31, and the source handshake circuits
however, are only enabled in talk mode and LATN set high.
8-371. A timing diagram of a typical source handshake is shown below. Since U9B(9) is high,
the microprocessor clocks data into U21. This clock also resets U9B(9) low. U9B(9) going low
causes the input to flip-flop U4B to go low, and U4B’S output goes low on the next
positive transition. Since U4(9) is low and HRFD is high, the input to flip-flop U4A(2) goes high
and the U4(5) output goes high on the next clock. When U4(5) goes high, LDAV at U36(3) goes
low. Sometimes later the listener set HDAC high to indicate that the data has been accepted.
HDAC going high causes the U4(12) flip-flop input to go high and the U4(9) output goes high
on the next clock pulse. Since U4(9) is high and U4(5) is high, U12(6) goes high and sets the Data
Ready flip-flop U9(9) to high. When U9B(9) goes high, U4(2) input goes low and causes the
U4(5) flip-flop output to go low on the next clock. This causes LDAV to return high. After LDAV
goes high, the listener reset HDAC low in preparation for the next handshake cycle. Since
8-83
Model 5342A
Service
U9B(9) is high, the microprocessor writes the second data byte into U21. U21(11) going high
resets U9B(9) to a low which sets the U4B(9) flip-flop output low. However, the source handshake logic can not indicate the presence of the second data byte (by pulling LDAV low) until
the listener sets HRFD high. When HRFD finally does go high, the output of flip-flop U4(5) goes
high on the first clock after HRFD goes high. U4(5) going high sets LDAV low. When the listener
senses LDAV low, it sets HRFD low and the process continues as previously described.
8-372. ASSEMBLY LOCATIONS
8-373. Figures 8-19, 8-20, 8-21 and 8-22 shows the front (A1 Display Assembly) rear, top and
bottom views, respectively, of the 5342A. The front and rear views show reference designators
of the front and rear panel controls, connectors, and indicators. The top view shows assembly
locations and adjustments.
8-374. TROUBLESHOOTING TO THE ASSEMBLY LEVEL
(STANDARD INSTRUMENT)
8-375. Troubleshooting Technique
8-376. In the troubleshooting procedure outlined in Table 8-5, the 5342A is exercised through
a series of operating modes which are arranged in an increasing order of complexity. As can be
seen in Table 8-6, an increasing number of assemblies is exercised as the operating modes
progress from, the first mode (power-up diagnostic) to the last mode (AUTO/1 GHz), By noting
the first mode in the sequence that fails, it is possible to isolate the defective assembly to a
specific group of assemblies by noting those assemblies common to the current (failed) test
and all previous tests (which passed). These common assemblies can be eliminated as being
the source of the failure and only those assemblies which are not common to previous operating modes are examined. Table 8-7 is a list of the noncommon assemblies for each of the operating modes and it is the basis for the troubleshooting procedure presented in Table 8-5.
8-84
Model 5342A
Service
8-377. Tables 8-9 through 8-27 are individual troubleshooting procedures for various assemblies and assembly groups and are referenced in the overall troubleshooting of Table 8-5.
By using the diagnostic modes of the 5342A, explained in Table 8-8, and the test equipment
listed in Table 1-4, the troubleshooting procedure outlined in Table 8-5 and Tables 8-9 through
8-27 allows isolation of a failed assembly. By reading the detailed theory of operation of the
assembly and referencing the dc voltages and 5004A signatures provided on the individual
schematics, it should be possible to find the failed components.
8-378. Figure 8-23 is a detailed description block diagram of the 5342A and is valuable in
troubleshooting. Figure 8-9 shows the relationship of the assemblies listed in Table 8-6.
8-379. RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT
8-380. Test equipment recommended for troubleshooting, adjustments, operational verification, and full performance testing is listed in Table 7-4. Equipment other than that listed may
be used if it meets the required characteristics.
Table 8-5. Overall Troubleshooting
1.
POWER UP DIAGNOSTIC —
Apply power to the 5342A and press front panel power
switch to ON. The power-up diagnostic routine progressively lights all LED segments
in the 5342A display, from left to right. Finally, the following should be displayed
briefly:
If the 5342A powered up properly, go to step 2. If not:
a.
If E’s fill the display, then RAM A14U12 failed the check sum routine exercised on
power up. A14U12 may be faulty if none of the address lines AØ-A15 or data lines
DØ-D7 are stuck low or high. Check address lines and data lines on A14 for stuck
nodes (use current tracer such as 547A to find faulty device). Stuck data lines may
be caused by stuck ROM outputs (U1, U4, U7) or stuck buffer inputs (U2, U3). If
1 is displayed, then ROM A14U7 failed the check sum routine exercised on power up.
Since the RAM proved good (E’s were not displayed), the data lines and address lines
be OK. Replace A14U7.
1)
If 2 is displayed, then ROM A14U4 failed the check sum routine exercised
on power up. Replace A14U4.
2)
If 3 is displayed, then ROM A14U1 failed the checksum routine exercised on power
up. Replace A14U1.
3)
If E16.0 is displayed (amplitude Option 002 only) then the check sum performed on
PROM A16U3 failed. In this case, a new muItiplexer/PROM (matched pair) P/N
05342-80005, must be ordered and installed (blue stripe exchange P/N 0534280505)!
4)
If E16.1 is displayed (amplitude Option 002 only) then the analog-to-digital conversion did not take place in A16U8 (U8 pin 36, BUSY, remains high).
b.
Check for the clock on A14. If the clock is not present, check A24, A18, A17U8,
c.
Go to Table 8-9 for A14 testing.
d.
Go to Table 8-10 for power supply troubleshooting.
e.
Go to Table 8-11 for A1, A2 testing.
8-85
Model
5342A
Service
Table 8-5. Overall Troubleshooting (Continued)
2.
TABLE 8-5
3.
4.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE 8 — Put the 5342A in diagnostic mode 8 (see Table 8-8 for a description
of diagnostic modes and how to set them). Perform the keyboard check, paragraph 3-43. If the
5342A operates properly, go to step 3. If not:
a.
Go to Table 8-11 for A1, A2 testing. If the 5342A passed the power-up diagnostic test but
failed the diagnostic mode 8 test, then likely problems on A1, A2 are failed Al keyboard
or failed A2 keyboard decoding circuitry such as A2U22, U12, U18, U19, etc.
b.
Go to Table 8-9 for A14 testing. The difference between this test and the previous testis
that the LKBRD device select is sent by A14.
DIRECT COUNT MODE — Apply the 10 MHz FREQ STD OUT from the rear panel of the 5342A
to the direct count input (front panel BNC). Place the impedance select switch in 50W position
and place the range switch in the 10 Hz—500 MHz position. If the counter counts 10 MHz ±1
count for all resolution settings, go to step 4. If not:
a.
Check the A3 Direct Count Amplifier (Table 8-12).
b.
Check the A14 Microprocessor as described in Table 8-9. A difference between this test
and previous tests is that LCTRRD, LCTRWRT, TMRD, LTMWRT device select codes
are used.
c.
Check the A13 counter (Table 8-13). Only the A counter is used in this mode.
d.
Check the A17 timing generator (Table 8-14). Only the gate time generation circuitry is
used in this mode.
CHECK MODE — Place the 5342A in CHECK (place range switch in 500 MHz—18GHz position)
and verify that the counter displays 75 MHz ±1 count for all resolution settings. If the counter
operates properly, go to step 5. If not:
a.
Go to Table 8-9 for A14 Microprocessor testing. A difference between this test and
previous tests is that LSYNHI, LSYNLO, LPDREAD, LPDWRT device select codes are used.
b.
Check that the 500 kHz output of A18, available at XA18(3), is present.
c.
Go to Table 8-15 for A8, A9, A10 Main Loop Synthesizer troubleshooting.
d
. Go to Table 8-16 for IF troubleshooting. Since the check signal enters the IF chain at
the A25 Preamplifier and the U1 Sampler can be eliminated as possible failed
modules.
NOTE
In the following step, for instruments containing Option
002 or 003, inject the 50 MHz test signal at the U1 Sampler
Input. This requires removal of the semirigid coax cable
from U1 input. This action is necessary due to the filter in
U2 at the 500 MHz—18 GHz input.
5.
8-86
AUTO/50 MHz MODE — Place the 5342A in AUTO mode, with the range switch in the 500
MHz—18 GHz position and apply a 50 MHz signal at -10 dBm to the high frequency input,
Verify that the counter counts 50 MHz ±1 count for all resolution settings. If the 5342A operates
properly, go to step 6. If not:
a.
Place the 5342A in diagnostic mode 0. If the counter displays SP or SP2 only (instead of
SP23 followed by Hd), then the failure is likely in the U1 Sampler or A25 Preamplifier
since All and A12 are used in the CHECK mode. Go to IF troubleshooting in Table 8-16.
b.
If the counter (still in diagnostic mode 0) displays SP23 but does not display Hd, suspect
A17 PRS generation circuitry. Go to Table 8-14 for A17 Troubleshooting.
c.
if the counter displays an incorrect answer, go to diagnostic mode 4 to verify that the
IF measured is 50 MHz. If it is not, check the A counter on A13 (Table 8-13). Also go to
diagnostic mode 1 to check the N number computed. If N is not 0, check the B counter
on A13 (Table 8-13).
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-5. Overall Troubleshooting (Continued)
6.
7.
8.
AUTO/1 GHz MODE — Place the 5342A in AUTO mode, with the range switch in the 500
MHz—18 GHz position and applya 1 GHz signal at -25 dBm to the high frequency input. Verify
that the counter counts 1 GHz ±1 count for all resolution settings.
a.
Place the 5342A in diagnostic mode 0. If the counter displays SP (instead of SP23 followed
by Hd), then the failure is likely to be in the A26 Sampler Driver since the other components in the IF were exercised in step 5. Go to Table 8-18 for A26 Sampler Driver
troubleshooting.
b.
Check U1 Sampler per Table 8-16, step b.
AMPLITUDE MODE — Place the 5342A in Amplitude Mode and proceed:
a.
Set 5342A front panel range switch to the 10 Hz-500 MHz position and the impedance
select switch in the 50 ohm position. Connect rear panel FREQ STD OUT to direct count
input (front panel BNC) of 5342A. Verify that counter displays 10 MHz at approximately
11 dBm.
b.
If the counter displays an erroneous frequency reading, problem is likely to be in A27
Low Frequency Amplifier Assembly switching diodes CR1, CR2 or in the direct count
assembly. (Refer to DIRECT COUNT TEST MODE in step 3.)
c.
Set 5342A front panel range switch to 500 MHz-18 GHz. Apply a 600 MHz signal at 0 dBm
the input N-type connector of the 5342A. Verify that counter displays the correct frequency and power readings.
d.
If the counter displays are erroneous frequency reading, problem is likely to be in U2
High Frequency Amplitude Assembly, or U1 Sampler and related circuitry. (Refer to
AUTO/1 GHz MODE in step 6.)
e.
If the instrument displays an erroneous amplitude/frequency measurement or an erroneous amplitude measurement only, refer to Table 8-20.
HP-IB MODE — Perform the Option 011 HP-IB Performance Verification as outlined in paragraphs 4-19 through 4-26 of the manual. If the 5342A fails the performance verification program,
refer to Table 8-21, HP-IB (Option 011) Troubleshooting.
8-87
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-6. Assemblies Tested by Test Mode
Table 8-11
Table 8-11
Table 8-12
Table 8-17
Table 8-19
Table 8-17
Table 8-17
Table 8-15
Table 8-15
Table 8-15
Table 8-16
Table 8-16
Table 8-13
Table 8-9
Table 8-21
Table 8-20
Table 8-14
Table 8-5
Table 8-10
Table 8-10
Table 8-10
Table 8-10
Table 8-5
Table 8-16
Table 8-18
Table 8-20
Table 8-20
NOTES:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
8-88
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-7. Probable Failed Assemblies by Test Mode
TEST MODES
I
POWER-UP
DIAG.
A14
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A24
SET 8
DIAG.
A1(1)
A2(2)
A14(3)
DIRECT
COUNT
A13(4)
A14(5)
A17(6)
CHECK
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A14(7)
A18(8)
AUTO
50 MHz
AUTO
1 GHz
A17(9)
A25
A4
A5
A6
A7
A26
U1
A13(10)
I
NOTES:
(11
{21
(31
(4)
(5)
41 k(,i bwrd
A) keyboard de(od IrIg ([r(uttry ~u(h ~~ A2LJ22, U12, U18, b19.
A14 LKBRD dwt(e s[,le[[ code.
A counter.
A14 LCTRRD, LCTRW’RT,
LTIMRD, LTIMWRT
dew(e select codes,
(6)
A17 gate tjme generation.
A14 LSYNHI, LSYNLO, LPDREAD, LPDWRT
(7)
A18 500 kHz OUtpUt.
(81
(9)
A17 prs generation.
I1OI A13 B counter exercised.
ciw!ce >e[ect codes,
8-89
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-8. Diagnostic
Modes of the 5342A
“
To go to a diagnostic mode, press front panel set key twice (SET, SET) and then the number
corresponding to the desired mode. For example, pressing SET SET 8 goes into diagnostic
mode 8, the keyboard check. To leave a diagnostic mode, press RESET. The following describes the available diagnostic modes:
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
FUNCTION
0
Displays mnemonics SP 23 followed by Hd. SP indicates that the
VCO’s are sweeping. 2 indicates that the unlatched power detector
is set, indicating an IF of sufficient amplitude and an IF in the range
of 50—100 MHz. 3 indicates that there is a proper IF for both the
Main VCO and OFFSET VCO. 3 is displayed after the VCO’s have
stopped sweeping. Hd indicates harmonic determination has been
complete. it is displayed at the end of the prs.
1
Counter displays Main OSC in MHz to 100 kHz, sign of IF (+ for
subtract and - for add) and the harmonic number N. For example:
IF is added
VCO = 344.2 MHz
MHz
kHz
N = 10.99 (rounded to 11)
Hz
This is displayed at the end of the harmonic determination. (The
(-) sign of the IF indicates that the Nth harmonic of the VCO is l e s s
than the unknown so that the IF must be added; the (+) sign of the
IF indicates that the Nth harmonic of the VCO is greater than the
unknown so that the IF must be subtracted.)
2
Counter continuously displays the contents of the A counter during
harmonic determination.
3
Counter continuously displays the contents of the B counter during
the harmonic determination.
4
Counter continuously displays the measured IF frequency. Resolution determined by resolution selected before going to diagnostic
mode 4.
5
(Option 002 only)
Put 5342A in AMPL mode (Option 002), then select diagnostic mode
5. Counter display scontinously the corrected amplitude. Multiplexer
on front end is not switching between frequency and amplitude.
6
(Option 002 only)
Put 5342A in AMPL mode (Option 002), then select diagnostic
mode 6. Counter display continuously uncorrected amplitude (not
corrected for level and frequency on A16). Multiplexer on front end
is not switching.
7
Sweeps Main VCO from 350 MHz to 300 MHz in 100 kHz steps.
Time between updates in VCO frequency determined by SAMPLE
RATE setting. To stay at a particular frequency, put SAMPLE RATE
to HOLD. (Remove input signal to counter, place counter in 500
MHz—18 GHz range and AUTO mode.)
8
Keyboard check. Refer to paragraph 3-43 for complete list of what
should be displayed when each key is pressed.
To return to normal operation, press RESET.
8-90
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-9. A14 Microrprocessor Troubleshooting
1.
Place the A14 Microprocessor Assembly on the extender board, P/N 05342-60036 which is
shown below. Place the 5004A START and STOP probes on the B(4) test pin of the A14 extender board. (Or, place on AP clip on U8 of A14 and place the START probe and the STOP
probe of a 5004A Signature Analyzer on A14U8(2), which is the most significant address line
out of the U21 microprocessor (A15).) Place the CLOCK probe of the 5004A on the VMA*$2
test point located in the upper righthand corner of A14. Place the GROUND probe of the
5004A on the ground test point of A14.
TABLE 8-9
2.
Set the 5004A for positive slope on START, STOP, and CLOCK (all pushbuttons of the 5004A
should be out). Apply power to the 5342A.
3.
Place the 5342A in free-run mode by moving A14 switch S2A to the up position and all S1
switches down (opens up data bus lines back into MPU U21). Ensure that the LX ROM
switch on the A14 extender board is in the up position. Press the RESET switch on the A14
extender board.
8-91
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-9. A14 Microprocessor Troubleshooting (Continued)
4.
Place the 5004A data probe on +5V and verify that the characteristic "1's" signature displayed on the 5004A is 0003. If 0003 is not displayed, then the U21 microprocessor is not
free-running. If 0003 is displayed when the 5004A data probe is placed on +5V, go to step 5.
a.
Check the clock inputs to the microprocessor by looking at the @II (phase 1) clock
test point on A14 and the VMA@ test point. These signals should be as in the
following oscilloscope photos.
If these signals are not present, troubleshoot the clock generation circuitry U19,
U22, U24, etc., on A14.
TABLE 8-9
b.
If these signals are present, check diodes CR2, CR3, and switches A14S1 and S2. If
these parts are good, then the U21 MPU is suspect.
c.
With switches S1 and S2 set for freerun, check for correct inputs, as listed below:
*Time base of scope out of CAL in order to get one
complete period in photo.
8-92
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-9. A14 Microprocessor Troubleshooting (Continued)
5.
Place the 5004A data probe on the following address signal points (available on the A14 extender board) and check that the proper free-run signatures are obtained:
If these signatures are obtained, go to step 6.
6.
a.
Check the signatures on the MPU side of buffer/drivers U16, U18, U8. These
signatures are adjacent to the A14 schematic. Correct or incorrect signatures
should isolate the problem to either U21 or one or more of the buffer/drivers U16,
U18, U8.
b.
A signature may be incorrect because that particular address line is being held
low or high by another assembly which is connected to the address bus. To check
this possibility, isolate the A14 address bus from the other assemblies by setting
the address bus switches on the A14 extender board all open (low).
Place the 5004A data probe on the following device select codes and check that the
proper free-run signatures are obtained:
DEVICE SELECT CODE
LOCATION
SIGNATURE
HDSPWRT
LKBRD
LTIMRD
LTIMWRT
LCTRWRT
LPDRD
LPDWRT
LSYNHI
LSYNLO
LCTRRD
LHPIB
LAMPMTR
U22(8)
U20(7)
U20(9)
U20(10)
U20(11)
U20(12)
U20(13)
U20(14)
U20(15)
U14(13)
U17(7)
U17(6)
U05H
FF48
7311
9FF7
A732
A9FU
6A70
1A9U
46A4
94F1
CC1A
1P2A
If these signatures are correct, go to step 7.
a.
If the signatures are not correct, check the inputs to the IC's with the incorrect
signatures. If the inputs are not correct, troubleshoot backwards along the signal
flow, from output to input, until a device is found where the input exhibits a
correct signature but the output is incorrect. Change that IC.
b.
If the inputs to U20, U22, U17 have good signatures, then either the IC is bad or
the output line is being held high or low by some other assembly connected to
that signal. To check this possibility, A14 must be isolated from the rest of the
instrument. Perform as follows:
(1) Remove A14 assembly and place it near lefthand side of instrument.
(2) Connect a clip lead from the +5V test pin on A17 to the +5V test pin on A14.
(3) Connect a clip lead from the gound test pin on A17 to the ground test pin
on A14.
(4) Connect an AP clip to A14U22. Connect a clip lead from test pin TP1 on A17
(1 MHz clock signal) to A14U22(4). The A14 assembly can now be exercised.
(5) Connect an AP clip to A14U8. Place the 5004A START and STOP inputs on
A14U8(2).
8-93
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-9. A14 Microprocessor Troubleshooting (Continued)
(6) Connect the 5004A CLOCK to VMA.@J, test pin on A14 and GROUND to
A14 ground test pin.
(7) Place the A14 board in free-run as in step 3.
(8)
7.
a.
Measure the signatures again. If the A14 signatures are now good, then
there is an assembly common to that signal which has a faulty input/output
buffer. To detect which assembly this is, put A14 back in the instrument and
pull assemblies which are connected to the failed A14 signal output, one
at a time, until a good signature is obtained.
With the 5004A set up as in steps 1, 2, 3, place switch S2B in the down position:
b . Open the data bus switches on the A14 extender board as shown below:
c.
Connect the 5004A data probe GND connector to chassis ground and the ground
lead of the test pod to ground.
d.
Connect the START of the 5004A to the R3 test point of the extender board and
the STOP to the R1 test point.
e.
Set the 5004A for (-) slope START (>)
(+) slope on STOP (f)
(+) slope on CLOCK (~)
f.
Observe the following signatures: +5V - C690
Signal Name
Location
LDO
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
LD5
LD6
LD7
A14A(3)
A14A(4)
A14A(5)
A14A(6]
A14A(7)
A14A(8)
A14A(9)
A14A(10)
g.
h.
Signatures (for ROM Combinations listed)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (P/N 1818-0329)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U4 (1818-0330)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U7 (1818-0706)
A14U7 (1818-0331)
A14U7 (1818-0331)
AA7C
9UH5
A4PF
F1P9
P1P9
AOAC
312H
54C7
27H1
H950
0AP2
65PF
84U9
PC7U
COF3
5P8H
If these signatures are good, go to step 8.
Check the inputs to A14U2, U3 by changing switch A14S2 as follows:
A14S2
8-94
HP37
C256
61P4
65PF
B4U9
PC7U
4925
358C
Model 5342A
Service
Tab/e 8-9. A14 Microprocessor Troubleshooting (Continued)
With the 5004A set up and connected as in steps 7d and 7e, take the following
signatures:
Signal Name
Location
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U3(9)
U3(12)
U3(4)
U3(7)
U2(12)
U2(9)
U2(7)
U2(4)
Signatures (for ROM Combinations listed)
A14U1 (P/N 1818-0329)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (P/N 1818-0330)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U7 (P/N 1818-0331)
A14U7 (1818-0706)
A14U7 (1818-0331)
9141
6UF0
CF72
H37F
3269
5HPU
0653
P81H
1FPC
2945
127F
7779
5779
163C
87CH
P227
68A7
04F6
H774
H37F
3269
5HPU
UUC5
831C
i.
If these signatures are good, suspect buffers U2 and U3. If any of these signatures
are bad, then perform the following to isolate the problem to a particular ROM.
U7 ROM Test:
START and STOP of 5004A to R3 test point on A14 extender board
CLOCK of 5004A to VMAOOZ test point on A14
START to (-) slope (>)
STOP to (+) slope (J)
CLOCK to (+) slope (<)
GND of data probe to ground
A14S1 and A14S2 switches remain unchanged:
+5V — 826P
A14S1
Signal Name Location
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U7(23)
U7(22)
U7(21)
U7(20)
U7(19)
U7(18)
U7(17)
U7(16)
A14S2
Signatures (for ROM Combinations listed)
A14U1 (P/N 1818-0329)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (P/N 1818-0330)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U7 (1818-0706)
A14U7 (p/N 1818-0331)
A14U7 (1818-0331)
F3PC
F3PC
HP87
CA11
CA11
CA12
52H7
52H7
52H4
3UP5
3UP5
3UP5
U9H1
U9H1
U9H1
359F
359F
359F
OFUC
OFUC
1197
3PCF
3PCF
3PCU
U4 ROM test — change the START and STOP of the 5004A to the R2 test point on the
A14 extender board. All other settings remain unchanged.
+5V — 826P
8-95
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-9. A14 Microprocessor Troubleshooting (Continued)
U1 ROM test — change the START and STOP of the 5004A to the R1 test point on the A14 extender board. All other settings remain unchanged:
+5V — 826P
Signal Name
Location
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U4(23)
U4(22)
U4(21)
U4(20)
U4(19)
U4(18)
U4(17)
U4(16)
Signal Name
Location
Signatures (for ROM Combinations listed)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (P/N 1818-0329)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U4 (P/N 1818-0330)
A14U7 (1818-0706)
A14U7 (1818-0331)
A14U7 (P/N 1818-0331)
4P63
6HPH
UHU3
2268
5UOA
7UHU
1748
2FHF
FAA3
9697
UHU3
A6A8
196H
24F6
A956
92F1
4P63
6HPH
UHU3
2268
5UOA
7UHU
1748
2FHF
Signatures (for ROM Combinations listed)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U1 (1818-0698)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U4 (1818-0697)
A14U7 (1818-0706)
A14U7 (1818-0331)
A14U1 (P\N 1818-0329)
A14U4 (P/N 1818-0330)
A14U7 (P/N 1818-0331)
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
8.
U1(23)
U1(22)
U1(21)
U1(20)
U1(19)
U1(18)
U1(17)
U1(16)
6000
6P3H
HP60
P686
65P0
A520
P903
H4UC
AAPC
A4H6
706P
05F2
86A4
A520
P903
H4UC
AAPC
A4H6
706P
05F2
86A4
A520
P903
H4UC
To check the read buffers, place A14 in free-run:
a.
Set the LX ROM switch on the A14 extender board to the down position to disable
ROM’s U1, U4, U7. Ground U19(2) to halt the microprocessor.
b.
With a logic pulser, pulse the read buffer inputs U2(3,6,10,13), U3(3,6,10,13) and
verify no output pulse on U2(2,5,11,14) U3(2,5,11,14) otputs with a logic probe.
Verify that the read buffer outputs U2(2,5,11,14) U3(2,5,11,14) all indicate an intermediate or high Z state (dim lamp). Place on AP clip on U3 and ground U3(1) to
enable the read buffer. Now pulse the U2, U3 inputs with the logic pulser and verify
with the logic probe that the U2, U3 outputs pulse.
NOTE
Return A14 switch settings to normal operation
(see step 3).
9.
8-96
It is possible for the MPU (U21) to freerun and still not operate properly. If trouble
persists, replace U21.
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-10, A19, A20, A21 Power Supply Troubleshooting
It is extremely dangerous to troubleshoot the A19 assembly of
the power supply if an isolation transformer is not used. A19 is
connected directly to the power main. Use an isolation transformer such as Allied Electronics P/N 705-0048 (for 120V ac) to
isolate the instrument from the power main. The measurements
in this troubleshooting procedure may be made only if an isolation transformer is used.
1.
Connect 5342A power cord to isolation transformer.
2.
The first step in power supply troubleshooting is to check the state of the green LED on
A20 and the red LED on A21. If the green LED is on and the red LED is off, then the
+5V(D) supply is working properly. If the red LED is on and the green LED is off, then
one or more of the voltage outputs of A20, A21 may be drawing excessive current. Even
if the green LED is on, one of the regulated outputs of A21 may be shut down due to
excessive current. Check the following voltage levels:
SUPPLY LOCATION
TABLE 8-10
VALUE
*lf this voltage is not correct, adjust A21R17 before making other voltage measurements.
NOTE
If one or more of the voltage outputs is at ground, then a probable
cause is that one of the assemblies in the instrument connected
to that voltage output has a short to ground. Remove assemblies
connected to that voltage output, one at a time, until the short
is removed. After removing an assembly, replace it in the instrument if that assembly is not the problem. This must be done because the power supply looses regulation if not run at approximately 75% of full load. The following table shows which assemblies are connected to the various supply voltages:
SUPPLY
FROM
TO
The waveforms in the following paragraph require using an
isolation transformer as described in the CAUTION preceding
step 1.
8-97
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-10. A19, A20, A21 Power Supply Troubleshooting (Continued)
3.
A21 Troubleshooting
a.
Pull A19 and A20 from the instrument and put A21 on an extender board. Plug
the 5342A to the line but leave the ON/STBY switch in STBY. Measure the voltage
at test lead TLS (labeled TLS 13.5V), which is the positive side of A21C20, and
verify that this voltage is approximately 13.5 volts. If not, suspect rectifier A21CR2
or oven transformer T4.
b.
With the 5342A still in STBY, monitor test points TP2 and TP3 on A21 with an
oscilloscope. Short TPJ and TPG (lower right corner TP on A21) together. Observe
the following waveforms:
TABLE 8-10
Now remove the short from TPJ to TPG and observe:
c.
8-98
Connect a clip lead to A21TP4 and momentarily ground the other end to the chassis.
Observe red LED turn on for approximately 1-2 seconds and waveforms at TP2,
TP3 go to a constant +13 volts for same duration. If not, suspect A21U3.
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-10. A19, A20, A27 Power Supply Troubleshooting (Continued)
4.
With A21 still on extender board (remove short from TPJ to TPG), insert A19 on an
extender board into the instrument (A20 is still out of the instrument). Leave the 5342A
line switch in STBY. The waveform at A19TP4 indicates that A19 transformers T1 and
T2 are operating properly.
Now switch front panel line switch to ON and observe:
If the above waveform is not present, check the collector of A19Q1 for 300V (with respect to the test point TPG). If 300V dc is not present, suspect input rectifier A19CR1
and associated circuitry. If 300V dc is present, suspect open transistors Q1 and Q2.
8-99
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-10. A19, A20, A21 Power Supply Troubleshooting (Continued)
5.
8-100
Fabricate the following special test extender board shown below. This board is useful
because, by placing a 1 Kfl load in series with the A20T1 transformer, the current drawn
from transistors A19Q1) Q2 is limited. If A19Q1, Q2 have failed because of excessive
current (due to a failure in the A21 overcurrent protection circuitry), then replacing
A19Q1, Q2 and using the 1 Kfl load allows the power supply to be checked out without
danger of blowing A19Q1, Q2 again.
a.
Take a 22-pin extender board (such as HP P/N 05342-60034) and cut the traces on
pin 8 and ~ as shown below.
b,
Solder a 1 Kfl, 20W resistor (HP P/N 0819-0006) above and below the cut as shown:
c.
Insert A20 in the above extender board into the instrument. Insert A21 (on standard HP P/N 05342-60034 extender board) into the instrument. Short A21TPJ to
TPG (low right test point). Insert A19 on extender into instrument. Monitor
A19TP4 with the scope probe ground on A19 TPG test point (emitter of Q2). If an
isolation transformer is not used, do NOT make this measurement.
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-10, A19, A20, A21 Power Supply Troubleshooting (Continued)
d.
Remove special extender board and remove the short between A21TPJ and TPG.
Insert A20 into XA20.
Green LED on A20 should be lit.
e.
Now monitor A19TP5 and observe (adjust A19R1 for -1V on trailing edge):
8-101
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-11. A1. A2 Keyboard/Display Troubleshooting
1.
First verify that HDSPWRT at XA14B(10) pulses high when power is applied to the
5342A by using a logic probe such as the 545A. If not, troubleshoot A14 to obtain an
HDSPWRT signal.
2.
If HDSPWRT is present on the power up and pulses consistently thereafter but the display/keyboard still does not operate properly, remove the A1, A2 and front panel
assembly as follows:
TABLE 8-11
3.
8-102
a.
Remove front panel, sample rate knob with allen wrench.
b.
Remove BNC connector nut and type N connector nut.
c.
Pull off the two coax cables connected to A1J3 and A1J1.
d.
Remove the two chassis screws from each side strut holding the front panel to
the strut.
e.
Pull off front panel assembly carefully.
f.
Remove 5 screws holding A1, A2 to front panel.
g.
h.
Pull out A1, A2 which are sandwiched together by a center press-on connector.
Make sure ribbon cable remains connected to A2.
Remove A14 from the 5342A chassis. With a clip lead, ground the following pins and
observe the display for the following lighted LED segments:
a.
A2U1(3)
A2U1(6)
A2U1(8)
A2U1(11)
all (b) segments and dBm light should light
all decimal points and blue key should light
all (d) segments, REM light, and MAN key should light
all (c) segments, GATE light, and OFS MHz key should light
b.
A2U4(3)
A2U4(6)
A2U4(8)
A2U4(11)
all (g) segments and RECALL key should light
all (a) segments and FM light and AMPL key should light
all (e) segments and AUTO key should light
all (f) segments, SET key and OFS dB key should light
c.
If all segments light as specified, then the LED’s A1DS11 through DS21 and the
associated transistor drivers on A1 are operating properly. In addition, the scan
clock comprised of A2U5, U3, U13, U6, and the column scanners A2U2, U7 are
operating properly.
d.
If only one segment in the display lights, troubleshoot the scan clock and column
scanners on A2.
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-11. A1, A2 Keyboard/Display Troubleshooting (Continued)
4.
If the 5342A does not perform the power up diagnostic but A1, A2 properly perform the
test described in step 3, the probable cause of the failure is A2U11, U8 (TTL RAM memory),
A2U16 (data bus buffer), A2U5, U13 (write enable generation), or U17 (multiplexer).
5.
If the 5342A performs the power-up diagnostic but does not perform the diagnostic
mode 8 keyboard check, the probable cause of the problem is the key decoding circuitry
on A2 consisting of U13A, USC, U18, U19, and U12. To test this circuitry, perform the
following tests with A14 still removed from instrument:
a.
Monitor U10(8) with a logic probe and verify that each time a key is depressed,
U10(8) goes low. To cause U10(8) to return to high, ground U22(1) momentarily.
This verifies that pushing a key generates an interrupt request (LIRQ) and that
reading the keyboard (LKBRD) clears the interrupt request.
b.
Place AP clip on U22 and monitor the outputs of latch U22 by grounding U22(1)
and verify that when a key is pressed, the latch stores the following data:
KEY
U22(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
l
ENTER
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
o
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
c.
Monitor U12(2) and verify that when any of the leftmost grouping of keys (AUTO,
MAN, RESET, etc.) is pressed, U12(2) is high and that when any of the rightmost
grouping of keys (0, 1, 2, etc.) is pressed, U12(2) is low. This verifies that the top/
bottom row decoder U19A is operating properly.
d.
If the A2 assembly passes all the above, then the most probable cause of the problem
is the A2U12 bus driver. Another possible cause is that the A14U2 MPU does not
respond to the LIRQ signal.
TABLE 8-11
8-103
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-12. A3 Direct Count Amplifier Troubleshooting
To check that the direct count amplifier is working, connect the 10 MHz FREQ STD rear
panel output to thedirect count input (front panel BNC). Place the range switch in the 10 Hz—
500 MHz range and the impedance select to 500. Monitor TP1 of A3 for the following waveform (TP1 is the output of Schmitt Trigger U5).
TABLE 8-12
NOTE
Check that the output of A3, DIRECT B available at XA3(1), is
divided by four and that DIRECT A available at XA3(2) is divided
by two.
8-104
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-13. A13 Counter Troubleshooting
1.
Apply approximately 50 MHz signal at -10 dBm to the high frequency input of the
5342A. Put the counter in diagnostic mode 2 (press SET, SET, 2) to read the contents
of the A counter. The A counter should read approximately 8,200,000. Put the 5342A
in diagnostic mode 3 to read the B counter. it should be the same reading as A, ±1 count
(provided the stability of the 50 MHz source is that good). If this is true, then A13 is
good. If it is not true, A13 may be at fault (as well as A17 for the prs generation and
gate time generation).
2.
Check the inputs to the A counter as follows: Apply 10 MHz FREQ STD OUT on rear
panel to the direct count input (fron panel BNC) with 50J_I position selected. Check the
following A counter test points (since 10 MHz is divided by four on A3, TP6 which divides
A3 output by 2, should have a period of 8x1OO ns = 800 ns and TP7, which divides A3
output by four should have a period of 16x100 ns = 1.6 PS):
TABLE 8-13
3.
Check the inputs to the B counter as follows: Apply a 50 MHz, -10 dBm signal to the
high frequency input and select the 500 MHz—18 GHz range. Put the 5342A in AUTO and
push RESET to cause the counter to go to the prs generation, thus enabling the B
counter. Place the rear panel FM switch to the FM position so that the B counter is
enabled for 2.1 seconds.
8-105
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-13. A13 Counter Troubleshooting (Continued)
4.
Test the outputs of U1 and U2 for activity by applying a 50 MHz, -10 dBm signal to the
high frequency input. Place the counter in AUTO, 500 MHz—18GHz range, and diagnostic
mode 2 so that the prs is continually generated, Monitor TP2 and TP3 with an oscilloscope. If the signals appears much different than the waveform shown below, one or
more of the U3 buffers have probably failed. Use a logic pulser and logic probe to check
out the U3, U7 buffers. An HP 1607A Logic State Analyzer may be used to check out the
actual data going back to the microprocessor as shown in step 5.
When the counter is not in diagnostic mode 2 but is just measuring the 50 MHz signal,
the waveform below shows activity at the A counter (counting the IF) but none at the
B counter.
TABLE 8-13
5.
1607A check out of A13
a.
Put A13 on extender board and put AP clips on A13U3, U5, U8, and U10. Connect
the following 1607 data bit lines as follows:
1607 Data Inputs
b.
8-106
A13 Connections
Description
Set 1607A to repetitive, Table A, word trigger, delay off and start display. Put bits
15-7 in the OFF (don’t care) position. Place the 5342A in CHECK mode and 1 MHz
resolution. Select each of the following trigger words (EXAMPLES 1, 2, and 3) and
verify the proper 1607A display in the don’t card bits of the trigger word.
Model 5342A
Service
Example 1: CHECK Mode - 1 MHz Resolution
TRIGGER WORD
(DATA BITS)
4
3
2
1
OFF DATA BITS
SHOULD BE:
10
9
8
7
*
*
1
1
6
5
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 = U17(5) output
Bit 8 = U17(9) output
Bit 9 = U17(2)
Bit 10= U17(12)
Count = 8 in this case.
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
Bit 7 = U13(5) output
Bit 8 = U13(9) output
Bit 9 = U13(2) output
Bit 10= U13(12)
Count = 1 in this case.
0
0
0
1
0
Bit 7 = U1(15) 100 decade
Bit 8 = U1(16) 100 decade
Bit 9 = U1(1) 100 decade
Bit 10 = U1(2) 100 decade
Count = 0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 = U1(15) 101 decade
Bit 8 = U1(16) 101 decade
Bit 9 = U1(1) 101 decade
Bit 10= U1(2)
Count = 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 7 = U1(15) 102 decade
Bit 8 = U1(16) 102 decade
Bit 9 = U1(1) 102 decade
Bit 10 = U1(2) 102 decade
Count = 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
Bit 7 = U1(15) 103 decade
Bit 8 = U1(16) 103 decade
Bit 9 = U1(1) 103 decade
Bit 10 = U1(2) 103 decade
Count = 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
Bit 7 = U1(15) 104 decade
Bit 8 = U1(16) 104 decade
Bit 9 = U1(1) 104 decade
Bit 10 = U1(2) 104 decade
Count = 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
Bit 7 = U1(15) 105 decade
Bit 8 = U1(16) 105 decade
Bit 9 = U1(1) 105 decade
Bit 10 = U1(2) 105 decade
Count = 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
COMMENTS
*These two bits ignored in
CHECK since they represent state of dividers on A3.
This reads out least significant counts. In this case
we’re reading state of
divider U12B (bit 9) and
divider U16B (bit 10). Count
equals 3 in this case.
Total Count = 3+4(8+10) = 75 counts
(Count display 75 MHz)
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Multiply all the counts after the 1st by 4 since
the input to the decade counters has essentially been
prescaled by 4.
8-107
Model 5342A
Service
Example 2: CHECK Mode — 100 Hz Resolution
COMMENTS
Count = 0
Count = 0
Count = 0
Count = 5
Count = 7
Count = 8
Count = 1
Count = 0
Count = 0
OFF DATA BITS
SHOULD BE:
10
9
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
TRIGGER WORD
(DATA BITS)
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Total Count = 4(187500) +0 = 750,000 = Display of 75,0000 MHz
Example 3: Apply 10 MHz from EXT FREQ STD OUT to 10 Hz—500 MHz input and select the
direct count range with 1 Hz resolution
COMMENTS
Count = 0
Count = 0
Count = 0
Count = 0
Count = 5
Count = 2
Count = 6
Count = 0
Count = 0
OFF DATA BITS
SHOULD BE:
10
9
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
TRIGGER WORD
(DATA BITS)
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
In the direct count mode, because of the divide-by-4 on A3, the output of the decade dividers
must be multiplied by 16 instead of 4. So total count is 16 (625,000) + 0 = 10,000,000 and is
displayed as 10,000000 MHz.
To check the B counter, the same set-up may be used but Bit 5 in the Trigger word must be a
zero. Put the counter in diagnostic mode 3 with a 50 MHz, -10 dBm signal applied to the high
frequency input. Observe that a reading of around 8,200,000 is output for 1 Hz resolution,
8-108
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-14. A17 Timing Generator Troubleshooting
1.
The A17 Timing Generator has a number of outputs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
LO SWITCH at XA17(1) which switches the AS multiplexer and A13 counters in a
pseudorandom sequence after acquisition.
LDIR GATE at XA17(~) which gates the main gate on A3 for direct count
measurements.
LIF GATE at XA17(;) which gates counter A on A13 for measuring the IF.
CLOCK at XA17(4) which drives A14.
When A17 is read by the microprocessor, the D4 line is examined to see if the gate
time is over. The D1 line indicates the end of the prs. The D2 line indicates the
end of the sample rate run down.
LO SWITCH verification. To verify that the LO SWITCH signal is operating properly, the
5342A must be able to acquire so that the counter can be forced into its harmonic determination routine. This means that A25, U1, A11, A12 must be working properly. To check
LO SWITCH, apply a 50 MHz signal, -10 dBm, to the high frequency connector and put the
5342A in the 500 MHz—18 GHz range. The LO SWITCH signal at XA5~ should appear:
The time during which the signal switches between high and low levels in a pseudorandom fashion should be 360 ms. The time where the signal is high and not switching is
controlled by the front panel sample rate control and resolution of counter. If the rear
panel switch is placed in the FM position, then the time during which the signal is switching should extend to 2.1 seconds (actually 2.096).
A sample of what the sequence looks like is shown below where the sweep speed of the
scope has been increased to 100 ps:
If LO SWITCH is stuck low, then the 5342A will not acquire even if all the IF circuitry
is working properly. This is due to the fact that during acquisition, a 1 ps measurement
is made on the IF and this requires that LO SWITCH go high to select the A counter on
A13. This measurement is made to insure that the IF is in the proper frequency range.
The above troubleshooting procedure will not work in this case since diagnostic mode 3
can not be entered. This condition would be evidenced by the counter displaying SP2
in diagnostic mode 0.
8-109
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-14. A17 Timing Generator Troubleshooting (Continued)
IF LO SWITCH is not present, check the TP5 test point on A17 to see if the prs generator is working. Put the counter in diagnostic mode 2 for continual prs generation.
TP5 is high during the prs and should remain high for 360 ms (normal or CW mode
on rear panel) or for 2.096 seconds (FM mode).
TABLE 8-14
3.
Troubleshooting the A17 prs generator.
To troubleshoot the prs generator on A17 (consisting of A17U7, U4, U5, U2, U1, and
various gates), pull the A18 time base buffer board from the instrument to disable the
1 MHz clock into A17. Put A17 on an extender board, connect logic probe and logic
pulser power leads to A17 +5V and ground, and perform as follows:
a.
U7, U4, U5 SHIFT REGISTER CHECK
1)
Put AP clip on U3 and connect clip lead from U3(9) to ground. Verify that
U5(1) is high. Clear U7, U4, U5 by applying 1 pulse with logic pulser to
TP5 test point. Monitor U5(9) with logic probe to see that the clear input
pulses low (if clear input powers up low, then apply a pulse to U19(9) then
to U14(2) to cause the clear input to go high).
2)
Apply logic pulser to TP4 test point and monitor the shift register outputs.
After 1 pulse at TP4, U5(3) should go from low to high.
Apply 2 more pulses at TP4, U5(5) should go from low to high.
b.
8-110
Apply 12 more pulses at TP4, U4(12) should go from low to high.
Apply 5 more pulses at TP4, U7(6) should go from low to high.
U2, U1 Counters Check
1)
Connect AP clip to U3. Connect clip lead from U3(1) to ground.
2)
Verify that U1(1) is high. If not, pulse U19(9), then U14(2) with logic pulser.
Verify that U2(3) is high and U2(5) is low. If not, pulse U19(9).
3)
Connect another clip lead from U3(5) to ground. Verify that U1(9) is low.
Move clip lead from U3(5) to U3(6) so that U3(6) is grounded. Verify that
U1(9) is high. This loads data into U1 and U2 counters.
4)
Monitor U1(15) with logic probe and pulse TP4 test point with pulser 14
times. ON 14th clock, U1(15) should pulse high.
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-14. A17 Timing Generator Troubleshooting (Continued)
4.
A17 LDIR GATE and LIF GATE troubleshooting.
a.
Set the 5342A to 10 Hz—500 MHz range, sample rate full CCW , no input signal, and
100 Hz resolution. With an oscilloscope, monitor LDIR GATE at XA3(5) and TP6 on
A17 as shown below:
b.
As the resolution is changed, the width of the gate signal (TP6 high) should vary as
follows:
Resolution
Width
1 MHz
100 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
100 Hz
10 Hz
1 Hz
c.
d.
1 /.ls
10 ps
100 ps
1 ms
10 ms
100 ms
1 sec
Change the range of the 5342A to the 500 MHz—18 GHz range and place the
counter in MAN mode and observe:
As the resolution is change, the width of the gate signal should vary as follows:
Resolution
1 MHz
100 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
100 Hz
10 Hz
1 Hz
Width
10 /ls
Four 10 PS width pulses, 100 ys between each
Four 100 MS width pulses, 100 AS between each
Four 1 ms width pulses, 100 ps between each
Four 10 ms width pulses, 100 ps between each
Four 100 ms width pulses, 100 ps between each
1 sec
For resolutions from 100 kHz to 10 Hz, each gate time consists of four gate signals
separated by 100 ps dead time.
8-111
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-14. A17 Timing Generator Troubleshooting (Continued)
5.
IF LDIR GATE or LIF GATE signals are not present, place A17 on an extender board and
monitor A17U16(1), the output of the A16 time base generator. Place the 5342A in 10 Hz—
500 MHz range, sample rate full CCW, and 1 kHz resolution and observe:
Only the first period of the U16(11) output is used to generate the LDIR GATE is used to
generate the LDIR GATE signal as shown below:
8-112
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-15. A8, A9, A10 Main Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting
1.
2.
To test if the A9 Main Loop Amplifier and A10 Divide-by-N are operating properly,
put the 5342A in AUTO and select the 500 MHz—18 GHz range. Disconnect any input
signal. In diagnostic mode zero (press SET, SET, 0), the counter should display SP,
indicating that it is sweeping the synthesizers. The MAIN CNTRL signal, measured at
XA8(1), should look like:
The sweep up time is approximately 90 ms while the sweep down time is 60 ms. If this
signal is present, then A9, A10, and part of A8 as well as the ROM program on A14, are
operating properly.
To test if the A8 Main VCO is operating properly, put the 5342A in MANUAL mode,
500 MHz—18 GHz range and set the MANUAL center frequency to the values in the
following table. Connect a coax cable, with BNC connector on one end and alligator
clips on the other, from XA5(10) to the 5342A direct count input (front panel BNC). XA5(10)
is the Main OSC signal and will be measured by the 5342A if the range switch is
changed to the 10 Hz—500 MHz range (impedance select should be in 500). To change
MANUAL center frequency, place the range switch back in the 500 MHz—18 GHz
position and SET MAN. Verify that the counter measures the proper MAIN OSC frequency for each of the MANUAL center frequencies selected.
MAIN OSC
MAN CENTER
FREQ
FREQ
500 MHz
550 MHz
600 MHz
650 MHz
TABLE 8-15
300.0 MHz
312.5 MHz
337.5 MHz
350.0 MHz
Also test the output level of the A8 outputs. Using an RF Millivoltmeter with a high Z
probe, the following A8 output levels should be measured (±100 mV):
500 mV rms
MAIN OSC
XA8(7)
250 mV rms
MAIN VCO
XA8Q)
250 mV rms
DIV N
XA8(5)
These levels are essentially independent of frequency.
If steps 1 and 2 pass the test, then the Main Loop Synthesizer is working properly. If
not, proceed to step 3.
3.
A8 FREE RUN FREQUENCY CHECK. Connect XA5(~O), the MAIN OSC signal, to the
direct count input (front panel BNC), of the 5342A. Use a coax cable, BNC on one end
and alligator clips on the other. With a jumper, short MAIN CNTRL, A9TP1, to ground.
The 5342A should read approximately 325 MHz (f2 MHz). If not, adjust A8R22. If no
signal is present, repair A8. (Test all of the A8 outputs for a signal.)
8-113
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-15. A8, A9, A10 Main Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting (Continued)
4.
Troubleshooting A9 and A10.
Put A10 on an extender board and put an AP clip on A10U2. Connect scopes probes to
U2(5) which is MAIN AO1 and U2(10) which is MAIN A@2. Ground TP1 on A9 with a
clip lead. This causes the A8 VCO to go to its free run frequency of 325 MHz. Put the
5342A in AUTO, 500 MHz—18 GHz range, and no input. This causes the 5342A to sweep
the synthesizers. Verify that the U2 phase detector outputs appear as follows:
If these signals are not present, then either the divide-by-N or the phase detector on
A10 is faulty. If this signal is present but there is no MAIN CNTRL sweep signal at XA8(7
as in step 1, then A9 is faulty.
TABLE 8-15
5.
The following test determines if the divide-by-N is faulty:
With the Main Synthesizer loop working properly, the signal at A10TP1 is a 50 kHz
signal as shown:
MIXED SCOPE DISPLAY
8-114
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-15. A8, A9, A10 Main Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting (Continued)
Ground A9TP1 so that A8 will go to its free run frequency of 325 MHz. Put the 5342A in
MANUAL mode and set the following center frequencies. Monitor A10TP1 and check
the period of this signal. It should vary per the table below since the 325 MHz free run
frequency is divided by the programmed N.
(frequency A8 would go
to if A9TP1 not grounded)
MAN CNTRL
FREQ
500 MHz
550 MHz
600 MHz
650 MHz
For example:
DESIRED VCO
FREQ
300.0 MHz
312.5 MHz
337.5 MHz
350.0 MHz
DIVISION
FACTOR N
6000
6250
6750
7000
A1OTP1 PERIOD
(if free run = 325.OMHZ)
18.46
19.23
20.77
21.54
MS
@
/.4s
@
If the MAN CNTRL FREQ is changed to 600 MHz, then the period of A10TP1 changes:
If this doesn’t occur, then the divide-by-N circuitry on A10 is faulty.
8-115
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-16. A11, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting
1.
Set up signal generator at 50 MHz to deliver 0.6V p-p into 500 as measured on an oscilloscope with 100 MHz bandwidth.
NOTE
In the following step, for instruments containing Option
002 or 003, inject the 50 MHz test signal at the U1 Sampler
Input. This requires removal of the semirigid coax cable
from U1 input. This action is necessary ,due to the filter in
U2 at the 500 MHZ—18 GHz input.
2.
Apply the 50 MHz signal generator output to the 500 MHz—18 GHz input of the 5342A,
Place the 5342A in AUTO and the range switch in the 500 MHz—18 GHz position.
The IF OUT on the rear panel of the 5342A should appear as follows:
IF OUT (REAR PANEL)
If this output is as shown above, go to step 3.
a.
8-116
If this output is not present, then either the U1 Sampler or the A25 Preamplifier
has failed. Check the A25 Preamplifier by checking the dc voltages on the active
components as given on the apron of the A25 schematic,
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-16. A11, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting (Continued)
b.
The U1 Sampler may be checked for continuity (does not guarantee proper operation across the frequency range, however) in the following manner:
1)
Remove U1 sampler. (Refer to Table 8-18).
2)
Measure the following resistance values on an ohmmeter set to the 1 Kf2
resistance range (1 mA constant current). Different values are obtained if
the current is different than 1 mA.
TABLE 8-16
. Measure from the RF Input to + IF OUT, both forward and reverse bias.
Ohmmeter should read =5700 forward bias, 00 for reverse bias.
l Measure from the RF Input to - IF OUT, both forward and reverse
bias. Ohmmeter should read ~570fl forward bias, 00 for reverse bias.
. Measure from the RF input to ground. Ohmmeter should read 50i5fl.
. Measure from sampler driver input to ground. Ohmmeter should
read 50 t5fL
8-117
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-16. A11, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting (Continued)
3.
Check the IF signal at XAll(~) using a 10 MWIO pF oscilloscope probe. Signal should
appear as follows:
If this signal is not present, suspect A25.
4.
Check the IF LIM signal at XAll(~2) with 10 MW1O pF oscilloscope probe. Signal should
appear as shown:
TABLE 8-16
If this signal is not present, suspect A11.
5.
Check the IF COUNT signal at XA12(@ with 10 MW1O pF scope probe. Signal should
appear as shown:
If this signal is not present, suspect amplifiers U2 and/or U4 on A12.
8-118
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-16. A11, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting (Continued)
6.
Testing A12 IF Detectors
Put the A121F detector on an extender board. Monitor TP8 (48-102 MHz detector) and
TP9 (22—128 MHz detector) with a logic probe. Put the 5342A in AUTO and the 500 MHz—
18 GHz range. Apply a 20 MHz 0 dBm signal to the high frequency input. Note that both
TP8 and TP9 are low. Increase the input frequency to 22 MHz and notice that the logic
probe indicates a high at TP9 (near the limits of the detectors, the logic probe will
blink high). Increase the input frequency to 48 MHz and check that TP8 goes high. As
the frequency is increased to 102 MHz, both TP8 and TP9 should be high. As the frequency is increased beyond 102 MHz, TP8 should go low and TP9 should remain high
until 128 MHz is reached, at which TP9 also goes low. If these test points are correct
the detectors operate properly. If the detectors do not operate, go to step 7.
If the detectors operate as above but if the counter is in AUTO with a 50 MHz signal applied
to its high frequency input and if, after placing the counter in diagnostic mode 0, the
counter displays SP or SP2 only, the most probable cause is that the U12 output gates
which drive the data bus are bad or else LPDRD is not being sent by the MPU. Use a
logic pulser to pulse LPDRD and check the bus driver outputs with a logic probe. Also
use a pulser to pulse LPDWRT to see if that sets the U7 latch to the low state (monitor
TP1O).
7.
Troubleshooting 48-102 MHz Detector on A12. With a dual trace oscilloscope, monitor
TP5 (48—102 MHz detector) and TP4 (transfer signal) on A12 under the following conditions. Check that the correct display is obtained. (Put A12 on extender board
05342-60034).
a.
Apply a 45 MHz signal at 0.6V p-p to the 500 MHz—18 GHz input of the 5342A.
b.
Increase the frequency to 48 MHz. The following display should be observed:
8-119
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-16. A11, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting (Continued)
c.
Increase the frequency from 48 to 102 MHz. Over the entire frequency range, the
transfer pulse (TP4) should occur inside the detector pulse (TP5). The transfer
pulse clocks the state of the detectors into U13 on A12.
d.
Increase the frequency beyond 102 MHz to obtain the following display:
Transfer pulse occurs outside the detector pulse so that a low is transferred into
U13.
e.
Similar waveforms occur for the 22—128 MHz detector with different frequency
limits.
f.
Using the 5004A Signature Analyzer, troubleshoot the frequency detectors on A12.
Put A12 on an extender board and an AP clip on A12U15. Place the START probe and
STOP probe of the 5004A Signature Analyzer on U15(12) which is the QD output. Place
the CLOCK probe of the 5004A on U15(8) which is the 1 MHz input to A12. Place the
GROUND probe on U15(7).
Place the CLOCK, START, and STOP switches on the 5004A to positive slope (buttons
out).
Connect the 10 MHz FREQ STD output on the rear panel of the 5342A to the high frequency input of the 5342A.
8-120
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-16. A17, A12, A25, U1 IF Troubleshooting (Continued)
Place the data probe on +5V to see if characteristic 1’s signature of UP73 is obtained.
If not, replace U15. CHECK the signature at U6(3) to see if the 10 MHz signal is entering
the digital filter properly. This signature should be 55H1. Check U6 signatures and work
back along the incorrect signature signal path.
U6(1) A1C9
U6(2) OU16
U6(3) 55H1
U6(4) P258
U6(5) 1F2C
U6(6) 0000
U6(7) 0000
U6(8) 0000
U6(9) UP73
U6(10) 0000
U6(11) 0000
U6(12) UP73
U6(13) 0000
U6(14) UP73
U5(1) UP73
U5(2) 6097
U5(3) NA
US(4) NA
U5(5) 9HP0
U5(6) 9HP0
U5(7) 0000
U5(8) A1C9
U5(9) 2F60
U5(10) NA
U5(11) NA
U5(12) 1F2C
U5(13) UP73*
U5(14) UP73
U8(1) 0000
U8(2) 0000
U8(3) HPO1
U8(4) P258
U8(5) 0000
U8(6) UP73
U8(7) 0000
U8(8) UP73*
U8(9) UP73
U8(10) 0000
U8(11) 0000
U8(12) UP73
U8(13) 0000
U8(14) UP73
U9(1) 0000
U9(2) 1F2C
U9(3) 0000
U9(4) 6097
U9(5) 2F60
U9(6) UP73
U9(7) 0000
U9(8) 0000*
U9(9) UP73
U9(10) UP73
U9(11) 0000
U9(12) 0000
U9(13) UP73
U9(14) UP73
U10(1) UP73
U1O(2) 0000
U10(3) NA
U1O(4) NA
U10(5) 0000
U10(6) 0000
U10(7) 0000
U10(8) 1F2C
U10(9) 0000
U10(10) NA
U1O(11) NA
U1O(12) 0000
U1O(13) UP73*
U1O(14) UP73
U11(1) UP73
U11(2) 0000
U11(3) 0000
U11(4) UP73
U11(5) 0000
U11(6) UP73
U11(7) 0000
U11(8) ACA2
U11(9) 55H1
U11(10) FH3F
U11(11) 334U
U11(12) 0000*
U11(13) UP73*
U11(14) UP73
U7(1) 6097
U7(2) 2F60
U7(3) HPO1
U14(1) 0U16
U14(2) 55H1
U14(3) 0000*
U14(4) FH3F
U14(5) 0000*
U14(6) UP73*
U14(7) 0000
U14(8) UP73*
U14(9) 0000*
U14(10) FH3F
U14(11) NA
U14(12) ACA2
U14(13) 0U16
U14(14) UP73
*Probe blinks
8-121
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-17. A4, A6, A7 Offset Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting
1.
To test if the Offset Loop Synthesizer is working, put the 5342A in AUTO, 500 MHz—18
GHz range, and no input signal. Monitor the OFFSET CNTRL signal at A6TP1 and the
MAIN CNTRL signal at A9TP1:
Also measure the ~4 output signal levels with an RF millvoltmeter with a high impedante probe. XA4(IO) should be around 600 mV rms and XA4(7) around 300 mV rms.
Both levels are ±100 mV and essentially independent of frequency.
TABLE 8-17
2.
To determine if A4 has failed, use a clip lead to ground A6TP1. This forces the A4 VCO
to its free run frequency of 325 MHz (±2 MHz). Connect XA4(l~), the OFFSET OSC
signal, to the direct count input of the 5342A using a coax cable with BNC connector on
one end and alligator clips on the other. Adjust A4R1 for the proper frequency if necessary. Check that the level is approximately 600 mV rms.
3.
If A4 is good, then either A6 or A7 has failed. Pull the A6 OFFSET LOOP AMP from the
instrument, put A7 on an extender board and monitor A7U1(5) and A7U1(10), the phase
detector outputs, with an oscillosqpe. Put the 53424 in AUTO, 500 MHz—18GHz range,
and no signal input. Ground XA4[51, the OFFSET CNTRL signal, with a clip lead to cause A4
to go to 325 MHz. It may be necessry to push MAN, then AUTO, in order to get the characteristic display of all zeros and start the instrument sweeping. The display should be
as follows.
If these signals are present, then A7 is OK.
8-122
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-17. A4, A6, A7 Offset Loop Synthesizer Troubleshooting (Continued)
4.
If these signals are not present, then the mixer portion of A7 should be checked. With
A6 out of the instrument, ground XA4(5) so that the A4VC0 goes to 325 MHz. Put the 5342A
in manual mode and program the MAN center frequency (to check that the VCO frequency is that desired, put the 5342A in diagnostic mode 1 so that the main VCO frequency is displayed). For example, program the MAN center frequency to 576 MHz: the
diagnostic mode 1 displays 325.5 MHz as the main VCO frequency. Monitor A7TP1, the
output of the mixer and check for the presence of the difference frequency between
the main VCO programmed frequency and the free run frequency of A4.
With A6 removed, HSRCH EN, XA7(2) should be TTL high.
5.
To check A6, install A6 and remove A7 from the instrument. Remove the short to ground
on XA4(5). The search generator on A6 should begin searching and driving the OFFSET
CNTRL signal in a search ramp. LPOS SLOPE should go low to indicate when the frequency of the VCO is being swept from higher to lower values.
TABLE 8-17
8-123
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-18. A26 Sampler Driver Troubleshooting
1.
TABLE 8-18
8-124
Remove the U1 Sampler and A26 Sampler Driver as follows:
a.
Remove bottom panel by loosening screw at rear, remove two front feet and slide panel
rearward.
b.
Locate assemblies at bottom front of instrument.
c.
Pull off coax cables from A1J1, A1J3, A25J1 (IF OUT INT) and A25J2 (IF OUT EXT).
d.
Disconnect rigid coax from U1 Sampler by loosening attaching nut.
e.
Remove nut on front panel type N connector and remove rigid cable to allow access.
f.
Remove cable strap connector at A22 motherboard and move cable strap to one side
to allow access.
g.
Remove 5 screws (four corner and one middle screw) attaching A25 Preamplifier mounting bracket and withdraw bracket (and attached assemblies) from instrument.
h.
Remove A26 from bracket by removing the two small attaching bolts and nuts. Separate
A26 from U1 by loosening the interconnecting hex connector from U1.
2.
Set 5342A to CHECK mode and measure the sampler driver output with a power meter. The
output should be greater than +16 dBm (if the output of A5, which is driving A26, is at a level
of approximately +15 dBm).
3.
If the A26 output level is good, then A26U1 and associated circuitry are probably functioning
properly. However, a good level does not indicate that the step recovery diode CR1 is working.
CRI could be open. To check the diode with an ohmmeter, connect the positive lead of the
ohmmeter (such as the HP 3465A in OHMS function) to the center conductor of the A26
Sampler Driver output and the common leads to the A26 case. Place the ohmmeter in the 2K
range (1 mA current source) and measure a forward resistance of approximately 800 ohms.
Measure a reverse resistance of infinity.
4.
To replace CR1, simply unscrew the plastic holder and remove CR1 with tweezers. Reverse
the process for assembly.
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-19. A5 RF Multiplexer Troubleshooting
Set up the test equipment as shown:
Set the 8620C to 1.2 GHz at approximately -20 dBm. Place the 5342A in AUTO, 500 MHz—18 GHz
range, and in diagnostic mode 2 (press SET, SET, 2) so that the counter continuously displays the A
counter contents as it remains in the harmonic determination routine. The trace on the spectrum
analyzer should show two IF’s, indicating that the A5 Multiplexer is switching between the main
synthesizer and the offset synthesizer.
The wideband filter on A9 is switched in as can be determined by the wider noise skirts about the
signal.
TABLE 8-19
1.2 GHz @ -20 dBm input to CNTR
If the scale is expanded to 1 MHz/div., it is seen that the separation between the IF’s is 2 MHz
(=4 x 500 kHz) where 4 is the N number. Go to diagnostic mode 1 to verify N=4.
8-125
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-19. A5 RF Multiplexer Troubleshooting (Continued)
Put counter in diagnostic mode 4 which continuously measures the IF. The narrow band filter on
A9 is switched in and noise skirt about IF reduced:
TABLE 8-19
8-126
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting
GENERAL. The steps in this table troubleshoot the amplitude option in three basic tests:
1. The analog loop is checked for proper operation by checking the input voltage to the
analog-to-digital converter;
2. The inputs and outputs of the analog-to-digital converter are checked;
3. The digital control is checked using signature analysis.
1.
ANALOG LOOP CHECK
Set up test equipment as follows:
a.
b.
Place the A16 assembly on extender boards. Monitor the Vin Test point (same as
A16U8(5). The following waveforms should be observed:
TABLEL 8-20
8-127
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
c.
If the input level is increased to 0 dBm, the gain of A16U12 is decreased which
decreases the level of Vin as follows:
d.
If the above waveforms are present, it indicates that the analog loop, consisting of
A27 Low Frequency Amplitude module and the analog portion of A16 circuits are
functioning properly. To test U2 High Frequency Amplitude module portion of
the high frequency loop, apply a 500 MHz signal at -10 dBm to the high frequency
input of the counter (5342A set up for 500 MHz-18 GHz range) and monitor the
Vin test point. Similar waveforms should be observed.
e.
If these waveforms are present, go to step 2, Analog-to-Digital Converter Check.
f.
The following steps troubleshoot the analog loop:
(1) Apply a 50 MHz, -10 dBm signal to the low frequency input. Select AMPL
and place the 5342A in diagnostic mode 6 (SET, SET 6). With a DVM, measure
the DETECTED RF (LF) input to A16 at A16U18(2).
This voltage should be approximately -0.04 Volts. Increase the input level
+10 dBm and measure A16U18(2). This voltage should be approximately
-0.70 Volts. If not, check U17(15) for these voltages. If still not present, suspect
bad cable or failed A27 Low Frequency Amplitude module.
(2) Apply a 2 GHz, -10 dBm signal to the high frequency input. With the counter
in AMPL mode and diagnostic mode 6, measure the DETECTED RF (HF)
input to A16 at A16U18(2). This voltage will be approximately -0.03 to
-0.04 volts. Increase the input level to +10 dBm and observe a level in the
range of approximately -0.6 to -0.7 volts.
8-128
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
(3) If the U2 High Frequency Module or the A27 Low Frequency module is
suspected, perform the following dc checks using a DVM such as the 3465A.
Place the DVM in OHMS function and 2Kfl range (if using a different DVM,
select that range which provides a 1 mA constant current). Connect the
positive lead of the DVM to the point indicated by a (+) and the common
lead to the point indicated by a (-).
U2 High Frequency Module Checks
—
+
SIGNAL NAME
XA16B3
GROUND
GROUND
XA16BT
GROUND
GROUND
xA16m
950 f-1
m
GROUND
2oofl
GROUND
A16J4
1.4Kfl
A16J5*
GROUND
2oofl
GROUND
A1615
1.4Kfl
A27 Low Frequency Module Checks
—
+
SIGNAL NAME
XA16B4
DETECTED 100 kHz (LF)
DETECTED RF (LF)
950f-1
m
XA16m
DETECTED 100 kHz (HF) A16J4*
DETECTED - RF (HF)
OHMMETER
OHMMETER
GROUND
1.2Kfl
GROUND
XA16B4
7oofl
A16J3*
GROUND
2oofl
GROUND
A16J3
1.4Kfl
A16J6*
GROUND
2oofl
A16J6
GROUND
Note: *touch center conductor of connector to DVM.
1.4Kfl
If the U2 High Frequency Module on the A27 Low Frequency Module is suspected, perform the following dc checks using a DVM such as the 3465A. Place
the DVM in OHMS function and 2Kfl range (if using a different DVM, select
that range which provides a 1 mA constant current). Connect the positive lead
of the DVM to the point indicated by a (+) and the common lead to the point
indicated by a (—).
(4) Return the counter to normal operating mode by pressing RESET. Apply a
50 MHz, -10 dBm signal to the low frequency input. With the counter in AMPL
mode, 1 MHz resolution, sample rate full CCW, 50fl and 10 Hz-500 MHz range,
observe the following waveforms at the 100 kHz test point (second TP from
right edge of A16 board):
8-129
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
Increase the input level to 0 dBm:
(5) With the 5342A set-up as in step (3), place the 5342A in diagnostic mode 6 and
for a 0 dBm input observe a CW 100 kHz signal at the 100 kHz TP:
(6) To check the switching signals which are sent to the input multiplexer U2
and A27, apply a 50 MHz, -10 dBm signal to the low frequency input of the
5342A. Place the 5342A in 50fl, 10 Hz-500 MHz range, 1 MHz resolution, sample
rate full CCW and AMPL mode. Monitor the AMPL SEL signal at XA16B(4)
with an oscilloscope:
8-130
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
(7) If this signal (shown above) is not present, go to diagnostic mode 6 and
measure the following dc levels for AMPL on and AMPL off:
A16 DC Levels, 50 MHz, -10 dBm Input
Front Panel
Mode
U5(10)
AMPL
+0.2V
+14.6V
+3.9
+14.5V
ON
AMPL OFF
Q8
Collector
Emitter
+0.02V
Q7
Collector
-13.9V
Q5
Emitter
-13.lV
+3.3
+15.1
+14.5V
8-131
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
(8) Apply a -10 dBm, 500 MHz signal to the 500 MHZ-18 GHz input and press RESET.
Set the 5342A to 1 MHz resolution, AMPL on, and the 500 MHz-18 GHz_range.
Check the AMPL ON signal at XA16B(4) and the FREQ ON signal at XA16B(3) with
an oscilIoscope:
(9)
If the waveforms (shown above) are not present, go to diagnostic mode 6 and
check the voltages in the following table:
A16 DC LEVELS, 500 MHz, -10 dBm INPUT
Mode
U5(10)
AMPL
ON
AMPL
OFF
+0.2
+3.9
U5(11)
Q5
Q 6
Q 1 Q 2
Q 9
Q 4
Emitter
+4.97C +0.07C +4.99C +0.05C +0.05C
-13.1
+3.4
+5.0B
+5.0B
+0.7B +0.07B
+4.2B
+5.0B
+14.5 +0.01C +4.8C +0.07C +5.OC
+0.2
+4.3B
+4.4B
+4.98B +0.16B +0.7B
Note: C = Collector, B = Base
NOTE
For amplitudes greater than approximately +5 dBm at the high frequency input, the ATT signal at XA16B(3) changes from +7(tl) volts
(low levels) to O(tl) volts (high levels). To verify proper operation,
apply a 500 MHz, -10 dBm signal to the 5342A high frequency inPut.
Select AUTO and AMPL off. Increase the input level while monitoring
XA16B(3) on the ATT test point with a DVM. Decrease input level until
ATT goes to +7(f) volts again. The input signal level where this occurs
should be around 1-2 dB less than the level which originally caused
ATT to go low.
8-132
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
2.
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER CHECK
a.
Using DVM, measure the following voltage points:
(1) Check the 10 volt reference at the +10V TP (or A16U8(3) for 10.00 volts.
(2) Check the 6.6V TP (or A16U8(7) ) for 6.64V DC.
(3) Check the 3.2V TP (or A16U8(8)) for 3.20V DC.
b.
Apply a 50 MHz, -10 dBm signal to the 5342A low frequency input. Set the 5342A
to 500, 10 Hz-500 MHz range, 1 MHz resolution, sample rate full CCW, and AMPL
mode. Monitor U5(6) and the start conversion signal at U5(3) with an oscilloscope:
CAUTION
U8 is a large-scale MOS integrated circuit. Its inputs are susceptible to
damage by high voltage and static charges. Particular care should
be exercised when servicing this circuit or handling it under conditions where static charges can build up.
c.
With the counter set up as in step b, monitor the conversion complete signal at
U6(10) and U8(6). Since U6(10) also receives data, the signal at U6(10) may vary as
shown in the following two scope photos. In the first photo, the data is high after
the conversion complete goes low (true). In the second photo, the data is low
after the conversion complete goes low.
8-133
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
3.
DIGITAL CHECK
a.
Place the A16 assembly on a 10- and an 18-pin extender board (05342-60030 and
05324-60033). Set switches S1 and S2 on the A14 Microprocessor assembly to the
Count Mode as shown below.
Normal Mode
Count Mode (for use with 5004A Signature Analyzer)
b.
8-134
Connect 5004A Signature Analyzer START and STOP probes to A16U1(4), the
CLOCK probe to VMA02 test pin on the A14 assembly and the GND probe to test
pin on the A14 assembly. Set the 5004A front panel switches as follows:
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
Signatures on PROM U4 should be as follows:
Location
Signal Name
U4(8)
LAO
U4(7)
LA1
U4(6)
LA2
U4(5)
LA3
U4(4)
LA4
U4(3)
LA5
U4(2)
LA6
U4(1)
LA7
U4(23)
LA8
U4(22)
LA9
U4(19)
LA10
U4(20)
LA11
U4(9)
U4(10)
U4(11)
U4(13)
U4(14)
U4(15)
U4(16)
U4(17)
Signature
A872
2068
335H
0F51
C177
U929
3032
HU4U
9CC8
5F08
U81P
0000
1U2F
7471
H412
59U1
512P
60HA
7463
85C8
c.
Connect the 5004A Signature Analyzer START and STOP probes to A16U9(8) (test
pin labeled $3) on A16 assembly, the CLOCK probe to VMA 02 test pin on the A14
assembly and the GND probe to test pin on the A14 assembly. Set the 5004A front
panel switches as follows:
d.
Remove PROM A16U3 from its socket. Signatures on A16U6 and U7 should be
as follows:
Signature
Location
Signal Name
0000
U6(1)
H READ ADC
0000
U6(15)
L READ
733U
U6(2)
0000
U6(3)
DB4/DB12
U110
U6(5)
0000
U6(6)
DB5
HHH8
U6(11)
0000
U6(10)
DB7/BUSY
8UUH
U6(14)
0000
U6(13)
DB6/OVERRANGE
0000
U7(1)
H READ ADC
0000
U7(15)
L READ
UFU5
U7(2)
0000
U7(3)
DBwDB8
P9A7
U7(5)
0000
U7(6)
DB1/DB9
2045
U7(11)
0000
U7(10)
DB3/DB11
6C72
U7(14)
0000
U7(13)
DB2/DB10
9FFU
U7(4)
LDO
899H
U7(7)
LD1
0C48
U7(12)
LD2
407U
U7(9)
LD3
1305
U6(4)
LD4
912A
U6(7)
LD5
PUF7
U6(12)
LD6
CHP2
U6(9)
LD7
8-135
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-20. Option 002 Amplitude Measurements Troubleshooting (Continued)
e.
Connect the 5004A Signature Analyzer START and STOP probes to A16U9(1), the
CLOCK probe to VMA02 test pin on the A14 assembly and the GND probe to
test pin on the A14 assembly. Set the 5004A front panel switches as follows:
f.
Observe the following signatures:
+5V 0003 (Characteristic High Signature)
8-136
Pin
Signature
Pin
Signature
Ul(l)
(2)
(3)
(4)
854F
854U
6U2C
6U28
U2(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
6114
486C
4FC9
C91U
3F53
854U
3F50
0003
0000
3F50
0000
3F53
U9(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
0002
9UP2
0003
0003
0003
0003
854F
—
—
6114
0003
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-21. Option 011 HP-IB Troubleshooting
Table 8-21A. Acceptor Handshake (HP-IB)
8-137
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-21. Option 077 HP-IB Troubleshooting (Continued)
2.
Source Handshake Troubleshooting
a. Setup:
HP-IB CABLE
59401A
BUS SYSTEM
ANALYZER
5342A
Set rear panel address
switch to Talk only:
59401A settings:
REN true (REN light ON)
HALT
LISTEN mode
b. Remove the A14 Microprocessor assembly. Perform the actions listed in Table 8-21B to verify the
source handshake. Use a 546A Logic Pulser to clock circuit nodes and a 545A Logic Probe to
check the state of circuit nodes.
Table 8-21B. Source Handshake (HP-IB)
STEP
ACTION
0
Apply power to 5342A
Clock U9(11) once
Clock U4(11) once
Clock U4(11) once
Press EXECUTE on 59401A
Clock U4(11) once
Clock U4(11) once
Go to Step 1 and the Handshake Sequence Repeats
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8-138
DAV
Light
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
59401 A
NRFD NDAC
Light Light
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
U5(4)
High
High
High
High
High
Low
High
U9(9)
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
U2(4)
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
U2(13)
Low
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
U4(9)
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
U5(13)
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
U4(5)
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
U36(3)
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
High
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-21, Option 011 HP-1B Troubleshooting (Continued)
3. U23, U26 ROM Troubleshooting
a. Setup:
HP-IB CABLE
59401A
BUS SYSTEM
ANALYZER
5342A
Set rear panel address
switch to:
59401A settings:
MEMORY . . . . OFF
COMP . . . .. OFF
TALK Mode
HALT
SRQ = O, EOI = O
REN True
b. Remove the A14 Microprocessor assembly from the 5342A. Place A15 HP-IB assembly on an
extender. Place an AP clip on U1 and ground U1(8). Set ATN and the DIO switches on the 59401A
as listed in Table 8-21C and check with a 545A Logic Probe for the correct outputs.
Table 8-21C. U23, U26 ROM Table (HP-1B)
COMMENTS
**59401A SETTINGS
DIO LINES
ATN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Listen Address
Talk Address
Data (M)
Go to Local
Serial Poll Enable
Serial Poll Disable
*U26 PINS
*U23 PINS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
100001 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
Local Lock-Out
1
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
Device Clear
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Selected Device Clear
Unlisten
Untalk
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
Group Execute Trigger
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
1
0
0
0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
NOTES:
*Ground U1(8) to enable ROM U23
*1 = TTL High for U23, U26
**(1 = TTL LOW for 59401 A outputs, e.g., if DIO7 set to 1, then LDIo7 at A15U31(10) is TTL Low)
8-139
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-21. Option 011 HP-IB Troubleshooting (continued)
4. Troubleshooting Registers U27, U24, U21, U16, U18, U30, U15
a. Setup:
HP-IB CABLE
5342A
59401 A
BUS SYSTEM
ANALYZER
b. Remove A14 Microprocessor assembly from the 5342A and place the A15 HP-IB assembly on
extender boards.
c. Place an AP clip on U11 and connect a clip lead from U11(12) to ground. This enables the U27
Data In register.
d. U27 CHECK:
Set the 59401A to TALK, HALT, and the 8 DIO switches to 0 (all switches down). Check the inputs
to U27(3, 4, 7, 8, 13, 14, 17, 18) for all TTL high. If these inputs are not all TTL high, troubleshoot the
input data buffers U22, U25, U31. With the 546A Logic Pulser, pulse U27(11). Check the outputs
of U27(2, 5, 6, 9, 12, 15, 16, 19) for all TTL high. Change the DIO switches of the 59401A to all 1 (all
switches up). Pulse U27(11) once. Check the U27 outputs for all TTL low.
e. U21 CHECK:
If U27 is working, it is possible to control the state of the microprocessor data bus and thereby
check out U21, U24, and U16. To checkout U21, ground U12(5) with another clip lead (U12(12) is
still grounded). This enables U21. With the 59401A DIO switches all set to 1 (all switches up),
clock U27(11) with the Logic Pulser. Now clock U21(11). Check the outputs of U21(2, 5, 6, 9, 12,
15, 16, 19) for all TTL low. Now change all the 59401A DIO switches to 0 (all switches down). Clock
U27(11) with the Logic Pulser. Verify that the U21 outputs are still TTL low. Now clock U21(11).
Verify that the U21 outputs are all high.
f. U24 CHECK:
Change the clip lead on U12 from pin 5 to pin 13 so that U12(13) is grounded. Check that U21(1) is
TTL high. If U21(1) remains low after the clip lead is removed, the serial poll FF U29 must be set
high. To do this, ground U29(14) and clock U29(12). Verify that U29(10) is TTL high. U12(13)
grounded enables U24. U27 should still be enabled by the ground on U11(12). With the 59401A
DIO switches all set to 0 (switches down), clock U27(11) and clock U24(11). Verify that the outputs of U24(2, 5, 6, 9, 12, 15, 16, 19) are all TTL high. Change the 59401A DIO switches to 1 (all
switches up). Clock U27(11) with the Logic Pulser. Verify that all the U24 outputs are still TTL
high. Now clock U24(11) and verify that the U24 outputs are all TTL low.
g. U16 CHECK:
Remove the clip lead from U12(13). U27 should still be enabled by the ground on U11(12). With
the DIO switches of the 59401A all set to 1 (all switches up), clock U27(11) with the 546A Logic
Pulser. Next clock U16(9) and verify that the outputs of U16(2, 5, 7, 10, 12, 15) are all TTL low.
Change the DIO switches on the 59401A to 0 (all switches down) and clock U27(11). Verify that
U16 outputs remain TTL low. Now clock U16(9) and verify that the U16 outputs are all TTL high.
8-140
Model 5342A
Service
Table 8-21. Option 011 HP-iB Troubleshooting (Continued)
h. U18 CHECK:
Change the clip lead on U11 from pin 12 to pin 13 so that U11(13) is now grounded. This action
will disable the U27 Data In register and will enable the U18 Interrupt Out register. Clock each
of the inputs to U18(2, 4, 6, 10, 12) with a 546A Logic Pulser, and simultaneously check the corresponding output, U18(3, 5, 7, 9, 11) with the 545A Logic Probe. Remove the ground from U11(13)
and verify that clocking an input has no effect upon an output (all the outputs should be in the
high Z state).
i.
U30 CHECK:
Change the ground to U11(15) with the clip lead. This enables the State In register U30. Clock
each of the inputs to U30(2, 6, 10, 12, 14) and simultaneously check the corresponding outputs of
U30(3, 7, 9, 11, 13). Remove the ground from U11(15) and verify that clocking an input has no
effect upon an output.
j.
U15 CHECK:
Change the ground to U11(14) which enables the Command In register U15. Set the DIO
switches and ATN to the following:
A T N 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(5342A rear panel HP-IB address switches set to 00001)
1
00100000
This should cause the U26 ROM outputs to present a TTL low to U15(12, 13, 14). Verify this with a
logic probe. U15(11) will be TTL high since the A15 assembly powers up with the U20 Listen FF
reset.
Clock U15(7) with the Logic Pulser and verify that U15(3, 4, 5) are TTL low and U15(6) is TTL high.
Set the DIO switches to the following:
ATN
1
87654321
00100001
Clock U20(12) to set the U20 Listen FF. This causes U15(11) to go TTL low.
Now set the DIO switches to the following:
ATN
1
87654321
00010001
This causes the U26 ROM outputs to present a TTL high to U15(12, 13, 14). Verify this with the
logic probe. U15(11) should beTTL low. Clock U15(7) and verify that U15(3,4, 5) are TTL high and
U15(6) is TTL low.
8-141
Model 5342A
Service
Part of Figure 8-19. 5342A Front (A1 Display) View
8-142
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-20. 5342A Rear View
8-143
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-21. 5342A Top View (Assembly Locations and Adjustments)
8-144
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-22. 5342A Bottom View, Options Installed
8-145/ (8-146 blank)
Figure 8-23.
8-147
Model 5342A
Service
A2
Part of Figure 8-24. Al Display Assembly and A2 Display Drive Assembly
8-148
Figure 8-25.
8-151
Model 5342A
Service
Part of Figure 8-26. A3 Direct Count Amplifier Assembly
8-152
Figure 8-26.
8-153
Figure 8-27.
8-154
Figure 8-27.
8-155
Model 5342A
Service
.
COMPONENT SIDE
SOLDER SIDE
Part of Figure 8-28. A5 RF Multiplexer Assembly
8-156
Figure 8-28.
8-157
Model 5342A
Service
.
Part of Figure 8-29. A6 Offset Loop Amp/Search Generator Assembly
Figure 8-29.
8-159
Figure 8-30.
8-160
Figure 8-30.
8-161
I
Model 5342A
Service
Part ot figure 8-37. A8 Main VCO Assembly
8-162
Figure 8-31.
8-163
Figure 8-32.
8-164
Figure 8-32.A9
8-165
Model 5342A
Service
.
Part of Figure 8-33. A10 Divide-by-N Assembly
8-166
Figure 8-33.
8-167
Model 5342A
Service
..
.
Part of Figure 8-34. A11 IF Limiter Assembly
8-168
Figure 8-34.
8-169
Model 5342A
Service
Part of Figure 8-35. A12 IF Detector Assembly
8-170
Figure 8-35.
8-171
Model 5342A
Service
I
Part of Figure 8-36. A13 Counter Assembly
8-172
Figure 8-40. Option 003 A16 Extended Dynamic Range Assembly
8-181
Model 5342A
Service
Part of Figure 8-41, A17 Timing Generator Assembly
8-182
Figure 8-41.
8-183
Figure 8-42.
8-184
Figure 8-42.
8-185
Figure 8-43.
8-186
Figure 8-44.
8-189
Figure 8-45.
8-190
Figure 8-45.
8-191
Model 5342A
Service
.
\
?
Part of Figure 8-46. A26 Sampler Driver Assembly
8-192
Model 5342A
Service
Figure 8-46. A26 Sampler Driver Assembly
8-193
8-194
EUROPE, NORTH AFRICA AND MIDDLE EAST
8-195/(8-196 blank)
TM 11-6625-3014-14
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
DA Pam 25-30
Consolidated Index of Army Publications
and Blank Forms
EM 0022
Interactive Electronic Technical Manual
for Calibration and Repair Requirements
for the Maintenance of Army Material.
TB 43-0118
Field instructions for painting and
preserving CommunicationsElectronics equipment,
TM 11-6625-539-14-3
Operator, Organizational, Direct
Support and General Support Maintenance
Manual: Test set, Transistor TS-1836C/U
NSN 6625-00-159-2263) Changes 1, 2.
TM 11-6625-2780-14&P
Operator Organizational, Direct
Support, and General Support Maintenance
Manual, Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools Lists for Signal
Generators SG-1112(V) 1/U and SG-1112(V)
2/U, (Hewlett-Packard Model 8640B,
Options 001 and 004) (NSN 6625-00-5663067), SG-1112 (V) 1/U, (NSN 6625-00500-6525) SG-1112 (V) 2/U.
TM 750-244-2
Procedures for Destruction of
Electronics Materiel to
Prevent Enemy Use.
AR 700-138
Army Logistics Readiness and
sustainability
DA Pam 750-8
The Army Maintenance Management Systems
(TAMMS) Users Manual
DA Pam 738-751
Functional Users Manual for the Army
Maintenance Management System-Aviation
(TAMMS-A)
SF 368
Product Quality Deficiency Report
Change 1 A-1/ (A-2 blank)
APPENDIX B
TM 11-6625-3014-14
Model 5342A
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION
Section I. INTRODUCTION
B-1. General
This appendix provides a summary of the maintenance operations for the TD-1225A(V)/U. It
authorizes categories of maintenance for specific
maintenance functions on repairable items and
components and the tools and equipment required
to perform each function. This appendix may
be used as an aid in planning maintenance operations.
B-2. Maintenance Function
Maintenance functions will be limited to and defined as follows:
a. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an
m by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/
or electrical characteristics with established standards through examination.
b. Test. To verify serviceability and to detect
incipient failure by measuring the mechanical or
electrical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards.
c. Service. Operations required periodically to
keep an item in proper operating conditions, i.e.,
to clean (decontaminate), to preserve, to drain,
to paint, or to replenish fuel, lubricants, hydraulic
fluids, or compressed air supplies.
d. Adjust To maintain, within prescribed limits,
by bringing into proper or exact position, or by
setting the operating characteristics to the specified parameters.
e. Align. To adjust specified variable elements
an item to bring about optimum or desired
performance.
f. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections
to be made or to be adjusted on instruments or
t measuring and diagnostic equipments used
in precision measurement. Consists of compari.
sons of two instruments, one of which is a certified
standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust
any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument
being compared.
g. Install. The act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position an item, part, module (component or assembly) in a manner to allow the proper
functioning of the equipment or system.
h. Replace. The act of substituting a serviceable
like type part, subassembly, or module (component
or assembly) for an unserviceable counterpart,.
i. Repair. The application of maintenance services (inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate,
replace) or other maintenance actions (welding,
grinding, riveting, straightening, facing, remachining, or resurfacing) to restore serviceability
to an item by correcting specific damage, fault,
malfunction, or failure in a part, subassembly,
module (component or assembly), end item or
system.
j. Overhaul. That maintenance effort (service/
action) necessary to restore an item to a completely serviceable/operational condition as prescribed
by maintenance standards (i.e., DMWR) in appropriate technical publications. Overhaul is normally
the highest degree of maintenance performed by
the Army. Overhaul does not normally return an
item to like new condition.
k. Rebuild. Consists of those services actions
necessary for the restoration of unserviceable
equipment to a like new condition in accordance
with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild
is the highest degree of materiel maintenance
applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation
includes the act of returning to zero those age
measurements (hours, miles, etc.) considered in
classifying Army equipments/components.
B-1
TM 11 6625-3014-14
Model 5342A
B-3. Column Entries
a. Column 1, Group Number. Column 1 lists
group numbers, the purpose of which is to identify
components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with the next higher assembly.
b. Column 2, Component/Assembly. Column 2
contains the noun names of component assemblies, subassemblies, and modules for which maintenance is authorized.
c. Column 8, Maintenance Functions. Column 3
lists the functions to be performed on the item
listed in column 2. When items are listed without
maintenance functions, it is solely for purpose
of having the group numbers in the MAC and
RPSTL coincide.
d. Column 4, Maintenance Category. Column 4
specifies, by the listing of a “worktime” figure in
the appropriate subcolumn (s), the lowest level of
maintenance authorized to perform the function
listed in column 3. This figure represents the active time required to perform that maintenance
function at the indicated category of maintenance.
If the number or complexity of the tasks within
the listed maintenance function vary at different
maintenance categories, appropriate “worktime”
figures will be shown for each category. The number of task-hours specified by the “worktime”
figure represents the average time required to
restore an item (assembly, subassembly y, component, module, end item or system) to a serviceable
condition under typical field operating conditions.
This time includes preparation time, troubleshooting time, and quality assurance/quality control
time in addition to the time required to perform
the specific tasks identified for the maintenance
functions authorized in the maintenance allocation
chart. Subcolumns of column 4 are as follows:
C - Operator/Crew
O - Organizational
F - Direct Support
H - General Support
D - Depot
B-2
e. Column 5, Tools and Equipment. Column
specifies by code, those common tool sets (
individual tools) and special tools, test, and sup
port equipment required to perform the designated
function.
f. Column 6, Remarks. Column 6 contains
alphabetic code which leads to the remark
section IV, Remarks, which is pertinent to the
item opposite the particular code.
B-4. Tool and Test Equipment Requirement
(sect Ill)
a. Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code. The
numbers in this column coincide with the numbers
used in the tools and equipment column of the
MAC. The numbers indicate the applicable tool
or test equipment for the maintenance functions.
b. Maintenance Category. The codes in this
column indicate the maintenance category allo
cated the tool or test equipment.
c. Nomenclature. This column lists the noun
name and nomenclature of the tools and test
equipment required to perform the mainten
functions.
d. National/NATO Stock Number. This column
lists the National/NATO stock number of the
specified tool or test equipment.
e. Tool Number. This column lists the manufacturer’s part number of the tool followed by the
Federal Supply Code for manufacturers (5-digit)
in parentheses.
B-5.
Remarks (sect IV)
a. Reference Code. This code refers to the appropriate item in section II, column 6.
b. Remarks. This column provides the required
explanatory information necessary to clarify items
appearing in section 11.
SECTION II MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
Counter, Electronic TD-1225A(V)1/U
(1)
(2)
COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY
GROUP
bNJh@ER
00
Counter,
Electronic TO-1225A (V)l/U
01
03
m
05
C5cl
06
07
Ca
09
10
11
12
13
111
15
16
(4)
MAINTENANCE cXTECORY
c
Inspect
Test
Test
Ad just
Repair 1
0.1
0.2
Replace
0.1
o
F
H
2
1
0.1
Nep2cce
0.1
Cix!uit Ccrd Asaemb2y A2
(Mleot count Amp)
Inspect2
@pair
Rapzace
Adjust
Inspect2
Repair
I@p2ace
Adjust
In.9pcwt2
Repair
N9plac.e
0.1
Circuit Card Aeeemb3y A5
(RF Mltip2axar)
Aeeembly A51il
0.1
1.0
1,0
0.1
0.1
0.1
1.0
0.1
Innpect2
Rcpcir
Rn lace
Ad? ust
Inspect2
Repair
Replace
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Cirouit Card As8ambly A8
(Mein Vco)
In8pact2
Rap.ir
0.1
Clrault Ccrd Acaamb3y A9
(Sain I@p Amp)
3Inspact2
Rap&d,
Bcplace
$1
0.1
Cirouit Ccrd Aseembly A7
(3fJa9r/Baaroh Control)
Cirouit Card Aer-smtly Alo
(mv’Me-21y-N)
Inqmct2
Repair
Rap2c0e
1.0
0.1
0.1
1.0
0.1
%*
0.1
0.1
2%%1:$
0.1
Circuit Ccrd Acmmbly A13
(Counter)
lv3p3.cce
Adjust
Insps+
%pcir
Replace
0.1
0.1
0.1
Inapeot2
Repair
0.1
[email protected]
0.1
Inspect2
Repcir
Rep2ace
0.1
Inepect2
0.1
~b~e
0.1
Cimuit Card Aeeembly Al h
(Mkqmxcaaor)
Circuit Card Aeaemb2y Al 5
(HP-IB hte*.)
Cirouit Caxd Aecemmy Al 7
(’2Ynd.ng Cemrat.or)
.-. .
—.
(wm footmotao ● t the end of this tebu )
1
2-29
1.0
Ciroult Ccrd Aeeembly Al 2
(IF Octaet.or)
1
2-29
2
2,3,8,9,10
1
1
>29
2,3,8,9,10
1
Z29
2
1.0
1.0
0.1
2-29
2
1
2-29
2
0.1
Inepcc~
Repair
1
2-29
2
1.0
0.1
(IF Ii2mitnr)
Cimuit Card A.seembw Al 1
B
1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Cirouit Card Aesemb2y A6
(offset Loop Amp)
1.0
0.1
1.0
Inspect2
Rapcir
Rap2.aOe
Cab2a
A
2.0
Inspect2
F&pair
Circuit Card Aceamb2y &
(offset Vco)
(6)
REMARKS
1
Cimxit Card Aesambly A2
(Msp2qy Dr2wr)
AI
D
2-16
2-16
0.1
bmmb~
(5)
TOOLS
AND
EQPT.
1.5
1.5
Incpect
Repair 2
Rap3acn
%;lS*
02
(3)
MAINTENANcE
Ill NCTI ON
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.1
:,3,8,9,10
1
2-29
2
1
2-29
‘?,3,8,9,1O
1
2-29
2
1
2-29
2
1
2-29
2
2-16
1
2-29
2
2-16
1
2-29
2
1.0
1
2-29
2
1.0
1
2-29
2
1.0
1
2-29
2
0.1
c
B-3
SECTION II MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
ELECTRONIC COUNTER TD-1225A(V)1/U (Continued)
(1)
GROUP
NUMBER
17
(2)
COMPUNENT/ASSEMBLY
Cirouit Card Asaemb2y Al 8
(Time S850 Buffer)
(3)
MAINTENANcE
FU NCTl ON
(4)
MAINTENXNCE ~TEGORY
c
o
F
H
Inspxt2
Repair
0.1
F&@-a.
0.1
Inspect2
lkpair
0.1
(5)
TOOLS
(6)
REMARKS
AND
EQPT.
D
1
1.0
2-29
2
I
10
Cimult Card Asmembly Al 9
(Primary Power)
Ad !“St
0.1
1
2-29
2
0.1
2-13
Inspect
0.1
Fie
19
20
Cir-wit Card Assembly A’20
(Secondary Pnwer)
Ciwuit Card Asrembly A21
(Switch Drive )
lace
22
Circuit Card As8embly A211
(Oscillator)
Inspect
Replace
(Preamplifier)
211
Circuit Card Assembly A26
(Sampler Drlvcr)
25
26
27
28
29
0.1
2-29
2
0.1
2-13
0.1
Circuit Card Assembly .!22
(Motkrtwxwd)
Cirouit Card Am@mbly .425
1.0
0.1
21
23
2-29
2
Insp3 ct2
Ins~ct,2
Repair
&p2ace
0.1
0.1
0.1
1
1
1.0
0.1
0.1
Inspect2
Repcir
M 2ace
Ad fUS t
Incp9ct2
Repair
$’.”:
0.1
1.0
Ckmit Card Assembly A29
(HP.IB Input) (Option 11)
Inspect2
F@pcir
Replace
0.1
Cab16 Acsembly ‘,J2
In@ct2
Repcir
0.1
Rcplcce
0.1
Inspectz
0.1
2-29
2
2-15
1
z-29
2
1
1.0
&m
1.0
2
0.1
1
2
18
1.0
Repair
Rq2ace
0.1
Cab16 Asmnb~ W
Inspcct2
Repair
Replace
0.1
(lover, p/n .40&1724
Inspcct2
Repair
R.eplaoe
0.1
1,8
2
2
1.0
2
2
1.0
2
2
0.1
1
0.1
1
0.1
1
0.1
1.0
0.1
1 BY repkc-nt of Cifit cam As*mb~ee Al -’59 AJ~s Al 8-22, ~~5* AZ6 ’299
Oscillator A!4, cnd chassis nwuntid cw~n ~1.
2
BY replacmnt of individual coqwnants.
2’
2
1.0
0.1
B-4
2
2-29
1
1.@
0.1
2
2
1
24.0
Adjust
Repla.
Cable As68mbly W
1
1.0
Repair 2
Replcce
Repair
Rep2.ace
Adjust
1.0
2
2
SECTION
OOL OR TEST
EQUIPMENT
REF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
MAINTENANCE
CATEGORY
TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
FOR
Counter, Electronic TD-1225A(V)1/U
NOMENCLATURE
NATIONAL/NATO
STOCK NUMBER
TOOL NUMBER
COOE
0
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Necessary common tools are available to personnel in cat ep,ory.
Tool Kit TK- 100/G
Oscilloscope OS-26 l/u
Signal Generator AN/usM-205
Sweep Oscillator SG 1121(V) l/U (2 each)
RF Plug-In HP 86290A
RF Plug-In HP 86222A
Voltmeter AN/USM-451
Isolation Transformer Allied Electronics
Service Acceeeory Kit HP 10S42A
Analyzer Spectrum 1P-12 16 (P) /GR
Tunning Section PL- 1406/11
IF Section PL- 1388/u
Power Meter TS-3793/U
Power Sensor HP S4S1A
Power Splitter HP 11667A
Logic Pnlser HP 546A
Current Tracer HP 547A
Logic Probe HP 575A
Voltmeter Sampling MS-426/U
Frequency counter TD-1225A(v) lIU
Logic State Analyzer HP 1607A
Signature Analyzer HP 5004A TS-3791/U
Swept Frequency Analyzer HP 8755B
Modulator HP 11665B
Detectors HP 11664a (2 each)
Oscilloscope Mainframe HP 182T
Directional Coupler HP 77SD
Directional Coupler HP 11692D
BUS System Analyzer HP 59401A
5180-00-605-0079
6625-00-127-0079
6625-01-007-4796
6625-01-019-7890
6625-00-138-9905
6625 -01-01 S-8548
6625-01-060-6804
P/N 705-004S
6625-00-424-4370
6625-00-140-0156
6625-00-431-9339
6625-00-033-5050
6625-00-354-9762
6625-01-017-2713
6625-00-113-3491
6625-01- 103-295S
6625-01-068-8641
B-5
SECTION IV.
REMARKS
Counter, Electronic TD-1225A(V)1/U
REFERENCE
CODE
B-6
REMARKS
A
Test by use of keyboard and display.
B
Replace fuses, knobs, power cord as required.
C
Repair normally performed along with next higher assembly.
TM 11-6625-3014-14
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
SECTION I. INTRODUCTION
C-1. SCOPE
This appendix lists additional items you are authorized for the support of the Frequency
Counter.
C-2. G E N E R A L
This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the Frequency Counter and that
do not have to be turned in with it. These items are all authorized to you by CTA, MTOE,
TDA, or JTA.
C-1
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION
SECTION II
COUNTER, ELECTRONIC
TD-1225A(V)1/U
LIST
(3)
UNIT
OF
MEAS
(2)
DESCRIPTION
1)
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART
NUMBER
AND
Rack Mounting
5061-0057
(4)
QTY
AUTH
USABLE ON
CODE
FSCM
1
Adapter Kit
28480
Power Cable (220/240 volt operation)
28480
8120-1689
1
Fuse (for
2110-0421
1
220/240 volt
28480
operation)
1
Fuse (for “10 Hz-500MHz” BNC) A1F1
28480
2110-0301
C-2
U.S.
GOVERNMENT
PRINTING
OFFICE:
1981-703-029/1238
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
E. C. MEYER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
ROBERT M. JOYCE
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-34B requirements for TMDE/(Calibration Maintenance Manuals.
These are the instructions for sending an electronic 2028
The following format must be used if submitting an electronic 2028. The subject line must be
exactly the same and all fields must be included; however only the following fields are
mandatory: 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, and 27.
From:
To:
“Whomever” <[email protected]>
[email protected]
Subject: DA Form 2028
1. From: Joe Smith
2. Unit: home
3. Address: 4300 Park
4. City: Hometown
5. St: MO
6. Zip: 77777
7. Date Sent: 19--OCT--93
8. Pub no: 55--2840--229--23
9. Pub Title: TM
10. Publication Date: 04--JUL--85
11. Change Number: 7
12. Submitter Rank: MSG
13. Submitter FName: Joe
14. Submitter MName: T
15. Submitter LName: Smith
16. Submitter Phone: 123--123--1234
17. Problem: 1
18. Page: 2
19. Paragraph: 3
20. Line: 4
21. NSN: 5
22. Reference: 6
23. Figure: 7
24. Table: 8
25. Item: 9
26. Total: 123
27. Text:
This is the text for the problem below line 27.
Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/
Supply Manuals (SC/SM)
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND
BLANK FORMS
DATE
8/30/02
For use of this form, see AR 25--30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form)(Include ZIP Code)
FROM: (Activity and location)(Include ZIP Code)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
MSG, Jane Q. Doe
ATTN: AMSAM--MMC--MA--NP
1234 Any Street
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
Nowhere Town, AL 34565
PART 1 -- ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER
DATE
TM 9--1005--433--24
16 Sep 2002
ITEM
PAGE
PARA--
LINE
FIGURE
TABLE
NO.
NO.
GRAPH
NO. *
NO.
NO.
1
WP0005
2
TITLE Organizational, Direct Support, And General
Support Maintenance Manual for Machine Gun, .50
Caliber M3P and M3P Machine Gun Electrical Test Set
Used On Avenger Air Defense Weapon System
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
Test or Corrective Action column should identify a different WP number.
PG 3
* Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
MSG, Jane Q. Doe, SFC
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/
AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
788--1234
REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED.
USAPA V3.01
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication)
FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
MSG, Jane Q. Doe
ATTN: AMSAM--MMC--MA--NP
1234 Any Street
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
Nowhere Town, AL 34565
DATE
8/30/02
PART II -- REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS
PUBLICATION NUMBER
DATE
TITLE
PAGE
COLM
LINE
NATIONAL STOCK
REFERENCE
FIGURE
ITEM
NO.
NO.
NO.
NUMBER
NO.
NO.
NO.
TOTAL NO.
OF MAJOR
ITEMS
SUPPORTED
RECOMMENDED ACTION
PART III -- REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and
blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
MSG, Jane Q. Doe, SFC
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON,
PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
788--1234
USAPA V3.01
Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/
Supply Manuals (SC/SM)
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND
BLANK FORMS
DATE
For use of this form, see AR 25--30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form)(Include ZIP Code)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
ATTN: AMSAM-MMC-MA-NP
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
FROM: (Activity and location)(Include ZIP Code)
PART 1 -- ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER
DATE
ITEM
PAGE
PARA--
LINE
FIGURE
TABLE
NO.
NO.
GRAPH
NO. *
NO.
NO.
TITLE
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
* Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/
AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED.
USAPA V3.01
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
ATTN: AMSAM-MMC-MA-NP
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)
DATE
PART II -- REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS
PUBLICATION NUMBER
DATE
TITLE
PAGE
COLM
LINE
NATIONAL STOCK
REFERENCE
FIGURE
ITEM
NO.
NO.
NO.
NUMBER
NO.
NO.
NO.
TOTAL NO.
OF MAJOR
ITEMS
SUPPORTED
RECOMMENDED ACTION
PART III -- REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and
blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON,
PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
USAPA V3.01
The Metric System and Equivalents
Linear Measure
Liquid Measure
1 centiliter = 10 milliters = .34 fl. ounce
1 deciliter = 10 centiliters = 3.38 fl. ounces
1 liter = 10 deciliters = 33.81 fl. ounces
1 dekaliter = 10 liters = 2.64 gallons
1 hectoliter = 10 dekaliters = 26.42 gallons
1 kiloliter = 10 hectoliters = 264.18 gallons
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters = .39 inch
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters = 3.94 inches
1 meter = 10 decimeters = 39.37 inches
1 dekameter = 10 meters = 32.8 feet
1 hectometer = 10 dekameters = 328.08 feet
1 kilometer = 10 hectometers = 3,280.8 feet
Square Measure
Weights
1 sq. centimeter = 100 sq. millimeters = .155 sq. inch
1 sq. decimeter = 100 sq. centimeters = 15.5 sq. inches
1 sq. meter (centare) = 100 sq. decimeters = 10.76 sq. feet
1 sq. dekameter (are) = 100 sq. meters = 1,076.4 sq. feet
1 sq. hectometer (hectare) = 100 sq. dekameters = 2.47 acres
1 sq. kilometer = 100 sq. hectometers = .386 sq. mile
1 centigram = 10 milligrams = .15 grain
1 decigram = 10 centigrams = 1.54 grains
1 gram = 10 decigram = .035 ounce
1 decagram = 10 grams = .35 ounce
1 hectogram = 10 decagrams = 3.52 ounces
1 kilogram = 10 hectograms = 2.2 pounds
1 quintal = 100 kilograms = 220.46 pounds
1 metric ton = 10 quintals = 1.1 short tons
Cubic Measure
1 cu. centimeter = 1000 cu. millimeters = .06 cu. inch
1 cu. decimeter = 1000 cu. centimeters = 61.02 cu. inches
1 cu. meter = 1000 cu. decimeters = 35.31 cu. feet
Approximate Conversion Factors
To change
To
inches
feet
yards
miles
square inches
square feet
square yards
square miles
acres
cubic feet
cubic yards
fluid ounces
pints
quarts
gallons
ounces
pounds
short tons
pound-feet
pound-inches
centimeters
meters
meters
kilometers
square centimeters
square meters
square meters
square kilometers
square hectometers
cubic meters
cubic meters
milliliters
liters
liters
liters
grams
kilograms
metric tons
Newton-meters
Newton-meters
Multiply by
To change
2.540
.305
.914
1.609
6.451
.093
.836
2.590
.405
.028
.765
29,573
.473
.946
3.785
28.349
.454
.907
1.356
.11296
ounce-inches
centimeters
meters
meters
kilometers
square centimeters
square meters
square meters
square kilometers
square hectometers
cubic meters
cubic meters
milliliters
liters
liters
liters
grams
kilograms
metric tons
To
Newton-meters
inches
feet
yards
miles
square inches
square feet
square yards
square miles
acres
cubic feet
cubic yards
fluid ounces
pints
quarts
gallons
ounces
pounds
short tons
Temperature (Exact)
°F
Fahrenheit
temperature
5/9 (after
subtracting 32)
Celsius
temperature
°C
Multiply by
.007062
.394
3.280
1.094
.621
.155
10.764
1.196
.386
2.471
35.315
1.308
.034
2.113
1.057
.264
.035
2.205
1.102
PIN: 049344-000
">